Home

BACKUP+/iX User Manual

1. Examples To perform a readall on a backup to tape in a library gt READALL t AUTOREPLY 14 OLM pogo mylib amp gt LABEL FULL VOLID 100002 See Chapter 13 ORBIT Library Manager in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide for more examples of performing Readalls to tape media located on a robotic tape library Notes e All volumes used in a BACKUP OLM operation must be located in the library at the start of the operation or imported into the library during the operation e The OLM keyword is also available with the STORE LISTDIR DUMP READALL and VERIFY commands Option ON Performs a specified command when a particular event has occurred Multiple ON options may be specified in the same READALL command The specified commands are MPE commands performed with DO A special variation of the ON command is ON ERROR QUIT which must be specified exactly ON ERROR QUIT Syntax BACKUP iX User Manual 18 265 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt READALL ON event DO mpecommand gt READALL ON ERROR QUIT event One of the following conditions on which to DO a specific MPE command ERROR ON lt RETRY DO mpecommand VOLUME ON ERROR QUIT Parameters mpecommand Any MPE command ON ERROR QUIT A variation of the ON commands The READALL is terminated on any error Event summary ERROR This event is the occurrence of any error RETRY This event is the
2. Repeat the ABORTIO command until a message is returned indicating that there is no I O to abort for the device 5 Issue an ABORTIO to the terminal from which BACKUP was run ABORTIO 110 Repeat the ABORTIO command until there is no I O to abort for the device 6 Abort the session using the ABORTJOB command 2 27 Chapter 2 Program Operation BACKUP iX Operations Guide ABORTJOB S27 Note If running BACKUP from the system console it may be necessary to issue a CONTROL A sequence before issuing these commands Aborting BACKUP from batch mode If running BACKUP in batch from a job stream 1 If BACKUP is waiting for a REPLY for the tape drive issue a REPLY of 0 zero REPLY 143 0 2 If BACKUP is not waiting for a REPLY issue an ABORTJOB command for the job stream ABORTJOB 330 If BACKUP has requested that a tape volume be mounted mount the correct volume and place it online At the system console issue the ABORTIO command specifying the Idev number of the tape drive being accessed ABORTIO 7 Repeat the ABORTIO command until a message is returned indicating that there is no I O to abort for the device Issuing commands At the BACKUP prompt gt the following types of commands may be specified e Standard BACKUP commands e BACKUP Tape Manager amp Librarian module commands MPE iX commands prefixed by a colon
3. HA kl SEQUENCE ldevlist SINGLEDRIVE MULTIDRIVE VOLID volidlist PROGRESS n Details of the options with their parameters in the pages that follow Example To copy the backup data on device class TAPE to device class DAT FILE T DEV TAPE FILE D DEV DAT RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt COPY T TO D Input Copy Options summary InCopyOption AUTOREPLY Automatically REPLYs to console requests for specified Idev s associated with the source tape BACKUP Identifies and selects on the source tape the backup to be copied to the target tape drive CYCLE For a copy with the Wizard product specifies the cycle s from which to copy DRIVES Allows multiple backup devices to be used in parallel with the source tape LABEL Validates volsetid specified against volsetid in the source tape label prevents copy if they do not match OLM Permits copy from one or more tape volumes in a robotic tape library ON VOLUME Performs a Mpe iX command on source tape volume change DO command SEQUENCE Specifies the order in which multiple backup devices associated with the source tape are opened VOLID Specifies ANSI format tape volids for up to eight source backup volumes Output Copy Options summary OutCopyOption AUTOREPLY Automatically REPLYs to console requests for specified Idev s associated with the target tape BACKUP Assigns a specified name to an appended backup by which it is la
4. To create nonexistent users and groups enter gt RESTORE T TEST CREATE OWNER GROUP To create nonexistent directories use any valid fileset in HFS syntax and enter gt RESTORE T CREATE PATH To create nonexistent accounts groups and users enter gt RESTORE T CREATE OWNER GROUP ACCT To create nonexistent accounts groups directories and users use any valid fileset in HFS syntax and enter gt RESTORE T CREATE OWNER GROUP ACCT PATH An alternate method for creating accounts groups directories and users is to specify the CREATE option with no parameters and any valid fileset in HFS syntax as shown BACKUP iX User Manual 9 103 Chapter 9 Restore Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt RESTORE T CREATE Note If an account group or directory cannot be created files of that account group or directory are not restored However if an owner cannot be created the files are restored since file owners do not need to exist as users on the system Note Some special rules and restrictions are imposed for the ACCOUNT GROUP and OWNER options when restoring spool files which have the equivalent effect on the LOCAL option Refer to the discussion of Restoring spool files later in this chapter Note When a store includes POSIX files that reside in directories below group level use the GROUP ACCOUNT CREATE GROUP and C
5. FILE T DEV 7 TML will interrogate the device class table for the specified ldev and select tapes using the media of the device class assigned If multiple device classes are assigned to the specified Idev the first one listed in the system device class table is used TML also permits a value that does not have a corresponding device class to be specified for tape volumes For example an 8mm tape drive may be configured as device class VIDEO8 and it may be undesirable to have volumes with a media of VIDEO8 Or there may be two tape drives TAPE and TAPE2 but all media for both should be configured as TAPE Therefore it is possible to override the device class name check that TML performs to determine which media to select Simply impose a file equation that includes the configured media for example FILE T TAPE DEV TAPE2 or FILE T TAPE DEV 8 Both will select volumes of the media TAPE even though the backup device class is TAPE2 The file equation BACKUP iX User Manual 6 68 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide FILE V VIDEO8 DEV 9 will select volumes with a media of VIDEO8 regardless of the device class assigned to ldev 9 Disk backup To perform a Disk backup specify the name of the Disk backup fileset using a maximum of 4 characters with the first character alphabetic The fileset name may be qualified with group or group account
6. gt RESTORE T SOURCE AP LAST To restore the earliest version of the file APREG DATA AP that was modified at or after 2 1 99 at 10 00 gt RESTORE T APREG DATA AP MDATE gt 2 1 99 10 00 FIRST To restore the next to last backed up version of DEVLOG DATA DEV gt RESTORE T DEVLOG DATA DEV CYCLE GEN 1 To restore the latest version of all files from the last full and last two partial backups BACKUP iX User Manual 115 Chapter 10 Restore Methods BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt RESTORE T CYCLE FULL GEN 0 CYCLE PART GEN 0 CYCLE PART GEN 1 Restore Wizard confirmation dialog When performing a restore with Restore Wizard an opportunity is provided to confirm that the proper files are being restored This prevents files from being restored unintentionally The qualifying generations are displayed and the option of viewing the list of files to be restored is provided The list may be refined by deselecting particular files The following examples show the differences between a restore with Restore Wizard and a normal restore Restore If the reply R is entered the restore proceeds as usual gt RESTORE T DATA AP CYCLE PART GEN 0 The following generations and tape volumes are required for this restore Cycle Gen Created Seq Volid Media Length Dir XXXXXXXX mm dd yy BEE XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX HHH XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXX
7. 6 61 18 324 18 328 18 344 NOLABEL option 5 54 12 135 18 326 18 328 NOLOCK option 16 177 18 328 18 333 18 346 OEM OpliOn ich se Ee ae eae ke 18 329 ON Option ii EE EE ESE ee EP eg Ee 2 32 18 330 ERROR construct aseene 2 33 FILE conStUGt ES SE EE Se EE e 2 33 RELEASED construct 2 33 5 51 SUSPEND construct 2 34 SYNCPOINT construct eee 2 34 SYNCWAIT construct ee ee eee eee eee 2 34 BACKUP iX User Manual 443 Index VOLUME construct iese sesse se ese ee ee ee ee 2 33 ONLINE option 18 328 18 333 ONS Opto ie Ese ees eaae ensena iait 6 62 ONVS Optio Dies deed sege Ee RE 18 334 OPTIMIZE OPHON esse sesse see 16 175 18 335 PREVIEW option esse ee ee ese ee se see 6 75 18 336 PROGRESS ODHON esse ee ee 6 72 18 337 PURGE option ese ese ee ee ee ee 4 46 18 337 SDATE option 6 61 18 324 18 338 18 344 SELECT OPON Dreisi ee ee ee ee se ee ee 18 338 TYPE construct iese sesse ee ee ee ee ee ee 4 45 4 46 SEQUENCE option 5 54 13 145 18 339 SETDATE option 4 40 4 41 4 42 18 258 18 324 18 339 21 377 23 397 25 420 SHOW ODHON ees se se ee ee ee ee 6 77 18 340 SYNCWAIT ODHON ee ee ee ee ee se Re ee 18 342 TAPEDIR option ees see ee ee 5 54 18 342 VOLID ODHORN EE ss Re Eed KERE RS Eed Re 18 343 ZERODOWN optiON ee 18 328 18 346 OperatiON ie ee Ea iea AA aari 7 89 Store directory Gaile Sas E i eh At 6 71
8. Files that qualify under both their old and new names are listed in both listings and are flagged with an R in the SHOW listing Files that qualify for store because they have been renamed into the store filesetlist are flagged with an S in the SHOW listing Purged Files selected for store but purged during the backup are listed in the Online Disqualified Files listing with the message PURGED DURING STORE Files purged then recreated under the same name during store are treated in the same way as a file created during an Online backup Saved Temporary files saved as permanent during an Online backup are flagged with an S in the SHOW listing BACKUP iX User Manual 7 91 Chapter 7 Online and Zero Downtime Backup BACKUP iX Operations Guide Open Native Mode files open at the synchronization point of a Zero downtime backup are flagged with an O in the SHOW listing File attribute change If files are selected for store based on filecode type or size and the attributes of files change during the store in such a way that they qualify during the store they are listed on the SHOW listing as normal Files that disqualify during a store because their attributes change are listed in the Disqualified Files listing with the message DISQUALIFIED DURING STORE Performance considerations The number of file transactions during an Online backup is not restricted However it is advisable
9. ees ee ee ee ee ee se ee ee 18 308 ADATE option 6 61 18 314 18 324 18 344 APPEND otion 0 c0e 5 54 5 55 18 314 AUTOREPLY option 5 54 13 143 18 315 AUTOSYNC Option ccccccceeeesteeeeenees 22 388 BACKUP ODHON ese ees se ke ee ee 5 55 18 316 BASELINE ODHON ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 18 316 BASELINE OPHON ee se ee ee ee se ee ee ee ee 18 319 CDATE option 6 61 18 317 18 324 18 344 COMPRESS option 005 16 174 18 317 DATE option 4 41 6 61 18 318 18 324 18 344 DATE options BDATE MDATE SDATE and DATE iss EE GESE Re ee Ee Re ee eg 18 344 DBSTORE option ees ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 4 43 DBSTORE option VD ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 18 318 DEFER FILEBUFF option 5 54 DEFER OPHOM se ee sees see se eesti Geb oek ed 18 319 DELTA OPHON ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 18 319 DIRECTORY option 3 36 4 48 5 53 12 136 18 312 18 320 18 328 DISKDEV OPDHON ee esse 5 51 5 53 18 321 DISKDIR option 5 54 6 76 18 321 DRIVES option 5 54 13 143 13 144 18 315 18 322 22 388 ENCRYPT option 0 ee 4 46 18 323 FILEBUFF option 5 51 5 52 16 177 18 324 22 390 GETDATE option 4 42 18 324 18 339 23 397 LABEL option 0 ee 12 135 18 325 and TM EE ESE age EE RE Ee RE NE 18 326 MAXBLOCK option ees 16 176 18 326 MAXERRORS option ees ee ee ee ee ee 5 54 MAXRETRIES option 5 54 18 327 MDATE option
10. Cycle Cycle name Gen Absolute number of generation within cycle Created Date generation of store was completed in mm dd yy date format 7 days Number of files not modified for 7 days preceding backup 30 day Number of files not modified for 30 days preceding backup 6 mos Number of files not modified for 6 months preceding backup 1 year Number of files not modified for 1 year preceding backup 2 year Number of files not modified for 2 years preceding backup PARMS option Displays the attributes of a specified cycle or all cycles Cycle Keep Retention Frequency Days ok Volumes req spare Size XXXXXXXX HHH HHH HHH HHH HHH HHH XXXXXXXX Cycle Cycle name Keep Number of generations of cycle kept Retention Retention period in days Frequency Days to skip between stores of this cycle BACKUP iX User Manual 24 413 Chapter 24 Reports BACKUP iX Reference Guide Days ok Mask of days on which this cycle may be stored a hyphen is displayed in place of days for which cycle storing is not authorized Volumes req Number of volumes required for backup if TML allocates the same number of tapes that were required for the last generation of the cycle Vol spare Number of spare volumes reserved for backup Size User defined size classification STATS option Displays the statistics of cycle generations Cycle Gen Created Files Sectors Buf size Com Time Vol Log sec Dyn files XXXXXXXX mm dd yy HHHHH FHHHHH
11. K FILELIST UNN EXIT FILE T DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt STORE FILELIST T SHOW LONG DATES To store all the files in the account ACCTA except those in the group TEMP and all files of the account ACCTB except the EDITOR workfiles which begin with K followed by 7 numbers gt STORE ACCTA TEMP ACCTA ACCTB K ACCTB amp gt T SHOW LONG DATES To perform a full system backup with the directories of all available volumesets at the beginning of the tape which in combination with an SLT tape can be used to perform an INSTALL gt STORE T DIRECTORY To perform a full deferred backup using as much disk space as possible for the filebuffer and launching NIGHTJOB JOB SYS at the end of the backup STORE T SHOW DBSTORE FILEBUFF 1 amp 2SETDATE ON RELEASED DO STREAM NIGHTJOB JOB SYS To perform a full ONLINE backup of the system while users continue to access stored files BACKUP iX User Manual 18 312 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide FILE T DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt STORE T SHOW ONLINE DBSTORE SETDATE Options summary ADATE APPEND AUTOREPLY BACKUP BASELINE CDATE COMPRESS DATE DBSTORE DEFER DEFRAG DELTA DIRECTORY DISKDEV DISKDIR DRIVES ENCRYPT Selects files for store based on last access date and optionally time Appends the backup to an existing backupset Automaticall
12. gt COPY T1 DRIVES numdrives TO With Output target tape Multiple drives can be used both in parallel or serial with the target tape Syntax gt COPY TO T2 DRIVES numdrives sh 1 ze P Parameters numdrives Total number of drives associated with the source tape It can be any value between 1 and 64 P Specifies parallel handling of multiple tape drives BACKUP iX User Manual 18 228 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide S Specifies serial handling of multiple tape drives Note If DRIVES option is not specified then default of one drive is assumed If P or S is not specified then P is the default behavior Examples To COPY from 2 tape drives 7 and 8 and have BACKUP automatically reply to Console tape requests gt COPY T1 DRIVES 2 AUTOREPLY 7 8 TO T2 To COPY from one drive 7 to two drives 8 and 9 in a serial fashion and have BACKUP automatically reply to Console tape requests gt COPY T1 AUTOREPLY 7 TO T2 DRIVES 2 s Autoreply 8 9 Option LABEL The BACKUP tape label is not automatically validated in a COPY command The LABEL option must be used with COPY for a tape label in proprietary BACKUP format to be checked Using the VOLID option with the LABEL option can check ANSI format labels With Input source tape This option validates the volsetid specified against the volsetid in the source tape label and prevents
13. Dataset capacities should be set high enough to accommodate growth For master datasets it is recommended that 20 25 percent free space be reserved at all times and that prime numbered capacities be used Dataset Type Content Capacity Tape attributes Set to number of tapes used for backup plus 20 El CYCLE Cycle attributes Set to number of oe plus 20 3 OFFSITE M_ Instructions for future use for future use ise ee relates VOLUMES Use capacity of GENERATIONS ee to EG 20 CONTXREF Internal use for POSIX Use capacity of POSIXCONTENTS files plus 20 BACKUP iX User Manual 25 419 Chapter 25 Maintenance BACKUP iX Reference Guide FILEIDHASH A Internal use for POSIX Use capacity of POSIXCONTENTS files plus 20 7 APPEND A Instructions for future use EE el CONTENTS M Generations on which Set to number of files that will exist on each file is contained all active today equal to the number of files the system plus 20 If files Each entry tracks 18 will generally exist more than 18 active generations active generations double the capacity POSIXCONTENTS Overflow area for POSIX Set capacity of dataset to number of files with long pathnames POSIX files with pathnames of 28 or more characters 1 1 1 TAPEMAINT Instructions for future use Use capacity of TAPE minus 20 0 2 GENERATIONS Generation attributes Set to one entry per active generation 3 VOLUMES Tape volumes used b
14. This sample of a FULL backup cycle includes all files on the system It is stored every Friday on 5 to 7 volumes of XLARGE media e g DLT tapes with each generation retained for at least 35 days and at least 2 generations are always kept on hand Sample of a PART cycle file A sample cycle file for a partial PART backup could contain PUB SYS SUPPORT TELESUP KEEP 4 RETENTION 5 FREQUENCY 1 DAYS 1234 VOLUMES 2 1 SIZE LARGE This sample of a PART backup cycle includes all files on the system with the exception of files in PUB SYS and the SUPPORT and TELESUP accounts It is stored every Monday Tuesday Wednesday and Thursday on 2 to 3 volumes of LARGE media with each generation retained for 5 days and 4 generations always kept on hand To restrict files by date for the PART backup cycle specify one of the DATE options or GETDATE on the STORE command Setting default cycle attributes The default cycle attribute values will be used when attributes are not specified in a cycle file When BACKUP with the Wizard module is first installed the default cycle attributes are given an initial set of values However these default cycle settings can be changed using the DEFAULT CYCLE command If default cycle attributes are changed they are not applied to existing cycles Only cycles created after the default settings are changed will make use of them And any default once set will remain from run to run unt
15. Volid Volid of first volume containing store directory Vsetid Volid of first volume in store volumeset Seq Sequential number of volume containing store directory Cop Number of copies of the store directory on tape Sep Store directory on separate reel YES or NO Filename Fully qualified name of file containing store directory Exist Is the store directory file currently on the system YES or NO BACKUP iX User Manual 24 412 Chapter 24 Reports BACKUP iX Reference Guide FILES option Displays all the files stored with cycle generations with one line for each file in each cycle listed alphabetically by account name then group name then file name within cycle and generation Cycle Gen Created Filename Group Account Volid Last modified XXXXXXXX mm dd yy XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm Cycle Cycle name Generation Absolute number of generation within cycle Created Date generation of store was completed in mm dd yy date format Filename Fully qualified filename Volid Volid of tape on which file is stored file may span additional tape s Last mod Date and time on which file was last modified in mm dd yy date format and 24 hour time format MODIFIED option Displays overall statistics for modification dates of files contained in cycle generations Cycle Gen Created Not modified for gt 7 days 30 day 6 mos 1 year 2 year XXXXXXXX mm dd yy HHHHHH FHHHHH HERE HERRER FERRE
16. e Arrange of ldevs e g 14 16 e Selected Idevs e g 14 17 e Any combination of the above e g 14 16 18 22 24 Example To store to Idevs 7 8 and 9 serially and open the drives in that order gt STORE T DRIVES 3 S SEQUENCE 7 8 9 Notes e The SEQUENCE option cannot be used to specify the drive opening sequence with ANSI labeled tapes List the volids in the desired order in the VOLID option e The number of ldevs specified must equal the number indicated in the DRIVES option e The SEQUENCE option may not be used with the VOLID option unless used with the OLM option Option SETDATE Saves a backup date and time for future use by the GETDATE option also may be used to force a desired backup date For a non online backup the date and time at which the store was started is set For an online backup the date and time of the console REPLY to the synchronization point request is set as the backup date and time To force the setting of specific backup date and time without performing a backup perform a dummy store of a file to NULL while specifying the SETDATE option with the desired backup date as its argument Another alternative is to use the SETDATE utility program Possible reasons for forcing a specific prior backup date include e After an INSTALL to set the date to the date of the INSTALL BACKUP iX User Manual 18 339 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide e
17. gt STORE T LABEL ACCT 09 20 2003 ACCOUNTING Notes e TML internally invokes the LABEL option for tape volume labeling using a different volid for each tape If the LABEL option is specified when storing a TML cycle with volid and or expiration date both values are overridden by TML while the comment is retained e Any existing BACKUP tape label is ignored if the NOLABEL option is specified e The LABEL option is invalid and ignored for a disk backup e The LABEL option is used with the VOLID option to create and store to ANSI labeled tapes Option MAXBLOCK For backup devices other than DDS drives causes BACKUP to use the maximum block size supported by the drive BACKUP uses the maximum supported block size for backup devices configured as DDS drives which include all HP DDS drives and some third party DDS and 8mm drives However for non DDS backup devices BACKUP uses a block size of 16 Kb BACKUP uses a common block size of 16 Kbytes for non DDS drives so that a backup may be restored from any model tape drive older tape drives use smaller block sizes This impairs performance since better throughput can be achieved with larger block sizes The MAXBLOCK option causes BACKUP to use the maximum block size supported by the backup device which enhances performance It should be used if intending to restore from the same model tape drive from which the store is performed or a model which supports the same maximum bloc
18. gt STORE SELECT selectspec AND OR selectspec ANDed and ORed specifications are evaluated from left to right Parentheses may be used to enforce grouping selectspec Files to select for store in one of the following formats TYPE relop typespec CODE relop filecode SIZE relop eof relop For TYPE one of the following relational operators equal to lt gt not equal to For CODE and SIZE one of the following relational operators equal to lt less than gt greater than lt less than or equal to gt greater than or equal to lt gt not equal to filecode A numeric file code typespec One the following file types IMAGE DB KSAM SPOOL PROG VPLUS ASCII BINARY BYTE SYMLINK DEVLINK LARGE For details on File Types see the Glossary article Eof End of file Example To store all IMAGE and all KSAM files gt STORE T SELECT TYPE KSAM OR TYPE IMAGE To store all ASCII files that contain 10 000 records or more and all binary files BACKUP iX User Manual 18 338 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt STORE T SELECT TYPE ASCII AND SIZE gt 10000 OR TYPE BINARY Option SEQUENCE For a backup to multiple backup devices specifies the order in which the devices are opened Syntax Idevlist The logical device number s of the backup device s for which BACKUP should automatically reply specified in one of the following formats e A specific Idev e g 14
19. megabyte s kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Tape statistics for volume Volume number assigned as a count of tape s used in a store Volumeset Volumeset ID assigned with the LABEL option of STORE Volume The tape volume ID VOLID enclosed in parentheses assigned with use of the VOLID option of STORE which creates an ANSI label compression percentage Percentage by which the store to tape is compressed Backup Backup number assigned as a count of backups and appended backups stored to tape Name Name assigned to a specific tape backup with the BACKUP option of STORE by which that backup may be referenced to append later backups total number of errors Number of tape errors that occurred when writing to tape backup Idev number Logical device number of backup device on which backup was performed total number of retries Number of tape retries that occurred when writing to tape total number of blocks Number of datablocks on this tape and amount of data it comprises in sectors and megabytes if compression was used amounts are for compressed data time beginning Beginning time of tape writing as 24 hour time in hh mm ss format ending Ending time of tape writing as 24 hour time in hh mm ss format elapsed Amount of tape elapsed while writing this tape as 24 hour time in hh mm ss format amount of disk space stored Amount of compressed disk space occupied by files that were stor
20. 33 e Relative generation number e g 1 means the next to last generation 2 the previous generation etc Examples To restore the next to last backed up version of DEVLOG DATA DEV BACKUP iX User Manual 18 285 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt RESTORE T DEVLOG DATA DEV CYCLE GEN 1 To restore the TESTDB PLAY DEV database from the most recent generation of cycle named FULL and the next to last generation of cycle named PART gt RESTORE T DEVLOG DATA DEV CYCLE FULL GEN 0 CYCLE PART GEN 1 Notes e Ifthe GENERATION option is specified in combination with xDATE option s it takes precedence If GEN is excluded meaning that all generations are selected then any xDATE option s used apply to all generations The xDATE options are filters that are applied to any generations that are selected and for Restore include DATE BDATE MDATE and SDATE e f neither the CYCLE nor GENERATION option is specified all backups are searched e To search all generations of a particular cycle specify the name of the cycle in the CYCLE option and exclude the GEN option e To search the same generation of all cycles specify CYCLE and the absolute or relative generation number e g GEN 0 for the last generation of all cycles e To search multiple generations of different cycles specify multiple CYCLE GEN options pairs e If a specified select
21. A standard partial backup includes all files that were modified since the last full backup Partial backups are typically performed daily This may be in the evening before night batch processing or in the middle of the night or in the early morning following night batch processing Each succeeding partial backup has the potential of growing in size since it is cumulative from the last full backup Partial backups may be performed using the PARTBACKUP command This command retrieves the prior backup date and time date of the last FULLBACKUP or the date set by use of the SETDATE option or the SETDATE program and stores all files that have been modified after that date and time PARTBACKUP example In this example all files on the system that have been modified since the last FULLBACKUP which was on 12 10 01 at 7 00 PM are stored to device class TAPE BACKUP automatically issues a REPLY to the tape request and the SHOW listing is sent to device class LP FILE T DEV TAPE FILE LP DEV LP RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt PARTBACKUP T LP AUTOREPLY 7 The above PARTBACKUP command internally generates this BACKUP command gt STORE T DATE gt 12 10 01 19 00 DBSTORE SHOW AUTOREPLY 7 STORE examples Another method of performing a backup involves using the STORE command with the GETDATE option This option stores files with a state change after the date of the prior backup but allows a fileset other
22. BACKUPTML BACKUPTML is an output JCW used for the Tape Manager amp Librarian under control of BACKUP The JCW is displayed by SHOWJCW BACKUPTML BACKUPTMLRESTORE BACKUPTMLRESTORE is an input JCW that enables or disables Restore Wizard overriding the TMLRESTORE configuration setting in the TMLCONF configuration file To enable Restore Wizard set this JCW to 1 to disable set to 0 for example SETVAR BACKUPTMLRESTORE 1 BACKUPVOLUMES BACKUPVOLUMES is an output JCW that upon completion of a store dump or copy returns the total number of tape volumes contained in the store volumeset The JCW is displayed by BACKUP iX User Manual 22 388 Chapter 22 JCWs BACKUP iX Reference Guide SHOWJCW BACKUPVOLUMES FILEBUFF FILEBUFF is an output JCW which returns the size of the disk filebuffer in Ksectors sectors 1024 The JCW is displayed by SHOWJCW FILEBUFF Note The size returned by the FILEBUFF JCW may differ from the size specified in the FILEBUFF option since there may have been insufficient disk space to build the file of the requested size FILESNOTRESTORED FILESNOTRESTORED is an output JCW which returns the number of files that were selected for restore but not restored due to an error The JCW is displayed by SHOWJCW FILESNOTRESTORED Note Ifthe value of FILESNOTRESTORED exceeds 32767 an MPE iX Cl variable called FILESNOTRESTORED is set r
23. Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide For example to store all files in the ACCT1 and ACCT2 accounts except files in ACCT2 that contain TEMP in the filename gt STORE ACCT1 ACCT2 TEMP ACCT2 T Multiple fileset exclusions Multiple filesets may be excluded both globally and locally in the same command The first example uses four global fileset definitions and would back up all files on the system except those in the CSL SUPPORT and TELESUP accounts gt STORE CSL SUPPORT TELESUP T The second example uses one global include and two local exclude fileset definitions to backup the CSL account while excluding all files in the USERS group and all files in any group in the CSL account that have TEMP in their filename gt STORE CSL USERS CSL TEMP CSL T Note When using fileset exclusion in an indirect file BACKUP causes each line to be treated as a global exclusion To declare a local exclusion in an indirect file specify the excluded fileset on the same line as the fileset from which it is being excluded Note A file name may not begin with the dash hyphen or minus character Automatically excluded files BACKUP automatically excludes certain files from backups even if they qualify based on the selection criteria This includes non archivable files quarantined files and TurboIMAGE XL dynamic files To avoid
24. FILE T DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt RESTORE T KEEPNEW SHOW To restore all output spool files SELECT TYPE SPOOL from a disk backup fileset SPFL TEMP and display information about each file GSHOW including the output spool file names under which the spool files are linked into the spooler gt RESTORE SPFL TEMP SELECT TYPE SPOOL SHOW LONG Options summary ACCOUNT AUTOREPLY BACKUP BDATE BASELINE CREATE CREATOR CWD CYCLE DATE DBRESTORE DEFRAG DELTA DEV DIRECTORY DISKDIR Restores files from their source accounts into the specified account Automatically REPLYs to console requests for specified Idev s Specifies which backup in an appended backupset from which to restore For a restore with Restore Wizard selects files based on backup date and optionally time Use a specific cycle name for a baseline restore Creates non existent users groups accounts and or directories Changes creator s username or accountname for restored files Restores files from a POSIX store with their paths directly below the specified path For a restore with Restore Wizard specifies the cycle s from which to restore Selects files for restore based on last label state change date and optionally time same as SDATE option The state change timestamp tracks when a file was last modified as well as when the file s label containing security and ownership info was last modifie
25. The fileset list may include multiple filesets delimited with commas For example to restore all files that were stored from the HISTORY and TRANS accounts gt RESTORE T HISTORY TRANS Note Filesets need not be declared in any particular order in the fileset list BACKUP iX User Manual 11 122 Chapter 11 Restoring Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide Selection by filecode or file type Files can be selected by their filecode using the SELECT CODE construct of the RESTORE command or by file type using the SELECT TYPE construct of the RESTORE command For example to select all files with a filecode of 1234 gt RESTORE T SELECT CODE 1234 To select all files except output spool files gt RESTORE T SELECT TYPE lt gt SPOOL File types The file type designators used with the SELECT TYPE construct of the RESTORE command include IMAGE DB KSAM SPOOL PROG VPLUS ASCII BINARY BYTE SYMLINK DEVLINK and LARGE For details on File Types see the Glossary article For example to select all IMAGE databases and all KSAM files gt RESTORE T SELECT TYPE IMAGE OR TYPE KSAM The same facility can be used to exclude files of a given type For example to exclude all VPLUS forms files from the restore gt RESTORE T SELECT TYPE lt gt VPLUS Selection by size Files can be selected by their size based on the number of recor
26. To set the default tape media to DAT and length to 90M for new tapes gt DEFAULT TAPE MEDIA DAT LENGTH 90M DELETE CYCLE Deletes cycle and its corresponding cycle file BACKUP iX User Manual 19 354 Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax gt DELETE CYCLE cyclename Parameters cyclename Name of an existing cycle Example To delete the cycle SPECIAL gt DELETE CYCLE SPECIAL DELETE TAPE Deletes tapes from the system Syntax gt DELETE TAPE volset Parameters volset The tape volumeset specified as e A specific volid e g 000100 or 100 e Arange of volids e g 100 199 disallowed for alphanumeric volids e Selected volids e g D100 D102 D200 e Any combination of the above e g 100 106 D100 Example To delete the tapes with volids 000114 and 00147 which are being discarded due to excessive retries gt DELETE TAPE 114 147 LABEL CYCLE Prints tape identification labels for specified cycle generations BACKUP iX User Manual 19 355 Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax gt LABEL CYCLE cyclename GEN ERATION value Parameters cyclename Name of an existing cycle GENERATION Absolute or relative generation number value Specified in one of the following formats e All generations exclude the GENERATION parameter e Most recent generation s
27. e The default blocking for network backups is 16384 bytes Online and Zero downtime backup Through use of the Online module a special add on feature BACKUP is able to store files while those files continue to be open for read and write access using the ONLINE or ZERODOWN options of STORE Please refer to Chapter 7 Online and Zero downtime Backup in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide Delta Backups The Delta Backup module is available as a special add on feature for storing files Following a full backup the Delta feature only needs to store changes within a file instead of the entire file Please refer to Chapter 8 Delta Backup Module in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide 5 57 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX offers various techniques for selecting and specifying files for backup Additionally several run time parameters can be used to govern a store In this chapter Find step by step backup guides and an example of a store operation as well as details on each of the following topics e Selecting files using store command syntax e Specifying files with indirect or cycle files e Specifying backup devices e Specifying store directory handling e Reporting backup progress e Reporting on files stored e Selecting tapes to use e Tape identification labeling e Step by step tape backup guide e Step by step disk backup guide e Store example e Optional notes for Tape Manager amp Librarian The
28. gt COPY T1 TO T2 PROGRESS 1 DO Re executes the last command when DO has no parameter Also re executes the most recent command matching the character string entered following DO or a command identified by number either a negative number relative to the most recent command or the specific number from the history stack for the command as displayed by the BACKUP LISTREDO command Syntax relativenumber gt DO command redonumber firstchar Parameters relativenumber A number in the command line stack relative to the value 1 of the most recent command e g The 7 command entered prior to the most recent one is re executed with gt DO 7 command Any BACKUP command previously entered during the current session firstchar The first character whether a letter number or special character of a command in the command line stack redonumber A number assigned to a command entered during the current session and displayed by entering BACKUP s LISTREDO command Examples Do the last store command including all of the options used with it gt DO STORE Do the last command that started with s gt DO s Do command number 11 in the history stack which is displayed by entering LISTREDO at the BACKUP prompt BACKUP iX User Manual 18 235 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Do the command indicated by a negative number relative to
29. ie ee ER Re AA ee ee EA Re Re ee ee ek eke ee 11 132 1 2 Labeled Tapes iese Re RA AR Re AR Re AR ee Re AR ee 12 134 In this chapter suisse es e ede 12 134 IntroduetiOR EE ER EE GE Ee Re ee Ee ves Ge Ee De Ee we ED ee Ge Ge aad 12 134 MPE iX labeled versus BACKUP labeled tapes 000 12 134 Using BACKUP proprietary labeled tapes iese sees ee se ee ee 12 135 Using BACKUP s ANSI labeled tapes ees ee de ee ee ee ee ee ee 12 136 Considerations for appended backup ee ee ee AE ee Ge 12 138 Labeled tapes and the Tape Manager amp Librarian sesse ee 12 138 1 3 Backup Devices iese eke eek AR Re RR Re AR Re AR Re ee Re ee 13 140 Mithis chapter anna eee inden ae 13 140 Considerations for various backup device types esse ss see 13 140 Supported backup device typeS is ee ee Re Re Re ee ee ee ee ee 13 141 Automatic REPLY to console tape mount requests 08 13 143 Using multiple backup devices see ee ee ee ER RR ee ee ee ee ee Re Re ee 13 143 Duplicating a backup from one device to another 000 13 149 1 4 ORBIT Library Manager esse ee ee 14 150 Intfiischapterrs Ed see Ed eel EE oe Be ee ae De Ee eg Es 14 150 OVEIVIEW EE EER anole hae a Aka Se Ae Ee ee 14 150 Basic OLM setup procedures iese ee ee ee ee ER RA Re Ge ee ee ee ee Re eke ee 14 152 More OLM Cl Commands ie se ee ee AA AA ee ee ee Ee eke ee 14 156 Using BACKUP iX
30. mm dd yy hh mm Volid Volid Filename Fully qualified filename Stored Date and time file store was completed in mm dd yy date format and 24 hour time format Cycle Cycle under which file was stored Gen Generation of cycle under which file was stored Last mod Date and time at which file was last modified in mm dd yy date format and 24 hour time format USAGE option Display information about the most recent usage of tapes Volid Media Size Length First use Used Cycle Gen Expires Scratched XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX mm dd yy XXXXXXXX mm dd yy mm dd yy Volid Volid Media Media type Size Size classification Length User defined tape length typically measured in feet First use Date tape was first stored to by TML in mm dd yy format 00 00 00 if never stored using TML Used Number of times tape was stored using TML Cycle For active cycle generations name of the cycle to store the tape For blank or scratched tapes contained in the pool of a particular cycle the cycle name appears otherwise the cycle name is left blank indicating that the tape is allocated to the global tape pool Gen For active generations absolute generation number within the cycle For blank or scratched tapes in the tape pool the generation is left blank Expires Date on which cycle generation stored on tape expired or will expire in mm dd yy date format 00 00 0000 if never stored using TML BACKUP iX User Manu
31. An acronym for the POSIX concept of current working directory the current location of the user Also a BACKUP iX RESTORE command option Cycle Unique type of backup such as PART or FULL defined by the files to be stored and attributes that effect the scheduling of backups and the retention and selection of tapes DAT The Digital Audio Tape media used by HP s DDS drives now obsolete for use by DDS drives DDS media recommended Datablock A unit of data on tape Daymask Numeric mask of days on which store may be performed where 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday and 7 Sunday DBRECOV program An HP supplied utility program which recovers IMAGE databases from transaction log files BACKUP iX User Manual 427 Glossary BACKUP iX DBSTORE program An HP supplied backup program which stores a single IMAGE database to a single tapeset To assure correspondence between a database and a particular generation of transaction log files DBSTORE modifies the date time stamp and sets the dirty bit in the database root file DDS The abbreviation of HP s Digital Data Storage the industry standard for digital audio tape DAT formats and storage devices Deferred backup An unattended backup method by which data which does not fit on the tape mounted is deferred in a disk filebuffer until another tape is mounted Delta backup or Delta store Delta stores are the second or later bac
32. Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt PREVIEW CYCLE The dates of the next scheduled backups of all cycles are Next due date Cycle Fri 09 28 99 FULL Fri 09 28 99 SALESDB Mon 10 01 99 PART Thu 10 10 99 PAYROLL The due dates for all cycles are displayed in chronological order Previewing backup tape requirements To determine the next due date and the tapes needed for the store use the PREVIEW CYCLE command with the name of the cycle for example gt PREVIEW CYCLE FULL The date of the next scheduled backup of cycle FULL is Friday September 28 1999 The following volumes are required for the backup of cycle FULL Volid Media Size Length Pool 000131 TAPE LARGE 2400FT ULL 000132 TAPE LARGE 2400FT ULL 000133 TAPE LARGE 2400FT ULL 000134 TAPE LARGE 2400FT ULL 000135 TAPE LARGE 2400FT ULL 000137 TAPE LARGE 2400FT 000138 TAPE LARGE 2400FT 000139 TAPE LARGE 2400FT 000140 TAPE LARGE 2400FT 000141 TAPE LARGE 2400FT ULL ULL ULL ULL ULL F F F F F 000136 TAPE LARGE 2400FT FULL F F F F F Non default media Media other than the default media may be previewed by including a MEDIA parameter on the PREVIEW CYCLE command as shown BACKUP iX User Manual 17 199 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt PREVIEW CYCLE FULL MEDIA CTAPE The date of the next scheduled backup of cycle FULL is Friday September 28 1999 The followi
33. Commands are automatically converted to upper case upon entry BACKUP commands BACKUP commands are documented throughout this manual by topic and in alphabetical order in Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide Provision is made for use of Cl variables and expressions in BACKUP commands for use of commands that are so long that they must be continued on a lower line and for entering comments into the command line Cl variable and expression dereferencing 2 28 Chapter 2 Program Operation BACKUP iX Operations Guide MPE Cl variables and expressions may be input as any part of any Backup command Cl variables are identified by the standard Cl prefix character Expressions are identified using the Cl s standard N T syntax BACKUP interpretation of Cl variables is compatible with the MPE iX Cl PUS gt PUB setvar Mondays Progress 1 Directory Label Monday OPUS gt PUB backuppl BACKUP iX 6 78 c Copyright 1991 06 ORBiT SOFTWARE INC 150ct06 04 24pm BACKUP iX 72 DAYS LEFT IN DEMO PERIOD Online module 72 DAYS LEFT IN DEMO PERIOD Delta module 72 DAYS LEFT IN DEMO PERIOD Wizard module IS NOT INSTALLED gt Store t Mondays Store t Progress 1 Directory Label Monday Building intermediate scratch files If T precedes a token that is not a defined Cl variable execution continues compatibly with prior BACKUP releases Hence users may continue to use to identify ind
34. This entry for example stores all of the files on the system except object programs and purges those files that have not been accessed for one year or more gt STORE T ADATE lt 365 SELECT TYPE lt gt PROG PURGE IMAGE and AllBase database backup IMAGE databases may be backed up using conventional STORE but transaction logging recovery requires that three fields in the database root file the store date store time and dirty bit fields be updated to ensure recoverability by MPE iX s DBRECOV program MPE iX includes the DBSTORE utility program to back up entire databases and update the root file as required but it can only back up a single database at a time Therefore a dedicated tape or set of tapes must be used for each database backup wasting both tape and time The DBSTORE option By specifying the DBSTORE option of the BACKUP iX STORE command the files that comprise a database including the root file jumbo datasets large datasets and third party index TPI files are stored The root files of all databases are also updated as required for recoverability Additionally the DBSTORE option 1 large datasets are dataset files whose files sizes can increase beyond the jumbo dataset file size limitation of 80 Giga bytes 4 43 Chapter 4 Backup Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide automatically forces a backup of all files that comprise the database if the root file is
35. e Simple to learn and use e Facilitates correct stores and restores in the absence of an operator e Provides automatic tracking of backups and tapes for restore BACKUP iX User Manual 17 178 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide e Facilitates locating files on backups in the absence of an operator Cycles Backup organization and management performed with BACKUP s Tape Manager amp Librarian TML module is based on the concepts of cycles and generations Each unique type of backup e g full partial incremental is created as a separate cycle with its own name cycle file and set of attributes Each time a cycle is stored a generation of that cycle is created A cycle is defined by the files contained in the backup the number of generations of the cycle to be kept on hand the amount of time to retain each generation before expiration and other attributes In this section find information about cycle name cycle files cycle attributes creating a cycle setting default cycle attributes reporting cycle attributes and modifying and deleting cycles using the DEFAULT CYCLE DELETE CYCLE and SHOW CYCLE commands Cycle name and cycle file Each cycle is identified by a unique name of up to 8 characters in which the first character is alphabetic A cycle name given to a cycle when it is created can be synonymous with the type of backup and descriptive of the files to be backed up The cycle fi
36. esse 11 127 18 282 18 321 BACKUPDISCDUMPFLIMIT JCW 5 54 22 386 BACKUPEXPIRES JOW ees ees ee se ee ee ee 22 386 BACKUPFILEBUFFTAPEPRI JOW aiae 22 386 BACKUPHC file ese ees ees ee ee ke ee ee ee ke ee 23 396 BACKUPIRNOCONFIRM JCW 118 17 220 22 386 BACKUPMAXERRORS JOW 22 387 BACKUPMAXRETRIES JOW see esse 22 387 BACKUPMC BACKUP message catalog 23 396 file 3 37 23 396 BACKUPNOSSM JOW 22 387 BACKUPPL program ese ee se se ee ee ee ee ee ee 3 37 de EE EE a EE N 2 27 INStaAllING 224 MEE Re nh aie ae ek oek 1 18 Starting EE GE Ee ER ee RE ee EER Ee De 2 24 BACKUPPROCESSES JOW eee 22 388 Backups determining for restore cece 11 119 BACKUPSYNCANYWAY JOW eee 22 388 BACKUPSYNCYN JOW 22 388 BACKUPTAPEERRORS JOW 22 389 BACKUPTAPERETRIES JOW 22 389 BACKUPTML JEW ee ees ee ee ee ee ee ke ee 22 389 BACKUPTMLRESTORE JOW sesse 22 389 BACKUPVOLUMES JOW ees ee se ese ee 22 389 Baseline store ee ee ee Ee RA ee ee ee ee 427 Baseline version ccccccceecesseeeeeeeeeeeaees 8 96 427 Batch mode operation ee ee ee ee ee 2 26 BCKUPHLP BACKUP help catalog ees se ee ee 23 396 BCKUPMSG BACKUP TML message catalog 17 202 21 380 23 396 BINARY AE Hector rv ive Ee ee Raed fence 428 BinaryfilesS see ee ee ee ee Re ee ee ee ee 6 61 11 123 BloCKSIZE ee Re Ee ea 13 141 default etek ds aaah alae 16 176 imposing MAX MUM 2 ee 16 176 18 326 B
37. file size in sectors and mnemonic file code For V6 60 and later only the fully qualified filename percentage of each file stored if a delta store file size in sectors and mnemonic file code are listed LONG In addition to the SHORT information lists record size file type EOF file limit blocking factor extents allocated maximum extents and for output spool files the old filename from OUT HPSPOOL FILENAME Lists the filename or pathname only across a full line Designed to provide a shorter listing for users with long POSIX pathnames DATES In addition to SHORT or LONG information lists creation date last access date last modification date and state change date SECURITY In addition to SHORT or LONG information lists file owner and access matrix OFFLINE Lists SHOW output to both the screen and printer formal file designator OFFLINE BACKUP iX User Manual 18 301 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide If BACKUP is run from a session and showformat is not specified SHORT format is imposed if run in batch showformat defaults to LONG The showformat parameters may be used in combination with the exceptions that LONG SHORT and FILENAME are exclusive of each other and that FILENAME must be used alone Examples To send instructions to the printer to generate a hard copy listing of all the files restored with basic information about them enter RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt RESTORE
38. iese ees ee RA ee ee ER RA ee 8 96 Restore operation EE ge EG Re ee ee a setae 8 96 Procedural notes for using the Delta module n 8 97 Maximum number of concurrent Delta backup cycles 8 98 Errors and exceptional Conditions cccccccseeseececeeeeeeseeeeneraeeeeeees 8 98 Miscellaneous Delta noteS ee se ee Re ee Ge Re ee Re ee ee Re ee ee 8 09 9 Restore Strategies sr ER EG erriirnnkn udinen u nune DE Ede 9 100 Inihistehaptef ss EE EE a A SE ee a a Ee as 9 100 Changing attributes of restored files ee ee ee Re ee ee ee 9 100 viii BACKUP iX User Manual Creating nonexistent users groups accounts and directories 9 103 Restoring files to a specified destination on disk ee ee 9 104 Preserving or changing file date attributes ei ke ee ee ke ee 9 105 Restoring IMAGE databases ees ees es ee ke ee ee ee ke ee ee ee ke ee ee ee ke ee 9 105 Restoring symbolic links ee ee ee ee Re ee nn Eann ee ke ee 9 106 Restoring FIFOs and stream esse ees ee ke ee ee ee ke ee ee ek ke ee ee ke ee 9 106 Restoring Spool files TREER EER RS EER GERS ties Se Re ER Re Re eke ea 9 106 Defragmenting during restore iese ees ee ke ee ee ke ee ee ek ke ee ek ke ee 9 106 Performing a system INSTALL ee ees ee ee ee ee ee ee ke ee ee ke ee 9 107 Restoring from a password protected or encrypted backup 9 108 Restoring onto any HPe3000 ieee ee ee eter ee ke ee ee ee ke ee ee ke ee 9
39. 0 12 MBytes time beginning 13 41 19 ending 13 42 03 elapsed 00 00 44 amount of disk space stored 1728 sectors 0 42 megabyte s kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk BACKUP iX User Manual 11 132 Chapter 11 Restoring Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Tape statistics for volume 3 Volumeset Volume compression percentage 90 Backup 1 name Ee kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk total number of errors 0 backup ldev number 18 total number of retries 0 total number of blocks 5 635 sectors 0 16 MBytes time beginning 13 41 22 ending 13 42 05 elapsed 00 00 43 amount of disk space stored 1728 sectors 0 38 megabyte s kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk total number of blocks read 13 1651 sectors 0 40 megabyte s total number of blocks in volumeset 17 2159 sectors 0 53 megabyte s total amount of disk space restored 5024 sectors 1 23 megabyte s tape errors retries on restore 0 0 tape errors retries on store 0 0 This restore took 0 hours 1 minutes 11 seconds KK KKK KKK KKK KKK RR KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK RR RKR RR RR RR RR K RR KT of files size ksectors Mb file type kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
40. 000012 and 000021 Note If an attempt is made to delete a tape that is protected or does not exist the delete request is rejected for that tape but proceeds to delete other selected tapes Reporting on tapes Reports generated in TML can be printed offline as well as being displayed to STDLST and provide three different kinds of information regarding tapes and tape attributes a tape s default attributes tapes by pool and tapes by volid Printing reports offline Appending OFFLINE to either the SHOW POOL or SHOW TAPE command causes output to be printed offline and displayed to STDLIST Output is sent to device class LP under the formal file designator TMLLIST Reporting default tape attributes The DEFAULT TAPE command displays the current default tape attributes To display the current default tape attributes specify the DEFAULT TAPE command with no parameters gt DEFAULT TAPE Media Size Length Cycle TAPE LARGE 3600FT FULL Reporting on tapes by pool The SHOW POOL command is used to display information on the tapes contained in a specified cycle pool or on the tapes in all pools A pool is displayed only if it contains tapes empty pools are not shown Tapes are listed by cycle pool in the order in which they were selected for stores within each pool The information displayed for each tape includes the media size length sequence of selection by store volid date of first use number of times used a
41. 8 and 9 and open the drives in that order gt RESTORE T DRIVES 3 SEQUENCE 7 8 9 To restore from Idevs 7 8 and 9 opening the drives in that order and reading the store directory on ldev 7 by use of the dirldev sub parameter following the colon BACKUP iX User Manual 18 300 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt RESTORE T DRIVES 3 SEQUENCE 7 9 7 Notes e The SEQUENCE option cannot be used with the VOLID option unless used with the OLM option e To specify the drive opening sequence using ANSI labeled tapes list the volids in the desired order in the VOLID option e f using the DRIVES option in combination with the SEQUENCE option the number of ldevs specified in the SEQUENCE option must equal the number indicated in the DRIVES option e If using the DRIVES option in combination with the SEQUENCE option the DRIVES option must appear first in the command line Option SHOW Specifies the display format of information about restored files The SHOW listing is sent to STDLIST under the formal file designator SYSLIST which may be redirected using a file equation Syntax gt RESTORE SHOW showformat showformat Specifies one or more of the following information listings delimited by commas SHOW LONG SHORT f DATES nem OFFLINE FILENAME SHORT Lists the fully qualified filename Idev number disk address volume number
42. BACKUP iX is installed for access by any user on the system by default Security is enforced within BACKUP based on the capabilities assigned to the user running the program and on the access restrictions configured for files groups accounts and directories In this chapter The various security considerations for BACKUP are discussed including e Capabilities and access restrictions e Lockwords and user access e Access control definitions ACDs e Temporary files e File access requirements Capabilities and access restrictions BACKUP imposes the same rules and restrictions on capabilities and access rights as does MPE iX STORE and RESTORE with one significant exception BACKUP allows users to store and restore privileged files without having Privileged Mode PM capability Privileged files usually displayed as file type PRIV have a negative filecode and include IMAGE database files Store The following access restrictions are imposed for store e Users must have read access to any file they wish to store Users with System Manager SM or System Supervisor OP capability can store all files on the system users with Account Manager AM capability can store any file in their logon account files except those owned by users from other accounts i e files whose GROUPID fields don t match the account where they re located e Users with AM capability may store spool files created by any user of their hom
43. C A If the operator replies C the program will try to find a volume that is not needed currently for exporting If it fails to find such a volume the operation will be aborted Library invalid The synchronization between the library itself and the olm database may be lost This can happen when the library door is opened or magazine dismounted since there is no way for the olm daemon to know if volumes in the library have been moved manually In this case the message The door is was open Follow validation procedure is printed Also if a volume is moved without olm control e g with the ORBiT TapeCtrl utility an internal olm check may detect the inconsistency and set the library into an invalid state In addition the following will be printed The database does not agree with the current library state Follow validation procedure In both of these cases the library will not be useful with olm until the validation procedure is followed Other error conditions returned by OLM Some error conditions returned by OLM are not discussed in the above For these conditions BACKUP iX will print the message BACKUP iX User Manual 14 167 Chapter 14 ORBiT Library Manager OLM Operations Guide Unexpected OLM error for library RINGO DLTLIB olm xxxx operation aborted error text appears here Validation Procedure Use the validation procedure to get the olm database consistent with the state of t
44. Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt RESTORE T NOLABEL Notes e The NOLABEL option is invalid and ignored for a disk backup e NOLABEL is disallowed for ANSI labeled tapes Option NOPATH Restores POSIX files from a tape or disk backup into the target location The NOPATH option strips the source path including accounts groups and directories if they are part of the pathname leaving only the file s basename i e filename and restores the basename into the location specified by other restore options e g CWD Syntax gt RESTORE NOPATH Examples To restore the files in ap test bin under their basenames only into ap bin gt RESTORE T ap test bin CWD ap bin NOPATH To restore the files that originated in TEST AP into ap test bin gt RESTORE T TEST AP CWD ap test bin NOPATH To restore a file including its original path SYS PUB DIR1 FILE1 into a specified group and account location gt RESTORE T GROUP TEST ACCOUNT AP CREATE PATH The file is restored to AP TEST SYS PUB DIR1 FILE1 To restore a file having the original path SYS PUB DIR1 FILE1 into a specified group and account location without its original path gt RESTORE T GROUP TEST ACCOUNT AP CREATE PATH NOPATH The file is restored to AP TEST FILE1 Notes BACKUP iX User Manual 18 293 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands
45. DrivelD PortID Slotid DrivelD DriveName DriveLocation Volumeld DriveName DRIVE DriveHost LDev DriveLocation DRIVE n PortID VolumelD PortLocation PortLocation PORT n SlotID VolumelD SlotLocation SlotLocation SLOT n SourcelD DrivelD PortID Slotld VolLocation VolumelD DrivelD SlotLocation PortLocation VolumelD The name of a volume up to 6 characters in length n The number of a library element E g if the library has 100 slots legal values would 0 99 Notes 1 LibraryHost is only needed if the library robotics is not connected to the host where you are logged on BACKUP iX User Manual 20 366 Chapter 20 OLM Command Line Interface Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide ADD The ADD command adds a library to the library database A database will be created on the host if none already exists Syntax olm gt ADD LIBRARY LibraryID DeviceFileName DeviceFileName This is the device file for the robotic controller as created using OLMDEV CONNECT The CONNECT command connects to the OLMRPCD running on the specified host system and reports the names of libraries attached to that host Syntax CONNECT LibraryHost DEFAULT The DEFAULT command sets temporary defaults for the LibraryName slot port and drive Note at least one of the optional parms must be provided Once a default has been set in an OLM CI run that default will b
46. Procedure for appended backups The following is the procedure for performing an appended backup 1 If this is the first backup of an appended backupset perform a normal backup without the APPEND option gt STORE T To append the current backup to an existing backupset use the APPEND option of the STORE command gt STORE PAYROLL T APPEND If desired use the BACKUP option of the STORE command as well to specify a name for the backup being created For example to create a full backup named PR990701 enter the following gt STORE PAYROLL T APPEND BACKUP PR990701 Note The BACKUP option can be used with or without the APPEND option and therefore can be used to name the first backup of a backupset 3 Mount additional tape volumes if required Operational notes for appended backups The appended backup feature supports DLT DDS and 8mm devices The DDS and 8mm devices must be configured as HP DDS drives and fully support HP s DDS driver functionality Note Some third party DDS and 8mm drives are not configured as HP DDS drives and do not support the required driver Also some third party devices do not support the full functionality of HP s DDS driver They therefore cannot support the appended backup feature Warning All appended backups on a tape or tapeset must be created with the same version of BACKUP ix The APPEND option is used for appending a
47. Restore List Confirm or Abort R L C A R List If the reply L is entered the selected files are listed with their attributes Options such as proceeding with the restore or verifying each file may then be indicated BACKUP iX User Manual 17 218 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt RESTORE T DATA AP CYCLE PART GEN 0 The following generations and tape volumes are required for this restore Cycle Gen Created Seq Volid Media Length Dir XXXXXXXX mm dd yy XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX HHH XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX H XXXXXXXX mm dd yy KXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX 3 files selected Restore List Verify or Abort R L C A L The Restore Wizard has selected the following files for restore Pathname Stored Cycle Gen Volid Last modified XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm XXXXXXXX XXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm XXXXXXXX XXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm XXXXXXXX XXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm 3 files selected Restore List Confirm or Abort R L C A R Confirm If the reply C for Confirm is entered each file is listed in succession and each file may be accepted or rejected for restore by specifying Y or N gt RESTORE T DATA AP CYCLE PART GEN 0 The following generations and tape volumes are required for this restore Cycle Gen Created Seq Volid Media Length Dir
48. UDC Short for a user defined command Volid Abbreviation for volume ID Volsetid Abbreviation for volumesetid Volume An individual tape reel cartridge DAT cassette or other unit of storage media Volumeid The 6 character volume identification code of each tape volume Volumesets Sets of all media on disk tape or other media grouped as a unit used for storage of data from a particular cycle generation Volumesetid The volid of the first volume of a cycle generation VPLUS files A file type which includes VFORM and VFAST forms files Vsetid Abbreviation for volumesetid Wildcard A special character used to represent one or more characters For example the wildcard represents a single numeric digit BACKUP iX User Manual 435 Index Index SST DIST EER EEN SE oe GE ES AE N ee ee eed Eg 435 Used for file selection eie ee ee ee ee ee ee 4 40 8mm backup device ese esse ese 13 142 22 387 Access Control Definitions 0 See ACDs Access requirements3 38 See Security and Access Requirements Access restrictions ie ee ee ee ee ee ee 3 36 d27 AGDS ER See Access Control Definitions required for POSIX files amp directories See Access Control Definitions Active generation ee ee ee ee ke ee ee ke ee 427 ADD FILE command iese see ee ee ee ee se 19 348 ET RE RE MR EE 17 206 file register inconsistency ee ee ee 26 425 ADD TAPE co
49. XXXXXXXX mm dd yy XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX HHH XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX H XXXXXXXX mm dd yy XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX files selected Restore List Verify or Abort R L C A C Pathname Cycle Gen Volid Last modified Restore Restore XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX H HHH XXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm N Y Y Restore XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX H HHH XXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm N Y N Restore XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX H HHH XXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm N Y Y 2 files selected Restore List Confirm or Abort R L C A R Abort If the reply A is entered the restore is aborted and the BACKUP prompt appears BACKUP iX User Manual 17 219 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt RESTORE DATA AP CYCLE PART GEN 0 The following generations and tape volumes are required for this restore Cycle Gen Created Seq Volid Media Length Dir XXXXXXXX mm dd yy XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX HH XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXX mm dd yy BEE XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX 3 files selected Restore List Confirm or Abort R L C A A Restore operation aborted by user request gt Note The confirmation dialog can be disabled if desired by setting the BACKUPIRNOCONFIRM JCW to 1 Note The confirmation dialog is not invoked in batch therefore special care should be exercised when performing a restore with Restore Wizard in a batch job Reporting change
50. a tray of volumes in a DLT changer Sometimes it is far more sophisticated Slots provide locations for volumes to be stored in the library And ports if present are used to add remove import or export volumes to from the library without opening the library door Ports are also sometimes called mail slots Not all libraries have ports BACKUP iX User Manual 14 150 Chapter 14 ORBIT Library Manager OLM Operations Guide OLM software components and architecture The library robotics hardware which moves volumes within the library is controlled by the OLM daemon OLMRPCD OLMRPCD also maintains a database for each library it controls on its particular host The database is especially important for libraries without barcode readers since it contains the volume id of each volume in the library among other things The names by which BACKUP iX knows library drives also are stored in the database Applications that use the library send instructions to OLMRPCD which then carries them out The OLM Cl mentioned above is just an application that uses a library When you use it to move a volume from a slot to a drive for example the OLM Cl sends the move command to OLMRPCD running on the appropriate host OLMRPCD moves the volume and when done returns a status to the OLM Cl BACKUP iX does the same thing the OLM Cl does For example if you are doing a store command using olm and need to get volume 1234 mounted on Idev 14 BACKUP iX
51. and can be used at any position XDATE Imposes date restriction one of the following values BACKUP iX User Manual 18 250 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide BDATE Backup date and optionally time only on Restore from tape with Restore Wizard DATE Last state change date and optionally time MDATE Last modification date and optionally time SDATE Last state change date and optionally time relop One of the following relational operators Equal to lt Less than gt Greater than lt Less than or equal to gt Greater than or equal to lt gt Not equal to datetimespec Date and optionally time in the following format mm dd yylyy HH MM days where mm is the month in 2 digits dd isthe day in 2 digits yylyy is the 4 digit year the first 2 digits being optional HH is the hour using 24 hour time MM isthe minute days is relative to today listdiroption One or more of the LISTDIR command options documented with their parameters in detail in the pages that follow Example To send a SHOW listing in DATES and SECURITY format to the printer device class LP FILE T DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt LISTDIR T SHOW DATES SECURITY OFFLINE Options summary AUTOREPLY Automatically REPLYs to console requests for specified ldev BACKUP Specifies which backup in an appended backupset for which to list the contents
52. e A specific volid e g 000100 or 100 e Arrange of volids e g 100 199 disallowed for alphanumeric volids e Selected volids e g D100 D102 D200 e Any combination of the above e g 100 106 D100 MEDIA Type of media Specify the backup device class for MEDIA the media type to cause TML to automatically select the media appropriate for that device when the backup is performed For example if storing to device class TAPE TML will select volumes with a media of TAPE if storing to DAT TML will select media DAT etc Note To instruct TML to select volumes or media based on something other than device class use a file equation when performing the store mediatype User assigned media type alphanumeric string of up to 8 characters beginning with an alphabetic character and containing no embedded spaces LENGTH Freeform tape length used for display purposes only For media measured in length such as tape or cartridges specify the number of feet For DAT and other media measured in time indicate the number of minutes of storage time measurement Freeform alphanumeric string of up to 6 characters surrounded by single or double quotes if it contains embedded spaces SIZE Identifies the size of the media that should be selected for stores The SIZE classifier is used to group and maintain media of various lengths e g SMALL MEDIUM and LARGE and allows TML to select the media o
53. for detailed instructions on creating cycle files Specifying backup device s Backups may be performed either to tape or disk Disk backups can later be DUMPed to tape in BACKUP store format or may be restored from directly For backups to tape BACKUP provides the ORBiT Library Manager module OLM to enable backups to media located within a robotic tape library and the Wizard module Tape Manager amp Librarian to facilitate backup scheduling and tape handling The Tape Manager amp Librarian TML can not be used when performing backups to disk If an attempt is made to store a TML cycle on a disk backup the command is rejected Designating Tape drives for a backup Typically if storing to tape the drive or drives are designated by backreferencing a file equation which defines the drives device class or a specific Idev number for a drive To backup to either a single or multiple drives define the drives as a device class and use the DRIVES option with the store For example to define device class TAPE enter this file equation FILE T DEV TAPE To store to multiple devices in this case three create file equations as above for each target device and use the DRIVES option with the STORE command gt STORE T DRIVES 3 To store to a single drive either use device class TAPE as above or define a file designator as a specific ldev number FILE T DEV 7 File designator The f
54. if not it is built in the current group or group account For example to store to the Disk backup fileset TEMP gt STORE TEMP This will build the TEMP fileset in the current group account To create the TEMP fileset in PUB BACKUP gt STORE TEMP PUB BACKUP Note BACKUP will create multiple Disk backup files which begin with the specified name followed by four numbers e g TEMP would create TEMPOOOO TEMP0001 TEMP0002 etc Null backup A store may be performed to NULL which causes BACKUP to go through the process of a regular backup but suppress the output data The purpose of a NULL backup is to validate a command or to test BACKUP operation without actually creating a store volumeset To store all files on the system to NULL FILE N SNULL RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt STORE N If a TML cycle is stored to NULL BACKUP assumes it is being done for testing purposes and performs a NULL backup without recording any data for TML Default backup device If the backup device is not specified a tape backup to device class TAPE is assumed and the logon user name is imposed For example HELLO OPERATOR SYS RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt STORE is the same as BACKUP iX User Manual 6 69 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide HELLO OPERATOR SYS FILE OPERATOR DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt STO
55. or the AUTOREPLY option of the STORE command should be specified See Chapter 13 Backup Devices in the BACKUP X Operations Guide for more on how to prepare a device or a process for autoreply Use of AUTOREPLY permits a deferred backup to be performed at any time without the need to respond to the console REPLY request Files are not released for access until they are written into the filebuffer If the filebuffer fills up before all files have been written into it a filebuffer full message is displayed If the filebuffer fills up after the current tape is full mount the next tape As soon as data is transferred from the filebuffer to tape BACKUP uses the empty space for further storage by treating the filebuffer as a circular file When performing a non deferred backup to tape the percentage completed messages reflect the percentage of the data actually stored to tape however when performing a deferred backup the progress shown represents the percentage of store completed to the filebuffer Deferred backups are normally started with a tape mounted on the tape drive If performing a deferred backup with no tape mounted a special procedure must be followed as described later in this chapter 5 51 Chapter 5 Backup Methods BACKUP iX Operations Guide e The BACKUPFILEBUFFTAPEPRI JCW can be used to set the priority of the process that writes the remaining data from the filebuffer to tape once additional tape volumes are m
56. 109 1 0 Restore Methods c s ccceeeeeeeeeeeeececeneeeeeeenes 10 111 Tale eie OE acted hee edd ote 111 Restoring from a tape baCkKUP is ee ee ee GR RA ee ee ee Re Re ee rn 111 Restoring from a disk backup ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 111 Restoring from an online backup ee ee ee ee Re ee ee 111 Restoring from an appended backup se ee ee ee ee RR Re ee ee 112 Restoring over a netWOFK ee ee ee AR Ee Re ee ee ee eb ee ee 113 Restoring with the TML Restore Wizard see ee se ee ee Re ee 113 1 1 Restoring FileSend Oe ee ge ig 11 119 In thistchapte rics cfs eet Fist EE EE GE EG eat a 11 119 Identifying backups for a restore ees ee ek ke ee ee Re ee ee ee ke ee ee 11 119 Identifying tapes for a restore ees ee ee ee ek ke ee ee ke ee ee ee ke ee ee 11 120 Specifying files using restore command SyNtaX esse ee ee 11 120 Specifying files in an indirect file ee ee ee ee 11 125 Specifying restore devicel ie ee ee ee Re ee Ge Re ee ee ee 11 125 Specifying store directory handling ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 11 126 Reporting restore Progress iii ees ee ed ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 11 127 Reporting on files restored iese ee ek ee AR ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 11 128 Overwriting existing files ee Ee Re AA ee ee ee ee ee 11 129 Step by step tape restore guide ee ee ee AA Ee ee ee ee 11 130 Step by step disk backup restore guide iese ee ee ee ee 11 131 Restore example
57. 18 02 10 18 02 10 18 02 11 05 02 11 05 02 10 18 02 10 18 02 10 18 02 10 18 02 10 18 02 10 18 02 10 18 02 10 18 02 10 18 02 OLM Operations Guide Accessed Accessed 12 31 69 Accessed 11 05 02 11 05 02 11 05 02 11 05 02 11 05 02 11 05 02 11 05 02 11 05 02 11 05 02 11 05 02 11 05 02 11 05 02 11 05 02 11 05 02 11 05 02 11 05 02 By default all of elements in the library are listed However you can restrict the listing to less information See the reference section for details The first column is the location number for example drives 0 and 1 are listed The second column shows the tape volume Id for volumes in each location or empty if there is no volume in the location If this field is blank then the volume is unnamed For drives the third column shows the drive name The third column is blank for all other types of library elements Column four reports the Hops which are the number of movements that a tape volume has made between library elements since it was added or imported to the library BACKUP iX User Manual 14 158 Chapter 14 ORBiT Library Manager OLM Operations Guide The fifth and sixth columns for elements other than drives are intended to contain the date the volume was last written from its start and last accessed However it is up to BACKUP iX to update these fields and that has not yet been implemented For tape drives the fifth column contains the location the volume in
58. 18 340 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt STORE SHOW showformat showformat Specifies one or more of the following information listings delimited by commas SHORT SHOW LONG SECURITY OFFLINE si DIRECTORY DATES FILENAME SHORT Lists the fully qualified filename Idev number disk address volume number file size in sectors and mnemonic file code For V6 60 and later only the fully qualified filename percentage of each file stored if a delta store file size in sectors and mnemonic file code are listed LONG In addition to the SHORT information lists record size file type EOF file limit blocking factor extents allocated maximum extents and for output spool files the old filename from OUT HPSPOOL DIRECTORY Lists the names of all directory structures MPE Groups Accounts and POSIX directories on the system when the DIRECTORY option of STORE is specified Directory files are tagged with one of the following CODE field values ACCT hy MPE Account GROUP sks MPE Group HFSDIR P POSIX Directory Directory files are NOT included in the Files to store total FILENAME Lists the filename or pathname only across a full line Designed to provide a shorter listing for users with long POSIX pathnames DATES In addition to SHORT LONG or DIRECTORY information lists creation date last access date last modification date and last state change date SECURI
59. 7 8 9 Note f using the DRIVES option in combination with the AUTOREPLY option the DRIVES option must appear first in the command line Using multiple backup devices Sites with multiple tape drives can speed up stores restores and readalls verifies by using more than one drive up to a maximum of 64 Tape drives must be of the same type e g tape or DDS but not mixed and written at the same density All backup devices are opened through a single file equation so they must all be configured with the same device class There is no requirement to use the same number of backup devices for restore as store so it is possible if you have four backup devices for example to store to three of them in order to keep one available for unexpected stores or restores and restore from four Tape volumes can be mounted in any order for restore and not all tapes may be required for restore If not using DISKDIR the volume containing the directory must be mounted at the start of the restore Parallel versus serial BACKUP can store to restore from and verify all tape drives simultaneously in parallel mode This greatly improves the overall speed of the backup and restore Alternately backup devices may be stored to serially Parallel backup is the preferred method for store since it is much faster than serial backup However a parallel backup may require more volumes than a serial backup since a serial backup though slower ensures
60. After an accidental BACKUP update having used RESTORE e After a backup performed with a utility other than BACKUP e g MPE iX STORE Note Donot use SETDATE with a specified backup date and GETDATE in the same store command Note SETDATE sets the internal date even if a successful backup is performed in which no files are stored Syntax gt STORE SETDATE datetimespec datetimespec Date and optionally time in the following format datespec time datespec Date in mm dal yylyy format time Time of day in the form hh mm using 24 hour time If not specified midnight on the specified date is imposed Example To perform a full backup and set the internal date for future use by a partial backup gt STORE T SETDATE Note The previous command is equivalent to the FULLBACKUP command To perform an incremental backup based on the internal date and reset the internal date for the next backup gt STORE T SETDATE GETDATE To perform a dummy backup to set the internal date to the last full backup date and time in this example December 1 1998 at 8 00 PM FILE NULL NULL RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt STORE anyfile NULL SETDATE 12 1 98 20 00 Option SHOW Defines display format of information about files stored in various ways The SHOW listing is sent to STDLIST under the formal file designator SYSLIST which may be redirected using a file equation Syntax BACKUP iX User Manual
61. BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide and is case sensitive Example To list the directory of the ANSI labeled volumeset TUESBU containing the store directory on volume TUESO3 gt LISTDIR T LABEL TUESBU VOLID TUES03 LISTREDO Entered at the BACKUP prompt gt this BACKUP command lists the last 20 commands issued from within BACKUP for use by REDO or DO It is used in basically the same manner as the MPE LISTREDO Syntax gt LISTREDO PARTBACKUP Performs a partial system backup to tape or disk The PARTBACKUP command requires that the internal prior backup date already be set either via the FULLBACKUP command or the SETDATE option of the STORE command otherwise the backup is aborted Syntax gt PARTBACKUP tapefile listfile storeoption diskfile Parameters tapefile Backreferences a file equation for the tape drive Tape is the default if not specified the current username is imposed as the tapefile name and prompts to mount the tape and enter the Idev are presented diskfile Name of disk backup fileset as a maximum of 16 characters first character must be alphabetic and optionally qualified with group and account The diskfile may be specified using any legal MPE or POSIX syntax filename or may backreference a file equation that specifies DEV DISC listfile Backreferences a file equation for the SHOW listing storeoption One or more of t
62. BACKUP iX Reference Guide If file information unloading fails it can be resumed by performing a SCRATCH FILE command against the current generation If file information loading or unloading fails for a generation a message identifies that generation and TML proceeds to update any other requested generations skipping the failed generation TMLDB database inconsistency Any database inconsistency reported by an IMAGE failure should be treated as any other IMAGE error A database utility or a database DBUNLOAD DBLOAD may be used to diagnose and repair database inconsistencies BACKUP iX User Manual 26 425 Glossary BACKUP iX Glossary In this glossary Find terms and concepts that particularly pertain to BACKUP HIX with descriptions or definitions Access restrictions MPE assigned security structure that determines which users may access particular files For example a file may be accessible for read by all users of a particular account but only accessible for write by its owner Active generation A cycle generation that has not been scratched i e all generations displayed by SHOW CYCLE Whereas a site may create hundreds of generations per year only a few of them will be active at any time because the previous generations will be scratched Archival backup A backup which creates a tape copy of files that are purged performed using the PURGE option of the STORE command AES encryption The Advanced Encrypt
63. CUSTDB but do an entire backup SYS account gt STORE SYS CUSTDB GETDATE T This command internally generates the BACKUP command gt STORE SYS CUSTDB DATE gt 12 10 2000 19 00 T To perform an incremental backup based on the internal date and time and reset the internal date for the next backup gt STORE T GETDATE SETDATE Option LABEL Writes a tape label containing volsetid expiration date and comment to each tape volume The LABEL option can be used to ensure that the correct tape is being used when storing restoring and dumping and to safeguard against overwriting a tape that has not expired By default a label in proprietary BACKUP format is written Alternately ANSI format labels can be written by using the VOLID option Syntax gt STORE LABEL volsetid expirationdate comment volsetid Specifies the user defined tape volumeset ID of the tape volume set has a maximum of 6 alphanumeric characters and is case sensitive BACKUP iX User Manual 18 325 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide expirationdate Date on which all tapes in the tape volume set expire and before which it may not be overwritten specified in mm dd yylyy format comment Freeform user specified comment alphanumeric string of up to 40 characters Example To write the label ACCT with an expiration date of 09 20 2003 and comment of ACCOUNTING to each volume in the backup
64. Current configuration options and their current values may be displayed using the SHOW CONFIG command gt SHOW CONFIG Tape Manager amp Librarian configuration values Configuration File TMLCONF DATA ORBIT TMLDB DATA ORBIT TMLCycles CYCLE ORBIT TMLAutoScratch YES TMLSaveLogs YES TMLAutoLoad YES TMLPrintLabels NO TMLRestore NO VolumeLabel BACKUP TML configuration options Each TML configuration option is presented here with a description of its purpose the syntax used in specifying values for the option in the TMLCOMF file and the default setting provided by BACKUP TMLDB The TMLDB configuration option identifies the group and account in which the TML database TMLDB resides To change the location of the TML database to another group account designate the address at the TMLDB configuration option line in the TMLCOMF file any file equation for TMLDB is reset gt TMLDB group account If not specified the default TMLDB location is DATA ORBIT BACKUP iX User Manual 17 211 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide TMLCYCLES The TMLCYCLES configuration option identifies the group and account in which the cycle definition files reside If relocating cycle files to another group account it must be specified here file equations are disabled for cycle files gt TMLCYCLES group account If not specified the default cycle file location is CYCLE OR
65. DBEND or DBXBEGIN DBXEND calls in applications that use them BACKUP will not suspend a user until a corresponding DBEND or DBXEND call has been encountered for each DBBEGIN or DBXBEGIN The BACKUPDBQUIESCE JCW can be set to enable or disable DBQUIESCE calls Available settings include the normal method which is the traditional ZDT method wait state the DBQUIESCE method or the default which is both normal and DBQUIESCE This JCW should only be used when advised by Technical Support The values for BACKUPDBQUIESCE are unbound 0 1 2 or greater than 3 unbound This is the default case Use ZDT code wait state and DBQuiesce 0 This is the default case Use ZDT code wait state and DBQuiesce 1 Do not use ZDT code wait state Use only DBQuiesce 2 Use only the traditional ZDT Do not use DBQuiesce Eddie This value may be useful when attempting to store databases that have been opened exclusively 3 This is the default case Use ZDT code wait state and DBQuiesce Logical transactions via wait state BACKUP s Zero downtime backup functionality is also able to define logical transactions by waiting until a user is idle in a wait state before suspending that user Generally the wait state is a terminal read but could also be one of several other recognized wait states e g programmatic pause wait on a message file or other interprocess communication or parent wait on a child process o
66. DISKDIR option of LISTDIR 06 18 253 DISKDIR option of RESTORE 18 282 DISKDIR option of STORE esse ese 18 321 ON fESlOl6 ini wie ial ais 11 131 spanning tape volumes 24 402 24 405 TAPEDIR option of STORE ees 18 342 Store Status report 17 186 17 187 24 404 STOREJCW JOW aaiae 17 186 22 393 26 422 displaying for a generation ee 17 186 STOREJCWDISCRETE JOW 22 394 Storing dte EE OE EE N 26 423 CXAMPIC set ceded adored Mae hi 6 77 OptimiZatON ese ee ee ee ee ee ae 16 175 resource requirements ie se ee ee ee 17 204 step by step guide disk backup EE radeon 6 76 tape bacCKUD iese ee ee ee AA ee ee ee 6 75 tape shortage ee ee ee ee ee Re ee ee 17 214 updating file register ee ee ee ee ee 17 206 using multiple backup deviceS iese 13 144 wrong tape mounted 17 214 SUSPEND event Used with ON option 2 32 2 34 7 89 18 331 Symbolic links sesse ee ee ee 4 46 6 61 11 123 selecting for restore iese 18 300 18 338 SYMLEINK EE GE Ee Ren Rg Ee deities 435 Synchronization automatic for online backup see ee ese 7 84 Synchronization point delaying EE EE EE Ee Ee ee Ed ed tee 7 88 Synchronization DONE ee ee ee ee ee ee 435 SYNCPOINT event Used with ON option 2 32 2 34 7 89 18 332 SYNCUTIL Program ee se ee ee ee ee 21 378 SYNCWAIT event BACKUP iX Used with ON option 2 32 2 34 7 89 18 33
67. DRIVES 2 S SEQUENCE 14 15 RESTORE command example with DRIVES option For example to restore from three backup devices configured as device class TAPE on ldevs 7 8 and 9 with the store directory volume mounted on Idev 9 and BACKUP automatically replying to console requests FILE T DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt RESTORE T DRIVES 3 SEOUENCE 7 8 9 9 AUTOREPLY 7 8 9 Using the SEQUENCE option The SEQUENCE option of the STORE and RESTORE commands controls the order in which backup devices are opened The order of backup device selection is determined in the following ways using various combinations of the DRIVES SEQUENCE and AUTOREPLY options e f specified the SEQUENCE option determines the order in which backup devices are opened The number of backup devices Idevs specified with SEQUENCE must equal the drive count indicated by the DRIVES option e If the SEQUENCE option is not specified the AUTOREPLY option determines the order in which devices are opened as well as causing AUTOREPLYs to be issued for the specific drives When the DRIVES option is used with AUTOREPLY the number of Idevs indicated by the DRIVES option must equal the number specified by AUTOREPLY e Ifthe SEQUENCE option is specified with the AUTOREPLY option the AUTOREPLY option indicates which devices are to receive AUTOREPLYS and the DRIVES option may have a value greater than the number of devices specified for AUTOREPLY e
68. Date the file was last accessed in mm dd yy format MODIFIED Date the file was last modified in mm dd yy format STATE CH Date of the last file label state change in mm dd yy format SECURITY format In addition to the information displayed in the default format of the SHOW listing SHORT or LONG the SECURITY format of SHOW displays the owner of and access rights to each file OWNER SECURITY XXXX XXXXXXXX R XXX A XXX W XXX L XXX X XXX OWNER User name of the file owner SECURITY File security access matrix showing classes of users allowed read R append A write W lock L and execute X access For an online backup The SHOW listing for an online backup flags files that have been created modified and or renamed between the start of the store and its completion with a C M and or R following the physical disk address Files which have been purged during the backup are not shown on the listing Files which have been renamed during the backup are listed under their new names Files that were still open for write access when synchronization was performed are indicated on the SHOW listing with the message NOT STORED BECAUSE OPEN FOR WRITING Disqualified Files listing Preceding the SHOW listing for an online backup files which disqualified during the store are displayed with a message describing why they disqualified Files are generally disqualified during an
69. GEN 0 Pathname Stored Cycle Gen Volid Last modified APTESTA G1 FULLLIST 03 23 99 3 04 FULL 193 RND125 01 05 99 Configuration BACKUP s Tape Manager amp Librarian TML has several different configuration options that govern its operation In this section information is provided about setting default cycle and tape attributes the TML configuration file the location of the TMLDB database and cycle files automatically scratching expired generations saving file information logs following store and automatically loading them into the file register automatically printing tape identification labels upon completion of store enabling or disabling Restore Wizard specifying tape volume label format setting the language for tape identification labels and customizing the tape identification label format The SHOW CONFIG command the TMLAUTOLOAD TMLAUTOSCRATCH TMLCYCLES TMLDB TMLPRINTLABELS TMLSAVELOGS and VOLUMELABEL configuration options the TMLLANGID JCW and the TMLCONF configuration file are provided for making configuration choices Default cycle and tape attributes Default cycle attributes are established and displayed by the DEFAULT CYCLE command and default tape attributes are established and displayed using the DEFAULT TAPE command Refer to the Cycles section and the Tapes and pools section in this chapter for instructions TML configuration file TML global configuration parameters are stored in a configuration fi
70. If the tape is not to be overwritten it is rejected by BACKUP and another tape is requested An unlabeled tape a tape having the correct volsetid or an unexpired tape depending on the problem must be mounted or BACKUP will continue to request an appropriate tape If such a tape is not available the store must be aborted Ignoring existing proprietary tape labels on store By specifying the NOLABEL option of the STORE command proprietary tape label verification can be disabled Any existing proprietary tape labels will then be ignored Note that ANSI labeled tapes are always validated BACKUP iX User Manual 12 135 Chapter 12 Labeled Tapes BACKUP iX Operations Guide Specifying NOLABEL can also speed up the store since BACKUP tape label checking is bypassed This is especially true when using tapes that have previously been stored to using the DIRECTORY option since the directory portion of the tape would have to be skipped in order to read the label and could take several minutes For example to ignore BACKUP tape labels on all tape volumes for the store gt STORE T NOLABEL Note The NOLABEL option should be used with caution NOLABEL sacrifices some security since the overwriting of an unexpired tape could occur Also if a tape was remounted after being written NOLABEL could permit the tape to be mistaken for a new tape Restoring from proprietary labeled tapes By default no proprietary tape labe
71. LIBRARY opus dltchg olm gt List Slot 0 9 olm gt default library Gandalf lib slot 1 drive 0 olm gt Load Displaying library information Both the LIST and CONNECT commands display library information With CONNECT The CONNECT command displays a list of the available libraries managed by OLM on a particular host This example shows that the host system Opus has one valid library with the name libchg and has a corresponding device file The line with VERSIO shows the version of the olm database being used This is only needed for tech support questions olm gt connect Valid libraries on host opus DEVICE NAME libchg dev libchg SVERSIO OLM Data Base Version 1 With LIST BACKUP iX User Manual 14 157 Chapter 14 ORBIT Library Manager The LIST command shows information about the library arms s drive s slot s and port s and their contents Default port drive and slot are also listed if the defaults have been set This example displays information about the library named libchg olm gt list library libchg default slot s2 Arms Num Volume ID Num Volume ID Name 0 empty OPUS 102 1 empty OPUS 101 Ports Num Volume ID 000003 000002 000008 000288 000024 000012 000007 000291 000027 000292 000025 000295 000286 000028 000029 000030 LW U LW U LU LOU NN UW Created 12 31 69 19 00 00 12 31 69 19 00 00 Lock Host PID 12 31 69 Created 10 18 02 10 18 02 10
72. MAXERRORS Maximum number of irrecoverable errors allowed on any tape When this occurs the tape is removed from the volume set The dump continues by asking for another tape which replaces the bad tape in the volume set If MAXERRORS is not specified DUMP will reject a tape due to one error Syntax BACKUP iX User Manual 18 240 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt DUMP MAXERRORS numerrors numerrors Indicates the count of allowable errors on any tape specified as an integer value Example To terminate a tape if it contains more than 5 errors gt DUMP TEMP T MAXERRORS 5 Option MAXRETRIES Maximum number of retries recoverable errors allowed on any tape When this occurs the tape is removed from the volume set The dump continues by asking for another tape which replaces the bad tape in the volume set If not specified no limit is imposed on the number of errors that may occur on any tape Syntax gt DUMP MAXRETRIES numretries numretries Indicates the count of allowable retries on any tape specified as an integer value Example To terminate a tape if it has had more than 20 retries gt DUMP TEMP T MAXRETRIES 20 Option NOLABEL Disables checking of BACKUP tape labels Specifying NOLABEL can speed up the dump since BACKUP tape label checking is not done This is especially true when the DIRECTORY option has been used since both th
73. Notes e SMor OP capability is required to use the DIRECTORY option e Ifthe writing of the directories fails the store is aborted e Ifthe DIRECTORY option is specified along with ONVS only the directories specified with ONVS are matched when building the full directory structures for those volume sets e The DIRECTORY option is not supported for ANSI labeled tapes and if specified together with the Label and Volid options a warning message is displayed e The DIRECTORY option of RESTORE is disabled Contact Technical Support if you need to restore the system directory Option DISKDEV Specifies disk device for the internal filebuffer which is used for a deferred backup or disk backup fileset Syntax gt STORE DISKDEV device device Either an ldev number or device class name Examples To build the filebuffer on device class SYSDISC gt STORE T FILEBUFF 10000 DISKDEV SYSDISC To build a disk backup on device class TEMPDISK gt STORE DEV PROGS TEMP DISKDEV TEMPDISK Option DISKDIR Specifies that the store directory should be kept on disk as well as tape Using DISKDIR in a store speeds up restore since the store directory does not need to be read from tape however care must be taken to ensure that the correct disk directory is used for restore The store directory is built in the current group account or account group directory under the filename BACKUPDF or in a specified name an
74. ORBIT BACKUP iX V6 79 User Manual BACKUP iX User Manual www orbitsw com ORBiT SOFTWARE Group Inc infous orbitsw com PO Box 2116 Fremont California 94536 Support orbitsw com United States of America 1 510 686 7913 Ext 1 ORBiT SOFTWARE UK Ltd SalesUK orbitsw com Suite B1 South House 21 37 South Street SupportUK orbitsw com Dorking Surrey RH4 2JZ England 44 1306 741 741 fax 44 1306 742 742 Table of Contents ListOFf Orbit Offices me SEE NE RE SE Mara N GR ele ain eevee Vv About This Manual ccccccccecccececececececeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeesess Xvi Installation ProCeCures cccccccccecccceeeceeececeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 1 18 Installing BACKUP P ies ee ines de eee De eed Ge a ele ee Ese 1 18 Step by step installation ee ee ee RR AA AE ER ER RA Re Ge ee ee ee ee Re ee ee 1 19 Operations Guide 1 20 BACKUP iX User Manual 1 Introduction ee ee ee ee ee e ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 1 21 In this Chapter EES N N Ee yal Ee cde GE EE de Ge Oe Pe 1 21 The need for backups iii se se ee Ee ER ER RA Ee ee ee ee Ge AA ee ee ee ea ee 1 21 eel ER N EA TOE EER ETE 1 21 Summary of benefits ee ee ee ek ke ee ee Re ee Ge Re ee ee ee ke ee ee ke ee ee 1 22 2 Program Operati sienien ES meen seta es De GE 2 24 Inihischapter EE ER RE EG T 2 24 Running BAGKUPE er ee Geek Ese ee ee Ee ee ER deca ee Ke E RAEE 2 24 Session versus batch mode ese ee ee ee ee ee Re
75. Option LABEL Validates volsetid specified against volsetid in BACKUP tape label prevents restore if they do not match By default the BACKUP tape label is checked on restore The LABEL option can be used to ensure that the correct tape is being used for restore Syntax gt RESTORE LABEL volid volid Specifies the user defined tape volumeset ID of the tape volume set has a maximum of 6 alphanumeric characters and is case sensitive Example To cause BACKUP to ensure that the tape being restored from has a label with a volsetid of ARCHIVE gt RESTORE T LABEL ARCHIVE Notes e Ifthe LABEL option is used to restore from ANSI labeled tapes the VOLID option must also be specified e TML internally invokes the LABEL option for tape volume labeling If restoring from a TML cycle backup it is recommended that the LABEL option not be used otherwise files that span tape volumes will not be restored e Ifthe LABEL option is omitted or the NOLABEL option is specified the tape label will be reported but no tape validation will be done Option LAST For a restore with Restore Wizard that qualifies multiple versions of the same file and specifies that the most recently stored version of the file or an offset thereto should be restored Syntax BACKUP iX User Manual 18 290 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt RESTORE LAST offset offset Specifies the v
76. READALL T AUTOREPLY 13 OLM pogo mylib volid 000010 If READALL is used to verify a store to multiple tapes you can use the DRIVES parameter gt READALL T DRIVES 2 SEQUENCE 17 19 OLM pogo mylib amp gt LABEL myback VOLID RND101 RND102 Exception Handling This section describes how Backup iX and the OLM program will act when various exceptions are encountered Note that all console messages and requests the latter require a reply will be on the system console where Backup iX is running NOT on the system console where the library s robotics is connected and OLM is running Messages but not requests will also be written to STDLIST When a command is aborted or if an exception occurs in a job BACKUP IX will also abort In the exception handling examples that follow tape volumes the library library host and library elements are identified as Volume ID Vol1 and Vol2 Library Name DLTLIB Library Host Name RINGO LDev Number 14 Slot Numbers 44 and 55 Exception summary The recognized exceptions covered here include BACKUP iX User Manual 14 163 Chapter 14 ORBiT Library Manager OLM Operations Guide e Needed volume not found in library by OLM e None of needed volumes found in library by OLM e An unneeded volume in the required drive e Needed volume is in the library but not in a slot e Tape write protected e Already a volume in needed slot e Drive is not part of the librar
77. RESTORE T SOURCE MFG KEEPNEW or reference an indirect file BACKUP iX User Manual 11 130 Chapter 11 Restoring Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt RESTORE T OLDPROG SOURCE MFG 4 Specify any RESTORE options required e g SHOW PROGRESS AUTOREPLY etc See Chapter 18 BACKUP iX Commands in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for details on commonly used options for a restore from tape 5 It is recommended that each tape be write protected to prevent accidental overwriting e g for a reel to reel tape remove the write ring 6 If the store directory was saved on disk when storing and the DISKDIR option is specified on the RESTORE command BACKUP displays the required tape volumes and then calls for each tape as it is needed If DISKDIR is not specified the store directory is read from tape If multiple backup devices are being used for restore the DRIVES option may be used to specify which backup device contains the store directory volume Otherwise if a single backup device is being used for restore BACKUP requests that the tape volume containing the store directory be mounted first by issuing a message on both the system console and if run from a session the terminal BACKUP then reads the directory from tape displays the required tape volumes and subsequently calls for each tape as needed by issuing console messages For an online backup the firs
78. Restore Strategies BACKUP provides extensive flexibility for restoring files If a Delta backup was used to store files then please refer to Chapter 8 DELTA Backup Module in the BACKUP X Operations Guide for procedures cautions and examples to restore your backup In this chapter Find information on these topics e Changing attributes of restored files e Creating nonexistent users groups accounts and directories e Restoring files to a specified destination on disk e Preserving or changing file date attributes e Restoring IMAGE databases e Restoring symbolic links e Restoring FIFOs and streams e Restoring spool files e Defragmenting during restore e Performing a system INSTALL e Restoring from a password protected or encrypted backup e Restoring between MPE versions e Restoring onto any HPe3000 The following command and options are discussed as the above topics are covered e The RESTORE command e The ACCOUNT BACKUP CREATE DBRESTORE DEFRAG DEV ENCRYPT GROUP LOCAL OLDDATE NEWDATE OWNER VOL VOLCLASS and VOLSET options of the RESTORE command Changing attributes of restored files When restoring files BACKUP by default retains the original file attributes such as flimit extent assignments location owner creation date last access and modification dates With BACKUP s restore function provision has been made for changing file attributes The file attributes that may be changed in
79. SEQUENCE option with DRIVES must be used with the OLM option to coordinate the mounting of the media on the correct logical device The LABEL and VOLID options are both required to identify each volume to the OLM database and to provide identifying internal labels for each volume unless TML is used If TML is involved the volume labels will be automatically determined and passed to OLM When the DirLDev drive is indicated with the SEQUENCE option each volume ID provided with VOLID will be searched for the directory as if the operator were manually loading the volumes If the directory is not found in any of the listed volumes the operator will be prompted to import more volumes If no DirLDev drive is specified in an OLM restore to identify the directory volume at least one volume ID must be supplied with the VOLID option for each drive in the library If the DirLDev drive is incorrectly indicated with the SEQUENCE option the restore operation itself will obtain volume IDs to search for the directory one per drive If fewer drives are needed than the ones provided BACKUP will release the unneeded drives With TML the Restore Wizard will identify the directory volume load that volume on the first drive listed with SEQUENCE or AUTOREPLY and identify that drive as the DirLDev BACKUP iX User Manual 18 294 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide In searching for the directory volumes will be picked for a reel c
80. T SHOW OFFLINE Option VOL Restores files to a specified volume Syntax gt RESTORE VOL volumename volumename Specifies the name of the volume Example To restore files to the volume named VOL_C within the PRIVATE_VOL_A volume set gt RESTORE T VOLSET PRIVATE VOL A VOL VOL C Notes e VOL may not be specified without VOLSET otherwise the command is rejected e If VOL and VOLSET are specified but the specified volume does not reside within the specified volume set the command is rejected e If VOL and VOLCLASS are specified but the specified volume does not reside within the specified volume class the command is rejected 3 e If there is insufficient room in the volume class to which the specified volume belongs the files that do not fit are restored to the volume class DISC within the volumeset to which the volume belongs If there is insufficient room on the specified volume and volume class DISC to restore all the files or if the volume class DISC does not exist in the specified volume set the remaining files are not restored and are listed in the Files Not Restored report Impact The VOL option has some effect on existing Options BACKUP iX User Manual 18 302 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide e If the CREATE option is specified to create nonexistent account s and or group s on restore the newly created account s and or group s will
81. TML Wizard is not being used VOLID and LABEL options must be specified VOLID and LABEL do not specify ANSI labels during OLM operations unless the ANSI option is specified Option ON VOLUME DO With Input source tape BACKUP iX User Manual 18 231 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide This option allows a MPE iX command to be executed on a mount request for a new tape volume of the source tape Syntax gt COPY T1 ON VOLUME DO mpe command TO With Output target tape This option allows a MPE iX command to be executed on a mount request for a new tape volume of the target tape Syntax gt COPY TO T2 ON VOLUME DO mpe command Parameters Mpe command Any MPE iX command Example To display the message changing output tape volumes on the console when a request for a new target tape volume is issued by COPY gt COPY T1 TO T2 ON VOLUME DO tellop changing output tape volumes Option SEQUENCE Specifies the order in which the multiple backup devices are opened Syntax with Input Source tape gt COPY T1 SEOUENCE ldevlist TO Syntax with Output target tape gt COPY TO T2 SEQUENCE ldevlist Idev Logical device number of tape drive Idevlist The logical device number s of the backup device s for which BACKUP should automatically reply specified in one of the following format
82. TML SHOW CYCLE command used with each of its options reports TML cycle information on cycle generation creation parameters CREATION store directory DIRECTORY files stored FILES modification dates of files MODIFIED information on attributes of a specified cycle or all cycles PARMS cycle generation statistics STATS tape volumes used TAPES and types of files stored TYPE CREATION option Displays creation parameters of cycle generations listed alphabetically by cycle name Cycle Gen Created Session User Account JCW Expires Vol Vsetid XXXXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX mm dd yy XXXXXX Cycle Cycle name Gen Absolute number of generation within cycle Created Date and time store of generation was completed in mm dd yy date format and 24 hour time format Session Logon ID session user and account name of user who invoked the store JCW Value of STOREJCW on completion of store Expires Date backup expires based on retention period defined for cycle Vol Number of volumes on which backup is contained Vsetid Volid of master first tape in backup volumeset DIRECTORY option Displays information about the store directory for a cycle generation which may optionally be saved in a file on disk as well as being written to tape Cycle Gen Created Volid Vsetid Seq Cop Sep Store directory filename Exist XXXXXXXX mm dd yy XXXXXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXX
83. The current directory MPE iX namespace Examples of some MPE namespace filesets are All files in the store volumeset All files that originated from the current group account TELESUP All files from the TELESUP account KiHHHHHE PUB SYS All files from PUB SYS beginning with the letter K followed by any 7 numbers CYA All files from the system with the string CYA somewhere in the filename POST SOURCE PAYROLL The file POST in the SOURCE group of the PAYROLL account 2 K AP All files in the AP account with K as the third letter POSIX namespace Examples of some POSIX namespace filesets are BACKUP iX User Manual 11 121 Chapter 11 Restoring Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide All files on the system J All files in the current directory and all directories beneath it All files in the current directory but not below SYS PUB LOG H All log files in PUB SYS ORBIT DATA TMLDB The TMLDB database in DATA ORBIT Some notes for POSIX file selection are e A trailing means all the files that reside in the current directory and below e A trailing means all the files in the current directory but not below e Filenames may contain the characters A Z a z 0 9 A and e Pathnames that exceed 1024 characters are rejected as are directory names that exceed 256 characters e An object directly below the root account and group directories whose name exceed
84. The point when user interruption begins ON SUSPEND The synchronization point ON SYNCPOINT 2 32 Chapter 2 Program Operation BACKUP iX Operations Guide On storing a file BACKUP can perform an action once a specified file has been stored when the filename has been indicated in the ON FILE option of the STORE command The filename entry may include wildcards in which case the condition is satisfied when the first matching file is stored The filename may also be qualified with group account For example the following entry streams the job PAYDAY when the tape volume containing any file beginning with the string POST has been completed gt STORE T amp gt ON FILE POST DATA AP DO STREAM PAYDAY On encountering an error BACKUP can be instructed to perform an action upon encountering an error during the store by using the ON ERROR option of the STORE command For example this entry causes a message to be sent to the console if an error is encountered gt STORE T amp gt ON ERROR DO TELLOP BACKUP error occurred Note For an online backup execution of ON FILE is deferred until after the synchronization point to ensure that any logging data for the specified file is written to the backup In another example the following entry causes BACKUP to be aborted if any error is encountered gt STORE T amp gt ON ERROR QUIT On requiring a new tap
85. User Manual 9 102 Chapter 9 Restore Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt RESTORE T OWNER OPERATOR ACCOUNT SYS GROUP SYSOPER Note Some special rules and restrictions are imposed for the ACCOUNT GROUP and OWNER options when restoring spool files which have the equivalent effect on the LOCAL option Refer to the discussion of Restoring spool files later in this chapter Creating nonexistent users groups accounts and directories As described above in the discussions of the GROUP ACCOUNT and OWNER options the CREATE option of the RESTORE command can be used to create non existent users groups and or accounts Accounts groups paths and users are created with default capability and access restrictions and no passwords A message is displayed for each account group directory and user which has been successfully created SM System Manager capability is required to create nonexistent accounts and allows creation of groups and users anywhere on the system AM Account Manager capability is required to create groups and users in the logon user s home account CD Create Directory access is required for creating new POSIX directories It is possible to selectively specify which should be created accounts groups directories and users or just accounts or groups or directories or users in any combination For example to create only nonexistent users enter gt RESTORE T TEST CREATE OWNER
86. a file should only be restored from tape 1 if no target disk file exists or 2 if the file on the disk is newer than the file of the same name in the backup based on its modification date and time This option is especially useful for undoing the changes in a file since the last backup Restores files even if an error occurred at store time or during restore Restores files open for write during an online store Files restored with KEEPBAD may be corrupted and should be checked thoroughly The KEEP option may be used to restore only those files that do not already exist on the system gt RESTORE T KEEP Or the KEEPNEW option may be used to restore only files that have been modified more recently than their counterparts on disk gt RESTORE T KEEPNEW Or the KEEPOLD option may be used to restore files to an older version present on the backup gt RESTORE T KEEPOLD Step by step tape restore guide The following is a step by step guide for performing a restore from a tape backup 1 Remove the required tape volume s from the tape rack If using TML the SHOW CYCLE TAPES command or the SHOW FILE command may be used to determine which tapes contain the desired files 2 Seta file equation for the restore device FILE T DEV TAPE 3 Run BACKUP and issue a RESTORE command specifying the restore fileset list in the command line RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt
87. a volume as correct based upon a number of criteria The command parameters used among other things will determine this A matching BACKUP iX or ANSI volume ID is sometimes necessary but frequently not sufficient So OLM may mount a volume identified to it as 12345 but BACKUP ix still may not accept it because of other criteria In addition OLM does not check the machine readable data on its volumes to enforce the correctness of the volume ID So a user can easily give OLM incorrect information and OLM cannot detect this For example if BACKUP iX User Manual 14 166 Chapter 14 ORBiT Library Manager OLM Operations Guide BACKUP iX volume 12345 is put into a library and this volume is identified to OLM as volume ABCDE then if BACKUP iX requests volume ABCDE OLM will select the volume it knows as ABCDE which is the volume 12345 to BACKUP iX BACKUP IX will detect this error and write the incorrect volume mounted message This situation is somewhat like having a mislabeled tape when the external label and the machine readable labels are not the same No empty slot available When BACKUP iX needs an empty storage slot and none are available the following will be printed No empty storage slots available in library RINGO DLTLIB If the library has no mail port the operation will be aborted but if a mail port is present the operator will be requested To Continue export an unneeded volume Otherwise Abort
88. additional recoverability To skip this parameter thereby placing the store directory or directories at the end of the current tape volume specify a comma for this parameter numcopies Specifies the number of copies of the store directory that should be written as an integer with a minimum value of 1 Examples To write the default two copies of the store directory at the end of the last tape gt STORE T To write one copy of the store directory onto a separate tape volume gt STORE T TAPEDIR SEP 1 To write three copies of the store directory at the end of the last tape gt STORE T TAPEDIR 3 Option VOLID With the LABEL option specifies ANSI format tape labels and the volids for up to eight backup volumes The VOLID option may only be used when it is combined with the LABEL option which specifies the volsetid optional expiration date and an optional comment In the event that the volid list is not provided or becomes exhausted more volids will be requested from the console operator If used with OLM the ANSI NOANSI parms of the OLM option determine whether an ANSI label is created Syntax gt STORE LABEL VOLID volidlist volidlist Specifies a comma delimited list of up to 8 volume IDs to be used for the first 8 tapes in the target tapeset Each volid may be a maximum of 6 alphanumeric characters for each volid BACKUP iX User Manual 18 343 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands B
89. after the last full backup Many installations additionally define selective or custom backup cycles for special purposes A defined cycle designates not only the files contained in the backup but also how the backup is handled Such details for example as how often the cycle is backed up and how long the backup tapes should be protected from overwriting before reuse are indicated in the cycle definition 4 39 Chapter 4 Backup Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide Tape Manager amp Librarian BACKUP s Tape Manager amp Librarian TML module the Wizard module formalizes each cycle by describing in a special indirect file called the cycle file the files to store and how the backups should be handled The cycle file is referenced on the STORE command Refer to the Cycles section of Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian for details on this topic Full backup A full backup typically includes all files regardless of when they were last modified and is performed once a week The full backup is commonly scheduled following the close of production in the evening or on the weekend typically on Friday night A full backup may be performed by specifying all files on the STORE command with the wildcards This use of the STORE command permits a fileset that excludes certain indicated files while including all other files If using TML the FULL cycle is referenced on the STORE command All inclusive full backups
90. all tapes disk space restored Amount of disk space occupied by files that were restored shown in sectors and megabytes tape errors Accumulated number of errors on all tapes tape retries Accumulated number of retries on all tapes hours minutes secs Duration of restore in wall time from the beginning of the restore until tn BACKUP s gt prompt is redisplayed Restore Tape Status As each tape volume is completed for restore a status report is displayed kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk BACKUP iX tape statistics for RESTORE volume 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk total number of tape errors backup ldev number is total number of tape retries number of data blocks read sectors Mbytes kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk tape errors Number of tape errors that occurred when reading the tape ldev number Logical device number of backup device on which restore was performed tape retries Number of tape retries that occurred when reading from tape data blocks Number of datablocks read from this tape and amount of data it comprises in sectors and megabytes if compression was used amounts are for compressed data BACKUP iX User Manual 24 400 Chapter 24 Reports BACKUP iX Reference Guide Occasionally a tape will contain only the
91. and account is preserved on restore The creator need not be a user of the target account the account to be restored into for the file to be restored The creator attribute for restored files may be changed through the CREATOR option of the RESTORE command The function of this command is limited to two choices either the username or the account name of the creator can be modified The change applies to all files in the restore set In the example below all stored files from PUB PAYROLL will be restored to the HISTORY account and the creator s account for these files will be changed to HISTORY gt RESTORE T PUB PAYROLL ACCOUNT HISTORY CREATOR HISTORY Similarly to change the user name of the creator to MGR gt RESTORE T PUB PAYROLL CREATOR MGR Notes Using CREATOR is equivalent to the default of NOT using the CREATOR option in the restore No other wildcards i e are allowed Partial wildcarding i e S S is not permitted Specifying logon group account and owner The LOCAL option of the RESTORE command restores files into the current group account and sets the owner to the logon user name For example the following operation HELLO OPERATOR SYS SYSOPER RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt RESTORE T UTIL TOOLS LOCAL would restore files into SYSOPER SYS and set the owner of all files to OPERATOR SYS The above command is equivalent to the command BACKUP iX
92. and help predict when it will complete BACKUP displays the percentage of store completion at specified time intervals If BACKUP is run from a session progress messages are displayed on the terminal if run in batch progress messages are listed on the system console By default progress messages are displayed every 5 minutes The time interval can be changed by use of the PROGRESS option of the STORE command For example to display progress messages every minute gt STORE T PROGRESS 1 Progress messages may be suppressed by specifying an interval of 0 Reporting on files stored At the end of a store BACKUP generates several reports including the total number of files stored and not stored and a listing of all the files stored and their attributes called the SHOW listing SHOW listing store reporting The SHOW listing can be output in a variety of formats specified by the SHOW option of the STORE command The SHOW formats available are SHORT Lists the fully qualified filename percent of each file stored in a delta store file size in sectors and mnemonic file code This is the default output format in a session LONG In addition to the SHORT information lists record size file type eof file limit blocking factor extents allocated and maximum extents This is the default output format in a job BACKUP iX User Manual 6 72 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide DATES In addition
93. are also included in the Store Status report Statistics about each backup are displayed including the number of files stored the number of sectors on disk they occupied the filebuffer size for a deferred backup the compression percentage achieved the duration of the backup and the number of volumes in the store volumeset For online backups the number of sectors of logging data and the number of dynamic files that changed status during the backup created purged renamed etc are also shown This command requests statistics of all generations of all backup cycles BACKUP iX User Manual 17 186 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt SHOW CYCLE STATS Created Files Sectors Buf size Time Vol Log sec Dyn files 09 01 99 8485 1369522 146560 1 57 7 40372 120 09 07 99 8520 1429003 148362 03 1003 107 52933 316 10353 212 2 09 14 99 8535 1652352 157035 2 13 2 7 8 09 21 99 8603 2023335 189035 2 37 8 09 24 99 827 23535 0 238 2 337 12 09 25 99 860 30866 241 2 0 36 09 26 99 930 40337 253 3 604 553 09 27 99 1027 53253 01 3 702 87 PAYROLL 09 26 99 3 18327 2 04 1 SALESDB 09 26 99 13 168022 2 03 1 1 09 27 99 13 168022 2 03 Note in this example that the FULL and PART backups were performed online and that their statistics varied from generation to generation For example the number of files and disk sectors increased from one generation to the next Files by type The TYPE mode of SH
94. are available in BACKUP Each method can be used alone or in combination with another method to perform an unattended backup These methods include e Data compression to reduce the amount of data to tape and therefore fit the backup on a single volume e g DDS Refer to Chapter 16 Maximizing Performance in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide for information e Using multiple tape drives to increase the directly available storage capacity for backup Refer to Chapter 13 Backup Devices in the BACKUP X Operations Guide for information 5 49 Chapter 5 Backup Methods BACKUP iX Operations Guide e Using a disk buffer for intermediate storage of data that does not fit on the tape volume s available The additional tapes required to complete the backup to tape are mounted when an operator is present discussed in this chapter e Storing the backup in permanent files on disk which can be dumped to tape at any time in regular store format discussed in this chapter Tape backups versus disk backups Backups may be performed to tape or disk Backing up to disk is faster and more convenient than backing up to tape Of course sufficient disk space is required to accommodate the stored files Because BACKUP compresses data before storing and achieves an average compression ratio of 50 percent only half of the space occupied by files is typically required to maintain a disk backup Tape backups Backups are usually to tape Tape backu
95. are under the control of the ORBiT Library Manager OLM and that BACKUP iX must communicate with OLMRPCD to move volumes If the command also specifies one or more tape volumes explicitly by volume ID and label or implicitly via TML BACKUP iX will ask OLM to load that specific tape into the appropriate drive If it does not contain a volume id then the operator will be prompted to provide them as needed The main syntax for use of the OLM parameter with BACKUP iX tape handling commands is gt backupcommand OLM hostname library ANSI NOANST The examples below illustrate a few situations the user may encounter in using the OLM parameter to support the use of a tape library while performing backup tasks with BACKUP iX The default is NOANSI Use other parameters of BACKUP iX with OLM The use of an OLM parameter with a BACKUP iX command will require the additional use of either the AUTOREPLY or the SEQUENCE parameter to coordinate the mounting of the volume on the correct logical device For OLM operations the AUTOREPLY and SEQUENCE parameters including the DirL Dev parm can be used with the VOLID parameter This is unlike non OLM operations with BACKUP iX when the AUTOREPLY and SEQUENCE parameters cannot be used with the VOLID parameter In RESTORE or LISTDIR if a DirLDev is specified with SEQUENCE and more than one volume ID is listed in the VOLID parameter the volumes listed are candidates for havi
96. as opposed to unlabeled tapes BACKUP also supports ANSI labels but with BACKUP labels are written only once per volume This results in more efficient backups and retains the security features of ANSI labels BACKUP proprietary labels also offer an efficient secure and convenient alternative to MPE iX labeled ANSI standard tapes With BACKUP proprietary labeled tapes BACKUP iX User Manual 12 134 Chapter 12 Labeled Tapes BACKUP iX Operations Guide e To conserve time and tape when using its proprietary labels BACKUP does not write header and trailer records header and trailer records are ignored by MPE iX anyway e Asa convenience and for additional security a descriptive comment may be included on the label for each volume BACKUP will also store the comment when using ANSI labels with BACKUP e When tapes are written through BACKUP s Tape Manager amp Librarian TML the volsetid and volids are provided by TML For proprietary labels the TML tape number is the volsetid For ANSI labels the cycle name is used as the volsetid and the TML tape number is the volid Using BACKUP proprietary labeled tapes BACKUP labeled tapes are specified through the LABEL option of commands that read from and write to tape STORE RESTORE DUMP etc When a labeled tape is mounted the label contents are displayed on the system console and on STDLIST to identify the tape If an unlabeled tape is mounted a message indicating
97. assure that installation is not left in an incomplete state the break key is disabled during the operation of the installation program ORBINSTP Note The installation procedure uses the DBUTIL program to create the TMLDB database If a lockword has been placed on DBUTIL it must be removed before starting the installation The lockword must be reset when installation is complete The installation procedure for a new installation of BACKUP HIX is slightly different than for an existing installation Existing installations contain certain ORBiT supplied files that along with updates should be retained New installation All files are restored into the PUB group of the ORBIT account that is PUB ORBIT The CYCLE and DATA groups are created for the Tape Manager amp Librarian and files are renamed into these groups Password prompts are presented for both the ORBIT account and for the MGR ORBIT user Installation Guide BACKUP iX Operations Guide Existing installation All files are restored into PUB ORBIT If the ORBIT account already exists its capabilities and access rights are reset to their ORBiT defined default values following installation The existing ORBIT account password and MGR ORBIT user password are preserved Therefore no password prompt is displayed If the CYCLE and DATA groups do not exist they are created and the Tape Manager amp Librarian files are installed into these groups If the CYCLE and DATA groups do ex
98. backup devices serially BACKUP iX User Manual 18 322 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt STORE T DRIVES 3 S Notes e If using the DRIVES option in combination with the AUTOREPLY option the DRIVES option must be specified before AUTOREPLY e The DRIVES option with the S option only may be specified in combination with the APPEND option e In earlier releases of BACKUP the DRIVES option was called TAPES Option ENCRYPT Selects proprietary or DES encryption or keyword protection only and specifies the key The ENCRYPT option may be used to protect data on tapes from being read by unauthorized users and is especially appropriate for backups that are sent off site Syntax gt STORE ENCRYPT encryptionmethod key keyfile1 keyfile2 encryptionmethod Encryption algorithm specified as an integer value 0 no encryption password protection only 1 fast proprietary algorithm the default 2 DES Data Encryption Standard algorithm 3 AES Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm key or keyfiles The key used for encryption of up to 8 alphanumeric characters which can include special characters except quotes and spaces The key is case sensitive keys less than eight characters are padded with blanks If no key is specified 8 blanks are used The AES encryption key is handled differently in that the key is not specified inline but is merged from two external files This allows for
99. be appended so it is possible to create an archival backup by performing a monthly backup appending a backup of static files to it and then appending all source programs to it Users of TML Tape Manager amp Librarian module can use the appended backup feature to append the TMLDB database once a backup has completed thereby making sure that the latest version of the database is on tape with its corresponding backup The appended backup feature can also be used in combination with the Zero downtime backup module to take snapshots of critical databases and other files during the day So for example you can load a DDS in the morning back up the critical production database at noon append a backup at 17 00 then finally append the normal daily backup at midnight This can all be done automatically and unattended Terminology The following terminology is used for appended backups Appended backup The feature 5 54 Chapter 5 Backup Methods BACKUP iX Operations Guide Backup One of multiple backups that may be contained on an appended backup tape volumeset Backupset All of the backups on an appended backup tape volumeset Backupname An alphanumeric string of up to 8 characters which may be assigned to a backup by the user when an appended backup is created and which can be used by RESTORE to reference that backup Backupspec A string that may be specified in various formats for selecting a backup for restore in an appended backupset
100. by its configured driver The issues here are generally e Maximum supported block size See Block size above e Support of Save Set Marks SSMs See below Supported backup device types DDS drives HP manufactured DDS drives are fully supported and automatically configured A special feature of DDS called Save Set Marks SSMs is used to speed up both FastSearch quick positioning within the backup and appended backup Most third party DDS drives are configured as HP manufactured DDS drives but many do not support SSMs Also some non HP drives do not support a block size greater than 16 Kb HP s DDS drives support 32 Kb blocks For backup devices which are configured as DDS drives but which do not support SSMs use the following SETVAR BACKUPNOSSM 1 When using third party DDS drives that don t support SSMs this JCW setting should be included in the user defined command UDC command file or job used for invoking BACKUP ix BACKUP iX User Manual 13 141 Chapter 13 Backup Devices BACKUP iX Operations Guide When using DDS drives BACKUP will determine the maximum block size at the beginning of a store To reduce program startup time use the BACKUPBUFSIZE JCW to set the maximum block size for your backup device 8mm drives Most 8mm drives are configured as DDS A special feature of DDS called Save Set Marks SSMs is used to speed up both FastSearch quick positioning within the backup and
101. command esse sesse see 19 354 DELETE TAPE command sesse ee esse ee 19 355 SEA RR N N EE 17 193 Delta Backupcyel EE EE Ee Ge EE RE GE EN a 8 95 GautonS es Ee ee bend Re ee EE tat oe ke ee 8 08 Restore directory 8 94 8 97 Store directory ee ee ee ee ee ee 8 94 8 95 Delta backup BASELINE ODHON ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 18 319 BASELINE ODHON ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 18 316 DELTA OPIO Ma SE ES Ned sn De ees ed Ee es 18 319 Delta backup cycle ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 429 Delta backup or Delta store iese ees se e 429 Delta cycle names ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 429 Delta module si ER EE De EG Di eg 8 93 429 Baseline backUD ii se ee Re Ee ee AA ee 8 93 Delta backup EERS EER se ER cit Rek Ka SER Sr 8 93 Delta MOnitor ees se ee ee ee ee ee Ee ee ee RR Ee 8 95 429 Delta restore directory ee ee ee ee ke ee ee ee 430 Delta store directory ee ee se ee ee 8 96 430 DENSIY RE RE facia EE DE Re eg 6 67 Dependent processing se ee ee ee ee 2 32 DES encryptiON sees ee ee 4 47 18 323 430 Device JINKS ce ee ee EE ee Ee Ee 6 61 11 123 selecting for restore 18 300 18 338 DEVLINK ER SE Ee ee ee ee Re ee Ee ee sd 430 DI Capability R AR ee ee 21 376 Differential bacKUD iese ee ee ee RR Re Ee ee ee RE n 430 Disk backup ees ee ee ee ee ee ee ER ee Re ee 5 50 430 AUTOREPLY option of RESTORE 18 275 LABEL option of STORE ees esse ee
102. command options e CYCLE GEN BDATE and MDATE are all optional and can be specified in any combination However GEN takes precedence over BDATE and MDATE i e BDATE and MDATE are filters applied to the selected generations If GEN is not used all generations are selected and BDATE and MDATE apply to all generations e To select the earliest or latest version or a version in between from multiple versions of files qualifying for restore use the FIRST or LAST options LAST is automatically imposed if neither option is used e To search all backups all generations of all cycles use neither the CYCLE nor the GEN option e To search all generations of a particular cycle specify the cycle name with the CYCLE option and do not use the GEN option e To search the same generation of all cycles specify CYCLE and the absolute or relative generation number e g GEN 0 for the last generation of all cycles e To search multiple generations of different cycles specify multiple CYCLE GEN options pairs e f selection criteria fails to find any qualifying files for example LAST 3 when only two copies of the file exist the desired file s will not be restored since they do not exist and no message will be issued e If a nonexistent generation is specified it will be ignored and no error message will be issued Restore Wizard examples To restore the latest version of the files in SOURCE AP from all backups
103. creator to MGR gt RESTORE T PUB PAYROLL CREATOR MGR Notes e Using CREATOR is equivalent to the default of NOT using the CREATOR option in the restore e No other wildcards i e are allowed e Partial wildcarding i e S S is not permitted Option CWD Restores files with their full paths directly below the path specified with the CWD option i e the specified path is prepended to the source pathname If the target path does not exist files targeted to that location are not restored unless the appropriate CREATE option is specified Note The CWD option may not be used in combination with the ACCOUNT GROUP or LOCAL options Syntax gt RESTORE CWD pathname pathname A pathname of up to 1023 characters to indicate the directory path that will be the target location of the restore The pathname will be prepended to the restored files Examples To restore files with their paths below the path ap bin BACKUP iX User Manual 18 279 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt RESTORE T CWD ap bin If files with the path pub sys were stored then a restore of those files using the RESTORE command above would result in a new location for the restored files ap bin pub sys To restore files directly below the root gt RESTORE T CWD The CWD option may be used in combination with the CREATE option to create the target di
104. data to selected files Restoring files from all mounted tapes Restore from ldev 14 completed drive released Restore from ldev 15 completed drive released Restore from ldev 18 completed drive released Restore is 100 complete Resetting restore bits and compiling file statistics BACKUP iX version 6 78 list date 02Nov06 01 42pm store date 02Nov06 01 16pm PATHNAME ABSTESTB ACCT XL ABSTESTB ACCT XXXX FILES RESTORED FILES NOT RESTORED kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Tape statistics for volume 1 Volumeset Volume 2 compression percentage 98 Backup 7 1 name kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk total number of errors 0 backup ldev number 14 total number of retries 0 total number of blocks 4 508 sectors 0 12 MBytes time beginning 13 41 17 ending 13 42 03 elapsed 00 00 46 amount of disk space stored 1728 sectors 0 42 megabyte s kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Tape statistics for volume 2 Volumeset Volume compression percentage 98 Backup 1 name kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk total number of errors 0 backup ldev number 15 total number of retries 0 total number of blocks 4 508 sectors
105. dates of files se 17 187 numbering Convention 17 184 program file count ee ee ee ke ee 17 187 SeratehIng ss EE abi EE eg see 17 184 BACKUP iX User Manual 438 Index automaties ee N 17 184 insufficient KEEP generations 17 185 ETES OR 17 185 UnEexpired ii bokeh es Bee be Ee 17 185 sector count stored ese ee ee ee ee 17 186 store date and time eek ee ee ee 17 186 Store directory volume n 17 188 tapedensity se Ee EE ER KERE ees ESE 17 188 tape error statistics ese ee ee ee ee 17 188 tape volumesetid ese ee ee ee ee ee ee 17 186 tapes used RA EER Gee RR Pe se 17 188 types OF TICS ee ES EED ER Re Ge see 17 187 user who performed store ese 17 186 VPLUS file COUN ee ee ee se ee Re ee 17 187 GID432 Global pool 17 182 17 189 17 214 432 Help Catalog tasse ania Ve RR EN N se Ge ee Re 23 396 HELP command ees ee esse ee se se ee 18 247 23 396 Eie RE RE N 2 35 Home pool 17 189 17 191 17 194 17 214 HPSPOOL accOUDE ee ese ee ee ee ee ee Ee RA ee 4 46 IJGCOMF file esse ee ee ee ee Ee ae 23 397 IMAGE 2 LE RE tea ate Set DAE EA as 432 IMAGE databases cccccccecsseseeeeeeeeees 3 36 6 61 large datasets 4 43 4 44 4 45 18 319 431 432 DACKUP EER ES OM AAS Ase ae ah 4 45 files excluded from store c cc00e 4 45 6 63 jumbo datasets ee ee ee Re AR ee ee 4 45 POSTOMING Hes 54225 EE N 9 105 selecting
106. directory handling e Reporting restore progress e Reporting on files restored e Overwriting existing files e Step by step tape restore guide e Step by step disk restore guide e Restore example The following command options and JCWs are discussed as the topics above are covered e The DISKDIR KEEP KEEPNEW KEEPOLD PREVIEW ONVS PROGRESS SELECT and SHOW options of the RESTORE command e The FILESNOTRESTORED and FILESRESTORED JCWs Identifying backups for a restore Before starting a restore it is necessary to determine which backup or backups from which to restore This can be done in one of three ways e Manually using whichever system has been set up e Manually assisted by TML BACKUP s Tape Manager amp Librarian module to find volumes e Using the Restore Wizard functionality of TML With the first method each backup is loaded independently and files are restored from each For example if restoring from the latest full and partial backups the full backup would be loaded and a RESTORE command issued to restore its files Then the partial backup would be loaded and a RESTORE command issued to restore its files With the second method the TML command SHOW FILE is used to locate the backup volumes then each backup is loaded independently and files are restored from each For example if restoring files stored at different times first use SHOW FILE to discover which volumes contain the desired files then load ea
107. e REDOing commands e Invoking dependent processing e Online help The following commands and options are discussed within the topics above e The HELP EXIT and REDO commands e The ON option of the STORE command Running BACKUP BACKUP can be run in either interactive mode or immediate mode from a session or it can be run in batch mode from a job stream If the Tape Manager amp Librarian module TML is installed it is automatically loaded when BACKUP is run To run BACKUP from a session simply log on and RUN the program HELLO OPERATOR SYS RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT Note Execute file access to the BACKUPPL program is required When BACKUP is invoked a banner identifying the product name and version is displayed 2 24 Chapter 2 Program Operation BACKUP iX Operations Guide RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT BACKUP iX 6 78 c Copyright 1991 06 ORBiT SOFTWARE INC 25Sep06 08 48am Wizard module 3 48 c Copyright 1990 01 ORBiT SOFTWARE INC BACKUP ix IS VALIDATED Online module IS VALIDATED Delta module IS VALIDATED Wizard module 65 DAYS LEFT IN DEMO PERIOD Interactive mode In interactive mode as many commands as desired may be specified at the BACKUP prompt gt The EXIT command is issued to terminate the program RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt BACKUP command gt BACKUP command gt EXIT Immediate mode In immediate mode only a single BACKUP command with it
108. ee ee 11 123 SEQUENCE option ese sesse 112 18 300 SHOW option ese ee ee ee ee ee RA ee ee ee 18 301 VOL OPON is Ek et ent anti eee ees 18 302 VOLCLASS option ee ee ee ee ee 18 303 VOLID OpHON ee ee ee ee ee RR RA ee 18 304 VOLSET OpHON ee ese ee ee ee ee ee se ke ee 18 304 Restore device ee ee ek ee ee ee 11 125 BACKUP iX User Manual 441 Index disk backup issie ees EG ee ER Re Ed Pe 11 126 le OM RE sted 11 125 Restore from delta store ee se ee ee 8 06 Restore processes se ee Ee ee eee 16 176 Restore Status report se ee ee ee ee ee e 24 401 Restore Wizard eie se ee ee ee ee ee ee 113 17 215 command OPTIONS iese ee ee ee ee 114 17 216 confirmation dialog ese 116 17 218 data encryption ee se se ee ee ee 118 17 220 DBRESTORE option 118 17 220 enabling EE ste SEE AE AE EER resins rs oan 114 17 215 labeled tape sn ees ee ee ee 118 17 220 Operational notes iese ee ee ee ee 118 17 220 Restore examples ii se ee Re Ee ee ee 18 272 RESTOREJCW JOW seee 22 392 26 422 RESTOREPROCESSES JCW 16 176 22 392 REStoOriNng EE DEE ese Re 10 111 10 111 tei AA EE EE DE 26 423 example see atid EES ed es De egg EE De 11 132 from a disk backup se ee ee ee ee ee ee 111 from a tape backup se ee ee ee ee ee ee 111 from an online backup ese 111 11 131 from an online backup procedure iese 112 ele SLAE T N 113 step by step g
109. ee ee 434 ME ER ML a eh 4 48 434 SM capability 3 36 3 37 18 277 18 321 21 376 Spare volumes se ee ee ee ee ee ee Re ee ee ee ee 434 Special characters comma ED EE Ee De deeds 6 60 definition Ee RS Ee Ve Bee e ees Te se 435 REDO editing characters eie ee ee 2 32 Use as a relational operator lt 11 124 18 299 18 305 18 310 18 338 18 344 lt 11 124 18 299 18 305 18 310 18 338 18 344 lt gt 11 124 18 299 18 305 18 310 18 338 18 344 11 124 18 299 18 305 18 310 18 338 18 344 gt 11 124 18 299 18 305 18 310 18 338 18 344 gt 11 124 18 299 18 305 18 310 18 338 18 344 Use as BACKUP HELP prompt EER EE ER EE dIE SR EE 2 35 Use as the BACKUP prompt gt 2 28 Use for embedded comments in commands so AE MR EE EO FEE 2 30 Use in batch mode BACKUP iX User Manual 442 Index l 2 25 Use in command syntax xvii 18 222 RR ER RI Xvii 18 222 T j EE EE Xvii 18 222 EL EE EE OE xvii 18 222 AM ER EE xvii 18 222 xvii 18 222 Use in encryption key 4 47 18 254 18 284 18 323 Use minus sign in excluding MPE filesets 6 62 Use of in command syntax a se 19 347 20 365 Use of in Command Syntax ee ee ee ee ee 20 365 Use of in command SyNtAx ee ee ee ee ee 20 365 Use of in command SyNtAx ee ee ee ee 20 365 Use of in command SyNtAx ee ee ee ee ee 20 365 Us
110. ee se RR Ge RR AR ee ee ee ee 22 383 2 3 Files and File Designators iese ee ee ee ee 23 394 In this chapter EE EE RE EG Ge EG at 23 394 BACKUP files and file designators summary n 23 394 BACKUP files and file designator descriptions 23 395 2 4 Bee n EE EE IE EN 24 398 Inthisichapter EE EE EG Ee EE GE RE Ge EE anne 24 398 al TE RE NE EE EE N 24 398 eie IR AE EE OE N 24 399 Restore Status is de ee se ee ede Se Ge de Ge ee se Se Ge de Re Se EA ea 24 400 Restore Tape Status ee ee Ee Re Re Ee ee ee GR Ee Re AR ee ee ee ee ee ee Re ee ee 24 400 SHOW IIStiING EED RE EE RE nee iene 24 401 Store Status Es actinium ainda keane 24 403 Store ape Status ss Ee ER alee eee 24 403 Tape Manager amp Librarian reporting feature ees se ee se ee 24 404 DEFAULT GYGLE 2E EE Ate eee ee eet nt are el 24 409 DEFAULT TAPE eranen a tench Ee Se ae ee A ey 24 410 PREVIEW GY de EE oiiae 24 410 SHOW GONEIG Se EE Ee ia eee ae 24 411 SHOW CY GLE 3 tele ese Re es Re et Seite ee ee haat has 24 412 SHOW FILE ea Secret ae EE let Ge Oe ER Ge ee ee eg ee ee ee tare 24 415 SHOW POOL ais te Es de eaten einen aa eae ed 24 416 SHOW TAPE Min sesde n sees r eg area atte Wed De gees Eed 24 416 2 5 Maintenance EE 25 419 In this chapters c22er ssid SE RE EE Ge aden hen eh eae 25 419 Resetting the internal prior backup date iese ee ee ee ee se Re ee 25 419 TMLDB dataset capacitieS is ee ee ee ee Ee AR Ge ee ee ee GR Re RR Re ee ee ee 25 4
111. error Performs a specified action when a pre defined event has occurred Restores only files that were located on specified volumesets Changes file s owner to a specified user Displays tape volume s and disk space required for restore without restoring files Specifies the time interval between percentage completed messages Selects files for restore based on last label state change date and optionally time same as DATE option The state change timestamp tracks when a file was last modified as well as BACKUP iX User Manual 18 273 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide when the file s label containing security and ownership info was last modified SELECT Selects files for restore based on filecode type and or size SEQUENCE Specifies the order in which multiple backup devices are opened SHOW Defines display format of information about files restored VOL Restores files to a specified volume VOLCLASS Restores files to a specified volume class VOLID Specifies ANSI format tape labels and the volids for up to eight backup volumes VOLSET Restores files to a specified volume set Option ACCOUNT Restores files from a tape or disk backup into the specified account instead of the source account Files originating from MPE iX accounts are restored into groups of the same name in the specified account If some groups do not exist in the specified target account files targeted to those accounts are
112. etc See Chapter 18 BACKUP iX Commands for details on commonly used options for a tape backup 3 Retrieve any reports that were printed for this backup such as the SHOW listing Check them for proper completion of the store and file them in a safe place Store example The following example illustrates a backup to three backup devices in parallel using the AUTOREPLY and DRIVES options RINGO BILL backuppl BACKUP iX 6 78 c Copyright 1991 06 ORBiT SOFTWARE INC 260ct06 12 37pm Wizard module 3 48 c Copyright 1990 01 ORBiT SOFTWARE INC BACKUP iX 61 DAYS I IN DEMO PERIOD Online module 61 DAYS I IN DEMO PERIOD Delta module 61 DAYS 1 IN DEMO PERIOD Wizard module 60 DAYS I IN DEMO PERIOD l l l l gt STORE X FILES6 t DRIVES 3 AUTOREPLY 14 15 18 SHOW PROGRESS 1 54 days left in BACKUP iX demo period expires on 12 26 06 Will perform parallel store to ldev s 14 15 18 Building intermediate scratch files This unlabelled BACKUP iX volumeset was created Nov 2 2006 04 43 52 on dev 14 NMSTORE of BACKUP iX program found at beginning of volumeset Found backup 1 named QA1 created Nov 2 2006 04 44 34 on dev 14 BACKUPPL written to volumeset in NMSTORE format This unlabelled BACKUP iX volumeset was created Nov 2 2006 04 08 34 on dev 15 NMSTORE of BACKUP iX program found at beginning of volumeset Found backup 1 named QA1 created Nov 2 2006 04 09 36 on dev 15 This unlabelled BACKUP iX volumeset was c
113. exceptions that LONG SHORT and FILENAME are exclusive of each other and FILENAME must be used alone Example To send instructions to the printer to generate a hard copy listing of all the files dumped with basic information about them enter BACKUP iX User Manual 18 245 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt DUMP TEMP T SHOW OFFLINE Option VOLID Used in combination with the LABEL option VOLID specifies ANSI format tape labels and the volids for up to eight backup volumes The VOLID option may only be used in combination with the LABEL option which specifies the volsetid optional expiration date and an optional comment In the event that the eight volid list becomes exhausted BACKUP will request more volids on the console Syntax gt DUMP LABEL VOLID volidlist volidlist Specifies a comma delimited list of up to 8 volume IDs to be used for the first 8 tapes in the target tapeset Each volid may be a maximum of 6 alphanumeric characters for each volid and is case sensitive Example To dump the disk backup named DAILYBU expecting three volumes gt DUMP DAILYBU T LABEL TUESBU 02 01 98 VOLID TUESO01 TUES02 TUES03 EXIT Exits the BACKUPPL program Syntax Example gt E XIT The EXIT command entered with either the single letter e or with the entire word exit has no parameters or
114. excluded e SYS may be specified in place of MPEXL SYSTEM VOLUME SET e If the DIRECTORY option is specified along with ONVS only the directories related to the volumesets specified with ONVS are stored Option OPTIMIZE Specifies the store optimization level If this option is not specified STORE performs low optimization resulting in a fast store and restore A high optimization factor may be specified to speed up store which fragments files more and could take longer to restore Syntax gt STORE OPTIMIZE optimizationfactor Optimizationfactor Integer value the higher the optimizationfactor the faster the store but the longer the restore The following values are valid 1 low optimization files kept together 2 high optimization file blocks fragmented and spread throughout tapes Example To perform a full backup using high optimization BACKUP iX User Manual 18 335 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt STORE T OPTIMIZE 2 Option PREVIEW Displays the results of a STORE without storing files When using the PREVIEW option NO STORE IS PERFORMED and store bits are not locked The steps performed when selecting files to be stored are taken without actually storing any data PREVIEW allows users to quickly verify if a STORE command they issued accurately represents the fileset they intended to store determine the size of the backup and identify which files are not available
115. following commands options and JCWs are discussed as the above topics are covered e The FULLBACKUP PARTBACKUP and STORE commands e The ADATE CDATE DATE DISKDIR MDATE SDATE ONVS PREVIEW PROGRESS SELECT SHOW and TAPEDIR options of the STORE command e The FILESNOTSTORED and FILESSTORED JCWs Specifying files using store command syntax Files can be selected for store in a variety of ways The following criteria may be used alone or in combination e Selection by MPE iX or POSIX filesets and wildcards e Including multiple filesets e Selection by filename range e Selection using date and time restrictions e Selection by filecode or type e Selection by size e Selection by volumeset 6 58 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide e Excluding filesets Please note that a store fileset must be indicated If the store fileset is not specified the STORE command is rejected Default filesets are not accepted Also note that unqualified filenames are qualified relative to a user s current group unless their CWD points to a directory in which case filenames are qualified relative to that directory All filenames are processed in this way regardless of where the filename is being supplied This applies to store directory filenames supplied to the DISKDIR option of STORE RESTORE and LISTDIR filesets to include or exclude with STORE and RESTORE and to a disk backup filename Selection by MPE iX or POSIX files
116. for a specified cycle or all cycles or that cause output to be printed offline and displayed on STDLIST Reporting default cycle attributes To display the current cycle defaults issue the DEFAULT CYCLE command with no parameters BACKUP iX User Manual 17 182 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt DEFAULT CYCLE Generations Retention Frequency Days ok Volumes req spare Size 1 30 1 1234567 3 1 Reporting specified cycle attributes The PARMS option of the SHOW CYCLE command displays the attributes of all cycles or of an individual cycle To display the attributes of an individual cycle use the SHOW CYCLE command with the name of the cycle specified as shown below along with the PARMS keyword In this example the command specifies the FULL cycle gt SHOW CYCLE PARMS Cycle Keep Retention Frequency Days ok Volumes req spare Size FULL 4 35 7 lt 5 2 To display the attributes of all cycles specify SHOW CYCLE gt SHOW CYCLE Cycle Keep Retention Frequency Days ok Volumes req spare Size FULL 4 35 2 PART 5 4 PAYROLL 1 13 1 2 1 SALESDB 2 In the example above 4 backup cycles are used including FULL and PART backups a PAYROLL cycle and a SALESDB cycle The PAYROLL cycle is a bimonthly payroll run sent offsite to a bank The SALESDB cycle is a daily backup of the sales database and supporting KSAM file The FULL backup cycle is executed on
117. for restore iese 18 300 18 338 selecting for store see ee ee ee ee ee 18 309 IMAGE iS EN 432 Immediate mode operation 5 2 25 18 311 Incremental baCKUD ese se se se ss ee ee 16 173 432 Incremental backup example se eke ee 4 42 Indirect file 6 64 11 125 18 271 18 311 distinguishing from cycle file eee 6 67 fileset excluding ee ee ee ee AA ee 6 63 fileset including eect ee ee 6 63 INITIAL program ees ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 21 376 Installation EE EE adh dade Ge ge Ge De SR 1 18 INS PAE LING Hittite tht be ge eta rege 9 107 Intelligent Restore See TML amp Restore Wizard esse 17 216 enabling and disabling ee ee 17 213 Interactive mode operation ee ee ee 2 25 Internal errOFS ee ee se RA Ee ee ee Ee ek ee 26 424 JOW system JOW JOW 22 391 JCWS Tian aa ae e E A 22 382 BACKUPBUF SIZE ien aat 22 384 BACKUPDBOQUIE SCE ccoin 22 385 BACKUPDISCDUMPFLIMIT 06 22 386 BACKUPEXPIRES ee ees ee ee se ee ee ee ee ee 22 386 BACKUPFILEBUFFTAPEPRI o ae 22 386 BACKUPIRNOCONFIRM ossee 22 386 BACKUPMAXERRORS esse ee ee ee ee ees 22 387 BACKUPMAXRETRIES ee se esse ee ee ee 22 387 BACKUP iX BACKUPNOSSM a ee ee ee ee ke ee 22 387 BACKUPPROCESSES ese ee ese see 22 388 BACKUPSYNCANYWAV ee ee se ee 22 388 BACKUPSYNCYN ee ee ee ee ee 22 388 BACKUPTAPEERRORS ese sees se ee 22 389 BACKUPTAPERETRIES oeen
118. for use in determining which tapes contain files for restore so that they may be located before actually restoring the files When using the PREVIEW option NO RESTORE IS PERFORMED The steps performed when selecting files to be restored are taken without actually restoring any data PREVIEW allows users to quickly verify if a RESTORE command they have composed accurately represents the fileset they intended to restore determine the size of the backed up body of data and identify which files cannot be restored PREVIEW may be used in combination with any other RESTORE command options When PREVIEW is used with the SHOW option the names of all files available to be restored are displayed and the report is titled FILES TO RESTORE rather than FILES RESTORED A RESTORE with PREVIEW generates the FILES NOT RESTORED report identifying the files that are unavailable for the restore and why they are not available When used with the DBRESTORE option database last store timestamps are not modified Similarly using PREVIEW with the SETDATE option does not modify the system last store timestamp PREVIEW does not extract information from TML cycles at this time Syntax gt RESTORE PREVIEW Example To determine which tape volume s contain a specified fileset gt RESTORE T SOURCE GL PREVIEW The required tape volume s number of files to be restored and amount of disk space occupied by
119. gt DUMP SEOUENCE ldevlist Idev Logical device number of tape drive Idevlist The logical device number s of the backup device s for which BACKUP should automatically reply specified in one of the following formats e A specific Idev e g 14 e Arrange of ldevs e g 14 16 e Selected Idevs e g 14 17 e Any combination of the above e g 14 16 18 22 24 Example To dump to the tape on Idev 7 and 8 and have BACKUP open the ldev 7 and then the Idev 8 gt DUMP TEMP T DRIVES 2 SEQUENCE 7 8 Notes e DRIVES option is required when SEQUENCE specifies more than one drive e SEQUENCE cannot be used with ANSI labeled tape volumes To specify the drive opening sequence using ANSI labeled tapes list the volids in the desired order in the VOLID option Option SHOW Defines display format of information about files dumped in various ways The SHOW listing is sent to STDLIST under the formal file designator SYSLIST which may be redirected using a file equation Syntax gt DUMP SHOW showformat Parameters BACKUP iX User Manual 18 244 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide showformat Specifies one or more of the following information listings delimited by commas SHORT SHOW LONG SECURITY OFFLINE 7 ete DIRECTORY DATES FILENAME SHORT Lists the fully qualified filename ldev number disk address volume number file size
120. gt STORE BASELINE deltacyclename deltacyclename A specific delta cycle name given to a baseline store and any associated delta stores defaults to DELTA Example To assign the delta cycle name DAILY to a baseline store BACKUP iX User Manual 18 316 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt STORE T BASELINE DAILY Note The BASELINE store option may be used with either ONLINE or ZERODOWN When a baseline backup is entered an informational message identifies the store as being a BASELINE store ONLINE BASELINE or ZERODOWN BASELINE and indicates the name of the Delta cycle in this example DAILY This backup was BASELINE with name DAILY This backup was ONLINE BASELINE with name DAILY This backup was ZERODOWN BASELINE with name DAILY Option CDATE See the page titled Options xDATE ADATE CDATE DATE MDATE and SDATE Option COMPRESS Indicates that a compression method be used either no compression low density compression medium density compression or high density compression If the COMPRESS option is not specified medium density 2 5 1 compression is performed Syntax compressionmethod Compression algorithm used specified as an integer value 0 nocompression 1 low density 2 1 compression 2 medium density 2 5 1 compression 3 high density 4 1 compression Examples To perform medium density compression the default method enter the option with no argum
121. iX User Manual 22 381 Chapter 22 JCWs BACKUP iX Reference Guide BACKUPCONTINUEIFANSILABELLED input BACKUPCOUNTNONARCHIVE input BACKUPDBQUIESCE input BACKUPEXPIRES output BACKUPFILEBUFFTAPEPRI input BACKUPMAXERRORS output BACKUPMAXRETRIES output BACKUPNOSSM input BACKUPOLDSHOW input BACKUPPROCESSES input and output BACKUPSYNCANYWAY input BACKUPSYNCYN input BACKUPTAPEERRORS output BACKUPTAPERETRIES output BACKUPVOLUMES output FILEBUFF output FILESNOTRESTORED output FILESRESTORED output FILESNOTSTORED output Instructs BACKUP to automatically proceed without requiring an operator REPLY when storing to an ANSI labeled tape Displays and counts non archivable files Used to enable or disable DBQUIESCE calls Displays the number of days left in the demo product Used to specify the priority at which the filebuffer to tape process will be executed during a deferred backup Returns the total number of store process tape errors for the tape with the most errors Returns the total number of store process retries for the tape that had the most retries An input JCW for STORE and RESTORE that must be set if a backup device configured as an HP DDS drive but not supporting Save Set Marks is to be used An input JCW for STORE that may be set to enable the report format used prior to BACKUP iX version 6 60 As an input JCW its value default is 4 may be set prior to a store is checked when BACKUP is invoked a
122. in sectors and mnemonic file code For V6 60 and later only the fully qualified filename percentage of each file stored if a delta store file size in sectors and mnemonic file code are listed LONG In addition to the SHORT information lists record size file type EOF file limit blocking factor extents allocated maximum extents and for output spool files the old filename from OUT HPSPOOL DIRECTORY Lists the names of all directory structures MPE Groups Accounts and POSIX directories selected for STORE when the DIRECTORY option of STORE is specified Directory files are tagged with one of the following CODE field values ACCT as MPE Account GROUP at MPE Group HFSDIR ae POSIX Directory Directory files are NOT included in the Files to store total FILENAME Lists the filename or pathname only across a full line Designed to provide a shorter listing for users with long POSIX pathnames DATES In addition to SHORT LONG or DIRECTORY information lists creation date last access date last modification date and last state change date SECURITY In addition to SHORT LONG or DIRECTORY information lists file owner and access matrix OFFLINE Lists SHOW output to both the screen and printer formal file designator OFFLINE If BACKUP is run from a session and showformat is not specified SHORT format is imposed if run in batch showformat defaults to LONG All combinations of showformats are valid with the
123. in the SEQUENCE option When dirldev is specified the following messages are displayed Mount tape volume containing store directory on dev 7 Searching for store directory for backup 1 on dev 7 If the store directory volume is not found on the dirldev drive the mounted tape is rejected and the correct tape is requested Unable to locate store directory Mount tape volume containing store directory on dev 7 Multi drive restore with dirldev not specified Unattended Restore The store directory volume must be mounted on one of the drives that will be used for restore BACKUP will automatically locate the store directory and will then restore from all tapes mounted on the specified drives which contain data needed for the restore BACKUP iX User Manual 13 146 Chapter 13 Backup Devices BACKUP iX Operations Guide The following message is displayed Mount tape volume containing the store directory on any dev Searching for store directory for backup 1 on all devs If the store directory volume was not found on any ldev the store directory volume must then be mounted on the first drive in the sequence Unable to locate store directory on any dev Mount tape volume containing store directory on dev 7 Restore from ANSI labeled tapes When restoring from ANSI labeled tapes dirldev is not used with the SEQUENCE option to locate the store directory In fact the entire SEQUENCE option is disallowed because dri
124. in the order stored Also the actual volid is shown rather than the sequence of the tape volumes within the store volumeset The last modification date and time of each file is also shown This example requests a listing of the files contained on a generation of the SALESDB cycle BACKUP iX User Manual 17 188 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt SHOW CYCLE SALESDB GEN 12 FILES Cycle Gen Created Filename Group Account Volid Last modified SALESDB 12 09 27 99 SALEDB DATA SALES 001012 09 27 99 12 10 SALEDB01 DATA SALES 001012 09 27 99 12 10 SALEDB02 DATA SALES 001012 09 27 99 12 10 SALEDB03 DATA SALES 001012 09 27 99 12 SALEDB04 DATA SALES 001012 09 27 99 12 SALEDB05 DATA SALES 001012 09 27 99 12 SALEDBO6 DATA SALES 001012 09 27 99 12 SALEDBO07 DATA SALES 001012 09 27 99 12 SALEDBO08 DATA SALES 001012 09 27 99 SALEDBO9 DATA SALES 001012 09 27 99 SALEDB10 DATA SALES 001012 09 27 99 SALENDX DATA SALES 001012 09 27 99 SALENDXK DATA SALES 001012 09 27 99 Note SHOW CYCLE FILES is unable to report file information that is not present in the file register Therefore if file information for any generation has not been loaded into the TML database a warning message is issued and TML continues to report on file information that is available Tapes and Pools BACKUP s Tape Manager amp Librarian TML keeps track of all tapes by pool within the TMLDB databas
125. into the tape pool for the FULL cycle only used for FULL backups enter gt ADD TAPE 100 119 MEDIA TAPE LENGTH 2400FT SIZE LARGE CYCLE FULL CHANGE TAPE Changes attributes of existing tapes Syntax MED IA mediatype gt CHANGE TAPE volset LEN GTH measurement eisai SIZ E classification CYCLE pool Parameters volset The tape volumeset specified as e A specific volid e g 000100 or 100 e Arange of volids e g 100 199 disallowed for alphanumeric volids e Selected volids e g D100 D102 D200 e Any combination of the above e g 100 106 D100 BACKUP iX User Manual 19 350 Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide MEDIA mediatype LENGTH measurement SIZE classification CYCLE pool Example Type of media Specify the backup device class for MEDIA to cause TML to automatically select the media appropriate for that device when the backup is performed For example if storing to device class TAPE TML will select volumes with a media of TAPE if storing to DAT TML will select media DAT etc Note To instruct TML to select volumes or media based on something other than device class use a file equation when performing the store User assigned media type alphanumeric string of up to 8 characters beginning with an alphabetic character and containing no embedded spaces Freeform tape length
126. it will attempt to put the drive online with no risk of a hang HELP Displays a help screen Return status TAPECTRL communicates the results of command execution via the system JCW A zero system JCW value always indicates either a successful operation or a TRUE response to an AVAILABLE FULL or WRITEABLE inquiry Warning and error conditions and NO answers are indicated by various non zero JCW settings e g WARNO WARN1 FATALO FATAL185 SYSTEMO etc The non numeric portion of the JCW indicates the type of condition while the numeric portion reports the type of error if non zero or a general or unknown problem if zero 0 TMLABPRT The TMLABPRT program may be used to preview TML tape identification labels It uses the label configured in BCKUPMSG the BACKUP TML message catalog and generates dummy values for dynamic parameters Before invoking TMLABPRT make sure that a file equation for TMLABLP has been set to the desired printer device To print labels in various languages set the TMLLANGID JCW to an allowed value Refer to the Configuration section in Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian for more information VERIFY The VERIFY utility verifies a backup tape volume like the READALL command Refer to the README file on the installation tape and VERIFY s HELP command for documentation on VERIFY BACKUP iX User Manual 21 380 Chapter 22 JCWs BACKUP uses several Job Control Words JC
127. may also be conveniently performed using the FULLBACKUP command FULLBACKUP stores all files on the system and the directories of all volumesets system and nonsystem and saves the current date and time internally for future reference Partial backups may then be based on such a prior full backup s date With the FULLBACKUP command no files or directories may be excluded from a backup FULLBACKUP example In this example all files on the system are stored to device class TAPE BACKUP automatically generates a REPLY to the tape request and the SHOW listing is sent to device class LP FILE T DEV TAPE FILE LP DEV LP RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt FULLBACKUP T LP AUTOREPLY 7 The above FULLBACKUP command internally generates the STORE command gt STORE T DIRECTORY DBSTORE SETDATE SHOW AUTOREPLY 7 The SETDATE option may be specified to save the backup date and time internally for future partial backups STORE example This STORE command example performs a full system backup with all volumeset directories at the beginning of the tape This entry in combination with an SLT tape can be used to perform an INSTALL gt STORE T DIRECTORY SETDATE SHOW DBSTORE To perform the same backup using TML to store the FULL backup cycle enter 4 40 Chapter 4 Backup Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt STORE FULL T DIRECTORY SETDATE SHOW DBSTORE Partial backup
128. name and are followed by four numbers For example the FULL disk fileset would consist of FULLOOOO FULL0001 FULL0002 etc To estimate the amount of disk space required for a disk backup fileset perform the same store to tape and note the number of sectors stored to tape Disk backup files are built with a privileged filecode so they cannot be purged with the MPE iX PURGE command To purge these files use BACKUP s PURGE command or a utility such as MPEX which is capable of purging privileged files If performing regular disk backups under a particular fileset name and later DUMPing to tape it is recommended that the disk fileset be left on the system after it is dumped until the next disk backup is due This has two benefits The disk space is reserved for future backups and files can be restored from the disk backup Disk backup files may be stored to tape using BACKUP s STORE command This is faster than DUMPing the data to tape but performing a restore would require that the entire disk backup fileset be restored from tape onto the system and then files restored from it 5 53 Chapter 5 Backup Methods BACKUP iX Operations Guide e To build the disk backup fileset on a nonsystem volume qualify the disk backup fileset name with a group account that resides on the desired nonsystem volume e The disc to disc file created by BACKUP can be restricted in size to a maximum value set in the JCW variable BACKU
129. occurrence of any recoverable tape read problem VOLUME This event is the mount request for a new tape volume Example To perform a READALL on ldev 7 and have BACKUP automatically REPLY to the console request or if an error occurs halt the READALL gt READALL T AUTOREPLY 7 ON ERROR QUIT Option PROGRESS Specifies the time interval between percentage completed messages If this option is not specified progress messages are displayed every 5 minutes Syntax gt READALL PROGRESS minutes minutes The frequency of progress messages specified as an integer value between 0 and 1000 To suppress progress messages specify minutes of 0 Example BACKUP iX User Manual 18 266 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide To display progress messages every minute gt READALL T PROGRESS 1 To suppress progress messages gt READALL T PROGRESS 0 Option VOLID Specifies ANSI format tape labels and the volids for up to eight backup volumes The VOLID option may only be used in combination with the LABEL option In the event that the eight volid list becomes exhausted more volids will be requested on the console Syntax gt READALL LABEL VOLID volidlist volidlist Specifies a comma delimited list of up to 8 volume IDs to be used for the first 8 tapes in the target tapeset Each volid may be a maximum of 6 alphanumeric characters and is case sensitiv
130. of allowable retries on any tape specified as an integer value Example To terminate a tape if it has had more than 20 retries BACKUP iX User Manual 18 327 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt STORE T MAXRETRIES 20 Option MDATE See the page titled Options xDATE ADATE CDATE DATE MDATE and SDATE Option NOLABEL Disables checking of BACKUP tape labels Specifying NOLABEL can speed up the store since BACKUP tape label checking is not done This is especially true when the DIRECTORY option has been used since both the label and the directory are written to the beginning of the tape When a directory is present on the tape the backup must skip over the directory in attempting to read the label This could take several seconds The NOLABEL option does sacrifice some security and therefore should be used with caution An unexpired tape could be overwritten or a newly written tape could be mistaken for a new tape and be overwritten if inadvertently remounted after being written Syntax Example To ignore any BACKUP tape label gt STORE T NOLABEL Notes e The NOLABEL option is invalid and ignored for a disk backup e NOLABEL is disallowed for ANSI labeled tapes Option NOLOCK Disables locking of store bits during store Using NOLOCK reduces the overall backup duration but does not prevent files from being accessed during the store therefore the integrity of the bac
131. of files that were selected but not restored Refer to Chapter 22 JCWs in the BACKUP X Reference Guide in this manual for more information about these JCWs Tape errors and retries during store and restore Because BACKUP reads and writes in large block sizes problems may arise on marginal tapes or dirty tape drives more often with BACKUP than with other programs like MPE iX STORE which use smaller blocks Such problems lead to excessive retries and even tape errors To overcome these problems BACKUP uses a sophisticated error recovery scheme in its tape handling In most cases the tape operation will continue without interruption and a message on the system console will indicate any errors BACKUP classifies problems in accessing tape as either tape errors or tape retries Tape errors are problems of a serious nature Every time the backup device driver returns an error BACKUP records the error in an internal error count For some errors BACKUP is able to recover In this instance no message is issued even though the error count is incremented For other errors BACKUP is not able to recover When this occurs a message is issued for that file and the error count is incremented If an unrecoverable error occurs on restore the file is not restored and the filename is highlighted in the SHOW listing Tape retries are recoverable tape errors where the tape drive has skipped a bad part of the tape The number of retries is an
132. online backup because they are purged or renamed out of the store filesetlist or their attributes are changed such that they no longer qualify by a specified SELECT option BACKUP iX User Manual 24 402 Chapter 24 Reports BACKUP iX Reference Guide Note Files listed in the Disqualified Files listing are not reflected in the value of the FILESNOTSTORED JCW Store Status A status report is displayed at the completion of store indicating various characteristics of the store FILES STORED H HHHHHHHH FILES NOT STORED listed above total number of blocks HH sectors H H megabyte s number of blocks on first tape sectors megabyte s compression percentage required size of filebuffer HHH sectors H megabyte s total amount of disk space stored sectors megabyte s total number of tape errors errors in store directory total number of tape retries retries in store directory This store took hours minutes seconds FILES STORED Number of files that were successfully stored FILES NOT STORED Number of files that could not be successfully stored each of which is listed above the Store Status report with an explanation total number of blocks Number of datablocks on all tapes and amount of data they comprise in sectors and megabytes if compression was used amounts are for compressed data number of blocks on first tape Nu
133. options FULLBACKUP Performs a full system backup to tape or disk The FULLBACKUP command internally saves the date and time of the backup for later use when performing partial or incremental backups Partial or incremental backups must use either the PARTBACKUP command or the GETDATE option of the STORE command BACKUP iX User Manual 18 246 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax gt FULLBACKUP tapefile listfile storeoption diskfile Parameters tapefile Backreferences a file equation for the tape drive Tape is the default if not specified the current username is imposed as the tapefile name and prompts to mount the tape and enter the Idev are presented diskfile Name of disk backup fileset as a maximum of 16 characters first character must be alphabetic and optionally qualified with group and account The diskfile may be specified using any legal MPE or POSIX syntax filename or may backreference a file equation that specifies DEV DISC Tape is the default if not specified tapefile is assumed listfile Backreferences a file equation for the SHOW listing storeoption One or more of the STORE command options except ADATE CDATE DATE MDATE SDATE SETDATE DBSTORE DIRECTORY and SHOW Example To perform a full backup to device class TAPE enter FILE Full DEV TAPE run BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt FULLBACKUP Full AUTOREPLY 7 The full backup shown jus
134. perform an action These methods are invoked as MPE iX commands through the following ON options of the STORE commana ON SYNCWAIT Recognizes the beginning of the waiting period for a backup in which the SYNCWAIT option was used ON SUSPEND Recognizes the point in time when BACKUP is ready to synchronize an online backup with ONLINE or when user suspension begins for a ZERODOWN backup ON SYNCPOINT Recognizes the synchronization point ON RELEASED Recognizes when files are released during an Online backup or when users are resumed during a ZDT backup Refer to the discussion of Invoking dependent processing in Chapter 2 Program Operation in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide for information and examples IMAGE transaction logging and recovery The IMAGE transaction logging and recovery options include Rollback recovery and Rollforward recovery Although Zero downtime backup has no problem with rollback recovery some limitations exist for ZDT backups with IMAGE transaction logging rollforward recovery Rollback recovery Rollback recovery recovers a database after a soft crash such as a program or system abort It physically backs out of any incomplete transactions by processing the log file against the current version of the database rather than restoring from the last backup A database may be enabled for rollback recovery using the ROLLBACK option of DBUTIL recovery is invoked using the gt ROLLBACK command of DBRECOV Rollfor
135. problems during a restore such files should not be restored onto the system or onto another system MPE iX designates most of the following types of files as non archivable e Input spool files which are located in IN HPSPOOL e Private output spool files which are located with non private output spool files in OUT HPSPOOL e Device description files which are located in the 3000devs account e Quarantined files which are files identified by MPE iX as having their internal structure corrupted Additionally BACKUP excludes dynamic files used by TurboIMAGE XL as control blocks and for other internal purposes These files are created and purged automatically by TurboIMAGE XL and include e Database control block files which have the same name as the database with GB appended e g SALESGB e The file TURBODBS PUB SYS Specifying files with indirect or cycle files Files to store may be specified in the command line as shown above in one or more indirect files or in a TML cycle file if the Tape Manager amp Librarian Wizard module is used BACKUP iX User Manual 6 63 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide Indirect file Rather than specifying the files to store within the STORE command it is possible to declare them in a text file called an indirect file which is then referenced by the STORE command An indirect file is recommended when the fileset specifications are too long to fit on the
136. relational operators equal to lt less than gt greater than lt less than or equal to BACKUP iX User Manual 18 299 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt greater than or equal to lt gt not equal to filecode A numeric file code typespec One the following file types IMAGE DB KSAM SPOOL PROG VPLUS ASCII BINARY BYTE SYMLINK DEVLINK LARGE For details on File Types see the Glossary article eof End of file Example To restore all VPLUS forms files gt RESTORE T DEV DIST SELECT TYPE VPLUS Option SEQUENCE For a restore from multiple backup devices specifies the order in which the devices are opened Syntax gt RESTORE DRIVES numdrives SEQ UENCE ldevlist dirldev The logical device number s of the backup device s for which BACKUP should Idevlist automatically reply specified in one of the following formats e A specific Idev e g 14 e A range of Idevs e g 14 16 e Selected Idevs e g 14 17 e Any combination of the above e g 14 16 18 22 24 Dirldev A sub parameter with which to indicate the logical device number of the backup device on which to read the store directory prefixed by a colon The dirldev must be included as one of the Idevs in the ldevlist The dirldev may be specified without ldevlist by using a comma place holder for ldevlist Examples To restore from Idevs 7
137. restore Syntax gt RESTORE DELTA deltacyclename deltacyclename A specific Delta cycle name given to a baseline store and any associated delta stores Example To restore the DEV account from the last baseline backup gt RESTORE T DEV BASELINE DAILY To restore the DEV account from the most recent baseline backup and the most recent delta backup gt RESTORE T DEV BASELINE DAILY DELTA DAILY Option DEV Restores files onto specified disk device If the DEV option is not specified files are restored to the volume class contained in their file labels Syntax BACKUP iX User Manual 18 281 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt RESTORE DEV device device Either an ldev number or a volume class name Example To restore a specified dataset onto Idev 3 gt RESTORE T GLDB17 DATA GL DEV 3 Notes The VOL the VOLCLASS and the VOLSET options may not be specified together with the DEV option Option DIRECTORY The DIRECTORY option of RESTORE is disabled Contact Technical Support if you need to restore the system directory Option DISKDIR When restoring from a tape backup specifies that the store directory should be read from disk indicates the directory file name and whether the restore is to be attended default or unattended Note Disk backups always include a copy of the store directory therefore DISKDIR
138. restores may be incomplete and unpredictable compromising data integrity Restore operation To restore from a Delta backup a baseline store and a single differential delta store usually the latest delta store are needed Note A restore from a baseline store must always be completed before a restore from a delta store The baseline store may be used alone for a restore The baseline store is restored first then the related delta store is restored This causes the baseline version of the selected files complete files to be restored from the baseline store and then updated based on the delta store BACKUP iX User Manual 8 96 Chapter 8 DELTA Backup Module BACKUP iX Operations Guide Files are selected for restore based on selection criteria specified by the user If the user has specified options like DATE SDATE MDATE ADATE or CDATE and or SELECT TYPE SELECT SIZE SELECT CODE and ONVS the store directory is examined to filter out files that would not qualify With a restore from a non Delta backup the same RESTORE command is used whether restoring from the full backup or an associated partial backup However to restore from a delta store the baseline restore must use the BASELINE option and the delta restore must use the DELTA option The Delta backup cycle name used with the DELTA option of RESTORE must be the same Delta backup cycle name specified with the BASELINE option of RESTORE The COPY LISTDIR or READA
139. results in greater efficiency and improved performance When using MAXBLOCK for a backup to tape BACKUP interrogates the backup device determines its maximum block size up to 32760 bytes and imposes it MAXBLOCK also causes BACKUP to use a block size of 32760 for disk backups the maximum block size for almost any MPE iX backup device For example if storing to a 7978B or 7980 tape drive or creating a disk backup that will be DUMPed to one these tape drives or to a DDS drive maximum performance can be achieved by specifying MAXBLOCK on the STORE command If later a disk backup is performed that will be dumped to one of these tape drives the MAXBLOCK option should be specified on the STORE command for the disk backup MAXBLOCK imposes the following block sizes for the STORE command Model Description Block size Various DDS Various 8mm DLT 7974 7976 7878A 7878B 7979 7980A 7980XC 4mm cassette 8mm cassette DLT cartridge 1 2 tape 1 2 tape 1 2 tape 1 2 tape 1 2 tape 1 2 tape 1 2 tape disk varies by vendor approx 32Kb for HP varies by vendor most are 16Kb 32760 bytes approx 32 Kbytes 16384 bytes approx 16 Kbytes 16384 bytes approx 16 Kbytes 16384 bytes approx 16 Kbytes 32760 bytes approx 32 Kbytes 32760 bytes approx 32 Kbytes 32760 bytes approx 32 Kbytes 32760 bytes approx 32 Kbytes 32760 bytes approx 32 Kbytes BACKUP iX U
140. reuse Scratching a generation deletes all information about that generation from the TML database and updates file information accordingly TML provides both an automated method for scratching generations by which generations are scratched based upon various criteria and a manual method by which generations may be scratched explicitly by the user Automatic scratching Generation scratching is performed automatically when the TMLAUTOSCRATCH configuration option is enabled TMLAUTOSCRATCH is enabled by default but the setting may be specified by entering it with a YES or NO value gt TMLAUTOSCRATCH YES No Generations that are due to be scratched are determined each time the BACKUPPL program is invoked and scratched at that time in order to free up as many tapes as possible for any new backups Generations qualify for scratching when these two conditions are met 1 The expiration date based on the cycle s configured RETENTION period is less than or equal to the current date 2 The configured number of generations of the cycle to KEEP exists Manual scratching BACKUP iX User Manual 17 184 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide Generations may be scratched manually by using the SCRATCH CYCLE command to specify the name of the cycle and the number of the generation to be scratched gt SCRATCH CYCLE FULL GEN 10 In this example TML will scratch generation 10 of the FU
141. selected for store This includes dataset files that were not modified and would otherwise be excluded by date restriction For example to store all files in the AR accounts that have been modified today and all datasets of any modified database regardless of whether all datasets were modified make the following entry gt STORE AR T DATE gt 1 DBSTORE An important function of the DBSTORE option is to guarantee that either all or no constituent parts of a database are stored DBSTORE in non ONLINE stores eliminates the possibility that backup tapes could contain partial inconsistent database files such as when some dependent database files are missing or inaccessible When the DBSTORE option is used parts of a database are not stored without signaling errors The DBSTORE option employs an algorithm to detect dependent files and guarantee that all index files Jumbo chunks and AllBase connect files are included Both AllBase and TurbolIMAGE databases are supported as long as the AllBase product is present on the user system Individual messages are displayed to indicate if individual database dependent files are inaccessible or missing and when the list of dependent files cannot be recovered Whenever a database is excluded from a store because of dependent file errors a summary error is displayed in the Not Stored report Incomplete database processing When the DBSTORE option is specified ever
142. sequence of the desired backup within the backupset where 1 is the first backup in the backupset The sequence number does not reset on volume change e FIRST meaning the first backup in the backupset e LAST meaning the last backup in the backupset This is the default e Anumber preceded by a minus sign indicating a backup relative to the last BACKUP iX User Manual 18 252 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide backup May be used in combination with LAST e g LAST 1 e Anumber preceded by a plus sign indicating a backup relative to the first backup May be used in combination with FIRST e g FIRST 1 Note f the BACKUP option is not specified when listing the contents of an appended backup volumeset LAST is assumed Example To list the contents of the third backup of the backup volumeset gt LISTDIR T SHOW LONG BACKUP 3 Option DISKDIR When performing a LISTDIR on a tape backup the DISKDIR option specifies that the store directory should be read from disk This permits the files of a tape backup to be listed without requiring that any tapes be mounted since all information is contained in the store directory on disk Syntax gt LISTDIR DISKDIR dirfilename dirfilename A store directory filename of up to 16 characters optionally qualified with group and account or partially or fully qualified Posix filename Note If dirfilename i
143. starts to process the mounted tapes the following message is displayed Restoring files from all mounted tapes If the store directory volume is required for the restore that tape will be used immediately and no prompt for a tape to be mounted on that Idev will be displayed Otherwise that tape is unloaded and BACKUP will call for a new tape on that Idev if one is required Calling for more tapes Once a tape volume is finished and a new one is needed the following messages are posted showing those volumes that are still needed and asking that any of the needed volumes be mounted on that Idev The following tape volume s are still required for restore ABC126 Mount any of the required tape volumes on dev 15 Wrong tape mounted BACKUP will reject a mounted tape and request a replacement tape under various circumstances e The tape is not a member of the store volumeset being restored from as determined from the store directory volume or diskdir e The tape is part of the store volumeset but not required for restore e The tape has already been used for the restore and has been remounted e The tape is a member of an appended backup volumeset but does not contain any piece of the particular backup being restored BACKUP iX User Manual 13 148 Chapter 13 Backup Devices BACKUP iX Operations Guide Releasing backup devices when finished When BACKUP is finished with a drive it rewinds the volume and releases the dr
144. stores in the same backup cycle the command gt STORE T DELTA DC1 would be used giving the Delta backup cycle name DC1 If no Delta backup cycle name is specified with the baseline store the default cycle name will be DELTA So the command BACKUP iX User Manual 8 95 Chapter 8 DELTA Backup Module BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt STORE PAYROLL T BASELINE assigns the default a cycle name DELTA Subsequent delta stores related to this baseline could use a delta store command that either relied on the default Delta cycle name or used the default name DELTA explicitly gt STORE PAYROLL T DELTA or gt STORE PAYROLL T DELTA DELTA If all stores were to tape at the end of the week one baseline tapeset and multiple delta tapesets one tapeset for each delta store would have been created The tapes from these backups could be given a name such as the Delta cycle name as an internal label by using the LABEL option of STORE with both the baseline and delta stores or could be identified by other methods The next baseline store the initial backup for the next week s backup cycle could then reuse the same Delta cycle file name however a new set of tapes would be used and appropriately identified The weekly Delta backup cycle is only a suggested method There is no limit to the number of delta stores that can be made after a baseline However it is recommend
145. tape drive The result is that when the mounted volumes are full the remaining data to be stored is written into the filebuffer Once the backed up files have been fully stored into the filebuffer they are released for normal user access The data remaining in the filebuffer is automatically written to tape when the next tape volume s are mounted Performing a deferred backup uses more processes and internal resources and incurs greater overhead than other backup methods Therefore deferred backups are intended for use primarily during low processing periods The size of the filebuffer can be controlled using the DEFER or the older FILEBUFF STORE option and is declared in amount of disk sectors Note The DEFER and FILEBUFF STORE options should not be confused with the JCW BACKUPBUFFSIZE which is used to declare the block size or physical record used to write to the backup tape BACKUPBUFFSIZE is declared in bytes whereas the FILEBUFF and DEFER STORE options are declared in disk sectors 4000 sectors 1MB 5 50 Chapter 5 Backup Methods BACKUP iX Operations Guide The default size for the filebuffer is zero sectors which is the recommended setting when not doing a deferred backup Procedure for deferred backups The following is the procedure for performing a deferred backup 1 Calculate the size of the filebuffer as described below and declare it in sectors using the DEFER option or the FILEBUFF option with versio
146. tape should be terminated prematurely ON ERROR BACKUP can be configured using the ON ERROR function of the STORE command to take a particular action such as aborting the backup or executing a specified MPE command if a tape error occurs during a backup The following constructs are available ON ERROR DO mpecmd Executes the specified MPE command ON ERROR QUIT Aborts the backup on any error Tape Manager amp Librarian and tape reliability BACKUP reports the number of errors and retries that occurred for each tape in the Tape Status reports at the end of the store This Tape Status report information is saved by TML for later review and to identify unreliable tapes TML features for reporting tape reliability are SHOW CYCLE TAPES The number of times each tape in a generation has been used and the number of errors and retries that have occurred on the particular store are reported SHOW TAPE ERRORS The number of errors and retries that occurred on the last five stores to each tape SHOW TAPE USAGE The date of the first store to each tape as well as the number of times each tape has received a store Recovering data from a bad tape If a tape containing required data is of low reliability its contents should be copied to another tape If two tape drives are available the data can be copied from the bad tape on one drive directly to a good tape on the other drive using the COPY command Otherwise if only one tape drive is a
147. tape volume and save a copy on disk under its default filename in the current group account enter gt STORE T TAPEDIR SEP 1 DISKDIR This will create the store directory in the file BACKUPDF in the current group account If a store directory file already exists with that name an error message is displayed and the store operation is halted Either the file specified for DISKDIR must be purged or another name must be used To take the default of two copies of the store directory at the end of the last tape and also save it on disk under the filename FULLDIR in the current group account gt STORE T DISKDIR FULLDIR To write three copies of the directory at the end of the last tape and not save the directory on disk gt STORE T TAPEDIR 3 Daily store directory Using the filename specification feature of the DISKDIR option in combination with MPE iX system variables it is possible to save the store directory from each day s backup under a unique filename on disk Day of week In the following example the store directory from a partial backup on Wednesday is saved in a file named BKUPWED in the STOREDIR group The file left by the previous week s backup is purged SETVAR DAY LFT HPINTRODATE 3 FILE DIRNAME BKUP DAY STOREDIR RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt PURGE DIRNAME gt STORE T GETDATE DISKDIR DIRNAME EXIT If
148. than to be used as the file selection parameter The following example stores all files on the system that have had a state change since the last backup but excludes the TELESUP account gt STORE TELESUP T GETDATE A partial backup using the STORE command can also be performed without the GETDATE option by storing based on a parameter that indicates a specified date using the DATE option For example this command entry stores all the files on the system modified on or after December 1 2001 4 41 Chapter 4 Backup Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt STORE T DATE gt 12 01 01 This construct also allows an explicit time of day to be specified which is useful if more than one backup is performed on a given day For example if the previous backup were performed at lunchtime the evening backup could be performed with the command gt STORE T DATE gt 12 01 01 12 00 Files may also be selected by specifying a relative modification date rather than an explicit date For a partial backup the relative date would vary between 1 and 7 based on the number of days since the last full backup For example to store all the files on the system modified since yesterday gt STORE T DATE gt 1 Incremental backup An incremental backup is a type of partial backup that includes all files modified since the last backup rather than the last full bac
149. that each tape is used to its capacity Selection of the parallel versus the serial backup mode may be specified in the DRIVES option of the store command The restore and readall commands only work in parallel BACKUP iX User Manual 13 143 Chapter 13 Backup Devices BACKUP iX Operations Guide Differing backup device models If multiple backup devices of different models are used e g DDS2 and DDS3 all drives may not support the same block size or tape format Because BACKUP by default uses the maximum block size supported for certain tape drives the issue of what drives will be available for a restore should be considered When performing a restore a drive must be used that supports the maximum block size and format with which the backup was created The BACKUPBUFSIZE JCW may be used when storing to enforce a lower block size However usually there is no way to control tape format at least through JCW control Both topics are documented in Chapter 16 Maximizing Performance in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide Using the DRIVES option The DRIVES option of the STORE RESTORE and READALL VERIFY commands allows up to 64 backup devices For STORE the DRIVES option can be used to specify that the drives will be accessed either in a parallel fashion or serially For restore the DRIVES option can optionally specify the backup device that contains the tape volume with the store directory For READALL only parallel access to drives is us
150. the ARCHIVE group of their respective source accounts gt RESTORE T GROUP ARCHIVE If the specified group does not exist it may be created by using the CREATE option in combination with the GROUP option as shown gt RESTORE T GROUP ARCHIVE CREATE GROUP Note Some special rules and restrictions are imposed for the GROUP option when restoring spool files Refer to the discussion of Restoring spool files later in this chapter Changing the owner attribute By default the file owner attribute both username and account is preserved on restore The owner need not be a user of the target account the account to be restored into for the file to be restored The owner attribute for restored files may be changed through the OWNER option of the RESTORE command For example to change the owner of all restored files to MANAGER BACKUP iX User Manual 9 101 Chapter 9 Restore Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt RESTORE T PUB SYS OWNER MANAGER The OWNER option may be used in combination with the CREATE option to create the specified user if it does not exist as shown gt RESTORE T OWNER MGR CREATE OWNER Note Some special rules and restrictions are imposed for the OWNER option when restoring spool files Refer to the discussion of Restoring spool files later in this chapter Changing the creator attribute By default the file creator attribute both username
151. the COPY command from executing if they do not match Syntax gt COPY T1 LABEL volsetid TO With Output target tape This option writes a tape label containing the volsetid expiration date and comment to each tape volume Syntax gt COPY TO T2 LABEL volsetid expirationdate comment Parameters volsetid Specifies the user defined tape volumeset ID of the source tape volume set has a maximum of 6 alphanumeric characters and is case sensitive expirationdate Specifies the date on which all tapes in the tape volume set expire and before which it may not be overwritten specified in mm dd yylyy format BACKUP iX User Manual 18 229 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide comment Specifies the freeform user specified comment and has an alphanumeric string of up to 40 characters Examples To cause BACKUP to ensure that the source tape has a label with a volsetid of ARCHIVE gt COPY T1 LABEL ARCHVE TO T2 To make a copy of a tape with label ACCT that needs to expire on Sept 20 1991 and a comment ACCOUNTING COPY gt COPY T1 TO T2 LABEL ACCT 09 20 91 accounting copy Notes If the LABEL option is used when copying ANSI labeled tapes the VOLID option of the COPY command must also be specified gt COPY T1 LABEL ARCHVE VOLID vol3 TO T2 LABEL cannot be used with the CYCLE option Option OLM With t
152. the MAXBLOCK option of the STORE command be used to force the maximum block size for a backup based on what the tape drive can support But there may be circumstances under which a specific block size needs to be explicitly set Do this using the BACKUPBUFSIZE JCW BACKUP iX User Manual 22 383 Chapter 22 JCWs BACKUP iX Reference Guide Refer to Chapter 16 Maximizing performance in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide for block sizes used for various tape drives Also refer to Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for more information on the MAXBLOCK option of the STORE command Note Itis not possible to override the maximum block size that a backup device can support Any attempt to do so will reset the JCW value to the maximum block size supported by the backup device if detectable BACKUPCONTINUEIFANSILABELLED BACKUPCONTINUEIFANSILABELLED is an input JCW which may be set to disable the console request NMSTORE DIRECTORY will be omitted Continue Y N which pauses job execution and awaits operator reply when ANSI labeled tapes are used in a backup This JCW suppresses the console request so that the store will continue without operator intervention To suppress the console request use SETJCW BACKUPCONTINUEIFANSILABELLED 1 or SETVAR BACKUPCONTINUEIFANSILABELLED TRUE The store will proceed without a reply Use this JCW with caution BACKUPCOUNTNONARCHIVE BACKUPCOUNTNONARCHIVE is an inp
153. the drive logical devices with the AUTOREPLY or SEQUENCE keywords OLM requires that you specify a LABEL and VOLID when not using TML Option SHOW Defines display format of information about files stored in various ways The SHOW listing is sent to STDLIST under the formal file designator SYSLIST which may be redirected using a file equation Syntax gt LISTDIR SHOW showformat Parameters showformat May be one or more of the following delimited by commas SHORT SHOW LONG SECURITY OFFLINE DIRECTORY DATES FILENAME BACKUP iX User Manual 18 256 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide SHORT Lists the fully qualified filename ldev number disk address volume number file size in sectors and mnemonic file code For V6 60 and later only the fully qualified filename percentage of each file stored if a delta store file size in sectors and mnemonic file code are listed LONG In addition to the SHORT information lists record size file type EOF file limit blocking factor extents allocated and maximum extents FILENAME Lists the filename or pathname only across a full line Designed to provide a shorter listing for users with long POSIX pathnames DIRECTORY In addition to the SHORT or LONG information lists the names of all directory objects stored when the DIRECTORY option was specified DATES In addition to the SHORT LONG or DIRECTORY info
154. the most recent command e g the command entered 7 entries prior to the most recent command gt DO 7 Do the last command entered This is the default when DO is entered without any parameters gt DO Notes Use LISTREDO to see a numbered list of previous commands used in the current session of BACKUP DUMP Copies data from a disk backup file to tape in store format Syntax gt DUMP diskfile tapefile dumpoption dumpoption pop APPEND AUTOREPLY ldevlist BACKUP backupname CYCLE cyclename DRIVES n P S LABEL volsetid expirationdate comment MAXERRORS numerrors MAXRETRIES numretries NOLABEL OLM hostname libraryname NO ANSI PROGRESS minutes SEOUENCE 1devlist SHORT SHOW LONG DATES OFFLINE es DIRECTORY SECURITY FILENAME VOLID volid BACKUP iX User Manual 18 236 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Parameters diskfile Name of disk backup fileset as a maximum of 16 characters first character must be alphabetic and optionally qualified with group and account The diskfile may be specified using any legal MPE or POSIX syntax filename or may backreference a file equation that specifies DEV DISC tapefile Backreferences a file equation for the tape drive dumpoption One or more of the DUMP command options documented with their parameters in d
155. the name implies a store of files in both the POSIX and MPE iX namespaces and will be reported as a POSIX namespace store The following conversions are automatically performed are reinterpreted as meaning the entire system e is reinterpreted as meaning all files in the current directory and all directories beneath it e are reinterpreted as currentaccount meaning all the files in the current account and all directories and groups beneath them e means the current directory Mixed filesets MPE namespace filesets may be specified in MPE iX or POSIX format and POSIX filesets may be specified in MPE namespace format where pertinent MPE format and POSIX format fileset specifications may be mixed in the same command Including multiple filesets The fileset list may include multiple filesets delimited by commas For example to store all files in the AP AR GL and PAYROLL accounts gt STORE AP AR GL PAYROLL T Note Itis not required that filesets be declared in any particular order in the fileset list Selection using date and time restrictions Filesets may be selected using date restrictions based on last access date creation date modification date or state change date In each case time of day may also be used to qualify files BACKUP iX User Manual 6 60 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide Da
156. the stored files are displayed Option PROGRESS Specifies the time interval between percentage completed messages If this option is not specified progress messages are displayed every 5 minutes If BACKUP is run from a session progress messages are displayed on the terminal if run in batch progress messages are listed on the system console Syntax BACKUP iX User Manual 18 298 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt RESTORE PROGRESS minutes minutes The frequency of progress messages specified as an integer value between 0 and 1000 To suppress progress messages specify 0 minutes Examples To display progress messages every 10 minutes gt RESTORE T PROGRESS 10 TO suppress progress messages gt RESTORE T PROGRESS 0 Option SDATE See the page titled Options xDATE BDATE DATE MDATE and SDATE Option SELECT Selects files for restore based on filecode type and or size Syntax gt RESTORE SELECT selectspec ann selectspec OR ANDed and ORed specifications are evaluated from left to right Parentheses may be used to enforce grouping selectspec Files to select for restore in one of the following formats TYPE relop typespec CODE relop filecode SIZE relop eof relop For TYPE one of the following relational operators equal to lt gt not equal to For CODE and SIZE one of the following
157. they are effectively run time pipes Spool file backup The MPE iX Native Mode Spooler handles spool files as permanent disk files in the HPSPOOL account allowing them to be stored and restored with certain rules and restrictions BACKUP uses the spool file handling of MPE iX STORE as a model The rules and restrictions used by BACKUP for storing spool files include the following e Input spool files contained in IN HPSPOOL are designated as non archivable by MPE iX and are automatically excluded from store e Users can store spool files of which they are owner The owner of a spool file is known internally by the spooler and differs from the MPE ix file owner e Users with AM Account Manager capability can store files created by any user of their home account e When using the PURGE option of the STORE command the spool file is unlinked This means that its entry in the spool file directory is removed thereby informing the spooler that the spool file no longer exists e When using the PURGE option of the STORE command any checkpoint files related to the purged spool files are also purged BACKUP provides an easy method for storing all spool files contained in a specified fileset through the SELECT TYPE construct of the STORE command The following example stores all output spool files on the system that were created the previous day gt STORE OUT HPSPOOL CDATE 1 SELECT TYPE SPOOL Password pro
158. this backup were performed on Monday the store directory would be contained in the file BKUPMON This example would create a store directory file for each day of the week and overwrite them as new backups were performed therefore a maximum of seven files BACKUP iX User Manual 6 71 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide Note In this example the BACKUP PURGE command was used rather than the MPE PURGE command to purge the existing store directory file because the store directory file is privileged and cannot be purged with PURGE Date Alternately the store directory file from each backup could be saved without overwriting previous backup files by naming the file based on the day month and year rather than the day of the week In the following example the store directory is saved in a file in the STOREDIR group starting with the letter B appended by the year 2 digit the alpha month abbreviation and the day of the month SETVAR MONTH STR HPDATEF 6 3 FILE DIRNAME B HPYEAR MONTH HPDAY STOREDIR RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt STORE T GETDATE DISKDIR DIRNAME EXIT If this backup were performed on Wednesday March 20 1999 the store directory would be contained in the file BY9MAR20 Using this solution the user would need to purge store directory files as they became obsolete Reporting backup progress To keep the operator informed of the progress of the backup
159. this section information is provided about the TML file register its resource requirements file information loading the result if it is not maintained how the file register is updated and maintained how to generate various file information reports and how to use the ADD FILE SCRATCH FILE and SHOW FILE command operations and the TMLAUTOLOAD and TMLSAVELOGS configuration options The TML file register BACKUP s Tape Manager amp Librarian TML file register maintains information about all files contained on tapes for active generations This information includes such things as the last modification date and the tape ID of the store Such file statistics are referred to as file information File information can be selectively maintained for all generations or for specified generations or this facility can be disabled using a configuration option in TMLCONF the configuration file TML s reporting features permit all copies of specified files on all active unexpired backups to be identified and their file information to be displayed This functionality is similar in syntax and operation to performing a ListFile of the files in all active backups Additionally the file register allows reporting of all files belonging to a specific backup generation similar to regenerating the SHOW listing on demand and of all files on a specified volume set volset Resource requirements File register maintenance requires extra disk and CPU resou
160. to be stored PREVIEW may be used in combination with any other STORE command options When PREVIEW is used with the SHOW option the names of all files available to be stored are displayed and the report is titled FILES TO STORE rather than FILES STORED A STORE with PREVIEW generates the FILES NOT STORED report identifying the files that are unavailable for the store and why they are not available When used with the DBSTORE option database last store timestamps are not modified Similarly using PREVIEW with the SETDATE option does not modify the system last store timestamp PREVIEW does not extract information from TML cycles at this time Syntax gt STORE PREVIEW Example This command displays all files on a system that are currently open for writing and thus are unavailable to be stored along with the size of the intended store gt STORE BAC PREVIEW The following command could be used to verify that the file selection syntax used is correct gt STORE SYS PUB MARCH PAYROLL TEMP MARCH PAYROLL amp gt YR2001 MDATE gt 03 01 01 BAC PREVIEW SHOW PREVIEW could also be used in conjunction with the SHOW option to verify that files indicated in the STORE filesetlist will be stored and to check the space required for the store BACKUP iX User Manual 18 336 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt STORE SOURCE GL
161. to label tapes with an ANSI format label instead of using its proprietary label BACKUP s ANSI labels provide the same benefits as MPE iX labels but also provide better security and a standard format for interchange with non HPe3000 systems Note ANSI labeled tapes written by BACKUP iX use a proprietary tape format only the label is in standard ANSI format Note ANSI volsetid labels are case sensitive BACKUP iX User Manual 12 136 Chapter 12 Labeled Tapes BACKUP iX Operations Guide Unique tape labeling with the ANSI format For ANSI labels two identifiers are used for each volume s labels a volsetid and a volid The volsetid is the same for all volumes in the volume set The volid may be different for each volume Conventionally an MPE iX tape label may be specified via a file equation and the values specified in the file equation are then used to label each tape However with BACKUP the identifiers are specified in two ways depending on whether the store is directed by TML or not If TML is NOT directing the store the identifiers are specified in the LABEL and VOLID options of STORE and various other BACKUP commands If TML is directing the store the cycle name is used for the volumesetid and the TML tape number is used for the volid Enforcing the ANSI labeled tape standard BACKUP enforces the standards for controlling access to ANSI labeled tapes Most notable among these are e An ANSI labeled tape cannot be
162. to minimize the number of write requests because they generate logging activity and degrade performance For this reason write intensive tasks should not be run during an Online backup If write intensive batch processing is required during an Online backup it is recommended that the system be TUNEd appropriately for optimum performance BACKUP iX User Manual 7 92 Chapter DELTA Backup Module The BACKUP Delta module purchased as a BACKUP iX add on provides the ability to store entire files in an initial backup then store only the changes to those files in later backups within the same backup cycle Thus those later backups of even very large files could consume very little time and space A Delta backup cycle is invoked by the BASELINE option of the STORE command while later backups in the delta cycle are performed with the DELTA option A Delta restore would reduire both the baseline store and one delta store in the same Delta Backup cycle typically the latest This chapter will describe the operation and features of the BASELINE and DELTA options and the distinctions between them for both STORE and RESTORE In this chapter Find detailed information about Delta backups including these topics e Overview e Delta store operation e Standard and Online Delta backups e Delta restore operation e Procedural notes for using the DELTA module e Maximum number of concurrent Delta backup cycles e Errors and exceptional co
163. to the default information lists creation date last access date last modification date and last state change date DIRECTORY Lists all directory structures MPE groups accounts and POSIX directories selected for STORE when the DIRECTORY option of STORE is specified The report identifies each directory file in the CODE field as an MPE account ACCT MPE group GROUP or POSIX directory HFSDIR SECURITY In addition to the default information lists file owner and access matrix FILENAME Lists the pathname of restored files Filename cannot be combined with any other SHOW format OFFLINE Lists SHOW output to both the screen and printer If BACKUP is run from a session and the SHOW format is not specified SHORT format is imposed if run in batch LONG format is used More than one format may be specified in any combination with the exception that LONG and SHORT may not be specified The SHOW listing is sent to STDLIST under the formal file designator SYSLIST which may be redirected using a file equation For example to generate a SHOW listing with basic information about files and their dates to the system line printer RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt STORE T SHOW DATES OFFLINE Refer to Chapter 24 Reports in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for examples of reports generated using the various SHOW formats Total files stored and not stored reporting In addition to the SHOW listing BACKUP reports th
164. used for display purposes only For media measured in length such as tape or cartridges specify the number of feet For DAT and other media measured in time indicate the number of minutes of storage time Freeform alphanumeric string of up to 6 characters surrounded by single or double quotes if it contains embedded spaces Identifies the size of the media that should be selected for stores The SIZE classifier is used to group and maintain media of various lengths e g SMALL MEDIUM and LARGE and allows TML to select the media of the appropriate length for storing the cycle For example a cycle used for regular transfer of data to another site and requiring only a 600 tape reel could be designated as SMALL regular backups could be stored to LARGE 2400 reels while archives could be stored to XLARGE 3600 reels The SIZE classifier is used instead of absolute measurement to allow proper media selection for cycles that could be stored to more than one type of media and therefore could have inconsistent tape lengths e g the same cycle could be stored to either TAPE or DAT The SIZE parameter in the cycle file must match the size value when creating tapes ADD TAPES For example Cycle file SIZE large ADD TAPES SIZE large The SIZE parameter is not case sensitive A freeform alphanumeric value of up to 8 characters with no embedded spaces It is recommende
165. user suspension beginning at 7 00 PM gt STORE T ZERODOWN SYNCWAIT 19 00 To perform a zero downtime backup with suspension and subsequent synchronization deferred until the SYNCENABLE function is invoked gt STORE T ZERODOWN SYNCWAIT To then invoke the SYNCENABLE function RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT INFO SYNCENABLE Option TAPEDIR Specifies for a tape backup if the store directory should be written to a separate tape volume as well as the number of copies to write If TAPEDIR is specified with no parameters or if the option is excluded two copies of the store directory are written to the current tape Multiple copies of the store directory are written by default to provide redundancy in the event of a tape error The purpose of writing the store directory to a separate volume is to speed up restore since restore does not have to read past the data on the tape to reach the directory Note If TAPEDIR is specified for a disk backup it is ignored BACKUP iX User Manual 18 342 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax gt STORE TAPEDIR SEP numcopies SEP Specifies that the store directory should be written to a separate tape volume If not specified the store directory is written to the end of the current last volume Specifying SEP also causes an additional copy of the BACKUPPL program and support files to be written to the beginning of the tape directory volume for
166. using PREVIEW to make sure that multiple backups are not competing for the same tapes For more information on previewing backups refer to Backup Schedule Maintenance in this chapter How TML determines tape requirements TML determines the number of tape volumes to select for a cycle based on its configuration and past backups as follows 1 If the number of required volumes was defined for the cycle as an explicit value e g 5 tapes TML uses it literally If the value was left blank the default number of required volumes are used If a was specified TML looks up the number of volumes that were required for the latest generation of the cycle that used the BACKUP iX User Manual 17 213 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide same media as required by the device currently being stored to and uses it If no generations exist and the number of required volumes is non zero 1 required volume is selected 2 TML then adds to this a number of spare volumes defined for the cycle to accommodate more data that may exist since the last backup of the cycle and to allow for tape errors which may require a tape to be terminated prematurely If the spare tape count was left blank the default number of spare volumes is used 3 The required tapes and spare tapes are added together to determine the number of tapes that will be selected for the backup Note SIZE is never taken into consideration when determining req
167. version of all files be restored from the last full backup and the last two partial backups The Restore command is issued from a system other than the library host so the hostname is included in the OLM parameter gt RESTORE t CYCLE FULL GEN 0 CYCLE PART GEN 0 CYCLE PART GEN 1 amp gt OLM pogo mylib AUTOREPLY 7 A Restore command using the OLM and DISKDIR parameters A Restore command using the DISKDIR parameter will be considered attended Thus no attempt will be made to access any tape drives until after BACKUP iX has examined the disk directory file to determine what tapes are needed Though this Restore is considered attended if the needed volumes are in the library then no operator action is required At that point the required library drives will be opened in the order specified in the SEQUENCE parameter or implied in the AUTOREPLY parameter if the SEQUENCE parameter is not specified If the DISKDIR parameter is not used the current attended vs unattended processing will be used with OLM used to mount volumes gt RESTORE t DISKDIR bdir OLM mylib DRIVES 2 SEQUENCE 14 18 Performing a Copy with OLM The OLM parameter of the Copy command tells BACKUP iX to copy data from one tape to another One or both tapes can be in a tape library This example copies data from a tape on Idev14 to a tape in ldev 13 in the library named mylib attached to the host system named
168. volid 000115 this command could be used gt RESTORE T MYFILE LABEL 000115 TML and ANSI labeled tapes TML will create labeled tapes using either BACKUP iX proprietary labels or ANSI format labels The VOLUMELABEL option in the TMLCONF configuration file specifies which label format to use either BACKUP or ANSI the default is BACKUP The volsetid assigned by TML is the cycle name truncated to six characters as required and upshifted Note that in prior releases of BACKUP ixX the volsetid was the same as the volid of the first volume The volids are determined by TML s normal tape selection process The LABEL and VOLID parameters are not required and should not be specified for a TML involved backup or a restore with Restore Wizard BACKUP iX User Manual 12 139 Chapter 13 Backup Devices BACKUP supports HP and third party backup devices for its various operations Backup devices used by the HPe3000 include 1 2 tape DDS 8mm DLT and tape libraries In this chapter Find detailed information regarding backup devices on the following topics including e Considerations for various backup device types e DDS drives e 8mm drives e DLT drives e Autochangers and stackers e Tape libraries e Automatic REPLY to console tape mount requests e Using multiple backup devices e Duplicating a backup from one device to another The following commands and options are discussed as the topic
169. volume numbers are automatically determined and displayed when restoring a file Alternately to determine the volume numbers for a fileset without actually performing a restore issue an appropriate RESTORE command specifying the PREVIEW option LONG format In addition to the information displayed in the SHORT format of the SHOW listing the LONG format of SHOW displays information about file size characteristics and the allocation on disk This is the default format if the command is executed in a job and the SHOW format is not specified CODE SIZE TYPE EOF LIMIT R B MX X OUTSPOOL XXXXX HHHX XXX H HHHHHE HHHHHHHH HHH HH ER XXXXXXXX SIZE Record length of the file indicated by B for bytes or W for words TYPE File type characteristic EOF End of file in records BACKUP iX User Manual 24 401 Chapter 24 Reports BACKUP iX Reference Guide LIMIT File limit in records R B Blocking factor MX X Number of maximum extents means unlimited maximum extents compared to number of extents currently allocated OUTSPOOL The old output spool file name in OUT HPSPOOL for restored spool files DATES format In addition to the information displayed in the default format of the SHOW listing SHORT or LONG the DATES format of SHOW displays the dates associated with each file CREATED ACCESSED MODIFIED STATE CH mm dd yy mm dd yy mm dd yy mm dd yy CREATED Date the file was created in mm dd yy format ACCESSED
170. volumeset If APPEND is specified for the first dump of a backup to a tape volumeset the command is rejected To create a new appended backup volumeset thereby overwriting all backups on tape do not use the APPEND option BACKUP iX User Manual 18 237 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax gt DUMP APPEND Example To create a new backupset containing the FULL disk backup gt DUMP FULL T SHOW To append the PART disk backup to the backupset gt DUMP PART T SHOW APPEND Option AUTOREPLY Automatically REPLYs to console requests for a specified list of Idev s Syntax gt DUMP AUTOREPLY ldevlist Idev Logical device number of tape drive ldevlist The logical device number s of the backup device s for which BACKUP should automatically reply specified in one of the following formats e A specific Idev e g 14 e Arrange of Idevs e g 14 16 e Selected Idevs e g 14 17 e Any combination of the above e g 14 16 18 22 24 Example To dump to the tape on Idev 7 and 8 and have BACKUP automatically reply to the console requests gt DUMP TEMP T DRIVES 2 AUTOREPLY 7 8 Option BACKUP Assigns a name when dumping to the tape backup by which the specific backup is later referenced Syntax BACKUP iX User Manual 18 238 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide
171. was saved under its default filename BACKUPDF in the current group account gt RESTORE T SOMEFILE DISKDIR To restore all files using a stored directory saved under the filename FULLDIR in the current group account gt RESTORE T DISKDIR FULLDIR Once BACKUP processes the store directory on disk it calls for each tape by its sequential volume number as it is needed Note When restoring with DISKDIR be sure that the correct directory file is being used that is the directory file created during the backup selected for this restore Other backups using DISKDIR could purge a DISKDIR file if their DISKDIR file has an identical name This could then lead to a restore attempt using an incorrect directory file The correct directory file is always available on tape because during a store to tape using the DISKDIR option it is created on tape as well as on disk The store directory can be processed from tape by excluding the DISKDIR option of the RESTORE command Store directory on tape If the store directory is processed from tape DISKDIR option not specified BACKUP requests that the tape volume containing the store directory be mounted first BACKUP reads the store directory from tape displays the required tape volumes and then calls for each tape as needed If using multiple backup devices for restore the DRIVES option may be used to specify which Idev contains the store directory otherwise all devices
172. working and is also the point at which all files on tape equal those on disk including all logging data The point in time that the event occurs varies based on the type of backup ONLINE or ZERODOWN or on the particular additional options used with the store e For an ONLINE backup following the syncpoint when all data has been stored BACKUP will display the message Logging completed all files have been released e Fora ZERODOWN backup the specified action is to occur when all suspended processes have been resumed e lf the FILEBUFF store option is specified in combination with ON RELEASED for a deferred backup the MPE command is invoked when the last file is stored into the filebuffer rather than to tape e If the NOLOCK store option is specified in combination with ON RELEASED the MPE command is invoked just as files begin to be stored Note ON RELEASED is invoked before the store directory has been written to tape and for TML before the TMLDB database has been updated This event is the point in time during an online backup at which users are interrupted This varies based on the type of online backup ONLINE or ZERODOWN e For an ONLINE backup it is when the Ok to synch console request is displayed e Fora ZERODOWN backup if the BACKUPSYNCYN JOW is set it is when the OK to synch console request is displayed otherwise it is when process suspension begins BACKUP iX User Manual 18 331 Chapter 18 BACK
173. would be done on Monday Tuesday Wednesday and Thursday Now with BACKUP and its Delta backup module a complete baseline backup could be done on Friday as before except the BASELINE option is included on the STORE or FULLBACKUP command to make it a Delta baseline store On the weekdays partials could be done as always using STORE or PARTBACKUP but now the DELTA option is included to make them delta stores Although a typical baseline store uses a fileset of any valid store fileset may be selected Note A delta store fileset must be either a subset of the baseline store fileset or the same as the baseline When the files selected in the backups are to be restored both the baseline store and the last delta store in that cycle are needed The restore is run first from the last baseline store in this example from last Friday The last delta store Thursday s is then run to restore the files as of Thursday s backup Syntax The BASELINE and DELTA options are used with both the STORE and RESTORE commands The syntax for each option is gt STORE BASELINE deltacyclename gt STORE DELTA deltacyclename gt RESTORE BASELINE deltacyclename gt RESTORE DELTA deltacyclename The deltacyclename can be a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters starting with an alpha character All alpha characters are upshifted to capitals If a cycle name is not specified the cycle name DELTA
174. write access to files being backed up for those files to be included in the store Users typically are instructed to exit their applications for just a few minutes while the synchronization point completes Because very few system resources are used for Online backup logging synchronization may be delayed until users can conveniently exit files Note that such delay may increase the time required for synchronization The operator then responds to the REPLY request the syncpoint occurs and any file changes are appended to the end of the backup When the store is finished the operator having been informed by BACKUP may notify users that they can resume normal access to their files When restoring a file from an Online backup only the contents of the file as of the end of backup are restored Any data that was changed subsequent to end of the store is not restored Therefore the file will be restored as it was at the end of the backup Online backup example BACKUP s traditional Online backup not Zero downtime is invoked with the ONLINE option of the STORE command In a traditional Online backup the store operation will wait for operator reply The operator may control when the reply is entered BACKUP iX User Manual 7 80 Chapter 7 Online and Zero Downtime Backup BACKUP iX Operations Guide Please be aware that the need for an operator to reply may be eliminated by using the ZDT backup functionality available in the Onli
175. 1 Volid Used D00500 000010 000011 000131 000132 000133 000213 000214 000215 001010 Expires 09 22 99 09 27 99 09 27 99 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 09 27 99 00 00 00 00 00 00 09 27 99 TML Operations Guide Scratched Home pool 09 22 99 09 27 99 09 27 99 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 09 27 99 00 00 00 00 00 00 09 27 99 SALESDB The EXPIRED qualifier of SHOW POOL lists all tapes in the specified pool that have expired on or before the current date The following command lists all expired tapes in the PART cycle pool gt SHOW POOL PART EXPIRED Length Seq 2400FT 2 2400FT 2 2400FT 2 Volid Used 000202 12 000203 14 000213 2 Expires 09 28 99 09 28 99 09 27 99 Scratched Home pool 00 00 00 PART 00 00 00 PART 09 27 99 The SCRATCHED qualifier The SCRATCHED qualifier of SHOW POOL lists all tapes in the specified pool that have been scratched on or before the current date The following command lists all scratched tapes in all cycle pools gt SHOW POOL SCRATCHED Media DDS TAPE TAPE TAPE CTAPE PART SALESDB The PROTECTED qualifier Length Seq 90M 1 2400FT 2 2400FT 3 2400FT 1 150FT 1 Volid Used D00500 2 000010 17 000011 17 000213 2 001010 27 Expires 09 22 99 09 27 99 09 27 99 09 27 99 09 27 99 Scratched Home pool 09 22 99 09 27 99 09 27 99 09 27 99 09 27 99 SALESDB The PROTECTED qualifier of SHOW POOL lists all tapes in the sp
176. 14 16 18 22 24 Examples To copy from Idev 7 and have BACKUP automatically REPLY to the console request gt COPY T1 AUTOREPLY 7 TO T2 To copy from the tapes on Idevs 7and 8 to the tape on Idev 9 with REPLYs for Idevs 7 8 and 9 done automatically BACKUP iX User Manual 18 225 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt COPY T1 DRIVES 2 AUTOREPLY 7 8 TO T2 AUTOREPLY 9 Notes e AUTOREPLY option also determines the order in which the backup devices are opened e DRIVES option is required when AUTOREPLY specifies more than one drive e The AUTOREPLY option may not be used with VOLID for ANSI labeled tapes options Option BACKUP With Input source tape Specifies which backup in an appended backupset to copy Syntax gt COPY T1 BACKUP backupspec TO With Output target tape Assigns a specified backupname to the copied backup by which it can be referenced later Syntax gt COPY TO T2 BACKUP backupname Parameters Backupspec References the desired appended backup in one of the following formats e A user assigned backup name with up to 8 characters alphanumeric first character must be alpha e Anumber indicating the sequence of the desired backup within the backupset where 1 is the first backup in the backupset The sequence number does not reset on volume change e FIRST meaning the first backup in the backupse
177. 19 TMLDB run time parameters ie ee ee se ee AR Ge ee ee ee ee ee Re Re ee ee ee ee 25 420 2 6 Error Handling ses N an oes N Ee eeii Sra 26 421 BACKUP iX User Manual XIV BACKUP iX User Manual this Chapters EE EE EE EE ES ee eaters ae veer a essen 26 421 Completion JES Eed ESSEN wee eee ae 26 421 Tape errors and retries during store and restore esse ee ee 26 422 Restoring a file with an FFOF eee ee ee ee ee AR ee AR ee ee ee ee ee 26 423 DISKE VO GMOS acn ER N 26 423 Tape drive erorS oeir erie Ee eg ER Ne Ee ee ea 26 423 System AD OMS 2a in n A T A sie 26 423 Internal eTo anra eesti aA inate 26 423 TML tape identification labeling errOrS ese ee ee ee Ge Re ee 26 423 Inconsistent TML generation ee se ee GR Re ee ke ee ee Re ee ee 26 423 Restored TMLDB database ee ee ee ee ee AR ee AR ee ee ee ee ee 26 424 TML file register inconsistency ees ee ee Re ee ee Re ee ee Re ee ee ee 26 424 TMLDB database inconsistency ee ee se Re ee ee Re ee Re ee ee ee 26 425 Elle EA ORE EE LE ER LE Eat 426 nisthiS GIOSSANY 34 ius EE EE Ee EE EE De iad EE ee EE eed 426 el oat tM AE AR EE EE N N OE EE ate 436 XV About this manual About This Manual Organization This manual is organized into three major sections The beginning pages These include the title pages a List of ORBiT Offices Table of Contents About This Manual and Installation Procedures which indicate how to install or reinstall t
178. 2 Syntax conventions Xvii 18 222 19 347 20 365 Ad ER ST xvii 18 222 19 347 20 365 19 347 xvii 18 222 19 347 20 365 SYSGEN Uil EES EEN EERS ee Ee ke ERG 4 48 435 SYSLIST file designator ee 6 73 23 397 System aborts ees ee ee AE Re ee ee 26 424 Tape backups ioiii ieira inienn 5 50 restoring WOY aur ees ee ee ke ee AE AA ee 111 Tape drives block SIZE aiser SE RUN Ge hve 16 176 22 384 cCoNfIguratiON ees ee E ee ee 26 424 el EE ER NE 26 424 fast 16 177 placing online ee ee Re RR ee ee ee 21 376 powerfall ER dies eae ee De EE NE EE 26 424 using multiple 13 143 16 177 18 315 18 322 Tape errors ese se se se ee 22 387 22 389 26 423 Tape identification labels se ee ee ee 435 automatic printing c eeee 17 203 17 212 CUSTOMIZING EE EE EE RR EE 17 202 se LA seas aed Genes 26 424 FOPMALS 00 0 cece ee ee ee ee ee ee RR Ee ee ee 17 201 23 396 labeling new tapes n se 17 192 language seke ee ees 6 75 17 201 22 394 DENISE EE EE EE EE teksts Pe Ee ie eed 6 75 17 201 TMLABLP file designator esse esse ees 23 398 TMLABPRT program 21 380 tape library See OLM See OLM See OLM See OLM See OLM Tape library see ee ee ee AA ee 13 143 14 151 Tape pools global pool is ED EE se be eed Ee ae id 17 189 home poel ESE nied 17 189 Tape retries 18 264 18 327 22 387 22 389 26 423 Tape Status report se ee ee ee ee ee ee 15 171 for
179. 2 35 18 247 Online module Online backup iS gek ee Geb ek ge 7 79 ZDV backup isi EE gee ie se ee OE ag 7 79 Online Status report LOGGING il RR EE EE N 24 400 OP capability 3 36 3 37 18 321 21 376 OPUIMIZALON iese EER aa aae 18 335 options summary Eers er EE 18 272 ORBINSTP program sesse see ees ees 1 18 21 377 ORBIT Library Manager See OLM See OLM See OLM See OLM Pary OMO S ii so ee EERS EE Ge EE ee EE ee 26 423 PART event file ese ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 23 397 PARTBACKUP command 4 41 18 258 18 308 example ME EE ERNA RR DEGREE nine tes 4 41 IJGCOMF fil oreh ceiaio tena einna 23 397 Partial baCKUD iese ee ee ee ee ee ee ee RR ee 4 42 433 example EE Ee BEE Ee ee be se sae 4 41 Percentage completed messages 6 72 18 298 18 337 DUMP command esse ee ee ee ee ee ee 18 243 Performance se ee ee ee ee Re ee ee 16 173 Vee AE AS EE 433 ASSIGNING tapes ee ee ee ee ee ke ee ee 17 191 available tapes is ee ee ee se Re ee ee ee ee 17 194 expired tapeS see ee ee Re ee ee ee 17 195 global pool ee ek ee AR ee AR ee ee 17 214 BACKUP iX User Manual 440 Index NOME POO RE AE 17 191 17 214 protected tapes see ee ee Ee ee 17 195 scratched tape meien ee ee Re AE 17 195 selecting tapes for Store ee ee 17 214 transferring tapes 17 191 PREVIEW encensar aik 6 75 11 120 18 298 PREVIEW CYCLE command 19 357 24 411 OXAM EK OR N 1
180. 30 MEDIA DDS LENGTH 150FT SIZE SMALL CYCLE SALESDB Labeling new tapes New tapes are not initialized with a volid by TML until the first time they are used by BACKUP in a store For this reason the LABEL TAPE command should be used to generate tape identification labels for each tape Troubleshooting point If a STORE to tape is attempted and TML says that no tapes are available even though a tape has just been added to the cycle or general pool check that the size attribute specified in the cycle file matches the size attribute of the tape that was added If they are not same ensure that they are same by modifying the size attribute in the cycle file or that of the tape that was added BACKUP iX User Manual 17 192 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide Scratching tapes Tapes are scratched by eliminating the generation to which they belong This can be done either automatically or manually Refer to the section in this chapter titled Generations for information about scratching cycle generations Deleting tapes Tapes which have excessive errors and or retries or which show signs of physical damage should be discarded Accordingly when discarded they should be deleted from TML Unprotected tapes may be deleted by using the DELETE TAPE command and specifying the volids of the tapes to be deleted For example gt DELETE TAPE 10 12 21 would delete the tapes with volids 000010
181. 39 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide S Specifies serial handling of multiple tape drives Note If DRIVES option is not specified then default of one drive is assumed If P or S is not specified then P is the default behavior Example To DUMP a disc to disc backup D2D onto two drives 8 and 9 in a serial fashion and have BACKUP automatically reply to Console tape requests gt DUMP D2D T DRIVES 2 s Autoreply 8 9 Option LABEL Writes a tape label containing the volsetid expiration date and a comment to each tape volume LABEL ensures that the correct tape is used and that an unexpired tape is not overwritten By default a label is written in proprietary BACKUP format To write ANSI format labels the VOLID and LABEL options are used together Syntax gt DUMP LABEL volsetid expirationdate comment Parameters volsetid Specifies user defined tape volumeset ID maximum of 6 alphanumeric characters expirationdate Specifies the expiration date of all tapes in the tape volume set in mm dd yyyy format Tapes may not be overwritten before this date comment Specifies a freeform user written comment an alphanumeric string of up to 40 characters Example To write the label ACCT with an expiration date of 09 20 2000 and the comment ACCOUNTING to each volume in the dump gt DUMP PART T LABEL ACCT 09 20 2000 ACCOUNTING Option
182. 415 tape reliability 0 ee ee ee ee AR ee ee 15 170 TAPES MOde ii iss Eg geneties 17 188 24 415 TYPE MOde iets sek ees esa 17 187 24 416 SHOW FILE command esse esse sesse see eke ee 19 360 ALL Co AE aain 17 207 BDATE keyword esse see ee ee ee ee ee 17 209 CYCLE KeyWord aneian ee ee ee ee ee 17 209 file register not maintained esse 17 205 FIRST keyword see ee se ee ee ee ee 17 208 GENERATION keyword sesse sees ee ee ee 17 209 LAST keyword ee ee ee ee ee Ke ee 17 208 report OUtDUL ss Ese neste arenes aes 24 416 SHOW listing sesser ee ees se ee ee ee ee ee 24 402 434 files IM SOIT OR ee ese Es See ge ee 26 423 26 424 for online bacKUP see ee ee ee ee ee ee 24 403 Output filename 23 397 SHOW option of LISTDIR commana 15 172 versus SHOW FILES commana 17 188 SHOW POOL command esse see ees ee 19 362 ALL tapes ee ee ee ATA 17 194 AVAILABLE tapes iese ee ee ee ee ee ee se ee ee ee 17 194 EXPIRED tapeS see ee ese se ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 17 195 PROTECTED tapes iss see ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 17 195 report OUDU eee ee ER ER ER ER aA 24 417 SCRATCHED tapes esse se ese ee ee ee ee 17 195 SHOW TAPE command iese sees se se sees ee 19 363 ERRORS mode 17 197 24 417 24 418 FILES mode iss ees 17 197 17 205 24 418 USAGE mode ese eke ee 17 196 24 418 Size classification ee ee ee ee RA Ee
183. 5 PileS texts ER ES EE RE EE ER ER aie ee SE ae ee 431 Filesetlist ees ee ee ee 18 311 437 Fileset scien eases ee steed 11 121 excluding ie eke ee 6 62 11 124 11 125 automatic ee se RR AR Ee RA ee ee ee 6 63 ale eie RE EE EE te 11 122 lae EE EE OE OE OE 11 123 wildcards ees ee 6 59 11 121 11 122 FILESNOTRESTORED JCW 22 390 26 423 FILESNOTSTORED JCW 22 390 26 423 FILESRESTORED JOW 22 390 26 423 FILESSTORED JOW 22 391 26 422 FINFO filea 23 397 FO QUENCY EE EE 431 Full backup Est EE oe EE Ee eee 431 example SA EES De a Ee ee 4 40 FULL cycle filens et edie Ee Bee sg See SR EE Id 23 397 FULLBACKUP commanid 18 246 18 308 ESME nies EE ee RA 4 40 GETDATE option ees ees ee se ee ee ee ee 18 324 IJGCOMF file ee eke ee ee ee RA Ee 23 397 Gerieratlons saute tee EE EE ee ER ge gs 431 ASCII file count ee ee ee Re Re ee 17 187 binary file count 17 187 compression percentage ee ee 17 186 Creation acta cote Ade ela GE nen ats 17 184 duration of Store iese ee ee RR ee ee ee 17 186 expiration date ee ee ee ee renerne 17 186 file COUPLE EE EO eter ER Ee EE 17 186 filebuffer size iek ee Ee Re ee 17 186 IMAGE file Count 2 ecceceeeeeeeeeeeteeees 17 187 INCONSISTENL ee ees ee ee se ee ee 26 424 26 425 KSAM file COUDE ee se se ee ee ee ee ee ee 17 187 logging sectOrs ee ee ee ee 17 186 modification
184. 7 198 MEDIA parameter esse esse ee ee ee ee ee 17 199 pre selecting tapes ie se Re ee 17 213 CEPOS e EE RE 24 411 Previewing backups ee ee ee ke ee ee 17 199 Printer TOF TEPOMS SE SE ist Hede aele Bee 24 410 for tape identification labels ee ee 6 75 Prior backup date se ee ee ee RR Re Re ee ee 434 FULLBACKUP command ees see sees 18 246 GETDATE option of STORE esse ese 4 41 IIGGONE file Ese KEER Ge SO GE ER Dee RE 23 397 PARTBACKUP command s s s 18 258 FOSCUING P E EE ee 25 420 SETDATE option of STORE esse see 18 339 Privileged files ER EE 3 36 Prod fileSt i EE EE EE Re ee GE Ee Ee gr 434 Program files see ee ee ee ee RR Re ee 6 61 11 123 selecting for restore see 18 300 18 338 Programs commands amp scripts command files ek ee ee Re 21 375 JOD streams ee ee ee ee Re ee Re ee TAE 21 375 PFOQIAMS EE AE EE EE iA 21 375 edel N EE OE a 21 375 PURGE command eie see ee ee ee ee ee ee 18 259 Ee ER N EA NE ET 18 259 READALL command 15 171 18 259 AUTOREPLY option ese ese ee ee ee ee ee 18 261 CYCLE OPHON res is ee edie e 18 261 DRIVES OPHON ee ese ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 18 262 example st ie Ee EE EG eg ee Ee 15 171 LABEL OptION te Ed sel Ee se Re ee ge sd 18 263 MAXERRORS OPDHON ee se ese ee ee ee ee 18 263 MAXRETRIES ODHON ee se sees ee ee ee ee 18 264 OLM ODHOR ss Ee EE tere an ede gee Ed ee 18 264 ON ODUON ie ee EE ae etna Pg De 18 265 PROGRES
185. 80 TMLAUTOLOAD configuration option 17 206 TMLAUTOSCRATCH configuration option 17 184 17 212 TMLCONF file ee ee ee 17 210 23 398 TMLCYCLES configuration option 17 212 TMLDB database ee ee ee ee ke ee ee ee 23 398 configuration option ee ee 17 212 23 398 BACKUP iX inconsistency 26 425 26 426 eresio a OE AE 17 212 reporting features table e eee 24 410 run time parameters is ese ee ee ee ee 25 421 Schema files setae Ee EER tates 23 398 TMLEDBSG file Eise Re ben taster ge Se Eg EG 23 398 TMLLANGID JCW 0 6 75 21 380 22 394 TMLLIST file designator cece 23 398 TMLPRINTLABELS configuration option 6 75 17 203 17 212 TMLRESTORE configuration option 17 213 TMLSAVELOGS configuration option 17 205 17 206 17 212 17 213 23 398 Transmission eFFOFS ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 26 423 TurDOIMAGE XL ee se ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Ge ee ee ee 436 Vee AE EE E 436 Unattended backup unattended Zero downtime backup 7 88 Validating backups eie ee ee ee ee ee ee 15 170 VERIFY program esse ese ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 15 170 VERIFY command esse ss se sees ee ee ee ee 15 171 VERIFY program sesse 15 170 15 171 21 381 Validating backups ee see ee ee ke ee 15 170 VERIFY utility oiea see ees se ee ee ee Ge Ee ee 15 171 Volidi EE EE ED E Ge eg 436 Volume eau siete ei ee a ee 436 VOLUME event Used
186. ACKUP Commands and Chapter 20 OLM Command Line Interface Commands in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for command syntax details Overview The ORBIT Library Manager OLM is supported on MPE iX version 6 0 or later and first appeared in V6 60 of BACKUP iX Full library support is available with the BACKUP iX and OLM products Each BACKUP iX command with the OLM parameter informs BACKUP iX that the volumes and the archive devices are under the control of the ORBiT Library Manager OLM and that BACKUP iX must communicate with the OLM process to move volumes The OLM command line interface OLM Cl provides a way to use the library outside of BACKUP ixX as well as perform the necessary tasks to prepare OLM to provide library services to BACKUP ix The use of library support is even easier with TML since it automatically determines what volume IDs are needed for BACKUP iX store and restore commands However volume IDs can be specified directly in appropriate BACKUP iX commands Tape libraries and terminology A tape library is a robotic device that contains several elements or components one or more arms medium transport elements drives data transport elements slots storage elements and zero or more ports import export elements Drives do the I O of data to from a tape volume Robotic arms move volumes around between the various other library elements Sometimes the arm is nothing more than the mechanism moving
187. ACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt RESTORE T LOCAL So if the restore was issued from the location pub sys the new location created for the restored files would be pub sys D1 D2 FN Option MDATE See the page titled Options xDATE BDATE DATE MDATE and SDATE Option NEWDATE Allows the last modification and last access dates to be set to the time and date of the restore operation However the creation date CDATE does not get updated to the restore date Syntax gt RESTORE NEWDATE Example To restore manufacturing programs so that the access and modification dates are set to the time of restore gt RESTORE T PROG MFG NEWDATE Option NOLABEL Disables checking of BACKUP tape labels By default NOLABEL is not imposed Specifying NOLABEL can speed up the restore since BACKUP tape label checking is not done This is especially true when the DIRECTORY option has been used since both the label and the directory are written to the beginning of the tape When a directory is present on the tape the backup must skip over the directory in attempting to read the label This could take several seconds The NOLABEL option does sacrifice some security and therefore should be used with caution It could allow the wrong tape to be used for restore Syntax gt RESTORE NOLABEL Example To ignore any BACKUP tape label BACKUP iX User Manual 18 292
188. ACKUP iX Reference Guide and is case sensitive Example To create a two volume backup with a volsetid of ACCT an expiration date of 2 20 2000 a comment of ACCOUNTING PERIOD 1 and volids of ACT123 and ACT124 gt STORE T LABEL ACCT 02 20 2000 ACCOUNTING PERIOD 1 VOLID ACT123 ACT124 Note e The VOLID option may not be used with either the SEQUENCE or AUTOREPLY option unless the OLM option is used as well e The VOLID option must be used with the LABEL option Options xDATE ADATE CDATE DATE MDATE and SDATE Selects files for store based on ADATE Last access date and optionally time CDATE Creation date and optionally time DATE Last label state change date and optionally time same as SDATE option DATE may restrict selection to either all files in the store or a specific fileset MDATE Last modification date and optionally time SDATE Selects files for restore based on last label state change date and optionally time same as SDATE option The state change timestamp tracks when a file was last modified as well as when the file s label containing security and ownership info was last modified Syntax gt STORE xDATE relop datetimespec XDATE Represents use of one of the ADATE CDATE DATE MDATE and SDATE options Do not use XDATE relop For CODE and SIZE one of the following relational operators equal to lt less than gt greater than lt less than or equal to gt greater
189. ACKUP iX User Manual 19 364 Chapter 20 OLM Command Line Interface Commands In this chapter With the addition of the ORBIT Library Manager module to BACKUP ix the ORBiT Library Manager Command Interface OLM Cl program is also available to control a tape library outside of BACKUP ix The OLM Cl commands provide the functionality for setting up OLM and tape libraries for use with BACKUP ix tape handling commands and for other tape library management tasks The OLM Cl commands ADD LIST etc are first listed with a brief description and then presented individually in alphabetical order with a description syntax diagram parameter list and examples Parameters and their formats are described in the table OLM CI Parameter Definitions OLM CI commands may be entered after first running the OLM Cl program or may be called directly from the MPE prompt bye using an info string to specify a single OLM command Nothing is case sensitive in the olm Cl except for the device file name which is used in the add command Syntax conventions BACKUP iX syntax conventions as of release 6 5 are reflected KEYWORD Literal keywords input User input May select one element Must select one element sd May repeat prior element s ss May repeat prior element s use comma if parm is repeated suey Must enter certain prior element s may enter others eto All keywords and user input are required unless enclos
190. AM Key files are sometimes shown with the code KSAMKk KSAMKL files NM KSAM implementation data and key integrated in a single file BACKUP iX User Manual 431 Glossary BACKUP iX KSAM64 files Large file implementation of KSAMXL introduced in MPE iX 6 5 KSAM64 specifies a KSAM file that is capable of supporting file sizes beyond 4GB but is in every other way identical to a KSAMXL file All BUILD command parameters that refer to KSAM or KSAMXL files also apply to KSAM64 files Length User defined 6 character alphanumeric string which describes the length of a particular tape volume Used for display purposes only to assist in locating tape volumes by their physical characteristics LP Typical MPE iX device class for system line printer Printed output is sent to this device class by default MAKECAT An HP supplied program which creates message catalogs Media The type of material onto which the backup is written e g tape cartridge DDS Monitor A program found in both the Online and delta modules that tracks and saves changes to the files groups and accounts selected for backup The Delta monitor is a memory resident program that records all changes to files both during and between backups For an Online backup a monitor is a logging function that tracks changes to the files being stored only for the duration of a backup MPE XL Former name of MPE ix the operating system on the HPe3000 Non archiv
191. An unattended backup method by which data is written to a set of permanent disk files rather than tape The data may be copied to tape in store format when convenient DLT Short for Digital Linear Tape a type of magnetic tape storage device originally developed by DEC and now marketed by several companies DLTs are inch wide and the cartridges come in several sizes ranging from 20 to over 40 GB DLT drives are faster than most other types of tape drives Encryption The act of encoding data through a keyword such that it cannot be decoded without supplying the same keyword File directory A directory of files contained in the backup which may be displayed using the LISTDIR command File information Information about files contained on active generations Created in file information log files which are loaded into the file register File register A collection of file information stored in the TMLDB BACKUP iX User Manual 429 Glossary BACKUP iX File types File type designators used with the SELECT option and TYPE keyword of STORE and RESTORE are IMAGE TurboIMAGE XL database root files datasets including jumbo and large datasets and TPI files DB TurboIMAGE XL and AllBase database root files datasets including jumbo and large datasets and TPI files KSAM CM KSAM data files The original CM KSAM implementation Each KSAM file consists of one data and one key file KSAMK CM KSAM Key files KSA
192. B LOG A M 0 9 _ All files in PUB SYS beginning with the string LOG followed by 2 characters first a letter from A to M then a number from 0 to 9 SYS PUB LOG H All log files in PUB SYS BACKUP iX User Manual 6 59 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide ORBIT DATA TMLDB The TMLDB database in DATA ORBIT When using POSIX symbols in file selection e A trailing means all the files that reside in the current directory and below A trailing means all the files in the current directory but not below e Ifthe fileset begins with a dot or a slash it is assumed to be in POSIX syntax e The characters composing the name may be selected from the following set Filenames may contain the characters A Z a z 0 9 _ A and e Pathnames that exceed 1024 characters are rejected as are directory names that exceed 256 characters e An object directly below the root account and group directories whose name exceeds 16 characters except valid MPE iX group and account names is illegal If specified the invalid objects are reported in the SHOW listing MPE iX syntax selection of POSIX files A leading is translated in such a way that if it is the first component of an MPE namespace filename the full name is converted to a POSIX name with current account and group filled in as necessary Therefore any fileset specification that includes an as the first component of
193. BACKUP iX Operations Guide Note Ranges may not be specified for fileset exclusions Default restore fileset A restore fileset must be specified Default filesets are invalid Specifying files in an indirect file Files may be specified in the command line as shown in the previous example or in an indirect file Rather than specifying the files to restore within the RESTORE command it is possible to instead declare them in an ordinary file which is then referenced by the RESTORE command An indirect file is recommended when the fileset specification is too long to fit comfortably on the command line The indirect file may be contained in any group account provided that the user has read access to it The indirect file is referenced in the RESTORE command prefixed by an exclamation point lor carat An indirect file may contain one or more fileset specifications per line For example the indirect file SPECIAL PROD containing CSL DATE lt 5 LOG H SYS 1 2 3 and then referenced on the RESTORE command as gt RESTORE T SPECIAL PROD is equivalent to the command gt RESTORE T CSL DATE lt 5 LOGHHH SYS Warning Care must be taken when using fileset exclusion in an indirect file BACKUP implicitly appends a comma to the end of each line in the file which causes each line to be treated as a global exclusion To declare a local e
194. BACKUP iX Reference Guide e The NOPATH option must be used in combination with the ACCOUNT CWD GROUP or LOCAL options it may not be specified alone e If the NOPATH and GROUP options are specified together the ACCOUNT option must also be specified Option OLDDATE This option is no longer required to be specified as the default behavior of the RESTORE command is as though the OLDDATE is specified Nevertheless Backup iX s RESTORE command still considers this a valid option for backward compatibility and hence is documented in this manual OLDDATE prevents the last modification and last access dates from being reset to the current date when restored When OLDDATE is used the creation date CDATE does not change and the modification date and the last label state change date and optionally time retain their original values and are not updated to the restore date Syntax gt RESTORE OLDDATE Example To restore manufacturing programs while preserving their former access and modification dates gt RESTORE T PROG MFG OLDDATE Option OLM With the OLM option a user may specify the host name and the library name to restore data from tape media located within a robotic tape library Only one library can be referenced at a time This option is available only with the OLM module installed and the OLM provider daemon background job running on the library host machine Either AUTOREPLY or the
195. BACKUP iX commands The new OLM parameter of the BACKUP iX commands indicates 1 that olm and a library are to be used for the commands 2 the name of the library and 3 optionally the name of the host the library is connected to This parameter is available only with the OLM module installed and OLMRPCD and PORTMAP jobs running on the appropriate machines see previous section When the OLM parameter is used in a command BACKUP iX uses OLMRPCD to mount and dismount volumes for that command One library can be referenced in each command For more on the OLM parameter of the STORE RESTORE DUMP LISTDIR and READALL commands see the section in this chapter titled Using BACKUP iX commands with the OLM parameter or for details on syntax for all BACKUP iX commands and options see Chapter 18 BACKUP iX Commands in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide OLM CI The ORBIT Library Manager Command Interface OLM Cl program provides a way to control a tape library outside of BACKUP ix It can be run on the library host or another system in the network OLM Cl commands provide the functionality for setting up OLM and tape libraries for use with BACKUP iX tape handling and other tape library management tasks See the sections in this chapter entitled Prepare OLM to Support a Tape Library and Other OLM CI Commands for examples of how to use OLM Cl to perform library management tasks and also see Chapter 20 OLM Command Line Interface Comma
196. BIT Note The designated cycle group may contain only cycle files other types of files should not be present in the cycle group and are ignored by TML TMLAUTOSCRATCH The TMLAUTOSCRATCH configuration option describes whether cycle generations should be automatically scratched when they expire upon invoking the BACKUPPL program or whether they may only be scratched explicitly using the SCRATCH commana YES gt TMLAUTOSCRATCH NO If not specified the default for the TMLAUTOSCRATCH parameter is YES TMLSAVELOGS The TMLSAVELOGS configuration option describes whether file information logs should be saved on disk so that they can be loaded either automatically or manually or if these logs should not be created YES gt TMLSAVELOGS NO If not specified the default for the TMLSAVELOGS parameter is YES TMLAUTOLOAD The TMLAUTOLOAD configuration option describes whether file information should be loaded automatically at the end of the store or whether file information loading will be invoked manually through the ADD FILE command YES gt TMLAUTOLOAD NO If not specified the default for the TMLAUTOLOAD parameter is YES TMLPRINTLABELS The TMLPRINTLABELS configuration option describes whether tape identification labels should be printed automatically upon completion of each store BACKUP iX User Manual 17 212 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Libra
197. BRARY hacker dltchg DRIVE 0 SLOT 3 This would move the volume from drive 0 to slot 3 in ditchg on hacker olm olm gt Default Library Pogo Stick Drive 0 olm gt Load 001234 olm gt UNLOAD Say volume 001234 is initially in slot 5 The above example moves the volume from slot 5 to drive 0 and then back into slot 5 olm olm gt Default Library Pogo Stick Drive 0 olm gt Move Port 1 Drive 0 olm gt UNLOAD Will move the volume in port 1 to drive 0 and then into the first empty slot Note that the above move is not supported in all libraries UNLOCK When BACKUP iX uses olm it locks the drive so that another user cannot change volumes until the BACKUP iX operations are completed In the event of a system crash or a BACKUP iX failure which is so BACKUP iX User Manual 20 373 Chapter 20 OLM Command Line Interface Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide serious that BACKUP iX cannot complete its termination clean up BACKUP iX may not unlock the drive before it terminates If this happens no other process will be able to access the locked drive Use the UNLOCK command to free the drive manually once you are sure no process has it legitimately locked The LIST LIBRARY III DRIVE nn command will indicate any locks under the Locker column Note the id of the locker and enter them in the UNLOCK command Syntax UNLOCK LibraryID DriveName DriveLocation LOCKER lockid Par
198. Command Print tape ID labels explicitly LABEL CYCLE LABEL TAPE Cycle generation assigned to LABEL TAPE BACKUP iX User Manual 24 407 Chapter 24 Reports Generation number stored to Density used by store Error count on current use Error count on last 5 uses Expiration date Files contained on First use by store Home pool Last modification date of files Length BACKUP iX Reference Guide SHOW TAPE FILES SHOW TAPE USAGE LABEL TAPE SHOW TAPE FILES SHOW TAPE USAGE LABEL TAPE SHOW CYCLE TAPES LABEL TAPE SHOW CYCLE TAPES SHOW TAPE ERRORS LABEL TAPE SHOW POOL SHOW TAPE USAGE SHOW TAPE FILES SHOW TAPE USAGE SHOW POOL SHOW TAPE SHOW POOL SHOW TAPE USAGE Length default DEFAULT TAPE Tape reports continued Attribute reported Command Media SHOW POOL Media default Pool assigned to Pool default Pool home Retry count on current use Retry count on last 5 uses SHOW TAPE all modes DEFAULT TAPE LABEL TAPE SHOW POOL DEFAULT TAPE SHOW POOL LABEL TAPE SHOW CYCLE TAPES SHOW TAPE ERRORS BACKUP iX User Manual 24 408 Chapter 24 Reports Scratch date Sequence in store volumeset Sequence of selection Size classification Size classification default Store date time STOREJCW value from store Usage count BACKUP iX Reference Guide SHOW POOL SHOW TAPE USAGE LABEL TAPE SHOW TAPE USAGE LABEL TAPE SHOW POOL SH
199. D when not using TML Examples To perform a dump gt DUMP TEMP T AUTOREPLY 14 OLM pogo mylib amp gt LABEL FULL VOLID 100002 See Chapter 13 ORBIT Library Manager in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide for more examples of performing dumps to tape media located on a robotic tape library Notes e All volumes used in a BACKUP OLM operation must be located in the library at the start of the operation or imported into the library during the operation e The OLM keyword is also available with the STORE LISTDIR DUMP READALL and VERIFY commands Option PROGRESS Specifies the time interval between percentage completed messages If this option is not specified progress messages are displayed every 5 minutes If BACKUP is run from a session progress messages are displayed on the terminal if run in batch progress messages are listed on the system console Syntax gt DUMP PROGRESS minutes minutes Indicates the frequency of progress messages and is specified as an integer value To suppress progress messages specify 0 minutes Example To display progress messages every minute BACKUP iX User Manual 18 243 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt DUMP TEMP T PROGRESS 1 To suppress progress messages gt DUMP TEMP T PROGRESS 0 Option SEQUENCE Specifies the order in which the multiple backup devices are opened Syntax
200. DD FILE Loads file information into the file register for selected generations ADD TAPE Adds new tapes into tape pool s for a specified cycle or into the global pool CHANGE TAPE Changes attributes of existing tapes DEFAULT CYCLE Displays current cycle attributes and sets default attributes for new cycles DEFAULT TAPE Displays current tape attributes and sets default attributes for new tapes BACKUP iX User Manual 19 347 Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide DELETE CYCLE Deletes cycle and its corresponding cycle file LABEL CYCLE Prints tape identification labels for specified cycle generations LABEL TAPE Prints tape identification labels for specified tapes PREVIEW CYCLE Displays the next scheduled backup date of all cycles or the next scheduled backup date and the specific tapes required for a specified cycle SCRATCH CYCLE Scratches a generation of a cycle thereby scratching its associated tapes SCRATCH FILE Unloads file information for selected generations SHOW CONFIG Displays information about TML configuration SHOW CYCLE Displays cycle generation backup attributes to the screen and or printer SHOW FILE Displays file backup attributes to the screen and or printer Unloads file information from the file register for selected generations while leaving the generation information intact SHOW POOL Displays backup attributes to the screen and or printer Shows tapes in pools and th
201. DISKDIR When listing the contents of a tape backup specifies that the store directory should be read from disk ENCRYPT Specifies that store volumeset has been secured or encrypted the encryption method and the encryption key LABEL Validates volsetid specified against volsetid in tape label prevents directory listing if they do not match BACKUP iX User Manual 18 251 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide OLM Permits LISTDIR to search one or more tape volumes in a robotic tape library SHOW Defines display format of information about stored files VOLID Specifies ANSI format tape labels and the volids for up to eight backup volumes Option AUTOREPLY Automatically REPLYs to console requests for specified Idev Note The AUTOREPLY option is invalid and ignored for a disk backup Syntax gt LISTDIR AUTOREPLY ldev LDev The logical device number of tape drive Example To list the directory of the backup volume on Idev 7 and have BACKUP automatically REPLY to the console request gt LISTDIR T AUTOREPLY 7 Option BACKUP Specifies a backup in an appended backupset Syntax gt LISTDIR BACKUP backupspec Parameters Backupspec References the desired appended backup in one of the following formats e A user assigned backupname by which the backup is referenced Up to 8 characters alphanumeric first character must be alpha e A number indicating the
202. E ER EN 17 190 volumes required for store ees 17 199 wrong tape mounted during store 17 214 Tapeset EE EE cake GE RES RA EE 435 Temporary files se ee ee ee ee RA ee 4 46 435 The OLM module ese ee ee ee ee 14 152 The OLM option ee ee ee ee ee RR Ee Ee ee 14 152 The OLM provider iese ee ee ee ee ee 14 151 TML Configuration file ese ee ee ke ee ee 23 398 Operational notes ee ee ee 17 213 Restore Wizard iese ee se 18 242 18 294 TML command ADD FILE SE SE EE A ache eae 19 348 ADD TAPE einai Be SEE Ee ee 19 349 CHANGE TAPE iese seer Es ee Se dese des See ed 19 350 DEFAULT CYCLE e ee ees ee ee taii 19 352 DEFAULT TAPE Gees eb see esis 19 353 DELETE CYCLE se ees ser es eds see gede BOE Ge 19 354 DELETE TAPE gs ee ee Ee veeg AE bede ie 19 355 LABEL CYCLE iii se bee gs sb ec i 19 355 LABEL TAPE 1 ED Ee ee AE Bee see sy bee 19 356 PREVIEW CYCLE ees ees ese ee ee ee ee ee 19 357 SCRATCH CYCLE ese see es se iiin 19 357 SCRATCHFILE esse se ee ee ee se ee ee ee ee 19 358 SHOW CONFIG ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 19 359 SHOW CYCLE ese ee se ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 19 359 SHOWEILES EE ena de Eed ede ee ee Ee 19 360 SHOW POOLS tnd es Ee ge eek ee eed ee 19 362 SHOW TAPE Ee Ee Ee ke Pe gee ee EN Ee 19 363 TML Program a ee ee RAAS 2 24 TML Wizard command list EE EE tease 19 347 TMLABLP file designator 6 75 17 201 23 398 TMLABPRT program sees ees ee ee ke ee 21 3
203. E iX STORE BACKUP iX User Manual 16 174 Chapter 16 Maximizing Performance BACKUP iX Operations Guide Adjusting store optimization In performing a store BACKUP analyzes the storage of data on disk and applies various optimization techniques to take advantage of the locality of data being backed up This can result in a faster backup but may fragment files on tape so that the content of any file is written in pieces on a single tape volume or across multiple tapes in the store volumeset The amount of optimization with which the store is run determines the amount of fragmentation the lower the optimization the lower the file fragmentation With low optimization files are contained on a single reel or may span consecutive tape volumes with high optimization files may be spread out over all the tapes High optimization generally results in improved performance although performance may be the same as with a low optimization or perhaps worse depending on how widely files are spread out on the system This can vary from backup to backup The OPTIMIZE option of the STORE command is used to select the amount of optimization If not specified low optimization is performed resulting in a fast store and restore A different optimization factor that fragments files more may be specified to speed up store but this could slow the restore BACKUP uses optimization factor 1as the default value Valid optimization factors are 1 Low optim
204. E relop modifydate modifytime FIRST offset LAST offset ALL Parameters filesetlist Files to display specified in the form filesetspec filesetspec filesetspec Note A maximum of 200 filesetspecs may be specified Parameters continued filesetspec Files to include in and or exclude from the display in one of the following formats fileset xDATE relop datetimespec fileset fileset xDATE relop datetimespec fileset fileset fileset fileset fileset Traditional MPE files may be specified in file group account format where group account default to user s current logon if not specified POSIX files may be specified in directory filename format Fileset specifications may include the and wildcards in any position Filesets preceded by a minus sign are excluded and multiple exclusions may be specified for any fileset A minus sign must have a leading space if specified for exclusion of POSIX filesets Ranges of POSIX files and MPE files in POSIX syntax may be specified using regular expressions Neither the starting or ending file need exist CYCLE Defines the tape volume s home pool cyclespec The name of a cycle or for all cycles If is specified TML loads file information for only those generations which require loading GENERATION Specifies which generation s to select for restore value Specified in one
205. EE EE EE nie Ge 14 154 20 367 GONNEGT canton cere tases eho 14 157 DEFAULT SE ir ee Ede EE ee Ge N DE Ge he 14 157 DEL ELE ier tatiana ete tana eet 14 157 EXPOR Direnni a ep ee 20 368 BACKUP iX IMPOR T ee ee ee oe era ae thease 14 155 BR 14 155 14 157 14 158 20 369 EOAD EER RE Ra Re sees geed 14 159 20 371 OEELINE sesse eed ees Gee ese 14 160 20 371 ONLINE iese ses ete ese sae 14 160 20 371 RENAME ees se ee ee ee ee 14 155 14 156 20 372 UNLOAD oe ana Leste etes ee 14 159 20 373 OLM HOS ne OE EE 14 150 14 152 Online bacKUP se 7 79 433 access requirements ee se ee ee ee 3 38 delaying synchronization 7 88 disk space utilization ee ee ee Re ee 7 80 example EE oe Ee SE ER EE sg ee 7 80 7 85 files accessed during ees ee ee ee 7 91 files created during ees ee ee ee 7 91 files modified during 7 91 files with attributes that change during 7 92 invoking dependent processing 5 7 84 locking store bits ee ee ek ee 18 328 operation AE RE EE ne 7 80 performance considerationS ees ee 7 92 restoring TOM EE RE EER ER see ee ave 111 restoring from procedure ees ee ke ee ee 112 synchronization ee ee 7 80 22 388 SYNCWAIT option ee ek eke ee ne 18 342 Zero downtime ee ee ee ee Re ee ee 7 84 Zero downtime backup 00ee 18 346 ONLINE backup example ES EE eb eed Ed ge di 18 312 Online help subsystem
206. ENCRYPT option of the STORE commana it is necessary when restoring to specify the encryption method and key If ENCRYPT is not specified on restore for an encrypted backup or if its attributes are specified incorrectly the files will not be properly decrypted and restored If the backup was encrypted using the proprietary algorithm a value of 1 must be specified if the DES Data Encryption Standard algorithm was used the value 2 is specified if the AES Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm was used the value 3 is specified The key is case sensitive and a key of less than 8 characters is padded with blanks If no key is specified 8 blanks are used The algorithm and key must be the same as those used to encrypt the backup Note Encryption keys are case sensitive for the fast and DES algorithms they must represent hexadecimal characters for the AES algorithm For example to decrypt and restore a backup which was encrypted using the DES algorithm and a key of SECRET gt RESTORE T ENCRYPT 2 SECRET To decrypt and restore a backup which was encrypted using the AES algorithm and key files KEY 1 and KEY2 gt RESTORE T ENCRYPT 3 KEY1 KEY2 To decrypt and restore a file that was encrypted in a backup using the fast algorithm and a key of PROTECT gt RESTORE T SOMEFILE ENCRYPT 1 PROTECT Both the encryption method and key will default if not
207. ESE RA ee Ee ee ties 6 61 IMAGE databaseS iese ese se ek eke ee ee ee ee ee ee 6 61 KSAM fles Es EE EE inte ehh inst 6 61 EargesrileS it RE ie ee RE oe ed 6 61 Program MeS erii Ee eth ge Ge Pe se 6 61 SpoolTiles is EE ce Sitar EE ee de 6 61 Symbolic LINKS anca n ee ke ee a ee ke ee 6 61 VPLUS fileS in EERS EE De OE Ge ee es 6 61 EILEBUEE JOW MEE Nee erge eed eeue did 22 390 Eilebuifef s EE EE N ee EG EE DE 5 50 allocating largest possible ee ee ee 5 52 Calculating size ee ee ee ke ee ee Re ee 5 52 disk device fOF ee ee ee 18 321 EILEBUER JCW winded 22 390 performance ee ee ee Ge Re ee ee ee ee 16 177 size for a generation ee ee 17 186 BACKUP iX Files internal ss se ER RE ee oe Re Re ge EE so 23 395 modification date and time 17 188 17 197 ON AADC 2 2 N ER ER 17 197 allieopies AE ation 17 207 by backup date ese ee ee ee ee ee 17 209 by cycle Ee EERDER Ke SERS eke i cates ee 17 209 by generation ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 17 209 earliest COPY 20 EE N 17 208 latest COPY c wakinw lade ate cena 17 208 overwriting EXISTING see se ee ee ee 11 129 reporting features table ese ee 24 406 reporting on restored 11 128 restore filesef ee ee ee ee 11 125 store date and time iii se ee ee ee 17 197 store tileset ii es EA eg Di 6 59 17 180 Files and file designators File designators ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 23 395 Files internal ee Re ee Ee AA ee ee 23 39
208. EV JOB NAME PIN PROGRAM STEP 10S LOADPRGS OPERATOR SYS 69 LOADTAPE 14 20 OPERATOR SYS 37 LOADTAPE 14 102 MGR SYSTEM IRMS ssb source system 103 JOE MANAGER SYS DISCFREE c 112 DEBBIE OPERATOR SYS IRMS ssb source system BACKUP iX User Manual 7 85 Chapter 7 Online and Zero Downtime Backup BACKUP iX Operations Guide 79 IRMS IRMS IRMS S44 101 JOHN DEVELOP 93 B p20700ps prod 84 QEDITNM PUB ROBELLE T p20700ps S45 111 DAVID MANAGER SYS 54 SHOWPROC job s The following processes are related to those above and will not be suspended S44 101 JOHN DEVELOP 93 B p20700ps prod 89 p20100n dev 91 p201333 dev Retry Continue or Abort R C A MAX CHARS 2 If any sessions or jobs are still active after the timeout period they are reported to the system console in two reports one for processes that BACKUP was not able to suspend and the other for related processes Both unsuspendable jobs and sessions are displayed with the job number ldev number job or session logon ID PIN and the active program and step Son processes are indented two spaces The first report contains all processes that could not be suspended The second report shows processes that are related to the unsuspendable processes which were themselves not suspended because the entire process tree could not be suspended The father main process whether it is suspendable or not is shown in both reports to identify the process tr
209. FIED SHOW CYCLE MODIFIED SHOW CYCLE all modes SHOW CYCLE TYPE SHOW CYCLE TYPE BACKUP iX User Manual 24 406 Chapter 24 Reports Last modification date and time of files Length of media stored to Logging sectors online Media stored to Program files stored Retry count on each volume Retry count on each volume Scratching auto or manual Sectors of disk stored Spool files stored Store directory copies on tape Store directory filename Store directory on separate volume Store directory volume Store directory volume exists on disk STOREJCW value STOREJCW value Time elapsed duration Usage count of each volume User who performed store Volid of volumes stored to Volume count stored to Volumes stored to Volumesetid first volume volid VPLUS files stored Write requests online Tape reports BACKUP iX Reference Guide SHOW CYCLE FILES SHOW CYCLE TAPES SHOW CYCLE STATS SHOW CYCLE TAPES SHOW CYCLE TYPE LABEL CYCLE SHOW CYCLE TAPES SHOW CONFIG SHOW CYCLE STATS SHOW CYCLE TYPE SHOW CYCLE DIRECTORY SHOW CYCLE DIRECTORY SHOW CYCLE DIRECTORY SHOW CYCLE DIRECTORY SHOW CYCLE DIRECTORY LABEL CYCLE SHOW CYCLE CREATION SHOW CYCLE STATS LABEL CYCLE SHOW CYCLE TAPES SHOW CYCLE CREATION LABEL CYCLE SHOW CYCLE TAPES SHOW CYCLE CREATION SHOW CYCLE STATS LABEL CYCLE SHOW CYCLE TAPES SHOW CYCLE CREATION SHOW CYCLE TYPE SHOW CYCLE STATS Attribute reported
210. HH GHHHHHHH HHS hh mm HER HHH HHH Cycle Cycle name Gen Absolute number of generation within cycle Created Date generation of store was completed in mm dd yy date format Files Number of files in backup Sectors Number of sectors of uncompressed disk space stored Buf size Number of sectors used by filebuffer Com overall compression percentage Time Duration of backup Vol Number of volumes on which backup is contained Log sec Number of sectors of logging data Dyn files Number of files that changed status during backup modified created renamed purged or saved online only TAPES option Displays tape volumes used for cycle generations with one line for each tape in each cycle listed by sequence number within cycle generation Cycle Gen Created Seq Volid Media Length Den Used Retry Error Dir XXXXXXXX mm dd yy XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX BERE HHHH HHHHH HHRHH HHH Cycle Cycle name Gen Absolute number of generation within cycle Created Date generation of store was completed in mm dd yy date format Seq Relative sequence of volume in store volumeset for this backup Volid Volid of volume Media Type of media on which data is stored Length User defined tape length BACKUP iX User Manual 24 414 Chapter 24 Reports BACKUP iX Reference Guide Den Density at which data was written to tape 800 1600 or 6250 blank for DATs and cartridges for which density is not meaningful Used Number of times tape has been sto
211. IRECTORY DISKDEV device DISKDIR dirfilename DRIVES numdrives A SEQ UENCE 1dev 1 S ENCRYPT encryptionmethod key keyfile1 keyfile2 FILEBUFF numsectors GETDATE LABEL volid expirationdate comment VOLID volidlist MAXBLOCK MAXERRORS numerrors MAXRETRIES numretries NOLABEL NOLOCK ERROR FILE filename SUSPEND RELEASED DO mpecommand SYNCPOINT SYNCWAIT VOLUME k k KKK storeoption syntax continued on next page BACKUP iX User Manual 18 308 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide k storeoption syntax continued from previous page ON ERROR QUIT OLM hostname libraryname NO ANSI ONLINE ONVS volumeset OPTIMIZE optimizationfactor PREVIEW PROGRESS minutes PURGE SELECT selectspecl l oe Foes J OR SETDATE datetimespec SHORT SHOW LONG SECURITY OFFLINE DIRECTORY DATES FILENAME SYNCWAIT time TAPEDIR SEP numcopies ZERODOWN timeout DATE ADATE CDATE relop mm dd yylyy hh mm MDATE days SDATE BASELINE deltacyclename DELTA CODE relop numeric filecode TYPE relop typespec SIZE relop eof selectspec IMAGE KSAM SPOOL PROG ASCII BINARY BYTE SYMLINK DEVLINK LARGE typespec BACKUP iX User Manual 18 309 Chapter 18 BAC
212. IRST meaning the first backup in the backupset e LAST meaning the last backup in the backupset e Anumber preceded by a minus sign indicating a backup relative to the last backup May be used in combination with LAST e g LAST 1 e Anumber preceded by a plus sign indicating a backup relative to the first backup May be used in combination with FIRST e g FIRST 1 If the BACKUP option is not specified on the COPY LISTDIR or RESTORE commands for an appended backup LAST is assumed Examples of RESTORE from an appended backup volume For example to restore the AP database from the last backup on the backup volumeset gt RESTORE T APDB DATA AP BACKUP LAST To restore the TEST SOURCE group from the next to last backup on the backup volumeset BACKUP iX User Manual 112 Chapter 10 Restore Methods BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt RESTORE T TEST SOURCE BACKUP LAST 1 or gt RESTORE T TEST SOURCE BACKUP 1 To restore the TEST SOURCE group from the second backup on the backup volumeset gt RESTORE T TEST SOURCE BACKUP FIRST 1 or gt RESTORE T TEST SOURCE BACKUP 1 To restore some programs from the backup named PROGS gt RESTORE T FIN PROG AP BACKUP PROGS Restoring over a network To restore files across a network a disk backup must be performed on a remote machin
213. IST command will show various pieces of information about a given library BACKUP iX User Manual 20 369 Chapter 20 OLM Command Line Interface Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax LIST LibraryID LIST LibraryID DRIVE n n DriveName LIST LibraryID SLOT n n LIST LibraryID Port n a LIST LibraryID VolumelD In the first format all elements in the library are listed In formats 2 4 one or more elements of the specified type are listed In the last format only the element with the specified VolumelD is listed Examples olm gt LIST LIBRARY hacker dltchg Lists the entire library and its contents olm gt LIST LIBRARY hacker dltchg DRIVE Lists all the drives in the library and their contents olm gt Default LIBRARY hacker dltchg olm gt LIST Port 2 4 olm gt LIST slot 207 The two commands will list the information for ports 2 4 and slot 207 olm gt LIST 000100 This would list information for volume 000100 and the library element it is in LOAD The LOAD command moves a volume from a slot into a drive BACKUP iX User Manual 20 370 Chapter 20 OLM Command Line Interface Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax LOAD LibraryID SlotID DRIVE name number Example olm gt LOAD LIBRARY hacker dltchg SLOT 3 DRIVE 0 This would move the volume from slot 3 to drive 0 in ditc
214. If during the backup it is determined that the number of volumes are insufficient TML selects additional volumes one by one and reports them on volume mount requests If TML is unable to open the database for read write access to perform this task the store is aborted Result of wrong tape mounted TML expects upon requesting a volume that either a labeled volume of the matching label will be mounted or an unlabeled new volume will be mounted If neither the volume with the requested label nor an unlabeled tape is mounted permission is requested at the console to overwrite the mounted wrong tape as shown BACKUP volume 2 on ldev 7 with id 000263 does not match Ok to overwrite tape Y N Reply N to this prompt The mounted tape is rejected and an opportunity is provided to mount the correct tape BACKUP iX User Manual 17 214 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide REPLY 38 N Tape startup error on ldev 2 unloading volume 2 Please re mount volume 2 on ldev 7 BACKUP will attempt to rewrite tape At this point mount the tape volume requested by BACKUP If the requested tape volume does not exist or cannot be located abort the backup assure that the correct tape is available and restart the backup Note Itis possible to override the request and force the mounted tape to be accepted but this will cause the volume to be labeled with an inappropriate volid This results in b
215. KUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Parameters tapefile Backreferences a file equation for the tape drive If not specified the current username is imposed as the tapefile name diskfile Name of disk backup fileset as a maximum of 16 characters first character must be alphabetic and optionally qualified with group and account The diskfile may be specified using any legal MPE or POSIX syntax filename or may backreference a file equation that specifies DEV DISC filesetlist Files to store specified in the form filesetspec filesetspec filesetspec Note A maximum of 200 filesetspecs may be specified filesetspec Files to include in and or exclude from the store with optional date and time restrictions in one of the following formats fileset xDATE relop datetimespec GETDATE fileset fileset fileset fileset fileset Filesets are defined the same as for MPE Traditional MPE iX files may be specified in file group account format where group account defaults to current if not specified and may include the and wildcards in any position POSIX and MPE files may be specified in directory oasename format Filesets preceded by a minus sign are excluded and multiple exclusions may be specified for any fileset A minus sign must have a leading space if specified for exclusion of POSIX filesets File ranges may be specified for both MPE and POSIX files us
216. KUP iX Reference Guide gt RESTORE T FIN PROG AP BACKUP PROGS Note e When restoring from an appended backup FIRST and LAST are interpreted as meaning restore from the first or last backup in the backupset not restore the first or last occurrence of the file on the volumeset e f the BACKUP option is not specified when restoring from an appended backup LAST is assumed Option BASELINE For a Delta baseline restore specifies the baseline store of a specific Delta backup cycle as the initial source of the restore The delta store s that followed the baseline in the same cycle could be used as a supplementary source Syntax gt RESTORE BASELINE deltacyclename deltacyclename A specific Delta cycle name given to a baseline store and any associated delta stores Examples To restore the DEV account from the last baseline backup gt RESTORE T DEV BASELINE DAILY GEN 0 To restore the TESTDB PLAY DEV database from the most recent baseline store and the next to last delta store gt RESTORE T TESTDB PLAY DEV BASELINE DAILY GEN 0 DELTA DAILY GEN 1 Option BDATE See the page titled Options xDATE BDATE DATE MDATE and SDATE Option CREATE Creates nonexistent users groups accounts and or directories Accounts groups and users are created with default capability and access restrictions and no passwords directories are created with def
217. KUP iX Reference Guide Scratching a generation completely removes it from TML as if it never existed The tapes used for that generation are released for reuse An inconsistent generation should only be scratched if it is not needed otherwise its information will be lost and its tapes will be overwritten Committing an inconsistent generation implies that the generation is good and should be kept Because with an inconsistent generation TML may be missing some information the following things are done to insure that as much information is stored as possible e The date and time of the store are based on when the store was started rather than on the date and time of the completion of the store e The tape volumes identified as belonging to the generation are the tape volumes that were initially selected rather than the tapes that were actually used for that generation e All unknown generation attribute values are assigned a value of 1 e No file information is recorded for that generation nor is it possible to record file information for that generation Upon invoking BACKUP TML checks for any inconsistent generations For any inconsistent generation a message is displayed identifying the cycle and generation and asking whether it should be committed or scratched WARNING inconsistency in cycle XXXXXXXX generation n stored mm dd yy hh mm Commit or Scratch this generation C S Specify C to commit the gen
218. LE function either from a session or in batch as shown RUN BACKUPPL INFO SYNCENABLE Delay until a console REPLY To delay synchronization until a console request has been replied to set the BACKUPSYNCYN JCW as described previously Note The SYNCUTIL program can be run with the SYNCREPLY entry point to automatically reply to the console request if desired Unattended Zero downtime backup In order to permit an unattended Zero downtime backup BACKUP may be configured to automatically proceed with synchronization regardless of any active processes An operator REPLY will then no longer be needed To accomplish this the BACKUPSYNCANYWAY JCW must be set to 1 before running the BACKUPPL program as shown SETVAR BACKUPSYNCANYWAY 1 If the BACKUPSYNCANYWAY JCW is set the following message is displayed as user suspension begins Synchronization continuing anyway BACKUPSYNCANYWAY JCW is set Notes Using BACKUPSYNCANYWAY can result in physical and logical integrity problems resulting from unsuspended users It is therefore strongly advised that this JCW be used only if all processes will definitely be in a suspendable state when the synchronization point occurs If the backup is to be unattended be sure that the BACKUPSYNCYN JCW is not set to 1 since this setting would delay synchronization until a REPLY is entered in response to a console request Preventing new logons Since ses
219. LL backup cycle Note f an attempt is made to scratch an unexpired generation or if the number of generations that would remain is less than the configured number of KEEP generations TML requires for safety that the request be confirmed The following message is displayed for confirmation Generation not expired or not enough KEEP generations scratch anyway NO YES Reply YES to proceed with the scratch or NO to cancel the request Reporting cycle generation information The SHOW CYCLE command is used to display or print information about cycle generations Seven output modes each designated with a three character parameter abbreviation may be used with the SHOW CYCLE command to indicate the cycle generation information to be displayed These seven parameters display creation information store statistics the types of files stored the date of the last modification of files stored store directory characteristics the tape volumes used and the names and attributes of files stored The SHOW CYCLE command output may include all cycles or a specified cycle Output may be further restricted to a particular generation of a cycle or of all cycles or to the latest generation of a cycle or all cycles To display information about the generations of all cycles specify a cycle name of To display the generations of an individual cycle specify the cycle name instead For example gt SHOW CYCLE FULL By
220. LL commands may directly use a baseline or delta store Delta restore directory When restoring from a Delta backup cycle a Delta restore directory is built to properly relate the baseline and delta stores for restore purposes One important function of the Delta restore directory is to ensure that files which exist on both a baseline and a delta store are properly related even if their characteristics change The Delta restore directory is created automatically whenever a restore is performed from a baseline store and is given the same name as the deltacyclename with a 1 appended The Delta restore directory is built in the POSIX namespace beneath the DELTA group of the account in which BACKUPPL resides by default ORBIT So the default Delta restore directory name is ORBIT DELTA DELTA 1 If restoring from a delta store the existing Delta restore directory for that cycle is used Delta verifies that this directory was created from the proper baseline store and that it relates to the current delta store If restoring from a baseline store an existing Delta restore directory is automatically purged and recreated Note This section Delta restore directory is for informational purposes only since the BACKUP user does not directly use or reference the delta restore directory Procedural notes for using the Delta module Please take note of the following caveats for operations using BACKUP s Delta module In each of these cases
221. MXL NM KSAM implementation data and key integrated in a single file KSAM64 Large file implementation of KSAMXL introduced in MPE iX 6 5 KSAM64 files capable of supporting file sizes beyond 4GB are otherwise identical to a KSAMXL file SPOOL Native Mode Spooler output spool files PROG Native Mode and Compatibility Mode object programs filecodes PROG and NMPRG VPLUS VFORM and VFAST forms files ASCII ASCll format files BINARY Binary format files BYTE Byte stream files SYMLINK Symbolic link files DEVLINK Device link files LARGE A large file is any file whose flimit is over 4GB gt 4 Gigabytes regardless of how much data the file currently contains Filebuffer A disk file that buffers data from disk to tape typically used for a deferred backup Fileset A set of files to be used by BACKUPPL Filesetlist List of filesets Frequency Number of days between backups of a cycle Full backup A backup of all files on the system generally executed once per week Generations A specific store of a cycle Every time a cycle is stored a generation of that cycle is created BACKUP iX User Manual 430 Glossary BACKUP iX GID Each MPE iX account has a group ID GID associated with it The group ID along with UIDs user IDs is part of MPE ix file and process structures that aid in identifying object owners and file sharing groups By default all members of an account are given the same group ID When a us
222. NARY For details on File Types see the Glossary article MODIFIED Number of files that have not been modified in the past 7 days month 6 months year and 2 years TAPES Tapes stored to including sequence number within the store volid media type length density number of times used and tape error and retry counts FILES Information about files contained on tapes including store date and time cycle generation and modification date and time DIRECTORY Information about the store directory including the volid of the first tape volume containing the store directory how many copies are on tape and if the store directory is also saved on disk and its filename OFFLINE Print output on device class LP under formal file designator TMLLIST as well as STDLIST Example To display the attributes of all existing cycles gt SHOW CYCLE PARMS To display a listing of the tapes used for the latest FULL backup gt SHOW CYCLE FULL GEN 0 To generate a printed report of all files contained on the last generation of the ARCHIVE cycle gt SHOW CYCLE ARCHIVE GEN 0 FILES OFFLINE SHOW FILE Locates and displays information about files contained in active backup generations BACKUP iX User Manual 19 360 Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax CYCLE cyclespec GEN ERATION value gt SHOW FILE filesetlist BDATE relop backupdate backuptime OFFLINE MDAT
223. NO ANSI aK K restoreoption syntax continued from previous page ON ERROR DO mpecommand VOLUME ON ERROR QUIT ONVS volumeset volumeset OWNER username accountname PREVIEW PROGRESS minutes L SELECT ee AND 1 OR SHORT SHOW LONG SECURITY OFFLINE DIRECTORY DATES FILENAME VOL volumename BACKUP iX User Manual 18 269 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide VOLCLASS volumeclassname VOLSET volumesetname DATE ADATE relop mm dd yylyy hh mm CDATE days MDATE SDATE FIRST offset LAST offset BASELINE deltacyclename DELTA Parameters tapefile Backreferences a file equation for the tape drive If not specified the current username is used as the tapefile name diskfile Name of disk backup fileset as a maximum of 16 characters first character must be alphabetic and optionally qualified with group and account The diskfile may be specified using any legal MPE or POSIX syntax filename or may backreference a file equation that specifies DEV DISC filesetlist Files to restore specified in the form fileset fileset fileset Note A maximum of 200 filesets may be specified using an indirect file Parameters continued fileset Files to include in and or exclude from the restore with optional date and time restrictions in one of the following formats file
224. Note that the default library and drive are used in both the load and the unload commands In the unload command the previous location of the volume i e slot 9 is used without it being explicitly specified Exporting tape volumes When it is necessary to remove tape volumes from the library use the EXPORT command to direct the library to take a volume from a particular slot and deliver it to a specified mail port This example EXPORT command will cause a volume to be moved from slot 9 to port 0 BACKUP iX User Manual 14 159 Chapter 14 ORBIT Library Manager OLM Operations Guide olm gt EXPORT LIBRARY pogo mylib SLOT 9 PORT 0 Putting the tape library online or offline These commands are rarely used In order to place the library online enter the ONLINE command to take the library offline enter the OFFLINE command ONLINE makes the tape volumes in the library available for use and OFFLINE makes the volumes unavailable When the daemon is initially started the library defaults to being online This example will put the local library mylib online olm gt ONLINE LIBRARY mylib Similarly this example will take the library mylib offline olm gt OFFLINE LIBRARY mylib Using BACKUP iX commands with the OLM parameter OLM can be used in the STORE RESTORE READALL VERIFY DUMP and LISTDIR commands A BACKUP iX command with the OLM parameter informs BACKUP iX that the volumes and the archive device
225. ODHON ee ee ee ee ee ee ee GR ER Re ee 18 256 Tape Status report se se ee ee ee 15 171 VOLID option ee ee ee ee RA Ee Ee ee 18 257 LOADTAPE program seeen 21 376 LOCkwOrdS ee ee ee ee RR RA ee ee ee ee ee 3 37 MAKECAT program ees see ee es se ee ee ee ke ee ee 433 Maximizing performance ee ee ee 16 173 Media ER ee Re Ee ee ee ger 433 Media selection ee Re AE ee ER AA ee 6 68 Message catalog ies ee ke ee 23 396 MODILOF SEE EE E De aad RR Ee Ee eee 433 MPE iX commands iese se se ee ee ee ee ee 18 330 MRE EE ES EE Ee EO EE OE a 433 Native Mode SpooleF see ee ee RR AA ee 4 46 NBDISABLE JOW ee ees ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 22 391 ND capability ee ee ee Re ee ee ee ee 21 377 Network backup Operational notes se ee Re ee ee ee ee 5 56 olie elle ai a 5 56 Network restore ee ee ee se ee ee ee ee ee ee Re ee 113 Non archivable files ees ee see 4 46 6 63 433 Nonsystem volumes 5 51 5 52 18 320 433 Null backUP cheetah dees 6 69 OFFLINE file designator iese sesse see ee ee 23 397 OLM OLM provider 18 242 18 245 18 252 18 254 18 295 18 329 OLM background JOBS ees ee ee ee 14 152 LBIFACE Ee EE EE Ge Ge Re ee Ee ee 14 153 RPC port mapper ie ese se ee ee ee 14 153 OLM backgroung jobs OLMRPCD EG ES Ee Se De EE en he OLM Cl ORBIT Library Manager Command line Interface ER EE OE eee tates 14 150 OLM CI commands ADD
226. ON option is specified in combination with xDATE option s it takes precedence If GEN is omitted all generations are selected and any xDATE option s used apply ies to all generations The xDATE options are filters that are applied to any generations selected and include DATE ADATE CDATE MDATE and SDATE BACKUP iX User Manual 18 345 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide e If the specified selection criteria fails to find any qualifying files for example if MDATE gt 10 10 2003 is specified but no files were modified after that date or if CDATE gt 10 10 2004 is specified but no files were created after that date no files will be stored since they are all disqualified by the date selection criteria Option ZERODOWN Performs a Zero downtime online backup of Native Mode files The ZERODOWN option permits all files except some Compatibility Mode files CM KSAM circular and relative to be still open for writing when synchronization is done Syntax timeout Number of seconds during which BACKUP attempts to suspend active processes before synchronizing as a value between 15 and 10000 with a default value of 60 Example To attempt to suspend active processes for 3 minutes gt STORE T ONLINE ZERODOWN 180 Notes e The NOLOCK option is automatically imposed for ZERODOWN backups e When a ZERODOWN backup is entered an informational message identifies the store as being a ZERODOWN s
227. OW CYCLE shows the number of files stored with a breakdown of the files by type this information is also shown in the File Status report at the end of the backup Output includes the number of files and those that are IMAGE database root files or datasets KSAM data or key files VPLUS or VFAST files output SPOOL files object programs ASCll format files and binary format files This example requests the types of files for all generations of all cycles gt SHOW CYCLE TYPE Created Files IMAGE KSAM VPLUS SPOOL PROG ASCII Binary 09 01 99 8600 513 34 24 115 1497 4649 3947 09 07 99 8627 513 34 24 107 1457 4678 3947 09 14 99 8628 513 34 24 93 1456 4678 3948 09 21 99 8705 543 40 26 102 1504 4715 3992 09 24 99 864 485 28 0 37 0 351 513 09 25 99 915 513 34 55 368 547 09 26 99 973 513 34 43 425 548 09 27 99 1081 543 40 54 490 591 27 27 SALESDB 09 26 99 13 11 09 27 99 13 11 0 1 6 PAYROLL 09 26 99 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 Files by last modification The MODIFIED mode of SHOW CYCLE shows the number of files that have not been modified in the past 7 days for more than a month 6 months a year and 2 years this information is also shown in the Store Status report at the end of the backup This example requests information about all generations of the FULL backup cycle BACKUP iX User Manual 17 187 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt SHOW CYCLE FULL MODIFIED Created Not modified f
228. OW POOL SHOW TAPE USAGE DEFAULT TAPE LABEL TAPE SHOW TAPE FILES LABEL TAPE LABEL TAPE SHOW POOL SHOW TAPE ERRORS SHOW TAPE USAGE Volid LABEL TAPE SHOW POOL SHOW TAPE all modes TMLDB reports Attribute reported Command Dataset capacities RUN QUERY PUB SYS and FORM SETS TMLDB group account SHOW CONFIG Printing reports Appending OFFLINE to either the PREVIEW or SHOW command causes output to be printed offline as well as being displayed on STDLIST Output is sent to device class LP under the formal file designator TMLLIST and the following message is displayed Offline listing TMLLIST created DEFAULT CYCLE The DEFAULT CYCLE command if specified with no parameters displays default cycle attributes BACKUP iX User Manual 24 409 Chapter 24 Reports BACKUP iX Reference Guide Keep Retention Frequency Days ok Volumes req spare Size HHH HHH HHH HEHEHE HHH HHH XXXXXXXX Keep Default number of generations to keep Retention Default retention period in days Frequency Default days to skip between stores of this cycle Days ok Default mask of days on which this cycle may be stored hyphen is displayed in place of days for which cycle store is not authorized Volumes req Default number of volumes required for backup if TML allocates the same number of tapes that were required for the last generation of the cycle Vol spare Default number of spare volumes reserved for backup i
229. P option assigns a name to each specific tape backup by which that backup may be referenced to append later backups BACKUP iX User Manual 18 314 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Note APPEND may not be specified in combination with DRIVES Syntax gt STORE APPEND Examples To append the current backup to the backupset on the loaded tape gt STORE T MDATE 08 09 99 SHOW APPEND To create a new backupset thereby overwriting any backups on tape gt STORE T SHOW Option AUTOREPLY Automatically REPLYs to console requests for specified Idev s Syntax gt STORE AUTOREPLY ldevlist Idevlist The logical device number s of the backup device s for which BACKUP should automatically reply specified in one of the following formats A specific Idev e g 14 A range of ldevs e g 14 16 Selected ldevs e g 14 17 Any combination of the above e g 14 16 18 22 24 Examples To store to Idev 7 and have BACKUP automatically REPLY to the console request gt STORE T AUTOREPLY 7 To store to Idevs 7 8 and 9 with REPLYs for Idevs 7 and 8 done automatically gt STORE T DRIVES 3 AUTOREPLY 7 8 Notes BACKUP iX User Manual 18 315 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide e The AUTOREPLY option is invalid and ignored for a disk backup e AUTOREPLY may not be used with the VOLID for ANSI labeled t
230. PDISCDUMPFLIMIT BACKUPDISCDUMPFLIMIT can now be increased beyond 32K Refer to Chapter 23 Files and File Designators in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for more information about the creation of disk backup filesets The invalid options of the STORE command for a disk backup are listed here with the results that occur should one be specified Invalid disk STORE options Results AUTOREPLY Ignored no message issued DISKDIR Option rejected message issued DEFER FILEBUFF Command rejected store aborted DRIVES Command rejected store aborted MAXERRORS Option ignored no message issued MAXRETRIES Option ignored no message issued NOLABEL Option ignored no message issued SEQUENCE Command rejected store aborted TAPEDIR Option ignored no message issued APPEND Command rejected message issued Appended backups The appended backup feature takes advantage of the high capacity of DDS and 8mm drives by permitting multiple backups to be contained on a single volume or on a multiple tape volumeset with one backup appended after the other A Restore can be performed from any of these backups For example it is possible to load a DDS on Friday perform a full backup then append the partial backups from the following Monday through Thursday onto the same DDS In this way an entire week s backups could be contained on a single DDS This is ideal for sites that do not have a regular operator Any type of backup except ANSI can
231. PECTRL program may also be used for the tape handling tasks of LOADTAPE and EJECTDAT BACKUP iX User Manual 21 375 Chapter 21 Programs Command Files and Scripts BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax EJECTDAT PUB ORBIT ldev Where Idevis the Idev number of the specified DDS drive Example The EJECTDAT command file requires that the Idev number of the DDS drive be specified To eject the DDS tape in the DDS drive on Idev 7 EJECTDAT PUB ORBIT 7 Notes e The EJECTDAT command file works only on DDS drives e The user executing EJECTDAT must have either SM System Manager capability or both OP System Supervisor and DI Diagnostician capability INITIAL The INITIAL program is used to initialize and validate BACKUP Please call ORBiT tech support to install BACKUP iX BACKUPPL on your system LOADTAPE The LOADTAPE program places a tape drive online It is intended for use when remotely restoring from a tape and then putting the tape drive back online to perform other restores but can be used in any situation in which a backup device needs to be placed online The backup device must be in an available state with a tape loaded If no tape is loaded LOADTAPE will wait indefinitely until a tape is loaded or until the program is aborted The LOADTAPE program requires that the Idev number of the backup device be specified as a PARM value or through an INFO string Note The TAPECTRL program may also be used for the tape ha
232. POOLFILES TMLCOMMANDS TMLREPORTING MENU returns to this menu Once in the help subsystem enter a keyword from the KEYWORDS list at the olm gt prompt Or just press enter to view the first and following KEYWORD topics gt COMMANDS Keywords for accessing information on commands or other items are provided at the bottom of each sub menu When finished to exit the help subsystem gt EXIT LISTDIR Lists the contents of the file directory of a disk or tape backup Also displays tape statistics for each tape volume Any tape volume of a backup volumeset may be initially mounted but the volume with the backup s file directory will be needed before the command will complete When using LISTDIR on an appended backup the directory information from the last backup will be reported by default unless the BACKUP option is used to identify a specific backup LISTDIR supports file selection while listing from the directory of a disk or tape backup This is an optional field and defaults to when not specified When file selection is specified the LISTDIR command has the same behavior as a RESTORE PREVIEW command BACKUP iX User Manual 18 249 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax gt LISTDIR tapefile filesetlist listdiroption diskfile listdiroption AUTOREPLY 1dev BACKUP backupspec DISKDIR dirfilename ENCRYPT
233. RE OPERATOR To intentionally have the logon user name imposed while specifying STORE command options specify a semicolon as the backup device gt STORE SHOW Specifying store directory handling At the end of every store a store directory containing information about all the files stored is created and stored with the backup to facilitate restore Store directory location If performing a disk backup the store directory is contained within the disk backup fileset When restoring from the disk backup the store directory is processed and files are restored All store directory handling is done automatically when performing a disk backup When storing to tape the store directory is written to the tape volumeset and optionally saved in a file on disk When restoring the directory is read from tape or disk and files are then restored from tape It is vital that the store directory be consistent otherwise files cannot be restored Therefore by default two copies of the store directory are written to tape so that in the event one copy of the directory is damaged the other can be used Store directory handling options To add further security and convenience to tape backups BACKUP provides two STORE options for specifying how the store directory should be handled e TAPEDIR e DISKDIR TAPEDIR The TAPEDIR option when used with the STORE command specifies how many copies of the st
234. REATE PATH options of the Restore command to restore them to a new location that does not have the same group account and or directory structure Restoring files to a specified destination on disk By default files are restored using the disk volume restriction in the file labels Alternately it is possible to direct files to a particular disk in one of the following ways e To restore files to a specific volumeset using the VOLSET option e To restore files to a specific volume class using the VOLCLASS option e To restore files to a specific volume using the VOL option e To restore files to a specific disk Idev or volume class using the DEV option Restore to volumeset For example to restore files to the volume named VOL_C within the PRIVATE_VOL_A volumeset enter gt RESTORE T VOLSET PRIVATE VOL A VOL VOL C Restore to volume class To restore files to the volume class CLASS B within the PRIVATE_VOL_A volumeset gt RESTORE T VOLSET PRIVATE VOL A VOLCLASS CLASS B Restore to volume To restore files to the volume named VOL_C within the PRIVATE_VOL_A volumeset enter gt RESTORE T VOLSET PRIVATE VOL A VOL VOL C Restore to disk ldev number or volume class To specify a particular disk Idev number or volume class onto which files should be restored use the DEV option of the restore command BACKUP iX User Manual 9 104 Chapter 9 Restore Strategies BACKUP iX Oper
235. ROLL T ENCRYPT 3 KEY1 GROUP1 ACCT1 KEY2 GROUP2 ACCT2 A default encryption method the fast algorithm and default encryption key eight spaces will be assigned by default if they are not specified For example to encrypt the backup using the fast algorithm and a blank key enter gt STORE FILES PAYROLL T ENCRYPT Note Remember the encryption key Itis crucial that the encryption key be remembered as it is required for decrypting files when restoring If the encryption key is not known for restore files cannot be restored and it is impossible to determine the key 4 47 Chapter 4 Backup Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide INSTALLable backup On MPE iX systems the SYSGEN program is used to create a system load tape SLT A STORE command is then used with the DIRECTORY option to back up files the system volumeset directory and optionally the directories of any nonsystem volumesets When performing a STORE with BACKUP the same MPE iX SYSGEN program is used to create an SLT first BACKUP is then run with the DIRECTORY option of the STORE command to back up the directories of all volumesets system and nonsystem and all the files The SLT and BACKUP store tapes can then be used in combination to INSTALL the system configuration files volumeset directories and the other files To perform a full system backup including the system volumeset directory and the directory of all nonsystem volumesets en
236. Re ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 2 26 stopping BACKUP Feee ded eens lee Se Eg 2 26 ISSUING COMMANAGS SEE ESE E RARR ane Re Ee ait 2 28 REDOINg COMMANAS arai ania ii e ea ee Re ee ee Re ee OA Re ee ee ee 2 31 Invoking dependent processing se ee ee de ee ek ee ee ee ee ee 2 82 eie N aA ae OE OE 2 35 3 Security and Access Requirements 3 36 this chapte ariii SE eee Mao ih eed eee 3 36 Capabilities and access restrictions ccccceeeeeececeeceeeeeeeeeeennaeees 3 36 vi BACKUP iX User Manual Lockwords and user capability iese se ee ee Re ee ee Re ee ee ke ee ee ee 3 37 Access control definitions ACDS 0 eee ee ee AA ee ee 3 37 File ACCESS reguirements ie ee ee GR ER Re Re ee ee ee ee Re Ge ee ee ee 3 38 4 Backup Strategies sie es ai ten ee cp N oe 4 39 Incthis Chapten s ic ses EE GE cae tbe a 4 39 Backupeycles AE EE EL ge RE data quid DE aia ine 4 39 ArchivalbaEkUupi ss ses SE ie EE EE Ee ee RD ee tee A 4 43 IMAGE and AllBase database backup ecceceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 4 43 Temporary MGS 25 55 i Bee DENDE gee tee EE ERKEN OE ee ea eg ERK OE ee 4 46 Symbolic links DACKUD cece ee ee teen ee Ge Re ee GR T ee ee ee Re ee ee ke ee ee 4 46 EIEOS and StreamS ss ee GR oe eal ie ade deed as 4 46 Spool files DaCKUPs sch ites tie seen ES Ee eg Ad AE Ge EN Ge Gee Pe se Pg 4 46 Password protected and encrypted backup ccccessseeseseeeeeeees 4 46 INSTALLable backup ee e
237. Restore ee ee se ee ee ee ee ee 24 401 ele ER OO EE HA 24 A04 LISTDIR SE teen Ee adn hs 15 171 TAPECTRL program ese se ee ee ee ee ee ee 21 378 Tapes addINGs shiek en GE Ed ek 17 192 attribute EE ket anderen ge ge DA 17 190 CYCLE attribute ee ee see ee ee ee 17 191 default attributes due EE OE OO 17 191 deleting Es Ee ee ED as 17 193 density EE ER EE ER Ee ade 17 188 determining for restore ees ee ee ee ee 17 216 error statistiCS ese sees ee ee ee ee 17 188 17 197 expiration date ees ee ee ee ee 17 194 17 196 files contained on tape iii se ee ee 17 197 first use date se ee ee ee RR Re ee 17 196 NOME poel e EE ee Pe EE Eg 17 194 Intelligent Restore See TML amp Restore Wizard BACKUP iX User Manual 444 Index tape identification ii se ee ee 17 216 Ee RE RE 17 194 17 196 LENGTH attribute oo sesse ee ee ee ee ee ek ee 17 190 MEDIA attribute oe ee ee ee 6 68 17 190 nonexistent device class ee 17 199 number required for store iese ese 17 214 retry statistiCS ius ii see EISE RE ede eed Eed 17 197 scratched date ese ese ee ee 17 194 17 196 selecting for restore eseese 17 216 sequence within a generation 17 188 gele RE IE AE 17 214 size17 194 17 196 SIZE attribute ser EER EE Ke nee Fee 17 190 USAGE COUNT nnr seve Moen EA a 17 196 used for generatiOnS ee ee ee ee 17 188 Verifying integrity ee esse ee ee ke ee ee ee 15 170 WONG E
238. S ODHON ee ee se ee ee ee ee ee 18 266 VOLID option ee ee e Re 18 267 Redirecting program output REPOMING e ss EE eines eae 6 74 11 129 REDO command iese se ee ee ee ee ee ee 18 267 REDO editing characters 2 32 2 32 Il 2 32 Reducing store fileset ie ek ee ee 16 173 Regular expression specify ranges 18 270 18 310 19 361 SVNIGX ER EE GE EE Re BE oe ce ae 11 123 RELEASED event Used with ON option 2 32 2 33 7 89 18 331 BACKUP iX Remote interface with tape libraries 14 150 REPOMS RR RE shin sesdz tees lanes 24 399 Required volumes iese ee esse esse ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 434 RESTORE command isas oe aapea ee ee ee ee ee 18 268 ACCOUNT option 18 274 18 291 ACCOUNT optiON ee ee ee ee ee 18 286 AUTOREPLY option 111 13 143 18 275 BACKUP OpHON ee se ee ee ee ee ee 18 275 BASELINE ODHON ie se sees ee ees ee ee ee ee 18 277 BDATE Option iese se o n Ee sees Ee Ee Oes ee 18 277 CREATE option 18 274 18 277 18 280 CREATE ODHON ese ee ee ee ee ee eke ee ee ee ee ee 18 286 CWD option 0000 18 279 18 286 18 291 CYCLE option ese ee ee ee ee 18 279 18 280 DATE OPHOM ss Re Ee Ee gee EE 18 280 DATE options BDATE MDATE SDATE and DATE RE ee ee ee RS oe teasers 18 305 DBRESTORE ODHON ese ee ee ee ee ees ee ee 18 280 Restore Wizard iese see ee 118 17 220 DEFRAG option osasse se se es
239. T SHOW PREVIEW Option PROGRESS Specifies the time interval between percentage completed messages If this option is not specified progress messages are displayed every 5 minutes If performing a deferred backup the percentage completed reflects the amount of data stored into the filebuffer otherwise the percentage completed to the backup device is shown If BACKUP is run from a session progress messages are displayed on the terminal if run in batch progress messages are listed on the system console Syntax gt STORE PROGRESS minutes minutes The frequency of progress messages specified as an integer value between 0 and 1000 To suppress progress messages specify minutes of 0 Example To display progress messages every minute gt STORE T PROGRESS 1 TO suppress progress messages STORE T PROGRESS 0 Option PURGE Purges files once successfully stored upon completion of the backup This feature is useful for archiving and purging old files Syntax STORE PURGE Example To store and purge all files not accessed for more than a year BACKUP iX User Manual 18 337 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt STORE T ADATE lt 365 PURGE Option SDATE See the page titled Options xDATE ADATE CDATE DATE MDATE and SDATE Option SELECT Selects files to include in or exclude from a store based on filecode type and or size Syntax
240. TINE filename USER LACKS TRAVERSE ACCESS filename IMAGE DEPENDENT FILES INACCESSIBLE filename ALLBASE DEPENDENT FILES INACCESSIBLE Reporting without storing The PREVIEW option may be included in a STORE command with any of the other STORE options to gain useful information about the expected results of the STORE syntax used With PREVIEW you can do such things as check the results of the file selection statement or determine the space needed on tape or disk for the store without actually storing files Redirecting program output FILE BPOUT It is possible to redirect all BACKUP output to a disk file by setting a file equation that redefines the BPOUT formal designator The file equation must specify SHR and ACC APPEND For example BUILD LIST DEV DISC REC 128 V FILE BPOUT LIST SHR ACC APPEND BACKUP will check for attempts to redirect its output using an illegal file equation and if this is detected will display an appropriate error message When the BPOUT file equation has been defined the following messages will be displayed before redirection is enabled when BACKUP is run Run Backuppl BACKUP iX 6 78 c Copyright 1991 06 Redirecting STDLIST to BPOUT file equation When BPOUT is defined all program output will be redirected including the interactive gt prompt normally displayed After BACKUP has run enter the reset command to cancel the effects of the BPOUT fi
241. TORE T00007 PROD UTILITY B47300A PROD UTILITIES T4230 PROD UTILITIES amp gt L32700 PROD UTILITY T SHOW DATES SECURITY When an ampersand is typed in at the end of a line and followed by RETURN BACKUP reissues its gt prompt for additions to the command line entry The command is not interpreted until RETURN is hit at the end of a line with no trailing ampersand The maximum command line length for BACKUP commands is 1024 bytes Embedded comments in commands Comments may be embedded in any BACKUP command by enclosing them in curly braces For example the following entry would not back up the files AR gt STORE AP AR PAYROLL T To designate an entire line as a comment or to specify an end of line comment exclude the closing brace For example the following entry would insert a comment line before the STORE command gt Perform a partial backup gt STORE T GETDATE SHOW Tape Manager amp Librarian commands TML commands form an extended set of BACKUP commands and are issued at the normal BACKUP prompt just like any other BACKUP commands TML commands are documented in Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide 2 30 Chapter 2 Program Operation BACKUP iX Operations Guide Executing MPE iX commands from BACKUP MPE iX commands may be executed from within BACKUP by prefixing them with a colon fo
242. TY In addition to SHORT LONG or DIRECTORY information lists file owner and access matrix OFFLINE Lists SHOW output to both the screen and printer formal file designator OFFLINE If BACKUP is run from a session and showformat is not specified SHORT format is imposed if run in batch showformat defaults to LONG All combinations of showformats are valid with the exceptions that LONG SHORT and FILENAME are exclusive of each other and FILENAME must be used alone Example To send instructions to the printer to generate a hard copy listing of all the files stored with basic information about them enter BACKUP iX User Manual 18 341 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt STORE T SHOW OFFLINE Option SYNCWAIT For an online backup delays suspension and subsequent synchronization until a specified time thereby allowing it to be pre defined It also allows suspension to be delayed indefinitely until the SYNCENABLE function is executed Note Should the synchronization point occur after the specified time because for example the backup takes longer than expected use the SYNCENABLE function to proceed with suspension Syntax gt STORE SYNCWAIT time time Time of day in the form hh mm using 24 hour time If not specified synchronization is deferred until BACKUP is run with the SYNCENABLE function Example To perform a zero downtime backup with
243. TYPE SELECT TYPE IMAGE may be used to select or exclude IMAGE databases only This example using the IMAGE keyword stores all IMAGE databases on the system in a DBSTORE compatible format gt STORE T SELECT TYPE IMAGE DBSTORE Notes Jumbo and large datasets will be stored as part of the specified database BACKUP automatically excludes dynamic files from store TurbolIMAGE XL uses dynamic files as control blocks and for other internal purposes These files are created and purged automatically by TurboIMAGE XL and include database control block files which have the same name as the database with GB appended e g SALESGB and the file TURBODBS PUB SYS 4 45 Chapter 4 Backup Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide Temporary files Only permanent files are stored temporary files are not stored Files which are temporary when the backup begins and are later SAVEd as permanent during the backup are also not stored unless an online backup is performed and the file is saved before the online syncpoint Symbolic links backup Symbolic links are always stored and restored as such links In storing a symbolic link only the link is stored the data file that it points to is not In order to store the file pointed to by the link it is necessary to include it in the store fileset FIFOs and streams FIFOs and streams may be stored but are always cleared their contents are removed on restore as
244. To perform a full ONLINE backup gt STORE T ONLINE Notes e The NOLOCK option is automatically imposed for online backups Files open for write access during an online store will not be stored e When an ONLINE backup is entered an informational message identifies the store as being an online store This backup was ONLINE e The ONLINE store option may be used with BASELINE or DELTA When a baseline or delta store is entered with ONLINE an informational message identifies the store as being an ONLINE DELTA store or BACKUP iX User Manual 18 333 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide an ONLINE BASELINE store and indicates the name of the Delta backup cycle in these examples DAILY This backup was ONLINE DELTA with name DAILY This backup was ONLINE BASELINE with name DAILY e The restriction to performing an Online store operation while mirrored disk repair is underway has been lifted A number of diagnostic messages indicate if mirrored disks are unavailable at the start of a BACKUP store and also if their status changes during a BACKUP store operation Any of the following messages may be displayed at the start of a store operation Ldev is being repaired from mirrored Ldev Ldev is a split backup volume Mirroring is suspended on Ldev Mirrored ldev is disabled Any of the following messages may be displayed at the end of a store operat
245. UP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide SYNCPOINT This event is the synchronization point for an online backup The point at which this occurs for an online backup varies based on the type of backup ONLINE or ZERODOWN e Foran ONLINE backup it is when the operator has replied Y to the Ok to synch console request e Fora ZERODOWN backup it is once all processes are suspended or when the operator has replied C to the RCA prompt SYNCWAIT This event is at the start of the waiting period for an online backup a period during which synchronization is explicitly delayed until a time specified in the STORE command or when the SYNCENABLE function is executed See the article on the SYNCWAIT option of STORE for an example of invoking the SYNCENABLE function VOLUME This event is the mount request for a new tape volume It is not supported for a disk backup ERROR This event is the occurrence of any error FILE The point in time of the FILE event is the point at which a specified file is stored e Foran ONLINE store the ON event will occur when the file is stored prior to the syncpoint The timing of the ON FILE event is not affected by any changes to the file captured by the online logging process Note Only one ON FILE condition may be specified in the same store command Examples To send the message to the console if an error is encountered gt STORE T ON ERROR DO TELLOP BACKUP error occurred To stream th
246. User Manual 21 377 Chapter 21 Programs Command Files and Scripts BACKUP iX Reference Guide SYNCUTIL The SYNCUTIL program facilitates an unattended online backup by detecting when the synchronization point has been reached and REPLYing to the outstanding console request for synchronization If run with the SYNCWAIT entry point SYNCUTIL checks periodically to see if the synchronization point has been reached If so it terminates normally if not it goes to sleep for a period of time specified as a PARM value or for a default period of 60 seconds and then checks again RUN SYNCUTIL PUB ORBIT INFO SYNCWAIT SYNCUTIL will reply to a syncpoint request in this case the store command used the SYNCWAIT store option If run with the SYNCREPLY entry point SYNCUTIL issues a REPLY command to the outstanding console request for synchronization RUN SYNCUTIL PUB ORBIT INFO SYNCREPLY TAPECTRL The TAPECTRL utility TapeCtrl 3 10 is used to perform utility operations on DDS drives and other backup devices and is especially useful in unattended backup environments This program may be used instead of the LOADTAPE and EJECTDAT programs to perform tape handling tasks The TAPECTRL program is run with two parameters a command an action or a question and the ldev number of the tape drive If TAPECTRL is entered with no parameters the help article is displayed Note If TAPECTRL is used on a device that is not in an AVAILable stat
247. Ws both to control program operation and to report status information In this chapter Input and output JCWs are briefly described with their syntax the various input and output JCWs available in BACKUP and in the Wizard module are summarized in the chart below and then are documented in more detail through the remainder of the chapter Input and output JCWs JCWs are classified as either input or output JCWs Input JCWs can be set by the user to govern BACKUP s operation while output JCWs report information back to the user JCWs are set using the MPE iX command SETJCW SETJCW jcwname 1 JCW settings are verified using MPE iX s SHOWJCW command SHOWJCW jcwname Where jcwname is the name of the desired JCW In the event that an output JCW value exceeds 32767 a variable is set rather than a JCW If using the IF command to test the variable it will continue to function as a JCW so no changes are required however to display the value of the variable the SHOWVAR command must be used Using Variables Variables may be used instead of JCWs in any instance and BACKUP will recognize them accordingly This gives the user the added advantage of using wildcards in the SHOWVAR command SETVAR varname true SHOWVAR var Job Control Words summary BACKUPBUFSIZE input Used to set the block size in bytes for tape and disk backups and the buffer size used for data transfer BACKUP
248. X XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXX Volid Tape volid Media Media type Size Size classification Length User defined tape length Pool Cycle s pool to which tape is currently allocated SPARE Indicates tape is allocated based on spare volume configuration while other tapes are allocated based on required volume configuration SHOW CONFIG Displays current values of all configuration options Tape Manager amp Librarian Configuration values Configuration File TMLCONF DATA ORBIT TMLDB DATA ORBIT TMLCycles CYCLE ORBIT TMLAutoScratch YES TMLSaveLogs YES TMLAutoLoad YES TMLPrintLabels NO VolumeLabel BACKUP Configuration file Fully qualified filename of TMLCONF configuration file being utilized also indicates if it is accessed through a file equation TMLDB Group and account in which the TMLDB database resides TMLCycles Group and account in which cycle files reside TMLAutoScratch Current YES or NO setting of the TMLAUTOSCRATCH configuration option TMLSaveLogs Current YES or NO setting of the TMLSAVELOGS option TMLAutoLoad Current YES or NO setting of the TMLAUTOLOAD option TMLPrintLabels Current YES or NO setting of the TMLPRINTLABELS option BACKUP iX User Manual 24 411 Chapter 24 Reports BACKUP iX Reference Guide VolumeLabel Current ANSI or BACKUP setting of the VOLUMELABEL option SHOW CYCLE The
249. Y command Introduction The purpose for using labeled tapes is to assure that the proper tape volumes are mounted for a given store or restore operation and to safeguard against accidentally overwriting tapes By default tapes are unlabeled in both MPE iX and BACKUP BACKUP supports two types of tape labels BACKUP proprietary labels and ANSI standard labels Proprietary tape labels are applied when data is written if an alphanumeric volume set identifier volsetid has been specified In contrast ANSI tape labels are applied when data is written if both an alphanumeric volsetid and a volume identifier volid for each volume have been provided When attempting to write to a proprietary labeled tape the volsetid on the tape volume must match the volsetid specified in the BACKUP command However for an ANSI labeled tape the volid on the tape volume must match the volid specified in the BACKUP command For both proprietary and ANSI labeled tapes the current date must meet or exceed the store volumeset s expiration date Also if either of these conditions is violated the operator must authorize BACKUP to overwrite the volume or must mount a correct volume for the store to proceed MPE iX labeled versus BACKUP labeled tapes MPE iX only supports the ANSI standard for labeled tapes which requires that both headers and trailers be written around each file This results in an increased usage of both time and tape for labeled tapes
250. a file equation in the form FILE OFFLINE DEV DISC SAVE DISC linesexpected PART The PART CYCLE ORBIT file is the default partial backup cycle file used by TML This file is supplied with TML and can be used as is or modified as required SYSLIST SYSLIST is the formal file designator used for the SHOW listing By default it is assigned to STDLIST but may be redirected to a file or printer with a file equation in the form FILE SYSLIST DEV DISC SAVE DISC linesexpected Note Setting up File equations with long POSIX syntax filenames over 80 characters on the right of the equal sign will cause a system failure if or wnen RESET is attempted against the file equation BACKUP iX User Manual 23 396 Chapter 28 Files and File Designators BACKUP iX Reference Guide TMLABLP TMLABLP is the formal file designator for the TML tape identification label printer If not set tape identification labels are not printed TMLCnnnx TML file information log files are built when a new store cycle generation is created with the TALSAVELOGS configuration option enabled This option is set by the user in the TMLCOMF file If the TMLSAVELOGS option is disabled log files are not created Each TML file information log file is built in the current group account and assigned a unique coded name TMLCnnnx where nnn day of year 001 365 and x 0 9 A Z The TML database contains the fully qualified filename of each TML
251. a new group called BACKUPPL in the HPSPOOL account BACKUP builds the group if it does not exist and leaves it in place for future restores e A spool file will not be restored unless its owner has ND Non shareable Device capability since this capability is required for accessing the system line printer e If the user performing the restore has OP system supervisor or SM System Manager capability the spool file owner need not exist on the system e Restored spool files are linked into the spool file directory so they may be governed by the spooler e The output spool file name will change on restore since an output spool file may already exist with the same name The LONG format of the SHOW listing displays both the old name of the output spool file and the new name under which the file is restored e If the output device to which the spool file is directed exists it is retained If the device does not exist on the system to which the spool file is restored it is set to device class LP system line printer e All restored output spool files are put into a READY state e All restored output spool files retain their output priority e Users with AM Account Manager capability can restore files created by any user of their home account e If the CREATE ACCOUNT construct of the RESTORE command is specified the spool file owner s account will be created if necessary The CREATE option will not create the HPSPOOL account as it sho
252. a specified action when the waiting period begins using the ON SYNCWAIT option of the STORE command For example to stream a job when the delay is until the SYNCWAIT timeout occurs or the SYNCENABLE command is issued gt STORE T ONLINE SYNCWAIT 20 00 ON SYNCWAIT DO STREAM DBJOB JOB SYS At the start of user interruption For an online backup BACKUP is able to perform a specified action when user interruption begins when the ON SUSPEND option of the STORE command has been indicated For example to notify users that they must exit any files they have open prior to an online backup gt STORE ONLINE T ON SUSPEND DO TELL CLOSE YOUR FILES FOR BACKUP SYNCH Another occasion for ON SUSPEND use is for a Zero downtime backup to notify users to stop working when suspension begins for example gt STORE T ZERODOWN ON SUSPEND DO TELL YOU WILL BE SUSPENDED FOR BACKUP At the synchronization point For an online backup the ON SYNCPOINT option of the STORE command performs a specified action when the synchronization point occurs This allows some action to be taken once all users are suspended or have exited files For example to stream a job when the synchronization point occurs 2 34 Chapter 2 Program Operation BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt STORE T ONLINE ON SYNCPOINT DO STREAM DBJOB JOB SYS Online help A comprehensive online help su
253. able files Files designated by MPE ix or BACKUP ixX as not being storable Non archivable files include system device configuration files input spool files private output spool files dynamic database files and quarantined files Nonsystem volumes Disk drives which are not part of the system volumeset and which are not mountable Equivalent to private volumes on MPE V Online backup A backup which can be performed while users have unrestricted access to files For a non online backup files that are open for writing are not backed up reliably Partial backup A backup which includes all files that were modified since the last full backup Pools Collections of all tapes used within TML with one pool for each cycle plus the global pool BACKUP iX User Manual 432 Glossary BACKUP iX Prior backup date The date and time of a backup which is saved internally and then later used to provide relative date criteria for a subsequent backup The prior backup date is set by the FULLBACKUP command the SETDATE option of the STORE command or the SETDATE program it is accessed by the PARTBACKUP command and the GETDATE option of the STORE command Prog files A file type which includes Native Mode and Compatibility Mode object programs filecodes PROG and NMPRG Quarantined files MPE IX can place files in a quarantined state if it detects that their internal structure has been corrupted and the subsystem dump facility has been enabl
254. accessed unless the correct volid is specified e Anunexpired ANSI labeled tape can be written to only if the operator confirms the write operation e An ANSI labeled tape retains its volid for life its volid cannot be replaced by a different volid unless the tape is erased or normal MPE ix file system access is circumvented however the expiration date and comment can be changed from backup to backup Restrictions in using ANSI labeled tapes The handling of tapes labeled by BACKUP s LABEL option and tapes labeled in the ANSI format differs somewhat in that ANSI labeled tapes are under the control of MPE iX while BACKUP labeled tapes are under the control of BACKUP The following restrictions therefore apply when using ANSI labeled tapes e f an ANSI labeled tape is mounted and no volid or the wrong volid is specified BACKUP will be blocked until the tape request is aborted or a volume matching the specified volid is mounted This blocking of BACKUP will appear to the user as a hung program e Ifa BACKUP proprietary labeled tape is mounted for a backup during which ANSI labeled tapes are to be written BACKUP is unable to check whether the mounted volume is the correct one or if it has expired therefore the tape will be overwritten So caution must be used if switching from BACKUP labeled to ANSI labeled tapes e When ANSI labeled tapes are used the restoration of a backup on systems that do not have BACKUP installed can not o
255. accounts and groups and to directories below group level use CREATE PATH with the GROUP and ACCOUNT options e The GROUP option may be used in combination with the ACCOUNT option but neither GROUP nor ACCOUNT can be specified with the LOCAL or CWD options on the same RESTORE command e If the GROUP option is specified with the NOPATH option the ACCOUNT option must also be specified Option KEEP Prevents files from being restored if files of the same name exist on the system If KEEP is not specified files on disk are overwritten with files from tape of the same names Syntax gt RESTORE KEEP Example To restore only those files which do not already exist on the system gt RESTORE T KEEP Note e The KEEP KEEPNEW KEEPOLD and DBRESTORE options may not be specified in the same RESTORE command e The KEEP and KEEPNONPVZ options may not be used together BACKUP iX User Manual 18 287 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Option KEEPBAD Restores a file even if an error occurs By default a file is not restored if an error occurs KEEPBAD is useful in emergency situations in which no other backup copy of the file is available KEEPBAD will also restore a file that was open for write access at the synchronization point of an online backup although integrity of that file cannot be guaranteed With KEEPBAD the contents of some files may be corrupted and should be checked
256. al 24 417 Chapter 24 Reports BACKUP iX Reference Guide Scratched Date tape was scratched in mm dd yy format 00 00 00 if not currently scratched BACKUP iX User Manual 24 418 Chapter 2 5 Maintenance In this chapter The following maintenance topics are dealt with e Resetting the internal prior backup date e TMLDB database dataset capacities e TMLDB run time parameters which can be inadvertently reset by database maintenance Resetting the internal prior backup date The internal prior backup date is normally set by the SETDATE option of the STORE command or the FULLBACKUP command at the time the store is run Some occasions in which the date must be explicitly reset include e After an INSTALL to set the date to the date of the INSTALL e After an accidental backup update having used RESTORE e After a backup performed with a utility other than BACKUP e g MPE iX STORE To set the prior backup date without performing a backup perform a dummy store of a file to NULL specifying the SETDATE option and the desired backup date Alternately use the SETDATE utility program TMLDB dataset capacities The TMLDB database contains the datasets listed in the chart below with their type content and recommendations for capacities Datasets types are noted in the Type column using the letters A M or D for Automatic Master dataset A Manual Master dataset M or Detail dataset D
257. ame tape volumeset file size in sectors and mnemonic file code This is the default format LONG In addition to the SHORT information lists record size file type eof file limit blocking factor extents allocated and maximum extents For restored output spool files the old filename in OUT HPSPOOL is also shown DATES In addition to the default information lists creation date last access date and last modification date SECURITY In addition to the default information lists file owner and access matrix FILENAME Lists the pathname of restored files Filename cannot be combined with any other SHOW format OFFLINE Lists SHOW output to both the screen and printer If BACKUP is run from a session and the SHOW format is not specified SHORT format is imposed if run in batch LONG format is used More than one format may be specified in any combination with the exception of LONG SHORT and FILENAME The SHOW listing is sent to STDLIST under the formal file designator SYSLIST which may be redirected using a file equation For example to generate a SHOW listing to the system line printer with basic information about files and their dates enter RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt RESTORE T SHOW DATES OFFLINE Refer to Chapter 24 Reports in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for examples of reports generated using the various SHOW formats JCW restore reporting In addition to the SHOW listing BACKUP upon co
258. ameters lockid The Locker ID from the List command Example olm gt List Library hacker dltchg drive 0 Drives Num Volume ID Name Hops Prev Loc Lock Host PID 0 empty OPUS 102 0 OPUS 128 olm gt UNLOCK LIBRARY hacker dltchg DRIVE 0 LOCKER OPUS 128 VALIDATE Syntax Validate LibraryID If the library status has been changed out of control of olm such as a moving a volume from it s slot then use the VALIDATE command to get the olm database consistent with the state of the library After using this command use the RENAME command to rename any volumes that may be wrongly named in the database E g olm gt Validate Library Dltchg olm gt Default Library Dltchg olm gt List olm gt Unload drive 1 slot 3 olm gt Rename slot 3 tape3 The first command will scan the library and update the olm database depending on any inconsistencies This may result in some volumes now having blank volume ids because of an inconsistency The next step is for you to rename any volumes including ones with blank names to their correct name This step may not be needed if the library has a bar code reader You cannot rename a volume in a drive so any volumes with blank names need to be unloaded Then rename all the volumes as needed in their slots BACKUP iX User Manual 20 374 Chapter 21 Programs Command Files and Scripts BACKUP includes several utility programs command files scripts and job s
259. ample the MDATE keyword is used to restrict output to versions of the file APTESTA G1 FULLIST that were last modified before 2 1 96 at 12 00 gt SHOW FILE F G ABSTESTA MDATE lt 2 1 96 12 00 APTESTA G1 FULLLIST 01 27 96 183 RND128 01 05 96 01 20 96 182 RND103 01 05 96 01 13 96 2 181 RND121 01 05 96 01 06 96 180 RND139 01 05 96 By backup date The BDATE keyword lists files based on when they were backed up by date and optionally time In this example the BDATE keyword is used to restrict output to versions of the file APTESTA G1 FULLIST that were backed up after 3 1 99 gt SHOW FILE APTESTA G1 FULLLIST BDATE gt 3 1 99 Pathname Stored Volid Last modified APTESTA G1 FULLLIST 03 23 99 RND125 01 05 99 15 06 03 16 99 RND124 01 05 99 15 06 03 09 99 RND120 01 05 99 15 06 03 02 99 RND119 01 05 99 15 06 By cycle and generation The CYCLE and GENERATION keywords can be used separately or together to list files based on the cycles and generations on which they appear If CYCLE is used alone all generations of that cycle are searched if GENERATION is used with CYCLE the specified generation of all cycles are searched In this example the CYCLE and GENERATION keywords are used together to specify the latest generation of the FULL backup cycle BACKUP iX User Manual 17 209 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt SHOW FILE APTESTA GL FULLLIST CYCLE FULL
260. ample to store files both from system volumesets and from some nonsystem volumesets enter the following gt STORE T ONVS MPEXL SYSTEM VOLUME SET VOL SET A VOL SET B Note The ONVS option has also been implemented for restore permitting only files from specified volumesets to be restored from a backup that contains additional volumesets Excluding filesets Filesets may be excluded from the backup by prefixing them with a minus sign for MPE ix files or a minus sign with a leading space for POSIX files Exclusions may be either global or local meaning that the exclusion may apply to a particular fileset or to all filesets and multiple filesets may be excluded in the same command Up to 250 fileset exclusions may be specified for any store Be aware also that BACKUP automatically excludes certain files from backups To store all files on the system except those in the ap test directory STORE ap test T Inserting a comma before the excluded fileset makes the exclusion global In this example all files on the system containing the string TEMP would be excluded gt STORE ACCT1 ACCT2 TEMP T Local exclusions In the previous examples the exclusion is global To perform a local exclusion do not specify a comma before the minus sign The local exclusion applies only to the fileset that immediately precedes it BACKUP iX User Manual 6 62
261. and 1009 1011 determine the spacing of the first label and spacing between labels Customizing the tape identification label Default labels may be customized to accommodate a specific label form or to change content The following label characteristics may be changed e Vertical positioning e Vertical spacing between labels e Horizontal positioning e Keyword descriptions e Elimination of the rightmost fields on a line e Blanking out an entire line or replacing it with hard coded text To change the characteristics of a default tape label for any language modify the appropriate label format in the message catalog and then run MAKECAT PUB SYS These steps are the same as those you would use when BACKUP iX User Manual 17 202 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide making changes to any MPE iX message catalog refer to the appropriate HP manual for more information about modifying and recompiling message catalogs Once the message catalog has been modified RESET the INPUT file equation A separate label format is included for each supported language in a separate SET in the catalog refer to the table above for the set that corresponds to the language of choice Message numbers 1000 through 1020 are allocated for each label Vertical spacing for each label is determined by leaving blank lines with message numbers To increase the number of lines following the label add blank lines with consecutive message number
262. and 8 The volumes CYA123 and CYA124 are in Idevs 51 and 52 of a robotic tape library st4x30 gt COPY T1 LABEL ACCT VOLID ACT123 ACT124 Drives 2 TO T2 LABEL ACCT VOLID CYA123 CYA124 OLM st4x30 ANSI Autoreply 51 52 Notes e VOLID must be specified along with LABEL option e VOLID cannot be used with the CYCLE option e VOLID cannot be used with AUTOREPLY or SEQUENCE unless used with OLM e f used with the OLM option the ansi noansi parameter of the OLM option determines whether an ansi label is created or not Option PROGRESS This option applies to the entire COPY command rather than the source or target tape s It has been placed in the list of output copy options arbitrarily It specifies the time interval between the progress messages The progress of the copy command is in terms of the number of blocks written to the output or target volumeset If this option is not specified progress messages are displayed every 5 minutes If BACKUP is run from a session progress messages are displayed on the terminal if run in batch progress messages are listed on the system console Syntax gt COPY PROGRESS minutes minutes Indicates the frequency of progress messages and is specified as an integer value To suppress progress messages specify 0 minutes BACKUP iX User Manual 18 234 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Example To display progress messages every minute
263. and generation associated with the source tape Syntax gt COPY T1 CYCLE cyclename GEN ERATION gen TO With Output target tape This option is used to create a target tape that needs to be associated with the TML cycle cyclename The generation value will be assigned automatically as the next available value for that cycle Syntax gt COPY TO T2 CYCLE cyclename Parameters Cyclename Refers to the TML cycle BACKUP iX User Manual 18 227 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Gen The generation value of the TML cycle of the source tape It could be e 0 for most recent generation e Positive integer for absolute generation number Note Please note that generation must be specified when using CYCLE as an input option Examples To COPY the tape associated with the last FULL TML cyclename backup on drive 7 gt COPY T1 CYCLE FULL GEN 0 AUTOREPLY 7 TO T2 To COPY the tape associated with the last FULL TML cyclename backup on drive 7 to the TML cycle FULLCOPY gt COPY T1 CYCLE FULL GEN 0 AUTOREPLY 7 TO T2 CYCLE FULLCOPY Option DRIVES This option allows multiple tape drives to be used with the COPY command Tape drives must be of the same type e g DLT or DDS but not mixed density configuration and device class With Input source tape Multiple drives can be used in only in parallel with the source tape Syntax
264. anual 8 97 Chapter 8 DELTA Backup Module BACKUP iX Operations Guide Restoring from a delta store with KEEP KEEPNEW and KEEPOLD The KEEP KEEPNEW and KEEPOLD options of the RESTORE command function normally when restoring from a baseline store however when restoring from a delta store these options behave differently Because KEEP KEEPNEW and KEEPOLD determine whether files will be restored based upon the existence of the same named files on disk respecting these options when restoring from a delta store would cause the just restored files on disk to be overwritten rather than being updated with the disk pages in the delta store Therefore the KEEP KEEPNEW and KEEPOLD options are generally ignored when restoring from a delta store If a file was created after the baseline and is only contained on the delta store the KEEP and KEEPNEW options are respected Private volume availability during a Delta backup cycle If disks and or volume sets not mounted when the baseline store was taken are mounted during that Delta backup cycle or if they were dismounted during a delta store files on those disks and or volumesets will not be considered part of the backup cycle Even though a baseline store may have been performed with a file selection of all files if any volumesets are not mounted when the baseline store is taken but are mounted when the delta store is taken for that cycle the files in those volumesets will appear in t
265. apes e Secures data stored on tapes through data encryption General features e Simple to integrate learn and operate syntactically consistent with MPE iX STORE and RESTORE e Contains an extensive online help facility e Extended command set and included utility programs provide robust functionality and controls e Special internal error recovery functions add security and reliability by validating tape media and recovering data from bad tapes e Backups can be restored onto any HPe3000 system including those that are not licensed to use BACKUP Operational features e Stores multiple IMAGE databases to a single tapeset as part of a regular backup while retaining compatibility with transaction logging recovery e Performs backups to tape or disk using disk for either temporary or permanent storage permanent disk backups can be dumped to tape when convenient e Uses up to 64 backup devices for store and restore e Powerful selection options permit files to be selected by wildcard range multiple global and local exclusion date and time of creation access or modification and file type e Data compression effectiveness may be adjusted to maximize performance e Backups may be encrypted for greater security using either a fast proprietary algorithm or the DES and AES standard algorithms 1 22 Chapter 1 Introduction BACKUP iX Operations Guide Provides the ability to store and restore by volumeset and can resto
266. apes option unless the OLM option is also used Option BACKUP Assigns a name to a specific tape backup by which that backup may be referenced to append later backups This option may be specified without the APPEND option to give the first backup in a backup set a name Note The BACKUP option is not supported for disk backups However a backup name may be assigned by specifying the BACKUP option on the DUMP command when dumping a disk backup to tape Syntax gt STORE BACKUP backupname backupname An alphanumeric string of up to 8 characters first character must be alpha Note The backupnames FIRST and LAST are reserved and will be rejected if specified with the STORE command Both FIRST and LAST can be specified with RESTORE Example To assign the backupname FB930701 when starting a new appended backupset gt STORE T BACKUP FB930701 Option BASELINE With the Delta module installed the BASELINE option of STORE performs a Delta baseline store to serve as the starting backup of a Delta cycle specifies the Delta cycle name and activates the Delta monitor process The same Delta cycle name must be indicated in the delta stores that follow in the same cycle A Delta baseline store must include at least one file See details on use of the DELTA option of STORE below in this chapter See Chapter 15 DELTA Backup Module in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide for an explanation of the Delta module Syntax
267. appended backup Many 8mm drives do not support SSMs but still may support BACKUP s appended backup feature For backup devices which are configured as DDS drives but which do not support SSMs use the following SETVAR BACKUPNOSSM 1 When using third party 8mm drives that don t support SSMs this JCW setting should be included in the user defined command UDC command file or job used for invoking BACKUP ix When using 8mm drives BACKUP will determine the maximum block size at the beginning of a store To reduce program startup time use the BACKUPBUFSIZE JCW to set the maximum block size for your backup device DLT drives DLT drives are fully supported and automatically configured for the HPe3000 They support 32 Kb blocks and appended backups HP provides supported drivers for DLT devices Autochangers and stackers Autochangers and stackers can be used to automatically change tape volumes when necessary They do this by advancing to the next tape in sequence when the drive is told to change tapes If using such a device when storing with BACKUP tapes are written in sequence If using BACKUP s TML module for tape management tapes must be sequenced in the order in which TML will call for them which can be determined using TML s PREVIEW command It is recommended that the store directory be retained on disk using the DISKDIR option of the STORE command so that it can be read from disk on restore When resto
268. are automatically searched Refer to Chapter 13 Backup Devices in the BACKUP AiX Operations Guide for complete information on multiple device restores Reporting restore progress To keep the operator informed of the restore progress and help predict when it will complete BACKUP displays the percentage of restore completion at specified time intervals If BACKUP is run from a session progress messages are displayed on the terminal if run in batch progress messages are listed on the system console By default progress messages are displayed every 5 minutes The time interval can be changed by the PROGRESS option For example to display progress messages every 10 minutes gt RESTORE T PROGRESS 10 Progress messages may be suppressed by specifying PROGRESS 0 BACKUP iX User Manual 11 127 Chapter 11 Restoring Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide Reporting on files restored At the end of a restore BACKUP generates several reports including a report of all the files restored and their attributes called the SHOW listing and reports resulting from the setting of JCWs that provide information on the number of files restored the number of files not restored or other store results SHOW listing restore reporting The SHOW listing can be output in a variety of formats specified by the SHOW option of the restore command The SHOW formats available are SHORT Lists the fully qualified filen
269. ask which describes the valid days A numeric value of up to 7 numbers in length ascending where 1 Monday 2 Tuesday etc For example 12345 means every weekday and 135 means Monday Wednesday and Friday Number of volumes of media to be selected by TML for a store of the cycle Both the number of volumes required and the number of spare volumes to reserve may be specified Spare volumes may be needed in case the required number of volumes is insufficient due to an increased amount of data or if a tape is terminated prematurely due to an error For example the value 8 3 reserves a total of 11 tapes 8 required and 3 spare The value 2 would reserve the same number of tapes as the backup needed last time plus 2 spares An integer value or blank If left blank the default number of required volumes are allocated If is specified the number of required volumes is determined from the last backup generation of the cycle If this is the first time the cycle is being stored so there is no previous generation 1 volume is allocated if not specified An integer value or blank If left blank the default number of spare volumes are allocated To reserve no spare volumes specify a value of 0 BACKUP iX User Manual 19 352 Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide SIZE Identifies the size of the media that should be selected for stores The SIZE classifier is used to gr
270. at loads an unloaded tape puts a loaded tape and the drive online and positions it at BOT Warning If the LOAD command is used on a SCSl interface device that is offline and empty the program may hang until a tape is inserted into the drive ONLINE An action command that puts a loaded tape and drive back online if the tape is loaded at BOT in the drive If it is not TAPECTRL will attempt to load it and put it online If the drive is already online TAPECTRL says so and sets the JCW to 0 Warning If the ONLINE command is used on a SCSl interface device that is offline and empty the program may hang until a tape is inserted into the drive AVAILABLE A question command that determines if a tape drive is available Sets the system JCW to 0 if the tape drive is available for use or to an error value if it is not TAPECTRL AVAILABLE ldev FULL A question command that determines if the drive has a tape loaded Sets the system JCW to 0 if the tape drive contains a tape or to an error value if it is empty WRITEABLE A question command that determines if the tape drive has a tape loaded and is ready to receive a write Sets the system JCW to 0 if the tape drive is write enabled and to an error value if it is not This command would typically be executed immediately before starting a backup to ensure that the drive is in the proper state with a loaded tape Note f TAPECTRL can detect that a tape is in the drive but the drive is offline
271. ate nonexistent account s and or group s on restore the newly created account s and or group s will automatically be spanned e The VOLSET option may not be specified together with the DEV option e Ifthe DIRECTORY option is specified along with the VOLSET option the minimal accounting structure required for the files being restored is created If neither the VOL VOLCLASS or VOLSET option is not specified the full directory structures as contained in the backup are created Options xDATE BDATE MDATE SDATE and DATE Selects files for restore based on BDATE Last backup date and optionally time used only with Restore Wizard MDATE Last modification date and optionally time SDATE Selects files for restore based on last label state change date and optionally time same as DATE option The state change timestamp tracks when a file was last modified as well as when the file s label containing security and ownership info was last modified DATE Selects files for restore based on last label state change date and optionally time same as SDATE option Syntax gt RESTORE xDATE relop datetimespec XDATE Represents use of one of the BDATE MDATE SDATE and DATE options relop For CODE and SIZE one of the following relational operators equal to less than gt greater than lt less than or equal to gt greater than or equal to BACKUP iX User Manual 18 305 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Refer
272. ather than a JCW FILESRESTORED FILESRESTORED is an output JCW set by restore which returns the number of files restored The JCW is displayed by SHOWJCW FILESRESTORED Note f the value of FILESRESTORED exceeds 32767 an MPE iX Cl variable called FILESRESTORED is set rather than a JCW FILESNOTSTORED FILESNOTSTORED is an output JCW which returns the number of files that were selected but not stored either because they were open for write access or because an error occurred The JCW is displayed by SHOWJCW BACKUPFILENOTSTORED Note Ifthe value of FILESNOTSTORED exceeds 32767 an MPE iX Cl variable called FILESNOTSTORED is set rather than a JCW BACKUP iX User Manual 22 389 Chapter 22 JCWs BACKUP iX Reference Guide FILESSTORED FILESSTORED is an output JCW that returns the number of files stored The JCW is displayed by SHOWJCW FILESSTORED Note lf the value of FILESSTORED exceeds 32767 an MPE iX Cl variable called FILESNOTSTORED is set rather than a JCW JCW system JCW BACKUP sets the system JCW that is based on the final value of the STOREJCW see below Values for JCW are STOREJCW value Corresponding JCW value FATAL1 FATAL2 FATAL3 FATAL4 FATALS FATAL6 WARN7 WARN8 OO NOU AR WD NBDISABLE NBDISABLE is both an input and output JCW As an input JCW this JCW governs whether or not a product called NetBase is enabled or disabled Backup p
273. ations Guide For example to restore all files from the logon account onto Idev 3 gt RESTORE T DEV 3 To restore the first 8 datasets of the GLDB database onto volume class MASTER gt RESTORE T GLDB01 GLDB08 DEV MASTER Preserving or changing file date attributes Preserving the file date attributes access and modification timestamps By default the file creation access modification and state change dates are preserved on restore This is a change in the default behavior when compared to the earlier versions of BACKUP In the earlier versions the last access date the last modification date and the last state change date were changed to the date and time of the restore To retain the former last access modification and state change dates for all files being restored specify the OLDDATE option on the RESTORE command The option OLDATE cntinues to be supported eventhough it is not required anymore Example gt RESTORE T OLDDATE Changing the file date attributes access and modification timestamps The NEWDATE option of the RESTORE command sets the access and modification date and time of the restored files to the date and time of restore The creation date remains unchanged Example gt RESTORE T PUB CUSTDB NEWDATE Changes the access and modification date and time of the files in the PUB CUSTDB group to the current time and date Restoring IMAGE
274. ault ACDs A message is displayed for each directory account group and user that has been successfully created Special capabilities are required for creating nonexistent users groups accounts and directories generally the same capabilities needed for creating these objects outside of BACKUP SM capability is required to create nonexistent accounts and allows creation of groups and users anywhere on the system AM capability is required to create groups and users in the current user s home account BACKUP iX User Manual 18 277 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax gt RESTORE CREATE createoption createoption One or more of the following keywords separated by commas PATH Causes any nonexistent directory to be created ACC OUN T Causes any nonexistent account to be created GROUP Causes any nonexistent group to be created OWNER Causes any nonexistent user to be created If createoption is not specified CREATE PATH ACCT GROUP OWNER is assumed Examples To restore all files from the TEST account and create any nonexistent users gt RESTORE T TEST CREATE OWNER To restore all files creating nonexistent directories accounts groups and users gt RESTORE T CREATE To create the directories accounts and groups specified by the source path such that source accounts and groups are created as accounts and groups rather than directori
275. automatically be spanned e The VOL option may not be specified together with the DEV option e Ifthe DIRECTORY option is specified along with the VOL option the minimal accounting structure required for the files being restored is created If none of the options VOL VOLCLASS nor VOLSET are specified the full directory structures as contained in the backup are created Option VOLCLASS Restores files to a specified volume class Syntax gt RESTORE VOLCLASS volumeclassname volumeclassname Specifies the name of the volume class Example To restore files to the volume class CLASS B within the PRIVATE_VOL_A volume set gt RESTORE T VOLSET PRIVATE VOL A VOLCLASS CLASS B Notes e VOLCLASS may not be specified without VOLSET otherwise the command is rejected e If VOLSET and VOLCLASS are specified but the specified volume class does not reside within the specified volume set the command is rejected e If there is insufficient room in the volume class specified the files that do not fit are restored to the volume class DISC within the volume set to which the specified volume class belongs If there is insufficient room on the specified volume class and volume class DISC to restore all the files or if volume class DISC does not exist on the specified volume set the remaining files are not restored and are listed in the Files Not Restored report Impact The VOLCLASS option has some effect on exist
276. ays e Delay until a specific time e Delay until the SYNCENABLE function is explicitly executed in either a session or in a batch job e Delay until a console request has been replied to either automatically or manually Delay until a specific time Use the SYNCWAIT option of the STORE command to delay synchronization until a specified time This is the time at which users will begin to be suspended for a Zero downtime backup and that the synchronization point for an Online backup will be imposed BACKUP iX will wait until the specified time before suspending users and synchronizing For example the following entry will begin to suspend users and or impose the synchronization point at 19 00 7 00 PM gt STORE T ZERODOWN SYNCWAIT 19 00 Note Should the synchronization point occur after the specified time because for example the backup takes longer than expected use the SYNCENABLE function to proceed with suspension and synchronization as described below Delay until a function is explicitly executed To delay suspension and synchronization indefinitely until a specific command has been executed use the SYNCWAIT option of the STORE command with no specified time as shown BACKUP iX User Manual 7 87 Chapter 7 Online and Zero Downtime Backup BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt STORE T ZERODOWN SYNCWAIT In order to then instruct BACKUP to proceed with suspension use the SYNCENAB
277. backup a normal RESTORE command no special options is issued For example to restore files from an online tape backup enter gt RESTORE T BACKUP automatically determines whether or not the store volumeset has been created as an online backup If it has BACKUP then determines whether any logging data corresponds to the files being restored If corresponding logging data is found both the tape containing the data file and the tape containing the logging data must be mounted Requests for these tape mounts by volume number will automatically be generated by BACKUP Restoring from an appended backup A specified fileset may be restored from any one of the backups on an appended backup A separate restore command must be entered for each backup used as the source of a restore The desired backup is specified via the RESTORE BACKUP option The BACKUP option of RESTORE permits selection of the desired appended backup by a preassigned backup name its sequence number as the first backup or as the last Parameters for RESTORE s BACKUP option Any of the following can be specified for the BACKUP option e A user assigned backupname by which the backup is referenced having up to 8 alphanumeric characters the first character must be alpha e Anumber indicating the sequence of the desired backup within the backupset where 1 is the first backup in the backupset The sequence number does not reset on volume change e F
278. backup to a tape volumeset that already contains one or more backups If writing to a tape volumeset that does not already contain a backup the APPEND option will result in an error message requesting that a suitable tape be mounted If writing to a tape volumeset that does already contain a backup the APPEND option must be specified to prevent existing backups on the tape volumeset from being overwritten 5 55 Chapter 5 Backup Methods BACKUP iX Operations Guide To create an appended named backup from a disk backup create the disk backup as usual then specify the APPEND and the BACKUP option on the DUMP command Refer to Chapter 12 Labeled Tapes in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide and the subsection entitled Considerations for appended backups for information about rules and restrictions to note when using labeled tapes for appended backups Appended backups are not supported under the following circumstances Multiple device backup DRIVES option in parallel serial is ok Network backup Non zero BACKUPFILESYS JCW Store of a TML cycle Network backups The disk backup feature can be used to store to foreign devices and over networks For example a disk backup may be performed on a remote machine the backup files transferred to the local system using MPE ixX s Network Services NS and then written to tape locally Note Only a disk to tape backup may be performed directly over a network a disk backup
279. be assigned that increments by one for each new tape The tapes can then be hung on a rack in numerical order making it easy to quickly locate tapes or see if any tape is missing As an alternate method for organizing tapes volids can be assigned so as to group certain tapes together For example tapes for full backups can be numbered starting with 000100 while volids for partial backup tapes can start with 000500 Tapes of the various media types can be numbered uniquely as well Because the volid is user assigned any desired scheme can be implemented Tape attributes setting or modifying defaults In addition to volid each tape volume is described by up to four other attributes that define e Media type tape DDS DLT etc e Tape length e g 1200 2400 e Tape size e g small medium large e Tape pool named for the cycle to which the tape belongs Tape attribute details A detailed explanation of the four tape volume attributes follows MEDIA This attribute indicates the type of media Any 8 character string beginning with an alphabetic character and containing no embedded blanks may be used but the device class configured for the backup device e g TAPE should be specified If the device class is specified for MEDIA TML will automatically select media of the type appropriate for that device when the backup is performed For example if storing to device class TAPE TML will select volumes with a media
280. be restored from using a single backup device or up to 64 backup devices in parallel Various types of backup devices are supported Refer to Chapter 13 Backup Devices in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide for information about backup devices and using multiple backup devices Restoring from a disk backup To restore from a disk backup the name of the disk backup fileset is specified as shown gt RESTORE NUDB The RESTORE command options that are invalid for a disk backup are listed below with the message resulting if use is attempted AUTOREPLY Ignored no message issued DISKDIR Ignored message issued DRIVES Message issued restore aborted NOLABEL Ignored message issued SEQUENCE Message issued restore aborted Restoring from an online backup Restoring from an Online backup involves additional processing by BACKUP since writes that occurred during the store must be posted from log files The following steps are performed by BACKUP when restoring from an Online backup on tape 1 Specified data files are restored BACKUP iX User Manual 10 111 Chapter 10 Restore Methods BACKUP iX Operations Guide 2 If any writes occurred during the store to one or more of the files being restored log files are scanned for log entries corresponding to the restored data files When restoring from an Online disk backup the same steps are performed but no tape mounts are required To restore from an Online tape
281. beginning of the store The store bits of the files selected for backup are set to prevent users from accessing those files And generally all users are logged off the system while a standard backup is in progress Online backups however both traditional and Zero downtime ZDT do not require that file access be excluded or limited to read only Files may be accessed normally during the store operation New files created during the store operation are included and files purged during the store are excluded by the backup File BACKUP iX User Manual 7 79 Chapter 7 Online and Zero Downtime Backup BACKUP iX Operations Guide store bits are not set so users are able to access files as they are being stored Users continue to work as they normally would without restriction The synchronization point The moment when all files in the backup are identical to their counterparts on the system the time at which a backup is accurate and complete is called the synchronization point For a standard non online backup the synchronization point is the time at which the backup starts The backup at that point contains only the qualifying files that existed and could be accessed when the store was started For both the traditional Online and the ZDT Zero downtime backups however the synchronization point is not at the start of the backup but rather at the end This is the moment after all selected files have been stored and pro
282. bsystem is available through the HELP command BACKUP s online help is functionally identical to MPE iX s HELP subsystem To open BACKUP s HELP subsystem enter gt HELP Once in the HELP subsystem specify one of the following to display all help information for the specified command or topic e The name of a BACKUP command e One of the help topics displayed e One of the values shown in the current KEYWORD list e ABACKUP command or help topic followed by ALL Getting help on commands Specify the name of aBACKUP command For example to get all help information for the STORE command issue the HELP command at the BACKUP prompt gt HELP The help subsystem prompt is issued gt This is the same prompt as for BACKUP At this prompt specify the STORE command followed by ALL gt STORE ALL The command syntax a listing of the command options descriptions of the options and terms used in the syntax representation and examples of command usage are then presented Exiting HELP To exit the HELP subsystem type EXIT at the prompt gt EXIT Because the HELP subsystem uses the same gt prompt as BACKUP H it is possible to be in HELP but not realize it For this reason the following message is displayed upon exiting the HELP subsystem Exiting HELP returning to BACKUP 2 35 Chapter 3 Security and Access Requirements
283. capability is required to create nonexistent accounts and allows creation of groups and users anywhere on the system AM capability is required to create groups and users in the logon user s home account CD Create Directory access is required for creating new directories e SMcapability is required for building new directories or files directly under root e To change the owner of POSIX files on restore the user must have SM capability be the group ID GID manager a user whose logon account matches the GID of the file and who has AM capability or be the current owner e f restoring files that already exist on the system write access to each file being restored as well as its group and account is also required since the existing file must be purged before the file can be restored e SMor OP capability is required to restore device links Lockwords and user capability When storing and restoring files that have lockwords the user is prompted for the lockword unless he has sufficient access capability to determine the lockword in which case the lockword is automatically supplied by BACKUP Users with System Manager SM or System Supervisor OP capability are not prompted for the lockword of any file on the system users with Account Manager AM capability are not prompted for the lockword of any file in their logon account except those owned by users from other accounts i e files whose GROUPID fields don t match the acc
284. ccur because BACKUP can not be written in NMStore format at the beginning of each tape volumeset as it normally would e A maximum of 8 volids may initially be specified in advance with BACKUP If more tapes volumes are needed for the store additional prompts for volids are displayed at the system console as each additional volume is required Volids can be specified via REPLY Tape backup in progress volid of next volume to store to When using TML TML will automatically provide volids for each tape to BACKUP as tapes are written Note that when using TML the store options LABEL and VOLID are not allowed Command operation ANSI labeled tapes are specified by the LABEL VOLID options of the STORE RESTORE and other BACKUP commands that use labeled tapes These options do the following BACKUP iX User Manual 12 137 Chapter 12 Labeled Tapes BACKUP iX Operations Guide LABEL Specifies the volumesetid expiration date and optional comment for each tape volume in the volumeset VOLID Specifies the volids of the tapes to be written as ANSI labeled tapes by store or read by any other operations Considerations for appended backup The appended backup feature introduces a fundamental change in the recognition of tape expiration Without appended backup functionality an expiration date can be set for a tape and that tape will not be written to unless a user specifically indicates that it is to be overwritten until the tap
285. ce a file equation that specifies DEV DISC readalloption One or more of the READALL command options documented with their parameters in detail in the pages that follow Example To verify the backup on device class TAPE gt READALL T Options summary AUTOREPLY Automatically REPLYs to console requests for specified Idev BACKUP iX User Manual 18 260 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide CYCLE Specifies the name and generation of the TML cycle upon which to perform the validation VOLID Specifies ANSI format tape labels and the volids for up to eight backup volumes DRIVES Allows multiple backup devices to be used in parallel for READALL MAXERRORS Maximum number of tape errors allowed on any tape MAXRETRIES Maximum number of retries allowed on any tape ENCRYPT Selects proprietary AES or DES encryption and specifies the encryption key OLM Permits readalls from one or more tape volumes in a robotic tape library ON ERROR QUIT Terminates on any error ON Performs a specified action when a predefined event has occurred PROGRESS Specifies the time interval between percentage completed messages Option AUTOREPLY Automatically REPLYs to console requests for specified ldev Note The AUTOREPLY option is invalid and ignored for a disk READALL Syntax gt READALL AUTOREPLY ldev Idev The logical device number of one or more tape drives Example To perform a READALL
286. ce a week every 7 days on Friday day 5 and 4 backup generations are retained for 35 days each Two spare volumes are allocated for every backup of this cycle Because is specified for required volumes the number of required volumes is automatically determined from the last generation of the cycle The PART backup cycle is executed Monday through Thursday with required tape volumes determined from the most recent cycle and 1 spare tape allocated for store Only 4 generations are kept for a period of 5 days each because the FULL backup on Friday makes them obsolete The PAYROLL cycle is executed every other Thursday and is written to a single small tape Only the latest generation is kept for a duration of 13 days which is the time period until the cycle is next stored The SALESDB cycle is executed every weekday Monday through Friday written to a single tape volume and kept for two days Printing reports To print output offline while displaying it on STDLIST as well append OFFLINE to the SHOW CYCLE command Output is sent to device class LP under the formal file designator TMLLIST BACKUP iX User Manual 17 183 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide Generations Each time a cycle is backed up a generation of that cycle is created A generation is a version or occurrence of the backup of a given cycle and is assigned a unique number which is associated with its cycle name to di
287. ces BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt STORE T COMPRESS 0 Block size BACKUP blocks data for output based on the block size supported by the backup device See the table in the discussion of the MAXBLOCK option in Chapter 16 Maximizing Performance in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide to see what block sizes BACKUP uses for different backup devices Some third party backup devices do not support the maximum block size suggested by the drivers with which they are configured see discussion below If this is the case it is necessary to reduce the block size used by BACKUP to the maximum supported by the backup device for store copy and dump operations This is done using the BACKUPBUFSIZE JCW For example to specify a 16K block size for a store SETVAR BACKUPBUFSIZE 16384 Third party backup devices On the HPe3000 drivers are provided for the backup devices that HP manufactures Historically however neither HP nor the third party device vendors have provided drivers for third party devices Most third party backup devices on the HPe3000 therefore emulate HP devices Because BACKUP determines how to handle a backup device by checking its driver configuration an 8mm tape drive may be mistaken for an HP DDS drive for example because the drive may configured as such For this reason BACKUP checks some optional JCWs that the user may set to indicate that the backup device behaves differently than the device suggested
288. ch volume and issue a RESTORE command to restore its files BACKUP iX User Manual 11 119 Chapter 11 Restoring Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide With TML s Restore Wizard and Intelligent Restore feature however multiple backups can be selected using a single RESTORE command and be restored from in a single operation This is an extremely powerful feature that facilitates a file oriented restore rather than a backup oriented restore Refer to the discussion of the Restore Wizard functionality in Chapter 10 Restore Methods in the BACKUP jiX Operations Guide Identifying tapes for a restore It is critical that the correct tapes be used for a restore otherwise the incorrect version of a correct file could be restored This could occur for example if restoring from a partial backup from the wrong day In this section methods are provided for checking tapes for desired files to restore and determining the tape volumes to use for a restore The TML Restore Wizard and Intelligent Restore may also be used to identify tapes For details refer to Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian and the section titled Check for desired files on tapes A BACKUP STORE command with the SHOW option generates a listing of the files captured by the backup which can be used to determine which store volumeset contains the latest or a particular version of a file To display the file listing without actually storing any files use the PREVIEW op
289. chapter for more information 2 The TMLABLP file equation is set to identify the printer The file equation for TMLABLP specifies the Idev or device class of the printer on which to output the labels For example this file equation would output labels to Idev 25 at an output priority of 10 FILE TMLABLP DEV 25 10 Because tape identification labels should be affixed to the tapes upon completion of the backup an output priority higher than the system outfence should be assigned so that labels print immediately and are not deferred of course the proper labels must be loaded on the printer Even with automatic labeling if the printer jams or some other problem with label printing arises label printing can be requested manually Manual label printing Tape identification labels may be explicitly printed with the LABEL command for either a specified generation or specified tapes For example BACKUP iX User Manual 17 203 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt LABEL TAPE 100 110 would print tape identification labels for volumes 000100 through 000110 inclusive while gt LABEL CYCLE FULL GEN 0 would print labels for the tapes used for the latest generation of the FULL backup cycle When labels have been sent to the printer as specified by the TMLABLP file equation the following message is displayed Tape identification labels are ready File Register In
290. characters in length and must begin with an alphabetic character It may be qualified with group or group account if not qualified the disk backup fileset is built in the current group For example the following would be entered to create the disk backup fileset FULL in BACKUP SYS using the DIRECTORY option gt STORE FULL BACKUP SYS DIRECTORY If desired use the DISKDEV option of the STORE command to specify a device class or Idev number other than the default device class DISC on which the disk backup fileset should be built For example to build the fileset on device class BACKUP gt STORE FULL BACKUP SYS DIRECTORY DISKDEV BACKUP To build the disk backup fileset on a nonsystem volume qualify the disk fileset name with the name of a group that resides on the nonsystem volume 3 If desired copy the disk backup fileset contents to tape in BACKUP store format using BACKUP s DUMP command gt DUMP FULL BACKUP SYS T SHOW To then purge the disk backup fileset use BACKUP s PURGE command gt PURGE FULL BACKUP SYS Note The disk backup fileset must be purged before using the same name again Operational notes for disk backups The following operational notes should be kept in mind when performing a disk backup BACKUP creates multiple disk backup files in the specified group account These files are given new file names that begin with the specified
291. command line More than one indirect file may be specified ina STORE command to define inclusion filesets as well as local or global exclusion filesets and may be used anywhere that filesets may be specified Indirect files may be nested and are efficiently processed regardless of their size whether they are used to include or exclude files from a backup An indirect file is referenced in a STORE commana prefixed by an exclamation point or caret 4 Creating an indirect file When creating an indirect file note that an indirect file e Must be an unnumbered text file e May be contained in any group account or HFS directory provided that the user has read access to it e May contain references to other indirect files nested up to 3 levels deep e May contain one or more lines each line may contain any of the three variants of fileset syntax supported by the BACKUP Store command summarized below e May contain blank lines BACKUP will continue processing to the end of an indirect file even if a blank line is encountered e May contain embedded comments by enclosing them in curly braces or end of line comment by specify only the opening brace but not the the closing brace Example This is an embedded comment This is an end of the line comment Supported Fileset Syntax BACKUP allows indirect files to be specified in place of any fileset s shown below Include filesets A B8 C L
292. commands with the OLM parameter 14 160 Exception Handling s cesena ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 14 163 Validation Procedure ee se se ee Ee ee GR AR Ge ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 14 168 Limitations and Restrictions ie se ee ee ee ee ER RA Re Ge ee Re Re Re ee 14 168 1 5 Ensuring Reliable Backups n 15 169 Inthis hapters EER ies Ree Reese ee 15 169 Detecting and handling tape CrrOrs oo ee ee AR ee AR ee ee 15 169 Recovering data from a bad tape ee ee ee AR ee ER ee ee 15 170 Validating DACKU PS ii EE Ke RE RE RE ae RE Di Gee RE RE EER ae EK De ER AE 15 170 BACKUP iX User Manual BACKUP iX User Manual Determining backup contents using LISTDIR cc ee ee ee ee 15 171 1 6 Maximizing Performance seere 16 173 Inthis chapter RE GE DE EE GE Ee Ge adh eaten 16 173 Improving the backup method ee se RR Re ER RR ee ee 16 173 Reducing the number of files to be stored ee ee ee ee 16 173 Using data compreSsiON nissin ee ee AR ee AR ee ea aka ia ee 16 174 Adjusting store optimizatiON ee ee ee ee ek ke ee ee ke ee ek Re ee 16 175 Increasing the number of store processes ee se ee 16 175 Maximizing tape block Size ee ee ee ee ee AR AR ee ee ee ee 16 176 Using afilebuffer EE RR OE Ge EE R ae Re ee ER DE 16 177 Not locking store Dilenen aoin a ee Re AR ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 16 177 Using multiple backup devices iese ee ee ER RR Re ee ee ee ee ee Re Re ee 16 177 U
293. continuation of the store directory from the previous tape These tapes include the words dir only on the last line SHOW listing The SHOW listing describes the files stored or restored and varies based on the showoption s specified One or more SHOW formats may be specified in any combination with the exception of LONG SHORT DIRECTORY and FILENAME which are mutually exclusive If BACKUP is run from a session and a SHOW format is not specified SHORT format is imposed as the default if run in batch the SHOW format defaults to LONG When the DIRECTORY keyword is specified with SHOW and the DIRECTORY option of STORE is in use the names of all directory structures MPE Groups Accounts and POSIX directories are displayed instead of the files stored SHORT format The SHOW listing in SHORT format displays basic information about files This is the default format if the command is executed in a session and the SHOW format is not specified PATHNAME SST SECTORS CODE XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX HE HHHHHHH XXXXX XXX XXXXX XXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXX HH HHHHHHHH XXXXX PATHNAME Filename with the Account and Group or Directories in which the file resides ST The percentage stored for each file listed in a store using the DELTA option SECTORS File size in sectors CODE Mnemonic file code Note Tape volume numbers are not displayed on the SHOW listing since a file may be fragmented on multiple volumes Required
294. corresponding value when setting the RESTOREJCW where RESTOREJCW values of 1 6 are fatal and 7 8 are warnings The RESTOREJCW values used by BACKUP except for 99 are the same as for MPE iX STORE The STOREJCW and RESTOREJCW are initialized to 99 at program startup time and on a successful command operation are set to 0 Once set to nonzero they remain non zero until they are reset by re invoking the program or explicitly resetting them STOREJCW and RESTOREJCW are also set by LISTDIR and READALL STOREJCW STOREJCW is an output JCW which returns a value that indicates whether the store was successful or not if unsuccessful the reason is given STOREJCW is also set when performing a READALL or LISTDIR against an existing store volumeset The JCW is displayed by SHOWJCW STOREJCW Note The STOREJCW is cumulative and reflects the most severe error that may have occurred during the backup Values for STOREJCW are Value Meaning oO No errors Syntax error in command Error while opening internal utility file s Error while opening indirect file Error while opening tape file Error in scanning files to be stored Error occurred in store Either one or more files specified for store does not exist or error in finding matching files ON DOO A OO N gt One or more files not stored because they were open for write access Initial value when B is launched and indicates program term
295. cter to 8 character name Disk backup files are privileged PRIV files and have the filecodes 993 for file0000 and 995 for file0001 A disk backup file is of the type fixed length binary FB and as such allows DSCOPY FTP BACKUP converts unqualified MPE or HFS syntax filenames to fully qualified paths If the user s Current Working Directory CWD was changed using the CHDIR or CHGROUP commands partially qualified filenames are qualified relative to the user s current CWD This method of qualifying filenames is compatible with the way MPE CI commands e g BUILD LISTF PURGE etc qualify filenames The Store Restore Listdir and Purge commands all use this way of qualifying filenames FINFO The FINFO file is created by BACKUP as a temporary file in the logon group account during a backup and contains the file directory FULL The FULL CYCLE ORBIT file is the default full backup cycle file used by TML This file is supplied with TML and can be used or modified as required IJGCONF The ISGCONF PUB SYS file holds the prior backup date This date is saved when the SETDATE option of the STORE or FULLBACKUP command is used It is accessed during a later backup using the STORE command with the GETDATE option or by the PARTBACKUP command OFFLINE OFFLINE is the formal file designator used for the SHOW OFFLINE listing By default it is assigned to device class LP but may be redirected to a file or printer with
296. ctionality of its Online module is able to store files while those files continue to be open for read and write access allowing unrestricted access to files during a store operation The Online module purchased as a BACKUP option provides both the traditional Online backup and the Zero downtime ZDT backup and is invoked by the ONLINE or ZERODOWN option of BACKUP s STORE command This chapter will describe the operation and features of these two options and the distinctions between them In this chapter These Online backup topics are covered e Standard backups compared to Online module backups e The synchronization point e Traditional Online backup operation e Zero downtime backup operation e Unattended Zero downtime backup e Invoking dependent processing during an Online backup e Non static files during an Online backup e Performance considerations The following function program command options and JCWs are covered with the above topics e The SYNCENABLE function e The SYNCUTIL program e The ONLINE SYNCWAIT and ZERODOWN options of the STORE command e The BACKUPSYNCANYWAY and BACKUPSYNCYN JCWs A comparison of standard and Online backups A standard non online backup can store only those files that are not being accessed or that if open are open only for read access New files created during the store are not included in a non online backup since all files to be included are selected at the
297. cycle pool the home pool for those tapes For example to allocate particular tapes for use only in full backups a number of tapes could be assigned to the pool for the FULL cycle Tapes assigned to a particular cycle pool remain in that cycle s pool now their home pool CYCLE attribute and are not used for any other cycle even when tapes are scratched Volumes of various media may belong to the same pool and yet still be distinguished by their media type MEDIA attribute TML selects volumes of the correct media type e g tape DDS based on the backup device to which the store is directed BACKUP iX User Manual 17 189 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide Within each pool volumes can also be distinguished by SIZE Thus volumes of various lengths referred to by SIZE classification may be in the same pool and the proper volumes may be selected based on the SIZE requirement SIZE attribute as specified for a backup of a certain cycle Tape volid Each tape is identified by a user assigned alphanumeric 6 character volid volume identifier Note that numeric volids should be used so that volids can be selected by range Ranges are not supported for alphanumeric volids because of potential ambiguity Numeric volids are right shifted and left padded with zeroes alphanumeric volids are left shifted The volume identifier volid is fundamental to tape library organization For example a numeric volid can
298. d Identifying tapes for a Restore with TML Restore Wizard and Intelligent Restore The tapes needed to restore a particular generation of a cycle can be identified automatically using TML s Restore Wizard with its Intelligent Restore feature or manually by entering the TML command SHOW CYCLE Refer to the Cycles section in Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide for information Identifying files on tape volumes with TML TML can be used manually to display the tapes needed to restore a specific file or fileset by entering the TML command SHOW CYCLE TAPES and specifying either the fileset or the generation of the cycle to restore Refer to the File register section in Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide for details Identifying tape volumes with Restore Wizard If performing a restore with Restore Wizard the appropriate tapes are automatically identified at the start of the restore and each tape is called for in the appropriate sequence Selecting files to restore In addition to the extensive number of other RESTORE command options the following methods can be used in any combination to select files for restore e Specifying a single backup or multiple backups by cycle name and generation using the CYCLE and GEN options of the RESTORE command e Specifying a date time period during which files were last modified and or backed up using the MDATE o
299. d Restores an entire database if the root file is specified not used with Restore Wizard Defragments the disk space to be occupied by the restored files Use a specific cycle name for a delta restore Restores files onto specified disk device The DIRECTORY option of RESTORE is disabled Contact Technical Support if you need to restore the system directory When restoring from a tape backup specifies that the store directory should be read from disk indicates the directory file name and whether the restore is to be attended default or unattended BACKUP iX User Manual 18 272 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide DRIVES ENCRYPT FIRST GENERATION GROUP KEEP KEEPBAD KEEPNEW KEEPOLD Allows multiple backup devices to be used in parallel for restore Specifies that store volumeset has been encrypted the encryption method and key For a restore with Restore Wizard that qualifies multiple versions of the same file specifies that the earliest version should be restored For a restore with Restore Wizard specifies the generation s to restore from Restores files from their source groups into a specified group Prevents files from being restored if files of the same name exist on the system Restores file even if an error occurs If restoring from an Online backup restores files that were open for write access at the synchronization point Prevents files from being restored unless they are mor
300. d allows BACKUP to store consistent databases wherever they re located but does not verify that all required files are indeed present All files that match the following wildcard patterns and which have the correct filecodes are included by the DBSTORE option when storing a rootfile beneath a POSIX directory root selects rootfile 4 44 Chapter 4 Backup Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide root selects datasets including large datasets root selects jumbo sets amp index files root A Z selects Omnidex indexes File Not Stored error messages Any of the following messages may be displayed preceded by the filename in question when DBSTORE is specified IMAGE DEPENDENT FILES INACCESSIBLE ALLBASE DEPENDENT FILES INACCESSIBLE IMAGE DEPENDENT FILES MISSING ALLBASE DEPENDENT FILES MISSING ASSOCIATED IMAGE ROOTFILE NOT STORED ASSOCIATED ALLBASE DBENV NOT STORED The SELECT TYPE option BACKUP also provides an easy method to specifically select for backup either all IMAGE databases or all IMAGE and AllBase databases contained in a specified fileset through the SELECT TYPE construct of the STORE command DB TYPE SELECT TYPE DB may be used to select or exclude both IMAGE and AllBase databases with a single keyword This example using the DB keyword stores all IMAGE and AllBase databases on the system in a DBSTORE compatible format gt STORE T SELECT TYPE DB DBSTORE IMAGE
301. d files and scripts Additionally information is presented about the various formal file designators used by BACKUP when creating files the way BACKUP utilizes disk space for various functions and how to control file attributes BACKUP files and file designators summary BACKUPDF BACKUPHC BACKUPMC BCKUPHLP BCKUPMSG Diskfile FINFO FULL MGCONF OFFLINE PART SYSLIST TMLABLP TMLCnnnx TMLCONF TMLDBnn TMLDBSC TMLLIST Contains the store directory if the STORE command DISKDIR option is used The BACKUP online help catalog The message catalog used by TML for user messages and online help Used by TML for user messages and online help A message catalog that contains TML tape identification label formats in various languages Disk backup files created with a user specified 4 character name A temporary file that contains the file directory The default full backup cycle file used by TML Contains the prior backup date The formal file designator used for the SHOW OFFLINE listing The default partial backup cycle file used by TML The formal file designator used for the SHOW listing The formal file designator for the TML tape identification label printer TML file information log files built wnenever a new generation is created with the TMLSAVELOGS configuration option enabled The TML configuration file The TML database The ORBiT supplied schema file for the TMLDB database The formal file designator for printed output fr
302. d for restore may improve performance on larger HPe3000 systems The number of processes to be used for a restore can be specified as the number of processes per backup device being used for the backup By default four processes per device are used This value may be overridden using the RESTOREPROCESSES JCW which is set before invoking BACKUP For example doubling the number of processes used in a restore on a large HPe3000 could allow better throughput and would be specified by SETVAR RESTOREPROCESSES 8 Maximizing tape block size For maximum efficiency BACKUP reads and writes data in large blocks By default BACKUP blocks are sized at the maximum supported size for HP DDS drives normally 32 Kbytes and 16 Kbytes for non DDS drives Note BACKUP will use a block size of 32 Kbytes on HP DDS drives which all support this block size Some third party DDS and 8mm drives do not support 32 Kbyte block sizes For these drives BACKUP will use the maximum block size each drive supports The 16 Kbyte block size used by BACKUP for non DDS drives is supported by all backup devices thereby permitting backups to be stored to and restored from all backup devices By default disk backups are also blocked at 16 Kbytes so they can be dumped to any backup device using the DUMP command The MAXBLOCK option of the STORE command can be used to force the block size up to the maximum block size supported by the backup device This
303. d for non numeric volids e Selected volids e g D100 D102 D200 e Using embedded and wildcards like LISTF e g D or D strings must be enclosed in quotes and ranges are disallowed e Any combination of the above e g 100 106 D100 E SHOW TAPE display modes SHOW TAPE displays three different types of tape information USAGE Tape usage characteristics ERRORS Tape error history FILES Files contained on tapes Tape usage characteristics The USAGE mode of SHOW TAPE displays information about the most recent use of each tape The following command displays usage information for tapes with volids 000120 through 000130 This is the default mode in which tape information is reported so the USAGE keyword need not be specified BACKUP iX User Manual 17 196 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt SHOW TAPE 120 130 USAGE Media Length First use Used Expires Scratched TAPE 2400FT 8 01 99 10 26 99 00 00 00 TAPE 2400FT 8 01 99 10 26 99 00 00 00 TAPE 2400FT 8 01 99 10 26 99 00 00 00 TAPE 2400FT 8 01 99 10 26 99 00 00 00 TAPE 2400FT 8 01 99 10 26 99 00 00 00 TAPE 2400FT 8 01 99 10 26 99 00 00 00 TAPE 2400FT 8 01 99 10 26 99 00 00 00 TAPE 2400FT 8 01 99 10 26 99 00 00 00 TAPE 2400FT 8 01 99 10 26 99 00 00 00 TAPE 2400FT 8 01 99 10 26 99 00 00 00 TAPE 2400FT 8 01 99 10 26 99 00 00 00 NDNNNNNNNNDNN OO OO CO OO CO OO T
304. d is especially useful for sites that have no operator Note The Restore Wizard requires the use of TML BACKUP s Tape Manager amp Librarian and is available only to owners and users of the TML module Restores with Restore Wizard can only be performed from backups created using TML Enabling Restore Wizard The Restore Wizard disabled by default can either be enabled via a configuration option or by setting a JCW When the BACKUPTMLRESTORE JCW is set to a value other than 0 Restore Wizard is enabled and the setting in the configuration file is overridden This feature makes it possible to enable Restore Wizard system wide but disable it for certain users or to disable it system wide but enable it for the system operator TMLRESTORE configuration option The TMLRESTORE configuration option in the TMLCOMF file describes whether Restore Wizard will be used or not YES TMLRESTORE NO If not specified the default for the TMLRESTORE parameter is NO Note The BACKUPTMLRESTORE JCW overrides this setting set to 1 to enable or 0 to disable the Restore Wizard Selecting files to restore In addition to the extensive number of other RESTORE command options the following methods can be used in any combination to select files for restore e Specifying a single backup or multiple backups by cycle name and generation using the CYCLE and GEN options of the RESTORE command e Specifying a date time period duri
305. d path and is assigned a special filecode 7652 Note Disk backups always include a copy of the store directory therefore DISKDIR is ignored when performing a disk backup BACKUP iX User Manual 18 321 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax gt STORE DISKDIR dirfilename dirfilename A store directory filename of up to 16 characters optionally qualified with group and account or partially or fully qualified Posix filename Examples To save the store directory in a disk file using the default filename BACKUPDF in the current group account gt STORE T DISKDIR To save the store directory in a disk file using the filename FULLDIR in the current group account gt STORE T DISKDIR FULLDIR Option DRIVES Allows multiple backup devices to be used serially or in parallel for backup Tape drives must be of the same type e g tape or DDS but not mixed and density and configured with the same device class Syntax gt STORE DRIVES numdrives P S numdrives The number of backup devices between 1 and 64 If the DRIVES option is not specified default of 1 drive is used P Specifies parallel handling of multiple backup devices If not specified this is the default S Specifies serial handling of multiple backup devices If not specified the default is parallel Examples To store in parallel to two backup devices STORE T DRIVES 2 To store to three
306. d that descriptive size classifications be used such as SMALL MEDIUM and LARGE If the size classification is to be ignored allowing media of any size to be selected for any backup of this cycle assign this parameter a blank value Defines the tape volume s home pool Name of an existing cycle or blank for the global pool To transfer five tapes from the pool for the cycle FULL into the global pool BACKUP iX User Manual 19 351 Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt CHANGE TAPE 115 119 CYCLE DEFAULT CYCLE Displays current cycle attributes and is used to set default attributes for new cycles Syntax gt DEFAULT CYCLE Parameters KEEP RETENTION FREQUENCY numberofdays DAYS daymask VOLUMES required spare KEE P numberofdays RET ENTION numberofdays FRE QUENCY numberofdays DAY S daymask VOL UMES required spare SIZ E classification Number of generations of the cycle in days that the cycle should be kept before expiring Number of days that each generation of the cycle should be retained before expiring Number of days to skip between backups of this cycle before performing this backup again For example numberofdays of 1 means that the backup should be performed every day 7 means every week An integer value Days of the week on which the cycle should be backed up identified by a m
307. d time exist the one that has the most recent store date and time is considered as last In this example the LAST keyword is used to restrict output to the latest copy of the fileset SALENDX DATA SALES gt SHOW FILE SALENDX DATA SALES LAST Filename Group Account Stored Cycle Gen Volid Last modified SALENDX DATA SALES 09 27 99 22 01 PART 28 000231 09 27 99 17 03 SALENDXK DATA SALES 09 27 99 22 01 PART 28 000232 09 27 99 17 03 In this example compared with the previous example it can be seen that this version of SALENDX is considered the LAST because its modification date and store date and time are most recent Earliest copy of a fileset The earliest or first file is that file which has the most distant modification date and time with the FIRST copy of identical versions distinguished by oldest store In this example the FIRST keyword is used to restrict output to the earliest copy of the fileset SALENDX DATA SALES BACKUP iX User Manual 17 208 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt SHOW FILE SALENDX DATA SALES FIRST Filename Group Account Stored Cycle Gen Volid Last modified SALENDX DATA SALES 09 01 99 21 20 FULL 5 000127 09 01 99 17 08 SALENDXK DATA SALES 09 01 99 21 20 FULL 5 000127 09 01 99 17 08 By modification date The MDATE keyword lists files based on when they were last modified by date and optionally time In this ex
308. databases The DBRESTORE option of the RESTORE command makes restoring IMAGE databases more reliable by restoring an entire database if the root file is specified For example to restore the entire GLDB database gt RESTORE T GLDB DATA GL DBRESTORE Note Jumbo and large datasets are restored using DBRESTORE BACKUP iX User Manual 9 105 Chapter 9 Restore Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide Restoring symbolic links Symbolic links are always stored and restored as links In restoring a symbolic link only the link is restored the data file that it points to is not In order to restore the file pointed to by the link it is necessary to include it in the restore fileset However if a symbolic link to a directory or a group or account appears in the middle of a path specification for a fileset to be stored the symbolic link is followed and the fileset itself is stored Restoring FIFOs and streams FIFOs and streams are always cleared their contents are deleted on restore as they are effectively run time pipes Restoring spool files MPE DCS Native Mode Spooler handles spool files as permanent disk files in the HPSPOOL account allowing them to be stored and restored with certain rules and restrictions BACKUP iX uses the spool file handling of MPE iX RESTORE as a model BACKUP s rules and restrictions for restoring spool files are e To facilitate restoring spool files BACKUP must build
309. days should be the same as shown in the BACKUP banner BACKUPFILEBUFFTAPEPRI BACKUPFILEBUFFTAPEPRI is an input JCW which can be used to specify the priority at which the filebuffer to tape process executes during a deferred backup This permits the user to set the process s priority as equal to or less than the priority at which users are running The process is launched at a relatively high priority by default to assure that the final stage of a deferred backup completes in a timely manner In some cases however the process can degrade system performance noticeably for users competing for limited system resources For example to cause the filebuffer to tape process to run at a priority of 160 competing with sessions in the middle of the CS subqueue issue the following command before invoking BACKUP SETVAR BACKUPFILEBUFFTAPEPRI 160 The BACKUPFILEBUFFTAPEPRI JCW can be set with any value in the range of 150 to 255 The lower the number the higher the priority The process is launched at the specified priority and remains at that priority for its duration The JCW must be set before invoking BACKUP changing the value after BACKUP has been started will have no effect Note Caution should be exercised in using this JCW Setting the priority too high i e a lower number could severely impact overall system responsiveness while setting the priority too low i e a higher number could result in unacceptable delays in backup comp
310. ded volume is in the library but not in a slot When the volume is in a drive an arm or a mail port or if the volume is in the desired drive then no attempt to load the volume will be made If the volume is in another element then Backup iX will provide the message Volume Voll is not in a storage slot or in Ldev 14 Move to storage slot and reply Continue or Abort C A If the operator types C then the volume location will be checked again If the operator types A then BACKUP iX will abort the operation Tape write protected When a tape is write protected the situation is handled basically as it is without OLM The operator must manually or with the OLM Cl move the volume out of the drive write enable it and move it back into the drive Already a volume in needed slot When Backup iX is finished with a volume previously in a storage slot it will move the volume back to its previous location as recorded in the OLM database If that slot contains some other volume Backup iX will provide the message BACKUP iX User Manual 14 165 Chapter 14 ORBiT Library Manager OLM Operations Guide Can not move volume from LDev 14 to occupied slot 44 in RINGO DLTLIB Moving to slot 55 instead where 55 is an empty slot If no more empty slots are available No empty slot available exception condition listed below will occur Drive is not part of the library ERR_NO_SUCH_DRIVE If the targ
311. default all active generations of the specified cycle or all cycles are displayed To restrict output to a particular generation include a GENERATION parameter on the command to specify either the absolute or relative number of the cycle generation For example gt SHOW CYCLE FULL GEN 7 will display information about generation 7 of the FULL backup cycle Assuming there are only 8 GENERATIONS this command is equivalent to gt SHOW CYCLE FULL GEN 1 which because the generation number is prefixed by a minus sign displays information about the next to last FULL backup generation To display information about the latest generation of a cycle specify a generation of either 0 or 0 For example to display information about the most recent generation of all cycles BACKUP iX User Manual 17 185 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt SHOW CYCLE GEN 0 Printing reports Appending OFFLINE to the SHOW CYCLE command causes output to be printed offline as well as being displayed on STDLIST Output is sent to device class LP under the formal file designator TMLLIST Creation information The CREATION mode of SHOW CYCLE displays information about the creation storing of cycle generations This is the default mode meaning that information is displayed in this format if the mode is not specified with SHOW CYCLE The information includes the date and time th
312. default as with LISTF By default all copies of the specified fileset are displayed by SHOW FILE SHOW FILE can also restrict output to information on files selected using one of the following fileset selection keywords The SHOW FILE fileset selection keywords are CYCLE Report on certain generations of certain cycles in the indicated generations GENERATION Report on certain generations of certain cycles in the indicated generations MDATE Report on files having particular modification dates and times BDATE Report on files having particular backup dates and times FIRST Report on the first and last versions of files LAST Report on the first and last versions of files Note SHOW FILE is unable to accurately report on file information that is not in the file register due to disabled file information log saving Therefore if file information for any active generation has not been loaded a warning message is issued in response to the SHOW FILE command and SHOW FILE continues to report using available information Printing reports Appending OFFLINE to the SHOW FILE command causes output to be printed offline as well as being displayed on STDLIST Output is sent to device class LP under the formal file designator TMLLIST All copies of a fileset SHOW FILE lists files in chronological order by last modification date If multiple versions of a file with the same modification date exist they are further ordered chronological
313. dification date and time multiple copies of the same version of a file same modification date and time are listed in stored date time order Filename Group Account Stored Cycle Gen Volid Last modified XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm XXXXXXXX XXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm Filename Fully qualified filename Stored Date and time file store was completed in mm dd yy date format and 24 hour time format Cycle Cycle under which file was stored Gen Generation of cycle under which file was stored BACKUP iX User Manual 24 415 Chapter 24 Reports BACKUP iX Reference Guide Volid Volid Last mod Date file and time was last modified in mm dd yy date format and 24 hour time format SHOW POOL Displays information about tapes in pools with one line for each tape in pool for each cycle listed in essentially the order in which they are selected for store specifically 1 Cycle pool Media Size Disposition SCRATCHED then PROTECTED then currently selected for store Scratch date Volid oa RPO N Cycle Media Size Length Seg Volid Used Expires Scratched Home pool XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXKX XXXXXX XXXXXX mm dd yy mm dd yy XXXXXXXX Cycle Cycle name for global pool cycle is blank Media Media type Size Size classification Length User defined tape length typically measured in feet Seq Relative order in which tapes will be selected for reuse Volid Volid of volume Used Number of times tape was stor
314. displayed on the console are not written to the system log file Automatically perform actions before synchronization It is possible to delay the synchronization point and for a Zero downtime backup also user suspension in order to accomplish certain actions before the synchronization When performing an Online backup without using the Zero downtime feature BACKUP notifies the operator through a console message that the synchronization point has been reached and requires that the operator REPLY before it performs the synchronization This REPLY requirement gives the operator opportunity to perform before synchronization any actions that are necessary This generally includes aborting inactive users and requesting active users to release their files momentarily Use of a traditional Online backup assumes of course that an operator is present to REPLY and that the operator will correctly perform the required steps before REPLYing Neither of these cases is always true Therefore it may be desirable to automate the REPLY as well as the performance of certain actions before the REPLY Actions that are good candidates for automation may include for example streaming a job that runs a logoff program to log off all inactive users a job that sends a message to all logged on users or a job that runs DBUTIL against each database to disable logging The synchronization point may be delayed in one of the three following w
315. dividually on restore include specifically e Account e Group e Owner e Creator BACKUP iX User Manual 9 100 Chapter 9 Restore Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide Changing the account attribute To redirect files on restore to a particular account use the ACCOUNT option of the RESTORE command This restores files into their original groups in the specified account If some groups do not exist in the specified account the files originating in those groups are not restored For example to restore files into their respective groups in the TEST account gt RESTORE T PROD ACCOUNT TEST If the specified account does not exist it may be created by using the CREATE option in combination with the ACCOUNT option as shown gt RESTORE T PROD ACCOUNT TEST CREATE ACCT To create required groups that do not exist in the specified account gt RESTORE T PROD ACCOUNT TEST CREATE ACCT GROUP Note Some special rules and restrictions are imposed for the ACCOUNT option when restoring spool files Refer to the discussion of Restoring spool files later in this chapter Changing the group attribute To redirect files on restore to a particular group use the GROUP option of the RESTORE command This restores files into the specified group in the original account If the specified group does not exist for certain accounts those files are not restored For example to restore files into
316. drive logical devices with the AUTOREPLY or SEQUENCE keywords OLM requires that you specify a LABEL and VOLID when not using TML Examples To perform a parallel restore on the OLM host gt RESTORE t keep olddate drives 2 autoreply 14 15 OLM mylib amp gt Label FULL volid 100001 10022 See Chapter 13 ORBIT Library Manager in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide for more examples of performing restores from tape media located on a robotic tape library Notes BACKUP iX User Manual 18 295 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide e All volumes used in a BACKUP OLM operation must be located in the library at the start of the operation or imported into the library during the operation e The OLM keyword also affects the STORE LISTDIR DUMP READALL and VERIFY commands Option ON Performs a specified command when a particular event has occurred A special variation of the ON command is ON ERROR QUIT which must be specified exactly ON ERROR QUIT Syntax gt RESTORE ON event DO mpecommand gt RESTORE ON ERROR QUIT One of the following conditions on which to DO a specific MPE command Event VOLUME This event is the mount request for a new tape volume It is not supported for a disk backup ERROR This event is the occurrence of any error Mpecommand Any MPE command ON ERROR QUIT A variation of the ON commands The restore is terminated on any error Multiple ON opt
317. ds they contain eof using the SELECT SIZE option of the RESTORE command Selecting by filename range Regular expression syntax is used for POSIX fileset range selection For example to restore the files AP test apdb through AP test apdb17 the APDB database gt RESTORE T AP test apdb AP test apdb0 1 9 AP test apdb1 0 7 Note Fileset ranges cannot be specified with MPE syntax For example to restore only files from the TEST account that have less than 5 000 entries gt RESTORE T SELECT SIZE lt 5000 The relational operators lt gt lt gt and lt gt may be used when selecting files by size BACKUP iX User Manual 11 123 Chapter 11 Restoring Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide Excluding filesets Filesets may be excluded from restore by prefixing them with a minus sign for MPE ix files or a minus sign with a leading space for POSIX files The leading space is necessary since a POSIX file can end with a minus sign Exclusions may be either global or local meaning that the exclusion may apply to a particular fileset or to all filesets Up to 250 fileset exclusions may be specified for any restore Global exclusions For example to restore all files from tape except those that originated from the CSL account gt RESTORE T CSL To restore all files on the system except thos
318. e deltacyclename A specific Delta cycle name assigned in the baseline store which must be used in any associated delta stores defaults to DELTA Example To assign the cycle name DAILY to a delta store gt STORE T DELTA DAILY To assign the default cycle name DELTA to a delta store use no parameter gt STORE T DELTA Note The DELTA store option may be used with either ONLINE or ZERODOWN When a delta store is entered an informational message identifies the store as being a DELTA store ONLINE DELTA or ZERODOWN DELTA and indicates the name of the Delta cycle in this example DAILY This backup was DELTA with name DAILY This backup was ONLINE DELTA with name DAILY This backup was ZERODOWN DELTA with name DAILY Option DIRECTORY The DIRECTORY option causes BACKUP to recover the directories of all available volumesets from the backup These directories include the system volumeset as well as all available nonsystem volumesets The directory ies and the BACKUPPL program are written in MPE iX STORE format followed by the specified fileset in BACKUP store format Syntax Example To perform a full system backup with all available volumeset directories at the beginning of the tape which in combination with an SLT tape can be used to perform an INSTALL BACKUP iX User Manual 18 320 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt STORE T DIRECTORY
319. e Example To READALL the volumeset FULL consisting of ANSI labeled volumes with IDs FRIO1 FRIO2 and FRIO3 gt READALL T LABEL FULL VOLID FRI01 FRI02 FRIO3 REDO Re executes a previous BACKUP command with optional editing Use the BACKUP command LISTREDO to select a previous command REDO without a command will edit execute the last command Syntax relativenumber gt REDO command redonumber Parameters relativenumber A number in the command line stack relative to the value 1 of the most recent command e g The 7 command entered prior to the most recent one is re executed with gt DO 7 command Any BACKUP command previously entered during the current session BACKUP iX User Manual 18 267 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide redonumber A number assigned to a command entered during the current session and displayed by entering BACKUP s LISTREDO command To append a single character to the end of the command line type the greater than character gt then the desired character and press RETURN If REDO is used with a redonumber as presented by first entering LISTREDO use the following characters to edit the command or manage REDO D Delete character string Insert string R string Replace string DE Delete through end of line string If a string that does not begin with a D R or I is specified it replaces the string above it as
320. e Tapes are added into pools where they are selected for backups Once tapes have been used in a store their cycle name and backup generation number can be used to reference them In this section information is provided about TML and tape pools volids attributes adding and labeling tapes scratching or deleting tapes and reporting on tapes using the ADD TAPE CHANGE TAPE DEFAULT TAPE DELETE TAPE SHOW POOL and SHOW TAPE commands Tape pools A tape pool is a collection of tapes that are either assigned to a particular cycle or are part of the global pool All volumes of all media are contained in a tape pool with a dedicated pool for each backup cycle plus a single global pool The global pool is a special default pool that contains tapes that have not been assigned to a particular cycle s pool By default all volumes are contained in the global pool Tapes having an available disposition status are drawn from the global pool whenever needed for a store Tapes used for a store cycle are automatically transferred into the dedicated pool for that cycle and remain there until scratched for reuse Once scratched the tapes return to the global pool So tapes may in effect be borrowed from the global pool reside temporarily in a cycle s pool and then return to their home pool the global pool Tapes may also be explicitly assigned to a cycle s pool This dedicates a specific set of tapes for use with one particular cycle making that
321. e it will return an error Syntax TAPECTRL action question ldev action E JECT L OAD ONLINE guestion A VAIL ABLE F ULL WIRITE ABLE H ELP Parameters action A TAPECTRL program command that performs an action BACKUP iX User Manual 21 378 Chapter 21 Programs Command Files and Scripts BACKUP iX Reference Guide question A TAPECTRL program command that asks a question Idev The numeric logical device number of the backup device Example To eject the tape volume in ldev 14 TAPECTRL EJECT 14 To determine if tape drive 14 is available TAPECTRL A 14 TAPECTRL AVAIL 14 To view a brief help screen enter TAPECTRL TAPECTRL h This display appears TapeCtr 3 10 Usage TapeCtr l Action Question LDevNumber Actions E j ect Unload and eject the media L oad Load media and put drive online O nl ine Put drive back online Questions A vail abl e Is tape drive available ull Is media in the drive Wi ritelable Can data be written now Results Ok or True JCW set to zero Failure or False JCW set gt FATALO value varies TAPECTRL command list EJECT An action command that unloads and ejects a loaded tape assuming the tape drive has software support for this operation most newer drives do BACKUP iX User Manual 21 379 Chapter 21 Programs Command Files and Scripts BACKUP iX Reference Guide LOAD An action command th
322. e then the disk backup fileset must be transferred to the local system and then restored Refer to the discussion of Network backup in Chapter 5 Backup Methods in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide for the procedure for network backup and Restoring from a disk backup above A restore may also be performed over a network by opening the remote computer s tape drive through a file equation For example if using NS Network Services with the tape drive on the remote system identified as Idev 7 and a nodename of PRODUCTION CALIFORNIA USA FILE PCUT DEV PRODUCTION CALIFORNIA USA 7 RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt RESTORE PCUT LOGS PROD Note The Fast Search feature is not available when restoring directly over a network Restoring with the TML Restore Wizard With BACKUP s Restore Wizard a component of the Tape Manager amp Librarian module a restore may be performed without having identified either the backup in which a specified fileset exists or the tapes that are needed A RESTORE command specifying the desired files is simply issued The tapes containing the desired version of the files are determined by BACKUP and TML working together then a console request is displayed as needed for the restore tapes BACKUP iX User Manual 113 Chapter 10 Restore Methods BACKUP iX Operations Guide This extremely powerful feature unique to BACKUP saves time and manual effort when restoring files an
323. e 6 lines per inch The tape identification label is customizable Such attributes as volid store date and time expiration date and error and retry statistics can be printed on them as shown Volid 000123 Seq 1 of 8 Cycle FULL Gen 00008 Density 6250 JCW 008 Retries 00002 Errors 00000 Stored 09 21 99 12 00 Expires 10 26 99 Used 0002 Tape identification labels are provided in several international languages the language in which to print the label may be set as a configuration option Refer to the section in this chapter titled Configuration for instructions on customizing the tape label format and setting the language A dedicated printer device for external labels It is recommended that a separate printer permanently loaded with the proper label stock be reserved for printing tape identification labels An inexpensive dot matrix RS232 printer is advised However it is possible to use any printer for printing tape identification labels since output contains no special control codes To specify the printer device on which to print labels issue a file equation for TMLABLP which identifies the device class or ldev number of the printer as shown FILE TMLABLP DEV 25 The output priority and number of copies may be included on the file equation if desired Note f the TMLABLP file equation is not set the labels are not printed and the following message is displayed WARNING tape identificat
324. e GENERATION option is specified in combination with xDATE option s it takes precedence If GEN is excluded meaning that all generations are selected then any xDATE options used apply to all generations BACKUP iX User Manual 18 306 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide The xDATE Restore options are filters that are applied to any generations selected and include DATE BDATE MDATE and SDATE If a selection criteria is specified that fails to find any qualifying files for example MDATE gt 10 10 2003 but no files were modified after that date or SDATE gt 10 10 2004 but no files had a label state change after that date the desired file s will not be restored since they do not exist and no message will be issued BACKUP iX User Manual 18 307 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide STORE STORE performs a system backup to tape or disk Alternately the FULLBACKUP and PARTBACKUP commands may be used instead of STORE for performing full and partial backups See sections on FULLBACKUP and PARTBACKUP earlier in this chapter Syntax gt STORE filesetlist tapefile storeoption diskfile filesetlist k GIE indirectfile gt cyclename fileset filestostore filestoexclude filestoexclude storeoption APPEND AUTOREPLY ldev BACKUP backupname COMPRESS compressionmethod DBSTORE dbstoreparm D
325. e account while any user may store spool files of which he is the owner e SMor OP capability is required for users of the DIRECTORY option of the STORE command e RD Read Directory and TD Transition Directory user access are required for reading and transitioning directories e DD Delete Directory access is required when purging files after storing using the PURGE option of the STORE command e SMor OP capability is required to store device links 3 36 Chapter 3 Security and Access Requirements BACKUP iX Operations Guide Note The BACKUP program BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT and the message catalog BACKUPMC PUB ORBIT are stored with tape backups except remote backups therefore the user is granted read access to these message catalog files by the BACKUP installation procedure Restore The following access restrictions are imposed for restore e Users must have save access to any file they wish to restore Users with System Manager SM or System Supervisor OP capability can restore all files on the system users with Account Manager AM capability can restore any file in their logon account files except those owned by users from other accounts i e files whose GROUPID fields don t match the account where they re located e RD and TD access are required when reading along a POSIX path e BACKUP is capable of automatically creating nonexistent users groups accounts and directories based on files being restored SM
326. e backup generations Syntax CRE ATION STA TS TYP E gt SHOW CYCLE cyclespec GEN ERATION value MOD IFIED OFFLINE TAP ES FIL ES DIR ECTORY Parameters cyclespec The name of a cycle or for all cycles If is specified TML loads file information for only those generations which require loading GENERATION Absolute or relative generation number value Specified in one of the following formats BACKUP iX User Manual 19 359 Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide e All generations exclude the GENERATION parameter e Most recent generation specify O e Absolute generation number e g 33 e Relative generation number e g 1 means the next to last generation 2 the previous generation etc PARMS Cycle attributes CREATION Default Information about the creation storing of cycle generations including the store date and time user logon ID StoreJCW expiration date number of tape volumes written to and volid of the first volume STATS Statistics about each backup generation including the number of files stored and number of sectors on disk they occupied filebuffer size compression percentage achieved backup duration and number of logging sectors and dynamic files for online backups TYPE Number of files stored with a breakdown of files by type i e IMAGE DB KSAM SPOOL PROG VPLUS ASCII BI
327. e ee 6 75 External tape identification labeling iese ee se ee ee Re ee Re de ee 6 75 Step by step tape backup guide see ee ee ER AA Ee ee ee Ee RA ee 6 75 Step by step disk backup guide iese ee ee ee RR RA Re Ge ee ee ee Ee Re ee ee 6 76 StOreeXamplEL Es OD ER DR DE DS Ee N GR tenon OR Ee OE ee 6 77 rd Online and Zero Downtime BackUD iese esse esse seke ee 7 79 In thiS Chapter icgecss EE Ee teeth ad hes ee aoe deed ele a Wee ss 7 79 A comparison of standard and Online backups eseeeeeeeeees 7 79 The Synchronization pointe cecenii AR ee AR ee AR ee ee ee ee 7 80 Online backup operatiON ee RA EA ER ER RA Re Ge ee ee ee ee Re ee ee 7 80 Zero downtime M backup iis ee ee RR ER Re Re Ee ee ee RA Re ee ee ee ee ee 7 82 Zero downtime Operation ee ee ee ek AR RA Ee GR ER Re Re ee ee ee ee ee 7 84 Unattended Zero downtime baCKUP iii se eke ee ee GR RA ee ee 7 88 Invoking dependent processing during an online bacKUD iis see 7 89 Non static files during an Online backup iese ee ee ee RA ee 7 90 Performance Considerations ee ee ee ee Re ee ee ee ee 7 92 8 DELTA Backup Module ees ees ee ee ee ee nnn nnna 8 93 Indhischaptef Ee ESE EER ER eer GE ER eee dei eet eee deed 8 93 OVEN ER RE EE GE Ee chit Gn GE ER Ee sais 8 93 Delta store operation ee ee ee ee Ee AA EE ee GR Ee AA ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 8 94 Standard and Online Delta backupS
328. e ee 9 106 18 281 DELTA Option ese ee ee se eke ee ee ee ee nne 18 281 DEV option ee ee ee ee ee ee se ee ee 9 105 18 281 DIRECTORY option ees ee ee ee ee ee 18 282 DISKDIR OptON ee 111 11 127 18 282 DRIVES option ees ee 111 13 144 18 283 ENCRYPT option eie see ese ee ee ee ee ee ee 18 283 FIRST Option EE ER ge Ge EE Sek 18 285 GENERATION option 18 285 GROUP option 0 9 101 18 286 18 291 KEEP ODHON ees see ee ee ee ee ee se ee 11 129 18 287 KEEPBAD option 11 130 18 288 26 424 KEEPNEW option ees ees se ee 11 130 18 288 KEEPNONPVZ option esse ee ee ese ees ee ee 18 289 KEEPOLD option ee ee ese ee ee ee ee ee ee 18 289 LABEL option esse ee ee ee ee 12 136 18 290 LAST OPON EED cde ae 18 290 LOCAL option 9 102 18 286 18 291 NEWDATE option ese see ese ee ee ee ee ee ee 18 292 NOLABEL OpDHON ee ee ee ee ee 111 18 292 NOPATH option ee ees ee ee ee ee ee ee ee n 18 293 OLDDATE option e ees ee ee se ee ee ee 18 294 OEM option ii catehe es Re Vee er ed 18 294 ON ODUON EER cate ee ten ele 18 296 ONVS option ee ee ee ee ee 11 121 18 296 OWNER OpDHON ese ee ee ee se ee ee ee 18 297 PREVIEW OPDHON ees esse esse se se ee 11 120 18 298 PROGRESS option esse ee ee ee ee ee ee 18 298 Restore Wizard optiONS ee 114 17 216 SDATE Option it EE EE Ee oe Ee DR 18 299 SELEGTODUOM ES ae Re EE eg ee ed 18 299 TYPE constructi siaa ee ee ee ee se
329. e ee Ee RA Ee Ee GR AA Ge ee ee ee ee ee Re Re ee ee ee ee 4 48 Backups restorable onto any HP 3000 ee ee ee ee ee 4 48 5 Backup Methods ccccccccceccessecececeeceeeeeseceseeeeeeaeaeaees 5 49 In this Chapter ie RE ae Res RR EE Re RD GE ER AE case N gee 5 49 Unattended backups ties issie eek a aa ae a cau a EEA 5 49 Tape backups versus disk bacKUDS iis ee ee ee ee ee ee Ee Re Re ee ee ee ee ee 5 50 Deferred backup esse ee ee a ER Re AA ee ee GR Ge AA ee ee ee RA Re ee ee ee 5 50 BE dee Pos ER RE EE RE EE EO OE 5 52 Appended backup ee ee ee AR AA AR ee ee ee AA ee ee AR ee ee 5 54 Network BackUDS e pel ae ean i eee a 5 56 Online and Zero downtime backup ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeees 5 57 Delta BacKUDS wana SE DE ahaa eee 5 57 6 ede dl coco AE EE EO OE RT 6 58 Mithis chapter EE ies RS ER Ed ME WE Re eee ee eed 6 58 Specifying files using store command syNtaX ees ee ek ee ee ee 6 58 Specifying files with indirect or cycle files ee ee ke ee ee ke ee 6 63 Specifying backup device s ie ee Re ee ee Re ee ee Re ee ee ke ee 6 67 Specifying store directory handling ee ee ek ee ee Re ee ee ke ee 6 70 vii BACKUP iX User Manual Reporting backup progreSS is se ee ee ER ER Re Re ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 6 72 Reporting on files stored ee se ee ee RR ee ee Re ee ee Re ee ee Re ee ee 6 72 Selection of tapes for backUDS ii se ee ee ER ER RA Re Ge ee ee ee ee Re d
330. e ee ee ee ee 18 323 ERROR event Used with ON option 0 2 32 2 33 18 332 Events used with ON option ERROR spec diepe E Oa Wee Ee ER 2 32 2 33 18 332 al kadai 2 32 2 33 18 332 RELEASED 2 32 2 33 7 89 18 331 SUSPEND srna aarin 2 32 2 34 7 89 18 331 SYNCPOINT eee 2 32 2 34 7 89 18 332 SYNCWAIT eee 2 32 2 34 7 89 18 332 VOLUME ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 2 32 2 33 18 332 EXIT command arere e esidan a ee ee 18 246 Elle EE EE EE EE ED 2 27 FIFOs and Streams ees se eke ee ee ee ee ee AA ee 4 46 File code is ae ints aed ee beets 11 123 File designatorsS ee ee ee ee ee 23 395 File directory ee ee Ee ee ee 23 397 26 423 FILE event Used with ON option 0 2 32 2 33 18 332 File information ee ee se ee Ee RR RA Ee ee 430 lle EE N RE N 17 205 aUtomatIC ee ee Re Re Ee ee AR ee ee 17 206 disabling 0 00 17 205 17 206 17 212 manual sesse esse ee ee ee ee ee Ee 17 205 17 206 File information logS iese see 17 205 23 398 NAMING Convention ee ee ee ee ee 23 398 ode oe N 17 206 RE RE EE TE 17 213 disabliNg ee ee ee 17 205 17 213 File register ses Ee EN REee eini 430 disabling maintenance ee ee 17 205 iNCONSIStENCY ee ee ee ee ee ee AR ee ee 26 425 File Status report Summary info for files stored 24 399 File tyDeS score des SE iei 11 123 431 ASCI EE EE N Ed 6 61 Binary les centile 6 61 Byte stream files aaeeei 6 61 Device links
331. e has expired By using the appended backup feature however additional backups may be appended to the tape regardless of whether the tape volumeset has expired So the fundamental change in philosophy is that the single expiration date applies to each individual backup on the tape Each appended backup tape volume has a single label which is written at the front of each tape and is not overwritten thereafter Therefore once a label has been written for a tape any appended backups to that volume can not alter that label Such a label can only be modified by restarting the volume with a non appended backup and then overwriting the label with a new label Because of these restrictions several rules apply when performing an appended backup 1 Because the tape volume has a single label attributes of the LABEL option apply to all the backups in the volume set 2 Ifthe LABEL option is specified for the first backup to a tape volume APPEND not specified its parameters are used to establish the label for that volume set All subsequent backups to that volumeset must specify the same volsetid or the NOLABEL option must be specified to disable label checking 3 Ifthe LABEL option is specified in combination with the APPEND option for a volume set a The volsetid specified in the LABEL option must match the volsetid on the tape otherwise BACKUP iX will behave in the same way as for a non appended backup by prompting to overwrite the tape
332. e in the ap test directory RESTORE T ap test Inserting a comma before the excluded fileset makes the exclusion global in this example all files on the system containing the string TEMP would be excluded gt RESTORE T ACCT1 ACCT2 TEMP Local exclusions In the previous examples the exclusion is global To perform a local exclusion do not specify a comma before the minus sign The local exclusion applies only to the fileset that immediately precedes it For example to restore all files from the ACCT1and ACCT2 accounts except files in ACCT2 that contain TEMP in the filename gt RESTORE T ACCT1 ACCT2 TEMP Multiple fileset exclusions Multiple filesets may be excluded both globally and locally in the same command For example to restore all files in the SYS and TELESUP accounts except files in the TEMPSYS group and also exclude all files in either account containing TEMP gt RESTORE T SYS TEMPSYS TELESUP TEMP Note When using fileset exclusion in an indirect file BACKUP implicitly appends a comma to the end of each line in the file This causes each line to be treated as a global exclusion To declare a local exclusion in an indirect file specify the excluded fileset on the same line as the fileset from which it is being excluded BACKUP iX User Manual 11 124 Chapter 11 Restoring Files
333. e job CHECKRUN once the tape volume containing the file AP79 the last dataset in the AP database has been written gt STORE T ON FILE AP79 DATA AP DO STREAM CHECKRUN To stream the job PAYDAY when any file beginning with the string POST has been stored gt STORE T ON FILE POST DATA AP DO STREAM PAYDAY To raise the session and job limits upon completion of the backup BACKUP iX User Manual 18 332 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt STORE T ON RELEASED DO LIMIT 2 40 To send a message to users during a Zero downtime online backup indicating that they will be disabled momentarily gt STORE T ZERODOWN amp gt ON SUSPEND DO TELL You will be disabled momentarily for backup To send a message to users during a Zero downtime online backup indicating they can continue working gt STORE T ZERODOWN amp gt ON RELEASED DO TELL Backup is done you may now resume working Option ONLINE Permits read write create and purge access during the backup while guaranteeing data integrity When the ONLINE option is used all transactions against files during the backup are logged to separate log files which are written to tape along with the store fileset Also created purged and renamed files are accommodated On restore the log files are searched and transactions are posted in a roll forward recovery fashion Syntax Example
334. e label and the directory are written to the beginning of the tape When a directory is present on the tape the backup must skip over the directory in attempting to read the label This could take several seconds The NOLABEL option does sacrifice some security and therefore should be used with caution An unexpired tape could be overwritten Syntax BACKUP iX User Manual 18 241 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt DUMP NOLABEL Example To ignore any BACKUP tape label gt DUMP TEMP T NOLABEL Notes NOLABEL cannot be used with ANSI labeled tapes Option OLM With the OLM option a user may specify the host name and the library name to copy data from a backup disk file to tape media located within a robotic tape library Only one library can be referenced at a time This option is available only with the OLM module installed and the OLM daemon job running on the library host machine The AUTOREPLY option must be used with the OLM option to coordinate the mounting of the media on the correct logical device Only one drive is allowed The LABEL and VOLID options are also required to identify each volume to the OLM database and to provide identifying internal labels for each volume TML is not used with DUMP At least one volume ID must be provided to perform the DUMP command with OLM If media must be changed additional volume IDs must be listed with the VOLID option or
335. e like the following is displayed for each generation of every cycle that is scratched Scratching generation 93 of cycle PART completed Scratching generation 27 of cycle FULL completed If the file register is being maintained additional messages are displayed when the process that excludes file information for scratched files starts and completes Excluding file information for scratched backup generation s file information exclusion completed The file register records information for files contained on all backups Refer to Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian for complete information about TML Session versus batch mode Backups may be invoked from a session or in batch from a job stream When using BACKUP batch jobs are recommended instead of sessions because batch jobs e Free the console or terminal for use during stores and restores e Are quicker than keying in commands every time a backup is performed e Organize BACKUP for automatic or semi automatic operation e Make backup procedures consistent from day to day e Allow system managers control over BACKUP commands e Improve security e Produce output listings that can be used as an audit trail e Are convenient for linking the backup to other processes e Allow for automatic system tuning and other system settings e Allow for scheduling of backups during off hours e Provide for better error detection and handling e Help ORBiT Technical Supp
336. e of in command syntax esse 19 347 20 365 Use of the colon as the MPE prompt 2 28 Use space and minus sign in excluding POSIX filesets 6 62 Use to delimit list of multiple filesets 6 60 pt to reference a TML cycle file Il 6 66 Use to specify a backup 112 112 Use with an indirect file IT 6 66 11 125 6 66 11 125 Use with label keywords I 17 203 Use with long commands amp 2 30 Use with REDO 1 18 268 Use with REDO in editing characters I 2 32 Use with TML module I 4 40 17 202 Used for selecting files 11 121 dl 11 121 11 121 411 121 OD ES EE RE EG EE ee 11 121 Spool files ie ee ee ee ee 6 61 11 123 435 Checkpoint files se ee ee ee ER RA Ee ee ee 4 46 excluded from store see ee RR RA ee 4 46 input spool files see ce eect eee ee RR Re ee ee ee 4 46 BACKUP iX selecting for Store airecc 18 309 eine OP OE 3 36 4 46 SSMs Save Set Marks ee ee se ee ee Ee ee ee 22 387 SLACK GELE EE RE N steels 13 142 Standard non online backup 5 49 7 79 Static HaCkUPS is ss EER heen tee reed ee 16 173 Step by step backup guide disk backup Sic Eer GERS esate 6 76 tape backup iris Ee eek GR Ke AE GED ae gee Ee Eg 6 75 Step by step guide restore from disk bacCKUD iese sesse see 11 131 SLOFG 2E Ee Ee n EE este tee 435 Store bits Bid EER ss ed ee 16 177 18 328 435 STORE command
337. e recent than the version on disk as determined by modification and state change date and time Prevents files from being restored unless they are less recent than the version on disk as determined by modification and state change date and time Options summary continued KEEPNONPVZ LABEL LAST LOCAL MDATE NEWDATE NOLABEL NOPATH OLDDATE OLM ON ERROR QUIT ON ONVS OWNER PREVIEW PROGRESS SDATE Causes only those files that were not fully restored in a previous aborted restore to be included in the current restore Files that were successfully restored in the previous aborted restore are not included in the current restore Validates volid specified against volid in BACKUP tape label prevents restore if not a match For a restore with Restore Wizard that qualifies multiple versions of the same file specifies that the most recent version should be restored Restores files directly below the current working directory CWD For a restore with Restore Wizard selects files based on modification date and time Allows the last modification and last access dates to be set to the restore date Disables checking of BACKUP tape labels By default label checking is used Restores the basename from a POSIX store into the target location Prevents the last modification and last access dates from being reset to the restore date Permits restores from one or more tape volumes in a robotic tape library Terminates on any
338. e store completed the logon ID of the user session or job the StoreJCW value the expiration date the number of volumes written to and the volid of the first tape volume in the store volumeset In the following example information about the creation of all generations of all backup cycles is requested gt SHOW CYCLE CREATION Gen Created Session User Account JCW Expires Vol Vsetid 09 01 99 LARRY OPERATOR SYS 10 05 99 000123 09 07 99 LARRY OPERATOR SYS 10 12 99 000130 09 14 99 DEBBIE OPERATOR SYS 10 19 99 000137 09 21 99 FSB OPERATOR SYS 10 26 99 000145 09 24 99 PSB OPERATOR SYS 09 29 99 000207 000214 000204 000209 000905 001011 001012 09 26 99 PSB OPERATOR SYS 09 27 99 PSB OPERATOR SYS 09 26 99 DEBBIE OPERATOR SYS 09 26 99 SALEBKUP MGR SALES 09 27 99 SALEBKUP MGR SALES 10 01 99 10 02 99 11 10 99 09 28 99 09 29 99 8 8 8 8 0 09 25 99 PSB 1 OPERATOR SYS 0 09 30 99 0 0 0 0 0 PRPRPWWNHDNOOO 1 I Note that in this example later generations of both FULL and PART backups required more volumes than previous generations This indicates that files grew in size and or there were more files to back up Also note that the StoreJCW value for the FULL backups is 8 which indicates that some files were in use during the store a normal occurrence for a full backup Resource statistics The statistics mode of SHOW CYCLE displays store statistics which
339. e total number of files that were stored and not stored at the completion of each backup JCWs for store reporting The total number of files stored and not stored are also available through two JCWs which can be tested to determine for example if more than the expected number of files were not stored These JCWs are FILESSTORED Number of files successfully stored FILESNOTSTORED Number of files not stored Note Additional JCWs are available for testing other store results Refer to Chapter 22 JCWs in the BACKUP X Reference Guide for information Files not stored Files selected for a store will not be included in a backup if for example they are specified with an invalid path if a security violation occurred in selecting them if they were open for writing and other less common reasons such as when the files have been quarantined or when a database file has been selected for store but has an associated rootfile or dependent file that cannot be stored When such files are found in a store fileset BACKUP excludes them from being stored and identifies them with an appropriate message BACKUP iX User Manual 6 73 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide The FILES NOT STORED report identifies the files that were selected for the store but are unavailable and indicates why they are not available For example PATHNAME NOT STORED BECAUSE filename USER LACKS READ ACCESS filename FILE IN QUARAN
340. e two files must be 32 48 or 64 characters of hexadecimal 0123456789abcdef data as strings which represent 128 192 or 256 bit keys The keys in these two files are converted to their binary equivalents and then XORed one against the other to produce the final key that is then used for encryption and decryption Algorithms are indicated in the STORE command line following ENCRYPT by entering the values 0 1 2 or 3 Enter 0 if no encryption is required 1 if the proprietary algorithm is to be used 2 for the DES algorithm or 3 for the AES algorithm If 0 is indicated for no encryption a password may still be specified For example to password protect a backup without specifying encryption using a key of SECRET enter gt STORE FILES PAYROLL T ENCRYPT 0 SECRET To perform the same backup with DES data encryption as the primary protection and with the password protection of the encryption key enter gt STORE FILES PAYROLL T ENCRYPT 2 SECRET To perform the same backup with AES data encryption create two files called KEY1 and KEY2 with your favorite editor In the file KEY1 use the string 000102030405060708090a0b0cOd0e0f and in the file KEY2 use the string 00102030405060708090a0b0cOd0e0f0 These two files when XORed together will represent the actual 128 bit key of O01 12233445566778899aabbccddeeff Then to perform the backup gt STORE FILES PAY
341. e used in place of any missing parameters in OLM Cl Commands until overridden by another Default command with an overriding argument Syntax DEFAULT LibraryID SlotLocation PortLocation DriveName DriveLocation Examples The following example loads volume 000201 into drive 0 in library Stick on host Pogo Then it unloads the volume back into its original slot Finally it loads the volume in slot 1 into drive1 BACKUP iX User Manual 20 367 Chapter 20 OLM Command Line Interface Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide olm gt DEFAULT Library Pogo Stick Drive 0 Slot 1 olm gt Load 000201 olm gt Unload olm gt Default Drive 1 olm gt Load EXIT Exit the olm Cl DELETE The DELETE command deletes an existing library from the olm database and terminates olm s control of the library Syntax DELETE LIBRARY LibraryID EXPORT The EXPORT command will move a volume from a library slot to a mail port Note that the volume must be in a slot Syntax EXPORT LibraryID SlotId PortLocation Example Olm gt EXPORT LIBRARY hacker dltchg SLOT 5 PORT 0 This would unload the volume from slot 5 to port 0 in ditchg on hacker IMPORT The IMPORT command moves a volume from a mail port and to a slot in the library The VolumelD last field is only allowed when there is no bar code reader installed If SlotLocation is not specified and the default com
342. e used with both the baseline and any and all later delta stores that are part of the same cycle BACKUP iX User Manual 8 93 Chapter 8 DELTA Backup Module BACKUP iX Operations Guide Multiple active Delta backup cycles may exist simultaneously as multiple baseline stores perhaps of different filesets and their related delta stores To achieve this each Delta backup cycle must be assigned its own unique cycle name A maximum of 5 Delta backup cycles Online stores or a combination of both can be running at any one time This means for example that no more than 4 active Delta backup cycles and one Online backup can run simultaneously Or if 5 Delta backup cycles are running then no Online stores would be possible The Delta monitor is always active for a Delta backup cycle Therefore each active Delta monitor would count toward the limit of 5 cycles even when an actual baseline or delta store is not running Restoring from a Delta backup cycle includes two steps restoring from a baseline store a baseline restore and then restoring from a delta store a delta restore Delta store operation Typical use of Delta backup In a typical case complete stores are performed weekly while partial stores are run daily to store disk page changes of files that have been changed and full files that have been created since the last complete store Historically a complete backup would be done on Friday while smaller differential backups
343. e volume BACKUP can perform an action when it needs a new tape mounted by using the ON VOLUME option of the STORE command For example to direct BACKUP to notify the operator when a new tape is needed type in the following gt STORE T amp gt ON VOLUME DO TELLOP mount another tape for backup On completion of the backup BACKUP can perform a specified action when it is safe for users to begin working again by using the ON RELEASED option of the STORE command This moment may be before the BACKUPPL program terminates and so this option is provided to let user activity begin at the earliest moment that is safe For example to raise the session and job limits upon completion of the backup 2 33 Chapter 2 Program Operation BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt STORE T amp gt ON RELEASED DO LIMIT 2 40 Note ON RELEASED is invoked in three circumstances first when files on tape equal those on disk including all logging data and all disk files are fully accessible second for a ZERODOWN backup and third when all suspended processes have been resumed ON RELEASED is invoked before the store directory has been written to tape and the TMLDB database for TML has been updated At the start of a delayed synchronization waiting period For an online backup in which synchronization is explicitly delayed until a specific time via the SYNCWAIT option of the STORE command BACKUP can perform
344. earliest version of the file APREG DATA AP that was modified at or after 2 1 99 at 10 00 gt RESTORE T APREG DATA AP MDATE gt 2 1 99 10 00 FIRST To restore the next to last backed up version of DEVLOG DATA DEV gt RESTORE T DEVLOG DATA DEV CYCLE GEN 1 To restore the latest version of all files from the last full and last two partial backups BACKUP iX User Manual 17 217 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt RESTORE T CYCLE FULL GEN 0 CYCLE PART GEN 0 CYCLE PART GEN 1 Restore Wizard confirmation dialog When performing a restore with Restore Wizard an opportunity is provided to confirm that the proper files are being restored This prevents files from being restored unintentionally The qualifying generations are displayed and the option of viewing the list of files to be restored is provided The list may be refined by deselecting particular files The following examples show the differences between a restore with Restore Wizard and a normal restore Restore If the reply R is entered the restore proceeds as usual gt RESTORE T DATA AP CYCLE PART GEN 0 The following generations and tape volumes are required for this restore Cycle Gen Created Seq Volid Media Length Dir XXXXXXXX mm dd yy BEE XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX HHH XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXX mm dd yy BEE XXXXXX XXXXXXKX XXXXXX files selected
345. ecified pool that are protected meaning that they belong to an unscratched generation and will therefore not be overwritten The following command lists all protected tapes in the PART pool gt SHOW POOL PROTECTED BACKUP iX User Manual 17 195 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide Length Seq Volid Used Expires Scratched Home pool 2400FT 000201 15 10 02 99 00 00 00 PART 2400FT 000202 12 09 28 99 00 00 00 PART 2400FT 000203 14 09 28 99 00 00 00 PART 2400FT 000204 11 10 01 99 00 00 00 PART 2400FT 000205 10 10 01 99 00 00 00 PART 2400FT 2400FT 2400FT 2400FT 2400FT 2400FT 000207 12 09 29 99 00 00 00 PART 000208 12 09 29 99 00 00 00 PART 000209 12 10 02 99 00 00 00 PART 000210 13 09 30 99 00 00 00 PART 000211 3 09 30 99 00 00 00 000212 3 10 02 99 00 00 00 1 2 2 2 2 2400FT 2 000206 10 10 01 99 00 00 00 PART 2 2 2 2 2 2 Reporting on tapes by volid The SHOW TAPE command displays information about tapes by volid with their attributes and usage in order of volid regardless of the pool to which they are assigned and regardless of their disposition Information may be displayed for all tapes or for a specified tape SHOW TAPE specification The selection of tapes to be reported on may be specified with the SHOW TAPE command in several formats e for all tape volumes e A specific volid e g 000100 or 100 e Arrange of volids e g 100 199 disallowe
346. ed FILEBUFF GETDATE LABEL MAXBLOCK MAXERRORS Specifies size of internal filebuffer in a deferred backup to tape Synonym for DEFER Facilitates partial and incremental backups by generating a DATE gt datetimespec option using the internal prior backup date and time Writes a tape label containing volid expiration date and comment to each tape volume Reads and writes datablocks at the maximum size supported by the tape drive Maximum number of tape errors allowed on any tape BACKUP iX User Manual 18 313 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide MAXRETRIES Maximum number of retries allowed on any tape MDATE Selects files for store based on last modification date and optionally time NOLABEL Disables checking of BACKUP tape labels NOLOCK Disables locking of store bits during store OLM Permits stores to one or more tape volumes in a robotic tape library ON ERROR Terminates on any error QUIT ON Performs a specified action when a pre defined event has occurred ONLINE Permits read write create and purge access during the backup while guaranteeing data integrity ONVS Stores files located on particular volume sets OPTIMIZE Specifies the store optimization level PREVIEW Displays the results of a STORE without storing files PROGRESS Specifies the time interval between percentage completed messages PURGE Purges successfully stored files upon backup completion SDATE Selects files for re
347. ed STORE command example with DRIVES option The DRIVES option of the STORE command is used for both parallel and serial stores Parallel stores In the following example the DRIVES option is used for a parallel store to two backup devices configured as device class TAPE on ldevs 7 and 8 FILE T DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt STORE T DRIVES 2 P The following message appears on the system console Will perform parallel store to 2 drives Mount tape volume 1 of volumeset unnamed on dev TAPE LDEV FOR T ON TAPE NUM Reply with the ldev number of the first tape drive REPLY pin 7 The tape drive on ldev 7 is activated and the following message appears on the console Mount tape volume 1 of volumeset unnamed on dev TAPE LDEV FOR T ON TAPE NUM Reply with the ldev number of the second tape drive REPLY pin 8 The tape drive on Idev 8 is activated BACKUP iX User Manual 13 144 Chapter 13 Backup Devices BACKUP iX Operations Guide Serial stores In the following example the DRIVES option is used to store using the serial method In this case a file equation is not specified The default file name is the logon user name and the device class is tape In this example the SEQUENCE option is used to specify which drive will be stored to first When the volume on Idev 14 is full store will then start writing on the volume on Idev 15 gt STORE
348. ed shown in sectors and megabytes Occasionally a tape will contain only the continuation of the store directory from the previous tape These tapes include the words dir only on the next to last line Tape Manager amp Librarian reporting features The following tables show the various attributes that can be reported and the commands to use Attributes are listed alphabetically within their corresponding entity BACKUP iX User Manual 24 404 Chapter 24 Reports Cycle reports BACKUP iX Reference Guide Attribute reported Commands Days valid SHOW CYCLE PARMS Days valid default DEFAULT CYCLE Frequency SHOW CYCLE PARMS Frequency default DEFAULT CYCLE Group account for cycle files SHOW CONFIG Keep generations SHOW CYCLE PARMS Keep generations default DEFAULT CYCLE Next scheduled backup date PREVIEW CYCLE Retention period SHOW CYCLE PARMS Retention period default DEFAULT CYCLE Size of media SHOW CYCLE PARMS Size of media default DEFAULT CYCLE Volumes required SHOW CYCLE PARMS Volumes required default DEFAULT CYCLE Volumes required next store PREVIEW CYCLE Volumes required next store STORE Volumes spare SHOW CYCLE PARMS Volumes spare default DEFAULT CYCLE File reports Attribute reported Commands ASCII files Binary files Cycle stored under File loading information File information logs Generation of cycle stored IMAGE files Last modification date and time Spool files S
349. ed BACKUP detects and excludes them from being stored and identifies them with an appropriate message Retention Number of days to retain a generation of a cycle before expiring Required volumes Tape volumes that it is anticipated the store of a cycle will require Scratch The process of eliminating a generation from TML and releasing its tapes for reuse Session An interactive online user SHOW listing A report which includes the names of all the files that were stored or restored available in a variety of formats Size classification User defined 8 character alphanumeric string which identifies the size of media Used to select the proper media for a given cycle which may optionally be configured with a media size classification SLT System Load Tape created by SYSGEN which contains the system configuration and accounting structure and from which the system can be INSTALLed Spare volumes Tape volumes that may be selected for a store in the event that required volumes is too low BACKUP iX User Manual 433 Glossary BACKUP iX Special characters Non alphanumeric ASCII characters that a user may enter from a keyboardSpool files A file created by the MPE iX spooler Input spool files represent input job streams waiting to execute or executing output spool files contain output from job streams which is normally printed STDLIST MPE DCS formal file designator for program output If BACKUP is run fr
350. ed that periodic full baselines are repeated Standard and Online Delta backups Delta s baseline and delta stores can be performed as either standard non Online backups or Online backups both traditional and Zero downtime ZDT The baseline store is performed in the same manner as a non Delta backup whether standard or Online using the BASELINE option of STORE A standard non Online baseline store contains the selected fileset and the Delta store directory which reflects the status of the files at the beginning of the backup An Online baseline store reflects file status at backup completion A delta store is performed as the second or later backup in a particular Delta cycle using the DELTA option of STORE Whether standard or Online a delta store contains only the updates to files that have occurred between the completion of the baseline store and the start of the delta store along with a Delta store directory Some delta stores will contain baseline versions of some files Baseline versions of files are complete files that did not exist when the baseline store was done because they were created since the baseline store These files would in fact not appear anywhere in the baseline store Note To ensure data integrity the baseline and delta store filesets must either be identical or the delta store must be a subset of the baseline store If delta filesets are not either identical to their baselines or a subset thereof then
351. ed to by TML Expires Date on which tape will expire or expired in mm dd yy date format 00 00 00 if never stored to by TML Scratched Date tape was scratched in mm dd yy date format 00 00 00 if not currently scratched Home pool Pool to which tape volume was assigned SHOW TAPE The TML SHOW TAPE command used with each of its options reports information about tape errors ERRORS files contained on tape FILES and the most recent usage of tapes USAGE ERRORS option Displays information about tape errors and retries on last five uses of each tape Volid Media Used Retries occurred last 5 uses Errors occurred last 5 uses XXXXXX XXXXXXXX HHHH HHHH HHHHH HEER HEHEHE HEER HEHEHE HEER HHHH HEER RHEE Volid Volid BACKUP iX User Manual 24 416 Chapter 24 Reports BACKUP iX Reference Guide Media Media type Used Number of times tape has been stored to using TML Retries Number of tape retries that occurred on the last five stores by TML listed chronologically left to right where indicates zero retries Errors Number of tape errors that occurred on the last five stores by TML listed chronologically left to right where indicates zero errors FILES option Displays information about files contained on tape sorted alphabetically by filename within account and group Volid Filename Group Account Stored Cycle Gen Last modified XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm XXXXXXXX
352. ed to improve performance under a variety of circumstances Generally BACKUP performs optimally with its default settings however performance may often be further enhanced under certain circumstances Additionally certain performance analysis tools provided both by HP and third parties may be helpful in improving performance In this chapter Find information on the various techniques that can be used to maximize the performance of BACKUP including e Improving the backup method e Reducing the number of files to be stored e Using data compression e Adjusting store optimization e Increasing the number of store processes e Maximizing tape block size e Using a filebuffer e Not locking store bits e Using multiple backup devices e Using fast backup devices The following command options and JCWs are discussed as the above topics are covered e The COMPRESS NOLOCK and OPTIMIZE options of the STORE command e The BACKUPPROCESSES RESTOREPROCESSES and BACKUPTAPEBUF JCWs Improving the backup method Several methods of accomplishing backups are available some of which offer better performance than others For example disk backup is faster than backup to tape Refer to Chapter 5 Backup Methods in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide in this manual for more information Reducing the number of files to be stored Of course one certain technique for speeding up backups is to reduce the number of files to be stored This ca
353. ed within bracket characters Bracket TT characters are not input as part of the command unless they are shown quoted OLM Cl command list ADD Adds a library to the library database CONNECT Connects to the OLM daemon OLMRPCD running on the specified host and lists the available libraries attached to the OLM host system BACKUP iX User Manual 20 365 Chapter 20 OLM Command Line Interface Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide DELETE Deletes an existing library from the library database DEFAULT Assigns current defaults for the library EXPORT Causes a volume to be unloaded from a slot in the library to a mail port IMPORT Causes a volume to be loaded from a mail port and inserted to a slot in the library LIST Shows various information about the library LOAD Causes a volume to be loaded from a slot in the library into a drive MOVE Causes a volume to be moved from one library element to another OFFLINE Causes the library to be placed offline ONLINE Causes the library to be placed online RENAME Allows a volume to be renamed and the device node and or the drive name to be changed SET DRIVE Set an option for special tape drive processing UNLOAD Causes a volume to be unloaded from a drive into a slot in the library OLM Cl Parameter Definitions Parameter Value LibraryID LIBRARY LibraryHost LibraryName DestinationID
354. edirection is enabled when BACKUP is run Run Backuppl BACKUP iX 6 78 c Copyright 1991 06 Redirecting STDLIST to BPOUT file equation When BPOUT is defined all program output will be redirected including the interactive gt prompt normally displayed After BACKUP has run enter the reset command to cancel the effects of the BPOUT file equation RESET BPOUT Overwriting existing files By default files restored from tape will overwrite existing files on disk in the target group account that have the same names unless the file being restored encounters an error By using any of the following RESTORE options a file on disk can be retained even though it has the same name as a file being restored from tape KEEP Specifies that a file should only be restored from tape if no file with the same name is on disk in the target group account BACKUP iX User Manual 11 129 Chapter 11 Restoring Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide KEEPNEW KEEPOLD KEEPBAD Specifies that a file should only be restored from tape 1 if no target disk file exists or 2 if the target disk file is older than the file of the same name on disk based on its modification date and time This option is especially useful for restoring from partial backups since it allows files to be restored from any day s partial backup without regard to the order in which files are restored from the partial backups Specifies that
355. editing constructs D Deletes the character just above the D One or more Ds may be entered to delete one or more characters string Inserts the string immediately following the I before the character above the I R string Replaces the character string starting from the character above the R with the character string typed in immediately following the R Characters in the original string are replaced one to one by characters in the replacement string DE Deletes the string from the character above the D through the end of the current line string If a string that does not begin with a D R or I is specified it replaces the string above it as if R had been specified To Exit Editing mode in REDO 2 31 Chapter 2 Program Operation BACKUP iX Operations Guide Editing continues if at least one character is entered before hitting RETURN Hitting RETURN without entering any character completes editing and displays the next command segment for editing If the current segment is the last segment of a command editing is completed and the modified command is executed Example of editing with REDO For example to change the SHOW format from LONG to SHORT enter REDO at the prompt The cursor moves to the line under the newly displayed command Press the space bar to move the cursor to the spot under the letter where you want to start editing Type the editing construct any
356. ee relationships In this example 844 has three sons PINs 84 89 and 91 As shown in the second report the sons with PINs 89 and 91 were suspendable but were not suspended because the son with PIN 84 shown in the first report could not be suspended Following such a report the operator should instruct BACKUP to try again to suspend the remaining active processes REPLY pin R Any processes that still cannot be suspended are identified on the console following the timeout period In this example session 39 is still active Unable to suspend the following processes JOBNUM LDEV JOB NAME PIN PROGRAM STEP 539 112 DEBBIE OPERATOR SYS 80 IRMS ssb source system 79 IRMS IRMS IRMS Retry Continue or Abort R C A MAX CHARS 2 BACKUP can be instructed to repeat the suspension attempt for another timeout period proceed with synchronization or abort the backup REPLY pin C In this example it was determined that session 39 was not writing to any files and the operator instructed BACKUP to proceed with synchronization by responding to the REPLY Following the completion of synchronization suspended processes are reactivated and a confirmation message is displayed BACKUP iX User Manual 7 86 Chapter 7 Online and Zero Downtime Backup BACKUP iX Operations Guide Resuming users for ZERODOWN zero downtime option Note The Unable to suspend messages that are
357. eir disposition SHOW TAPE Displays tape backup attributes to the screen and or printer Displays information about tapes and their usage ADD FILE Loads file information into the file register for specified generations Syntax gt ADD FILE S cyclespec GEN ERATION value Parameters cyclespec The name of a cycle or for all cycles If is specified TML loads file information for only those generations which require loading GENERATION Absolute or relative generation number value Specified in one of the following formats e All generations exclude the GENERATION parameter e Most recent generation specify O e Absolute generation number e g 33 e Relative generation number e g 1 means the next to last generation 2 the previous generation etc Example To load file information for the most recent generation of the FULL backup cycle BACKUP iX User Manual 19 348 Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt ADD FILE FULL GEN 0 To load file information for all generations of all cycles that do not have file information loaded gt ADD FILE ADD TAPE Adds new tapes into the tape pool for a specified cycle or into the global pool Syntax MED IA mediatype gt ADD TAPE volset LEN GTH measurement SIZ E classification CYC LE pool Parameters volset The tape volumeset specified as
358. en BACKUP is output invoked and uses this value to determine the number of processes per tape drive to use for the restore As an output JCW reports the number of processes used STOREJCW output Reports the success or failure of a store STOREJCWDISCRETE input Governs whether or not the STOREJCW is set to the same value as the RESTOREJCW BACKUPIRNOCONFIRM input Disables the confirmation dialog displayed after files are selected for a restore with the Restore Wizard BACKUPTML output Used for the Tape Manager amp Librarian under control of BACKUP BACKUPTMLRESTORE input Enables or disables Restore Wizard overriding the TMLRESTORE configuration setting in the TMLCONF configuration file TMLLANGID input Used to specify the language to be used for the text on TML tape identification labels AESENCRYPTMODEECB Input Used to indicate to the encryption module that it should use Electroninc Codebook Mode instead of the default Cipher Block Chaining mode Job Control Words descriptions BACKUPBUFSIZE BACKUPBUFSIZE is an input JCW which sets the block size for tape and disk backups as well as the buffer size used for data transfer SETVAR BACKUPBUFSIZE buffersize Where buffersize is specified in bytes as an integer up to 262144 By default BACKUP imposes a block size of 16 Kbytes for disk to disk backups and 32760 for tape backups a size which is supported by all HP tape drives under MPE ix It is generally recommended that
359. en prevent BACKUP from functioning If no SSMs are to be used enter SETVAR BACKUPNOSSM 1 or if SSMs are to be used enter SETVAR BACKUPNOSSM 0 BACKUPOLDSHOW BACKUPOLDSHOW is an input JCW for the STORE command which enables the old report formats prior to V6 60 to be displayed when the SHOW option is used This JCW may be needed by users who relied on the disk address information columns To activate the pre V6 60 report formats enter the following command BACKUP iX User Manual 22 386 Chapter 22 JCWs BACKUP iX Reference Guide SETVAR BACKUPOLDSHOW TRUE BACKUPPROCESSES BACKUPPROCESSES is both an input and output JCW As an input JCW this JCW may be set prior to running the store so that it is checked when BACKUP is invoked and its value is used to determine the number of processes per tape drive to use for the store Increasing the number of processes used for backup may improve performance on fast HPE3000 systems The JCW is set by SETVAR BACKUPPROCESSES processcount Where processcount is specified as an integer A maximum of 12 BACKUP processes per tape drive may be utilized The default is 4 processes per tape drive Following completion of the store the BACKUPPROCESSES value is reset to the actual number of processes that were used for the store As an output JCW this JCW may be read to discover the number of processes that were used by BACKUP during a store Such output is available whether t
360. ence Guide lt gt not equal to datetimespec Date and optionally time in the following format datespec time datespec Date or days in one of the following formats mm dd yylyy days Days relative to today time Time of day in the form hh mm using 24 hour time Example Use DATE or SDATE to restore the earliest version of the file APREG DATA AP with a label state change on or after 10 00 AM 2 15 2003 gt RESTORE T APREG DATA AP DATE gt 2 15 2003 10 00 FIRST Use BDATE with the Restore Wizard to restore all the files backed up on or after 10 01 2004 at 8 00 PM gt RESTORE T BDATE gt 10 01 2004 20 00 Use MDATE to restore the file APREG DATA AP if it was modified on or after 10 00 AM 2 15 2004 gt RESTORE T APREG DATA AP MDATE gt 2 15 2004 10 00 Use DATE or SDATE to restore all the files on the system having a label state change after December 1 2001 gt RESTORE T SDATE 12 1 2001 Use DATE or SDATE to restore all the files that had a label state change during the past five days gt RESTORE T SDATE gt 5 Use DATE or SDATE as part of the local file selection expression to restore all files in the account ACA that had a label state change before December 1 2001 and all files in ACB ignoring last label state change date gt RESTORE ACA SDATE lt 12 1 2001 ACB T Notes e Ifth
361. encryptionmethod key keyfile1 keyfile2 LABEL volsetid OLM hostname libraryname NO ANSI SHORT SHOW LONG DATES OFFLINE DIRECTORY SECURITY FILENAME VOLID volidlist Parameters tapefile Backreferences a file equation for the tape drive diskfile Name of disk backup fileset as a maximum of 16 characters first character must be alphabetic and optionally qualified with group and account The diskfile may be specified using any legal MPE or POSIX syntax filename or may backreference a file equation that specifies DEV DISC filesetlist This is an optional field and specifies the files to be listed If nothing is specified this field defaults to When this field is specified it can be specified in the form Filesetspec Indirectfile Indirectfile Indirectfile Unnumbered flat file containing file selection specification for files to be listed May be prefixed by either or N filesetspec Fileset fileset fileset Files to include in and or exclude with optional date and time restrictions in one of the following formats filespec xDATE relop datetimespec filespec filespecl filespec2 filespec Files specified in the MPE file group account or in the HFS format ACCOUNT GROUP FILE or DIRECTORY If group and account are not specified in the MPE format then they default to the current group and account Wildcards like
362. ent indicate compression method 2 or just don t use the COMPRESS option gt STORE T COMPRESS or gt STORE T COMPRESS 2 To disable compression BACKUP iX User Manual 18 317 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt STORE T COMPRESS 0 Note e When storing to a tape device having high density hardware compression do not use the high density compression method of BACKUP COMPRESS 3 Option DATE See the page titled Options xDATE ADATE CDATE DATE MDATE and SDATE Option DBSTORE Equivalent to MPE iX s DBSTORE of TurboIMAGE XL databases setting the dirty bit and store date and time in the database root file BACKUP s DBSTORE assures that all datasets are backed up if the root file is selected Databases that use transaction logging should use BACKUP s DBSTORE option to ensure recoverability by MPE iX s DBRECOV program Syntax gt STORE DBSTORE dbstoreparm Dbstoreparm Indicates either FULL or PART IAL FULL requests an all or nothing behavior in storing database dependent files whereas PARTIAL specifies that if any part of the database cannot be stored a store of all possible database dependent files is attempted Example To back up all databases on the system and retain compatibility with MPE iX s DBSTORE gt STORE T DIRECTORY SETDATE SHOW DBSTORE FULL To back up all possible root and dependent files for the databases se
363. eporting features table iese ee ee ee 24 406 RETENTION attribute ee 17 180 17 184 SIZE attribute se se ese ee ee ee ee Ee Re ee 17 214 SONG EE RES EE Re Re Se N E ee 6 66 VOLUMES attribute ees ee se se ee ee ee ee ee 17 180 Gycle les RES E Re EE ee EE Ee 17 179 deleting EE ES ESE nee se ee Ge DE Es 17 182 distinguishing from indirect fles esse 6 67 lOCALION EN EN 17 212 Sample 13 00 eel keen ily Eg ag Eb eg 17 180 DATs tant EE EI EE aa ED ee ie GE AE SG 428 Data compression ie se ee Re Ee ee 13 140 Data encyryption Restore Wizard ese ee ee se ee ee ee 118 17 220 DatabloekK ER DE EE EE De eg laden 428 DaymasSK tiie 428 DBRECOV program sesse ee ee ee ee ee n 4 43 428 DBSTORE program se ese see ee ee ee se 4 43 429 DDS backup device 5 49 13 141 22 387 429 ejecting DAT 2 studenten eee 21 375 DEFAULT CYCLE command 19 352 24 410 example iS Ee ged deeds 17 181 17 182 FEPOMING EE RE RE 17 182 FEPOrIS SR ete heen SE ED N oe 24 410 DEFAULT TAPE command 19 353 24 411 example hate N N sheets 17 191 FEPOMtS AA AE EE N EA 24 411 Deferred backup se ee Ee ee ER Re AG ee 429 example EER sg EE ade 18 312 Operational notes se ee ee ee GR AA ee 5 51 percentage completed messages 18 266 18 337 priority for tape write ie ee ee ee ee 22 386 procedufe s si EE este dere then Ree 5 51 Defragmentation ee ee ee ee ee 18 281 BACKUP iX DELETE CYCLE
364. er COPY now supports e Multiple drives for source and target tapes e Single drive copy e Source tapes given in any order e Tapes contained in robotic tape library e TML tapes as source or and target tapes e Progress reporting e Tape statistics of the source and target tapes e BACKUP labels e ANSI labels e Copy of tapes across DS line Syntax gt COPY tapefilel Incopyoption TO tapefile2 Outcopyoption Parameters tapefile1 Backreferences a file equation for the source tape drive tapefile2 Backreferences a file equation for the target tape drive Incopyoption One or more of the following COPYcommand options associated with the source input tape drive AUTOREPLY ldevlist BACKUP backupspec CYCLE cyclename GEN ERATION gen DRIVES n LABEL volsetid OLM hostname libname ansi noansi ON VOLUME DO mpe command SEQUENCE l1devlist VOLID volidlist Details of the options with their parameters in the pages that follow BACKUP iX User Manual 18 223 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Outcopyoption One or more of the following COPYcommand options associated with the target output tape drive AUTOREPLY ldevlist BACKUP backupname CYCLE cyclename DRIVES n P S LABEL volsetid expirationdate comment OLM hostname libname ansi noansi ON VOLUME DO mpe command
365. er amp Librarian TML can keep track of backup schedules based on the information recorded in the TML database as cycle attributes It can also preview any backup displaying the next date that backups are due to run and the specific tapes required for them In this section information is provided about the ability of TML to track and display backup schedules and preview backup tape requirements using the PREVIEW CYCLE command Viewing backup schedules TML is capable of determining from cycle attributes when backups are scheduled to be executed A report may be displayed of the next due date for all cycles or for an individual cycle a report of the next due date and the specific volumes needed The FREQUENCY and DAYS cycle parameters are used to determine when backups are due For example a cycle with a FREQUENCY of 1 and a DAYS mask of 12345 indicating Monday through Friday would be stored every weekday like most partial backups A cycle with a FREQUENCY of 7 and DAYS value of 5 would be stored once per week on Friday as are most full backups The next required backup date is determined by adding the date of the last backup of the cycle to the configured FREQUENCY value If the resulting day is not permitted by the DAYS mask the nearest valid backup date is displayed Displaying backup schedules To determine the next due date of all cycles use the PREVIEW CYCLE command with a cycle of BACKUP iX User Manual 17 198
366. er creates a file or directory it is assigned by default the parent directory s GID Group ID is a file sharing concept and should be distinguished from MPE groups Global pool The default pool in which tapes reside unless they have been assigned to another pool or have been transferred to another pool by store Home pool The pool to which a tape is explicitly assigned IMAGE HP s proprietary network database management system in use on almost all HPe3000 computers On MPE V IMAGE was replaced by TurboIMAGE on MPE ix by TurboIMAGE XL Both are still generally referred to as IMAGE IMAGE files A file type which includes TurboIMAGE XL database root files datasets including jumbo and large datasets and TPI files Incremental backup A type of partial backup which includes files that were modified since a previous backup although not necessarily a full backup For example Wednesday s partial backup would include files that were modified since Tuesday s backup KEEP Number of active generations of a cycle to keep on hand before scratching the earliest generation KSAM HP s proprietary Keyed Sequential Access Method data management facility in which records may be accessed either sequentially or randomly by primary or alternate record keys KSAM files A file type which includes KSAMXL data and key files The original CM KSAM implementation Each KSAM file consists of one Data and one Key file KS
367. er is to restore the partial backup first then the full backup using the KEEPNEW option The second method is substantially faster Restoring the partial backup first followed by the full backup specifying the KEEPNEW option causes only the newest version of the file to be restored This method is much faster because each file is restored only once The first method results in many files being restored twice first from the full backup then overwritten from the partial backup Another advantage of the second method is that disk space fragmentation is minimized INSTALLing from full and incremental backups To INSTALL the system from full and incremental backups the latest full backup is restored first followed by each incremental backup in ascending order by date This sequence must absolutely be followed otherwise Tuesday s files would be overwritten by Monday s files and the latest version of each file would not be restored An alternate and faster method with BACKUP is to restore the most recent incremental backup first followed by each previous incremental backup in reverse chronological order followed by the full backup specifying KEEPNEW for all restores The speed advantage is that each file is restored only once whereas the other method could restore many files multiple times and tend to fragment the available disk space Restoring from a password protected or encrypted backup If a backup has been encrypted using the
368. er library robot control are automatically sent to the OLMRPCD running on the Library host OLMRPCD must also be running on HostB and HostC to provide BACKUP iX User Manual 14 151 Chapter 14 ORBiT Library Manager OLM Operations Guide drive functionality to eject volumes or put them online as needed to successfully access and move the volumes On all systems that run OLMRPCD OLM Cl and BACKUP iX using olm PORTMAP is run A backup running on HostB communicates a tape mount request to the OLMRPCD running on HostA HostA s OLMRPCD then directs the library to mount the tape on Drive 1 Once the volume has been moved to the drive if the library hardware will not put the volume online for the backup s use then the OLMRPCD on HostA would send a request to the OLMRPCD on HostB to place the volume on line programmatically Some terminology Library Host is the host to which the library s robotics is connected HostA in the example Local host is the host at which the user is entering commands Local drive is a library tape drive connected to the local host Drive 2 is a local drive on HostC Local library is a library its robotics actually connected to the local host The library is local to HostA Remote library is a library connected to a host other than the local host The library is remote to HostB Remote drive is a library tape drive connected to a host other than the local host Drive 0 is remote to HostB The OLM parameter for
369. eration or S to scratch it If in doubt the generation should be committed rather than scratched If BACKUP is invoked in batch where there is no opportunity to specify how the generation should be handled the generation is automatically committed and a message is written to STDLIST Restored TMLDB database Because the TMLDB database is written to tape before it is updated with the generation information for the current backup it will contain an inconsistent generation The inconsistent generation has the same characteristics as that resulting from a TML failure An additional check is performed to determine if the TMLDB database was restored In this check the store date and time of the most recent generation is compared with the restore date and time of the TMLDB root file If TML detects that TMLDB was restored the following message is displayed WARNING TMLDB database appears to have been restored in an inconsistent state WARNING Inconsistency in cycle XXXXXXXX generation n stored mm dd yy hh mm Commit or Scratch this generation C S It is recommended that in this case the generation be committed by specifying C If BACKUP is invoked in batch the generation is automatically committed TML file register inconsistency If file information loading fails it can be resumed by performing an ADD FILE command against the current generation BACKUP iX User Manual 26 424 Chapter 26 Error handling
370. erformance may be adversely affected if NetBase is running during a backup This JCW is used to stop NetBase from running during a backup The JCW is set by SETJCW NBDISABLE value Where value is specified as an integer 0 or 1 Values for the NBDISABLE JCW are Value Meaning 0 NetBase is enabled 1 NetBase is disabled The default is for NetBase to be enabled Following completion of the store the NBDISABLE value is reset to the default 0 value As an output JCW this JCW may be read to discover the state of NetBase as enabled or disabled Such output is available whether the JCW was set prior to the store or not BACKUP iX User Manual 22 390 Chapter 22 JCWs BACKUP iX Reference Guide The JCW is displayed by SHOWJCW NBDISABLE RESTOREPROCESSES RESTOREPROCESSES is both an input and output JCW As an input JCW it is checked when BACKUP is invoked and its value is used to determine the number of processes per tape drive to use for the restore Increasing the number of processes used for restore may improve performance on fast HPe3000 systems The JCW is set by SETVAR RESTOREPROCESSES processcount Where processcount is specified as an integer A maximum of 12 BACKUP processes per tape drive may be utilized The default is 4 processes per tape drive Following completion of the restore the RESTOREPROCESSES value is reset to the actual number of processe
371. erformed For example if storing to device class TAPE TML will select volumes with a media of TAPE if storing to DAT TML will select media DAT etc Note To instruct TML to select volumes or media based on something other than device class use a file equation when performing the store mediatype User assigned media type alphanumeric string of up to 8 characters beginning with an alphabetic character and containing no embedded spaces OFFLINE Print output on device class LP under formal file designator TMLLIST as well as STDLIST Example To display and print a listing of the tapes of default media that are designated for the next FULL backup gt PREVIEW CYCLE FULL OFFLINE To display a listing of the next scheduled backup of all cycles gt PREVIEW CYCLE SCRATCH CYCLE Scratches a generation thereby scratching its associated tapes BACKUP iX User Manual 19 357 Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax gt SCRATCH CYCLE cyclename GEN ERATION value Parameters cyclename Name of an existing cycle GENERATION Absolute or relative generation number value Specified in one of the following formats e All generations exclude the GENERATION parameter e Most recent generation specify O e Absolute generation number e g 33 e Relative generation number e g 1 means the next to last generation 2 the previous generation e
372. erformed every day 7 means every week DAYS The days of the week to run the backup cycle identified by a mask the Daymask which describes the valid days The daymask is a numeric value of up to 7 numbers in length ascending where 1 Monday 2 Tuesday etc for example 12345 means every weekday and 135 means Monday Wednesday and Friday VOLUMES The number of media volumes TML will select for a cycle store Both the number of required volumes req and the number of spare volumes to reserve are specified Spare volumes may be needed in case the required number of volumes is insufficient due to growth or if a tape must be terminated prematurely due to an error For example the value 8 3 reserves a total of 11 tapes 8 required and 3 spare The BACKUP iX User Manual 17 179 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide value 2 would reserve the number of tapes that the backup needed last time plus 2 spares required An integer value or blank If left blank the default number of required volumes are allocated If is specified the number of required volumes is determined from the last generation of the cycle The first time the cycle is stored no previous generation exists 1 volume is allocated if a required value is not specified spare An integer value or blank If left blank the default number of spare volumes is allocated To reserve no spare volumes specify a va
373. ersion of files relative to the earliest version omits the offset value to restore the earliest version The maximum offset value is 5 Example To restore the next to last version of the HISTORY OPERATOR SYS file from all backups gt RESTORE T HISTORY OPERATOR SYS LAST 1 Notes If neither the FIRST or LAST option is specified LAST is applied automatically Option LOCAL Restores files with their paths directly into the current logon MPE group If the current location is a group files that originated in accounts and groups other than the current logon group and account will have their account and group substituted by the current logon group and account Additionally the owner of each file is changed to the current user name This is done to preserve functionality that existed before POSIX was introduced into MPE Note The LOCAL option may not be used in combination with the ACCOUNT CWD or GROUP options in the same RESTORE command Syntax gt RESTORE LOCAL Examples To restore files directly below the current logon MPE group gt RESTORE T LOCAL To restore files that originated in or below the account and group PUB AP to the current logon MPE group gt RESTORE T PUB AP LOCAL If stored files had the path D1 D2 FN the following restore command would restore the files below the current logon MPE group BACKUP iX User Manual 18 291 Chapter 18 B
374. es HRRERRRR HHHHHH HHHHHHHH HHHHHH HEHEHE not modified in past 7 days HEHEHE not modified in past 30 days HHHHHHHE HEHEHE HEHEHE not modified in past 6 months HHHHHHHH HEHEHE HEHEHE not modified in past 1 year kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Ce OE OE E HF HF HF HF E HF F ne doe SSS RS EA of files Number of files in this category Ksectors Mb Total amount of disk space that files in this category occupy shown in kilosectors and megabytes file type Type of file or files not modified for a specified period of time in the same categories as used for the SELECT option of the STORE command Online Status When an Online backup has completed an Online Status report containing information about the quantity and overhead of logging is displayed just above the Store Status report and below the FILES STORED FILES NOT STORED report kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk BACKUP iX online logging statistics kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk number of I number of files logging sectors I modified I created I renamed I purged I saved HHH I HHH I I I HHH I kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk number of logging sectors Number of sectors of logging data number of files modified Number
375. es gt RESTORE T CREATE PATH ACCOUNT GROUP To restore a file including its original path SYS PUB DIR1 FILE1 into a specified group and account location gt RESTORE T GROUP TEST ACCOUNT AP CREATE PATH The file is restored to AP TEST SYS PUB DIR1 FILE1 Notes e Torestore both MPE and POSIX files to nonexistent accounts and groups and to directories below group level use CREATE PATH with the GROUP and ACCOUNT options e Ifa directory account or group cannot be created files targeted to that location will not be restored If restoring files into the POSIX namespace and their owners cannot be created files having those owners are not restored e If the CREATE option is used in combination with the VOL VOLCLASS or VOLSET option to create nonexistent account s and or group s on restore the newly created account s and or group s will automatically be spanned BACKUP iX User Manual 18 278 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Option CREATOR Changes creator name and or account for all files in the restore set Syntax gt RESTORE CREATOR username accountname Examples In the example below all stored files from PUB PAYROLL will be restored to the HISTORY account and the creator s account for these files will be changed to HISTORY gt RESTORE T PUB PAYROLL ACCOUNT HISTORY CREATOR HISTORY To change the user name of the
376. es The user should not type the colon when inputting MPE ix commands e Information which is not generally applicable but is important in specific cases is prefixed with Note e All examples of user input and program output are enclosed in boxes with user input displayed in boldface type e Syntax conventions Xvi About this manual KEYWORD Literal keywords Input User input May select one element Must select one element u May repeat prior element s ss May repeat prior element s use comma if parm is repeated Must enter certain prior element s may enter others orn All keywords and user input are required unless enclosed within bracket characters Bracket characters are not input as part of the command unless they are shown quoted Future revisions Let us know what you think about our documentation of the BACKUP ixX package As you use this manual you may notice ways in which our manual could be improved We value your input highly Please do tell us about your ideas for making this user manual a more valuable tool for our users Send your comments and suggestions to us in any of the following ways e Email Send an email to SUPPORT ORBiTSW COM e Fax Fax your comments to 925 837 5752 to the attention of the Technical Publications Department e Postal letter Send letter to ORBiT SOFTWARE USA Inc Technical Publications Department 1300 Clay Stree
377. es contained on tapes The FILES mode of SHOW TAPE displays all the files contained on the specified volumeset sorted alphabetically by filename within tape In this example an offline listing of all files contained on tape 001012 is requested BACKUP iX User Manual 17 197 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt SHOW TAPE 1012 FILES OFFLINE Filename Group Account Stored Cycle Last modified SALEDB DATA SALES 09 27 99 SALESDB 09 27 99 17 SALEDB01 DATA SALES 09 27 99 SALESDB 09 27 99 17 SALEDB02 DATA SALES 09 27 99 SALESDB 09 27 99 SALEDB03 DATA SALES 09 27 99 SALESDB 09 27 99 SALEDB04 DATA SALES 09 27 99 SALESDB 09 27 99 SALEDBO5 DATA SALES 09 27 99 SALESDB 09 27 99 SALEDB06 DATA SALES 09 27 99 3 SALESDB 09 27 99 SALEDB07 DATA SALES 09 27 99 SALESDB 09 27 99 SALEDB08 DATA SALES 09 27 99 3 SALESDB 09 27 99 SALEDBO9 DATA SALES 09 27 99 SALESDB 09 27 99 SALEDB10 DATA SALES 09 27 99 SALESDB 09 27 99 SALENDX DATA SALES 09 27 99 SALESDB 09 27 99 SALENDXK DATA SALES 09 27 99 SALESDB 09 27 99 Note SHOW TAPE FILES is unable to accurately report against any file information that is not present in the file register therefore if file information for any tape has not been loaded a warning message is issued and SHOW TAPE FILES continues to report on the current file register contents Backup Schedule Management BACKUP s Tape Manag
378. ested manually for any generation for which a file information log has been saved To load file information for a generation specify the cycle and generation on the ADD FILE command This command loads file information for the most recent generation of the FULL backup cycle gt ADD FILE FULL GEN 0 To load file information for all generations for which file information is not present specify an in place of the cycle name and exclude the GENERATION parameter BACKUP iX User Manual 17 206 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt ADD FILE In the above example TML will load file information for any generations that require it and for which file information log files exist The same status messages as for automatic loading are displayed Reporting fileset information The SHOW FILE command is used to display or print information about a specific fileset in active cycle generations This is particularly useful for example when the latest version of one or more files must be located for use in restoring files that have been corrupted or accidentally purged The fileset is specified as a parameter of the SHOW FILE command in LISTF format and may include the and wildcards for file group and or account name Searches for specific files are much faster than for filesets using expressions that include wildcards If not qualified with group account the current group account is used by
379. etail in the pages that follow Example To dump the backup data in the disk backup file PART to tape and produce a SHOW listing in LONG format issue the file equation then use the following BACKUP command FILE T DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt DUMP PART T SHOW LONG Options summary APPEND Appends the backup to an existing tape backupset AUTOREPLY Automatically REPLYs to console requests for specified Idev list BACKUP Assigns a specified name by which it can later be referenced to the tape copy of the backup CYCLE When used with the Wizard product specifies the cycle s under which to make the store DRIVES Allows multiple backup devices to be used with the created store tape LABEL Writes a tape label containing volsetid expiration date and comment to each tape volume MAXERRORS Maximum number of tape errors allowed MAXRETRIES Maximum number of tape retries allowed NOLABEL Disables checking of BACKUP tape labels OLM Permits dumps to one or more tape volumes in a robotic tape library PROGRESS Specifies the time interval between percentage completed messages SEQUENCE Specifies the order with which multiple backup devices associated with the tape are opened SHOW Defines display format of information about files dumped VOLID Specifies ANSI format tape labels and the volids for up to eight backup volumes Option APPEND The APPEND option of the DUMP command appends the backup to an existing
380. eted drive is not a library drive the following will be printed and BACKUP IX will abort the command LDev 14 is not in library RINGO DLTLIB No such library ERR NO SUCH LIBRARY If a library name is misspelled or omitted the following will be printed and BACKUP IX will abort the command OLM daemon for library RINGO DLTLIB not found No previous location When BACKUP IX needs to move a volume that came from a mail port was already in an arm or was ina drive but had no previous location in the OLM database to a storage slot Backup iX will provide the message Volume on LDev 14 in RINGO DLTLIB has no previous location Moving to slot 55 Where slot 55 represents an empty slot If no more empty slots are available No empty slots available exception condition listed below will occur Incorrect volume mounted When an incorrect volume has been mounted BACKUP iX will write a message on the console requesting that the operator mount another tape and wait for a new tape to be mounted The operator must use OLM Cl commands to dismount the incorrect volume remove it from the library add the correct tape to the library and move that tape to the needed drive OLM identifies volumes by an OLM volume ID However since OLM volume IDs are only unique within the OLM controlled library more than one volume with the same ID may exist in the customer s inventory BACKUP iX will accept
381. ets BACKUP iX User Manual 11 120 Chapter 11 Restoring Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide e Selection by fileset range POSIX syntax only e Selection by filecode or file type e Selection by size e Excluding filesets Selection by volumeset Files may be selected by volumeset by specifying one or more volumesets using the ONVS option This is useful for restoring files from one volumeset to another or for recovering if a disk drive fails and all data on the volumeset to which it belongs must be restored Note The backup does not need to be restricted to just those volumesets being restored files belonging to the specified volumeset s will be sub selected from the backup For example to restore only those files originally on volumeset PRIVATE_VOL_D to the volume named VOL_C within the PRIVATE_VOL_A volumeset gt RESTORE T ONVS PRIVATE VOL D VOLSET PRIVATE VOL A VOL VOL C Note The ONVS option has also been implemented for STORE permitting a backup to be created containing only files residing on specified volumesets Selection by MPE iX and POSIX filesets and wildcards The filesetlist defines one or more fileset specifications for selecting files to be restored Filesets are defined in the same format as for MPE iX RESTORE and ListF and may include the same wildcards where None or any number of any characters A single numeric character A single alphanumeric character The root directory J
382. ets and wildcards In the syntax of the STORE command the filesetlist defines one or more fileset specifications for selecting files to be stored Filesets are defined in the same format as for MPE iX STORE and LISTF The following wildcards may be used in defining filesets None or any number of any characters A single numeric character A single alphanumeric character A range of alphanumeric characters The root directory The current directory MPE iX namespace filesets Here are some examples of how wildcards are used to define MPE namespace filesets All MPE ix files on the system All files in the current group account SYS All files in the SYS account LOG A M 0 9 PUB SYS All files in PUB SYS beginning with the string LOG followed by 2 characters first a letter from A to M then a number from 0 to 9 LOG HHH PUB SYS All files in PUB SYS beginning with the string LOG followed by any 4 numbers DB All files on the system with the string DB somewhere in the filename POST PROG PAYROLL The file POST in the PROG group of the PAYROLL account 2 K AP All files in the AP account with K as the third letter POSIX namespace filesets Here are some examples of how wildcards are used to define POSIX namespace filesets All files on the system 4 All files in the current directory and all directories beneath it All files in the current directory but not below SYS PU
383. ew simple rules about the storage handling and selection of magnetic tapes be followed to ensure trouble free error free backups In this chapter Find detailed information regarding the following backup reliability topics including e Detecting and handling tape errors e Recovering data from a bad tape e Validating backups e Determining backup contents using LISTDIR The following commands options JCWs and program are discussed as the above topics are covered e The LISTDIR and READALL VERIFY commands e The MAXERRORS MAXRETRIES and ON ERROR options of the STORE command e The BACKUPMAXERRORS BACKUPMAXRETRIES BACKUPTAPEERRORS and BACKUPTAPERETRIES JCWs e The VERIFY utility program Detecting and handling tape errors If a tape error occurs during a read operation the tape is repositioned to the beginning of the block and a reread is attempted This procedure is repeated until the data is recovered This type of error is commonly called a soft read error If several retries are attempted the condition is called a hard read error BACKUP reports the total number of tape errors and retries encountered during a store operation to STDLIST and sets JCWs to reflect these values If more than 10 retries are attempted on a single tape reel a TELLOP warning message is sent BACKUP can even be configured to terminate upon encountering a specified number of retries or hard errors The following facilities are a
384. example Eb RED GES De Ge ge Se GR ee ss 17 204 LABEL TAPE command sesse ee ee ee ees 19 356 example ER EG eh Ane 17 203 NeW tapes stack EE Ee dake ed 17 192 Labeled tapes esceeecceeceeeeeseeeenteaeees 12 139 ands ML RES ded ae a ea DE 17 192 18 326 ANS les ESE ER ED ND Ee Ge 12 137 BACKUP vs MPE ees ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 12 134 DUMP command esse ese ee ee ee ee ee 18 240 expiration date ee Re ee ee ee 17 200 ignoring labels ee ee 12 135 18 328 MPE versus BACKUP esse se ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 12 134 ON PESlOlG Mes ect Bach cede A 18 292 elk el ete aes iia hee 18 328 Restore Wizard ese se se ee ee eee ee 118 17 220 With TME reiii ee ee ee ee ee Re Re ee ee 12 138 17 200 Language installation dialog ees ee Re AR ee ee 1 19 BACKUP iX User Manual 439 Index of tape identification labels 17 201 22 394 Bes SR EA eaa 6 61 11 123 selecting for restore iese 18 300 18 338 Ee N EE EE cantons 433 Library elements arm 13 143 14 151 port 13 143 14 151 slot 13 143 14 151 LISTDIR command s s s 15 171 18 249 AUTOREPLY option VD se se sees ee ee ee 18 252 BACKUP option ese ee ee se ae 18 252 DISKDIR option ee ee se Re ee 18 253 ENCRYPT option cccceeeseseseceeeeeeees 18 253 example Er se Bad se Dee eels 18 251 LABEL ODIOM san ses see Ere odes eae 18 254 OEM OPON aei Eseg oe ae ERG EER DE ena oes AE 18 255 SHOW
385. f 0 no spare volumes are allocated Size Default size classification DEFAULT TAPE The DEFAULT TAPE command if specified with no parameters displays default tape attributes Media Size Length Cycle XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXX Media Default media type Size Default size classification Length Default tape length in feet Cycle Default cycle pool to which tape is allocated blank indicates the global pool PREVIEW CYCLE All cycles If all cycles are previewed the due dates for all cycles which have been configured with FREQUENCY and DAYS are displayed in chronological order The dates of the next scheduled backups of all cycles are Next due date Cycle HH H H XXXXXXXX HH HH HH XXXXXXXX HH HH HH XXXXXXXX Next due Day of week and date of next store due Cycle Name of cycle BACKUP iX User Manual 24 410 Chapter 24 Reports BACKUP iX Reference Guide Specified cycle If a specified cycle is previewed the due date for the cycle and required tapes are displayed Tapes are displayed in the order in which they must be mounted The date of the next scheduled backup of cycle XXXXXXXX is Day Mmmmmmmm dd yyyy The following volumes are required for the backup of cycle XXXXXXXX Volid Media Size Length Pool XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXX
386. f media must be changed additional volume IDs must be listed with the VOLID option or the user will be prompted for a volid Syntax The basic syntax for the OLM option is as follows gt READALL OLM hostname 1libraryname NO ANSI Parameters hostname The optional name of the host machine running the OLM provider is indicated This is optional if the command is performed on the OLM host Note that the hostname must be terminated with a colon This name must be resolvable through a DNS lookup and the OLM BACKUP iX User Manual 18 264 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide daemon must be running on the named host libraryname The name given to the library Because multiple libraries can be on the same host a library name must be entered in this field Note that the library name is case sensitive ANSI This literal will indicate ANSI labels are to be used in the operation See also the BackupOLMANSI MPE CI variable NOANSI This literal will indicate ANSI labels are NOT to be used in the operation NOANSI is the default when the MPE Cl variable BackupOLMANSI is not bound or is set to False See also the BackupOLMANSI MPE Cl variable Error messages The following error messages may be returned when using the OLM option OLM requires that you specify the drive logical devices with the AUTOREPLY or SEQUENCE keywords OLM requires that you specify a LABEL and VOLID when not using TML
387. f neither SEQUENCE nor AUTOREPLY is specified backup devices are opened in the order in which the REPLYs are issued by the operator Note f the SEQUENCE option is used the DRIVES option must precede the SEQUENCE option Device sequence with ANSI labeled tapes Neither SEQUENCE nor AUTOREPLY can be used with ANSI labeled tapes To specify the drive opening sequence using ANSI labeled tapes list the volids in the VOLID option in the order in which you want the drives opened Mounting tapes in any order for restore Once the store directory has been processed tapes may be mounted in any order This feature is especially useful for users of stacking and autochanging backup devices where it may be inconvenient to mount tapes in a particular order BACKUP iX User Manual 13 145 Chapter 13 Backup Devices BACKUP iX Operations Guide Restore first locates and processes the store directory then restores from each tape exactly what is needed from that tape The order in which the tape drives are opened is the same as for STORE except if a dirldev is specified see below Use the DISKDIR option of the STORE command to create a copy of the store directory on disk then use the DISKDIR option for restore This will eliminate the need in a restore to first mount the tape volume containing the store directory and will allow all tapes to be mounted in any order for restore Tape handling during a multi drive restore Additionally a numbe
388. f the appropriate length for storing the cycle BACKUP iX User Manual 19 349 Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide For example a cycle used for regular transfer of data to another site and requiring only a 600 tape reel could be designated as SMALL regular backups could be stored to LARGE 2400 reels while archives could be stored to XLARGE 3600 reels The SIZE classifier is used instead of absolute measurement to allow proper media selection for cycles that could be stored to more than one type of media and therefore could have inconsistent tape lengths e g the same cycle could be stored to either TAPE or DAT The SIZE parameter in the cycle file must match the size value when creating tapes ADD TAPES For example Cycle file SIZE large ADD TAPES SIZE large The SIZE parameter is not case sensitive classification A freeform alphanumeric value of up to 8 characters with no embedded spaces It is recommended that descriptive size classifications be used such as SMALL MEDIUM and LARGE If the size classification is to be ignored allowing media of any size to be selected for any backup of this cycle assign this parameter a blank value CYCLE Defines the tape volume s home pool pool Name of an existing cycle or blank for the global pool Example To add 20 new 2400 tapes with volids 000100 through 000119
389. fferentiate between each separate occurrence of that backup cycle For example this Friday s full backup and last Friday s full backup are both generations of the FULL cycle and have their own identifying number Generation information remains in BACKUP s Tape Manager amp Librarian TML until the generation is scratched at which time the generation information is removed A generation that has not been scratched is considered to be an active generation In this section information is presented about creating and scratching a generation reporting cycle generation information using the SCRATCH CYCLE and SHOW CYCLE commands and the TMLAUTOSCRATCH configuration option Creating a generation Generations are automatically created as a byproduct of storing a cycle The generation number is assigned at that time and all backup information is captured and cataloged Generation number The purpose of the generation number is to distinguish between different backups of a given cycle The first backup of each cycle starts at generation number 1 The generation is incremented with each backup of the cycle and does not reset It is also possible that generation numbers will be skipped due to aborted backups The higher the generation number the more recently the backup has been performed Scratching a generation When a backup generation is no longer needed it is recommended that it be scratched to release the tapes used in the backup for
390. file information log file corresponding to each generation TML file information log files are automatically purged by TML whenever their corresponding generations are scratched Purging TML log files requires that the user running BACKUP has read and write access to the file information log file otherwise a message is displayed and the file is not purged If this is the case the file may be explicitly PURGEd later TMLCONF TMLCONF DATA is the TML configuration file which TML looks for in the group account in which TML is installed If located in a different group account a fully qualified file equation is required TMLDBnn TMLDB is the TML database in the format of the version of IMAGE running on the system TMLDB may be redirected by specifying its group account in the TMLDB configuration option File equations are disallowed for TMLDB if set they are automatically reset by TML TMLDBSC TMLDBSC is the ORBiT supplied schema file for the TMLDB database It can be used as source schema for a DBUNLOAD DBLOAD of the TMLDB database if required TMLLIST TMLLIST is the formal file designator for printed output from the TML PREVIEW or SHOW command requested by specifying OFFLINE in the command By default TMLLIST is directed to device class LP BACKUP iX User Manual 23 397 Chapter 24 Reports BACKUP iX generates several informative reports when storing and restoring files Tape Manager amp Librarian commands prod
391. file is not restored the older file is preserved Syntax gt RESTORE KEEPOLD Example To restore only files that have not been changed more recently than their counterparts on disk gt RESTORE T KEEPOLD Notes e The KEEP KEEPNEW KEEPOLD and DBRESTORE options may not be specified in the same RESTORE command e The KEEPNEW and KEEPNONPVZ options may not be used together e Ifa file does not have a State Change date the modification date is used to determine which version of a file is older Option KEEPNONPVZ Restores only priv level zero files those files that were not fully restored in a previous aborted restore If a restore is aborted files not fully restored are left at priv level zero so they can not be accessed They are given a temporary file code of 9876 which indicates to BACKUP during a restore those files that have not yet been fully restored The file code will not be changed back to the normal file code unless the file has been restored fully Use this restore option to recover from an aborted restore Syntax gt RESTORE KEEPNONPVZ Example To restore only files that have a priv level of zero BACKUP iX User Manual 18 289 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt RESTORE B GROUP TEMP KEEPNONPVZ SHOW Notes e The KEEP KEEPNEW KEEPOLD and KEEPNONPVZ options may not be specified in the same RESTORE command
392. for store or accept it for restore b The expiration date if specified is ignored c The comment if specified is ignored 4 The expiration date on the tape label is ignored for an appended backup If an attempt is made to append backups to an unexpired tape BACKUP iX will proceed without error or warning Appended backups and ANSI labeled tapes When performing an appended backup using ANSI labeled tapes specify the volid of the last volume in the volume set as the first volid in the VOLID parameter You may specify additional volids if you think more volumes will be needed If more volumes are needed and you did not specify them during the store the operator will be prompted for them as needed Labeled tapes and the Tape Manager amp Librarian TML and Proprietary labeled tapes When performing a store of a TML cycle the LABEL option for tape volume labeling is internally invoked by TML imposing a different volid for each tape If when storing a TML cycle the LABEL option is specified with volid and or expiration date these values are replaced with values assigned by TML while the comment is retained if specified BACKUP iX User Manual 12 138 Chapter 12 Labeled Tapes BACKUP iX Operations Guide If you wish to use label checking when restoring a TML backup specify the volid of the volume on which the directory is located as a parameter of the LABEL option For example if restoring a backup that has its directory on
393. ges have been made to the cycle file In deleting a cycle both the cycle file and any information pertaining to the cycle must be deleted from the TMLDB database For this reason the cycle file should not be PURGEd but rather the DELETE CYCLE command should be used For example gt DELETE CYCLE SPECIAL would delete the cycle SPECIAL from the TMLDB database and the cycle file SPECIAL located in the cycle group account by default PUB ORBIT Notes e A cycle should not be deleted until all active generations of the cycle have been scratched If a cycle is deleted while active generations still exist TML will delete the cycle file to prevent the cycle from being stored but will leave the cycle definition entry in its database Should this occur reissue the DELETE CYCLE command after all generations have been scratched to delete the cycle definition as well e TML can allocate tapes for use with a specific cycle in a pool for that cycle Deleting a cycle transfers all tapes contained in the cycle s pool into the global pool The global tape pool contains all tapes that are not specifically allocated for use with a particular cycle If any generations of the deleted cycle are still active the user must transfer tapes assigned to that cycle s pool to the global pool once the generations are scratched Reporting cycle attributes Reports may be generated that display the default cycle attributes the cycle attributes
394. gh the library port load them into storage slots and give the tape volumes their volume IDs The following command moves the volume in port 0 to slot 9 and names the volume 000110 olm gt IMPORT LIBRARY opus dltchg SLOT 9 PORT 0 000110 If your library does not have import export ports then you will need to load volumes into the library by opening the door removing the tray etc and manually putting the volumes into the library This also may be more convenient for the initial set up of any library whether or not the libraries have ports BACKUP iX User Manual 14 155 Chapter 14 ORBIT Library Manager OLM Operations Guide Populate the library in this way before doing the ADD command Or do a VALIDATE command after closing the door 6 Ifthe library has no bar code reader and unnamed tape volumes are listed in the list command output use the RENAME command to assign volume Ids either one volume at a time or as a range of volume IDs olm gt RENAME LIBRARY opus dltchg SLOT 0 000110 or olm gt RENAME LIBRARY opus dltchg SLOT 0 7 000110 In this example the first command assigns a volid to one tape but the second command which indicates a range of volume IDs will create eight volume IDs from 000110 to 000117 Volume ids must be 1 6 characters in length 7 If the Wizard module TML is installed whether the library has a bar code reader or not the user must additionally add tapes to a TML cycle
395. gt DUMP BACKUP backupname backupname An alphanumeric string of up to 8 characters the first character must be alpha Note The backupnames FIRST and LAST are reserved and will be rejected if specified Example To assign the backupname PB930704 when appending a disk backup to an existing backupset gt DUMP PART T APPEND BACKUP PB930704 Option CYCLE This option is available with the DUMP command only with the Wizard TML module This option is used to create a target tape that needs to be associated with the TML cycle cyclename The generation value will be assigned automatically as the next available value for that cycle Syntax gt DUMP CYCLE cyclename cyclename Name of the TML cycle to which the target tape will be associated Example To DUMP a disc to disc backup D2D onto a tape on drive 7 and create a new generation of the TML cycle FULL gt DUMP D2D T CYCLE FULL Autoreply 7 Option DRIVES This option allows multiple tape drives to be used in parallel or serial with the dumped tapes Tape drives must be of the same type e g DLT or DDS but not mixed density configuration and device class Syntax gt DUMP DRIVES numdrives P S numdrives Total number of drives associated with the dump tape It can be any value between 1 and 64 P Specifies parallel handling of multiple tape drives BACKUP iX User Manual 18 2
396. guration section later in this chapter Give the cycle file a name descriptive of its backup type e g FULL PART etc Remember the cycle file name may have up to 8 characters and the first character must be alphabetic Lines in the cycle file must be kept unnumbered Next review the default cycle attribute settings by entering the DEFAULT CYCLE command If any default settings are not desired for the new cycle make an entry in the cycle file itself for those attributes Cycle attribute settings written into the cycle file take precedence over the default settings Not all cycle attributes need be specified but an unspecified attribute will have the default value For information on setting cycle defaults see the section in this chapter entitled Setting default cycle attributes Sample cycle files Examples of cycle files for both FULL and partial PART backup cycles are presented here To create a backup cycle file enter statements one on a line to indicate cycle file selection and to assign other cycle attribute values where the default values are not desired Sample of a Full cycle file A cycle file for a FULL backup cycle could contain the following statements BACKUP iX User Manual 17 180 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide KEEP 2 RETENTION 35 FREQUENCY 7 DAYS 5 VOLUMES 5 2 SIZE XLARGE Note A cycle file is saved as unnumbered line numbers do not occur in a cycle file
397. h default capability and access rights All subsequent Delta backups for that Delta backup cycle will reference and utilize the same Delta store directory When a Delta backup cycle is active meaning that the Delta monitor is running and tracking updates for that cycle the Delta store directory file is accessed So if LISTF 2 is entered and the name of the Delta store directory file is specified an asterisk will be displayed for an active cycle while no asterisk will be displayed for an inactive cycle If a Delta backup cycle is active and a baseline store of that same cycle is invoked the existing Delta backup cycle is replaced by the new cycle Subsequent delta stores will now be related to the most recent cycle s baseline store Delta store directories have a filecode of 7653 starting with BACKUP iX version 6 50 Note This section Delta store directory is for informational purposes only since the BACKUP user does not directly use or reference the delta store directory Delta cycle example If a Delta backup cycle is to be performed weekly the baseline store would be performed once a week and followed by a series of delta stores perhaps daily until the next baseline If the weekly baseline store is started with the command gt STORE T BASELINE DC1 a baseline store will run while starting the Delta monitor and assigning the Delta backup cycle the name DC1 Then for the delta
398. hange from the volid list in the order listed with the VOLID option When the directory volume is found any other media needed for the restore will then be mounted See Chapter 13 ORBIT Library Manager or Chapter 27 OLM Command Line Interface Commands for information on using the OLM Cl to label media for use in a tape library with BACKUP Syntax The main syntax for the OLM option is as follows SRESTORE OLM hostname libraryname ANSI NOANSI Parameters hostname The optional name of the host machine running the OLM provider is indicated This is optional if the command is performed on the OLM host Note that the hostname must be terminated with a colon This name must be resolvable through a DNS lookup and the OLM daemon must be running on the named host libraryname The name given to the library Because multiple libraries can be on the same host a library name must be entered in this field Note that the library name is case sensitive ANSI This literal will indicate ANSI labels are to be used in the operation See also the BackupOLMANSI MPE CI variable NOANSI This literal will indicate ANSI labels are NOT to be used in the operation NOANSI is the default when the MPE Cl variable BackupOLMANSI is not bound or is set to False See also the BackupOLMANSI MPE Cl variable Error messages The following error messages may be returned when using the OLM option OLM requires that you specify the
399. he BACKUP iX package BACKUP iX Operations Guide How to use the BACKUP iX package including strategies and methods for storing and restoring files using labeled tapes information about tape drives ensuring reliable backups and maximizing performance Tips and techniques for optimizing backup operations are given where appropriate Functions of the BACKUP iX package are organized by topic and examples are included throughout BACKUP iX Reference Guide Reference information for utilizing the BACKUP iX package and the Tape Manager amp Librarian module including commands JCWs files programs reports and error handling Functions are organized by command name JCW name program name etc alphabetically within their respective chapters Also included is a glossary and an index Conventions The following conventions are used throughout this manual e The BACKUP iX package is referred to as BACKUP e The Tape Manager amp Librarian module identified in the BACKUP banner as the Wizard module is generally referred to in this manual as TML and sometimes as the Restore wizard e IMAGE TurbolIMAGE TurboIMAGE XL and IMAGE SQL are all referred to as IMAGE since they are all versions of the same package and are treated in the same manner by the BACKUP iX package e MPE iX commands are prefixed by a colon the MPE iX prompt to avoid confusion with BACKUP commands and options of the same nam
400. he JCW was set prior to the store or not The JCW is displayed by SHOWJCW BACKUPPROCESSES BACKUPSYNCANYWAY For an online backup performed with the ZERODOWN option this JCW instructs BACKUP to automatically synchronize without requiring an operator to REPLY in the event that any processes cannot be suspended This JCW is set by SETVAR BACKUPSYNCANYWAY 1 BACKUPSYNCYN For an online backup performed with the ZERODOWN option instructs BACKUP to put up a console request at the synchronization point requiring a REPLY before proceeding This JCW allows the operator to delay the user suspension and synchronization until ready at which time the user must reply to the console request It is intended to give users the opportunity to exit CM files or to have user suspension occur at a specific time This JCW is set by BACKUP iX User Manual 22 387 Chapter 22 JCWs BACKUP iX Reference Guide SETVAR BACKUPSYNCYN 1 BACKUPTAPEERRORS BACKUPTAPEERRORS is an output JCW which returns the total number of tape errors that occurred during a store It is also set by READALL when validating a backup volumeset The JCW is displayed by SHOWJCW BACKUPTAPEERRORS BACKUPTAPERETRIES BACKUPTAPERETRIES is an output JCW that returns the total number of tape retries that occurred during a store It is also set by READALL when validating a backup volumeset The JCW is displayed by SHOWJCW BACKUPTAPERETRIES
401. he OLM option a user may specify the host name and the library name to copy data into or from tape media located within a robotic tape library Only one library can be referenced at a time This option is available only with the OLM module installed and the OLM provider daemon background job running on the library host machine Either AUTOREPLY or the SEQUENCE option with DRIVES must be used with the OLM option to coordinate the mounting of the media on the correct logical device The LABEL and VOLID options are both required to identify each volume to the OLM database and to provide identifying internal labels for each volume unless TML is used If TML is involved the volume labels will be automatically determined and passed to OLM With Input source tape This option is used when the source tape being copied is contained in a tape library Syntax gt COPY T1 OLM hostname libraryname ANSI T TO NOANSI With output target tape BACKUP iX User Manual 18 230 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide This option is used when the target tape is contained in a tape library Syntax gt COPY TO T2 OLM hostname libraryname j ANSI Di Pete OANSI Parameters Hostname The optional name of the host machine running the OLM provider is indicated This is optional if the command is performed on the OLM host Note that the hostname must be terminated with a colon Th
402. he STORE command options except ADATE CDATE DATE MDATE SDATE SETDATE DBSTORE DIRECTORY and SHOW Example To perform a partial backup to device class TAPE enter BACKUP iX User Manual 18 258 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide FILE T DEV TAPE FILE LP DEV LP RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt PARTBACKUP T LP AUTOREPLY 7 The partial backup shown just above includes all files modified since the last FULLBACKUP and internally generates the following BACKUP command gt STORE T DATE gt 12 10 98 19 00 DBSTORE SHOW AUTOREPLY 7 This command then automatically replies to the tape request and sends the SHOW listing to device class LP The last FULLBACKUP date and time are indicated as 12 10 98 at 7 00 PM 19 00 Note See the STORE command in this chapter for details on the STORE command options and parameters PURGE Purges the diskdir file or a disk backup fileset The PURGE command purges all files comprising the disk backup fileset These files are privileged and cannot be purged with the MPE iX PURGE command If the diskdir file has an unqualified MPE or POSIX syntax filename BACKUP converts it to a fully qualified path If the user s Current Working Directory CWD was changed using the CHDIR or CHGROUP commands a partially qualified diskdir filename is qualified relative to the user s CWD Syntax gt PURGE diskfile Parameters diskfile Name of
403. he delta store as updates only They will not appear in the baseline store and are therefore not restorable In such cases a baseline store or a conventional backup must be done with all volumesets mounted Attempting file access between baseline and delta restores If a restore from a baseline store is run and the restored files are accessed before the corresponding delta store is applied those file changes will be overwritten by the delta restore Always perform both the baseline and delta restores before allowing access to the files Purging a baseline version before delta restore is complete If a file is successfully restored from a baseline store and then purged before the restore from a delta store is done an error message will be issued during the restore from the delta store The baseline restore for that file must be repeated before the subsequent delta is applied Maximum number of concurrent Delta backup cycles Multiple Delta backup cycles may run at any given time subject to the following limitations e Only one combination Online and Delta cycle backup can be running at any time During an Online Delta backup a maximum of 4 other Online and or Delta backup cycles can be active e Amaximum of five concurrent Delta backup cycles can be active at any time with the Delta monitor running whether or not a backup is actually in progress e The total number of active Delta backup cycles and Online stores is five For exa
404. he information displayed for each tape also includes the media type size length date of first use number of times used the assigned cycle pool the cycle generation and the expiration and scratch dates For tapes belonging to active generations the cycle name indicates the cycle to which the tape is currently allocated and the generation is also shown For blank or scratched tapes the cycle name indicates the tape pool and the generation is left blank A blank cycle name indicates that the tape belongs to the global pool Tape error history The ERRORS mode of SHOW TAPE displays the number of times each tape has been used as well as the number of errors and retries encountered on the last five stores to each tape shown chronologically left to right Any zero value is displayed as rather than 0 to make non zero values easier to recognize The following command lists retry and error statistics for tapes with volids from 000120 through 000130 gt SHOW TAPE 120 130 ERRORS Volid Media Used Retries occurred last 5 uses Errors occurred last 5 uses 000120 TAPE 2 000121 TAPE 000122 TAPE 000123 TAPE 000124 TAPE 000125 TAPE 000126 TAPE 000127 TAPE 000128 TAPE 000129 TAPE 000130 TAPE NNNNNNNNDN N Note in this example that all requested tapes had been used only 2 times volid 000126 had 3 retries on its last store and 2 on its previous store and volid 000125 had 1 error on each of its last two uses Fil
405. he library The steps are to use the Validate command and then rename any volumes that may be named wrong in the database E g Validate Library Dltchg Default Library Dltchg List Unload drive 1 slot 3 Rename slot 3 tape3 The first command will scan the library and update the olm database depending on any inconsistencies This may result in some volumes now having blank volume ids because of an inconsistency The next step is for you to rename any volumes including ones with blank names to their correct name This step may not be needed if the library has a bar code reader You cannot rename a volume in a drive so any volumes with blank names need to be unloaded Then rename all the volumes as needed in their slots Limitations and Restrictions BACKUP iX will use arm 0 and port 0 every time whether or not more than one of these elements arms or ports is in the library All volumes used in an operation must be accessible through the library if the OLM parameter of any BACKUP iX command is used The term accessible indicates both those volumes in the library at the start of the operation as well as volumes that can be imported into the library during the operation BACKUP iX User Manual 14 168 Chapter 15 Ensuring Reliable Backups Backups are only as reliable as the equipment with which they are written and the media on which they are stored Itis vital that both tape drives and tapes be kept clean and that a f
406. hg on hacker MOVE The MOVE command moves a volume from one library element to another A move from a slot to a drive does the same as a load command Unload is the reverse Move from a slot to a port does the same thing as an export command In some libraries a move between slots and other variations are allowed Syntax MOVE LibraryID SourceId DestinationId Example olm gt MOVE LIBRARY hacker dltchg SLOT 3 DRIVE 0 This would move the volume in slot 3 to drive 0 in ditchg on hacker OFFLINE The OFFLINE command will place the library offline Syntax OFFLINE LibraryID ONLINE The ONLINE command will put the library online BACKUP iX User Manual 20 371 Chapter 20 OLM Command Line Interface Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax ONLINE LibraryID QUIT Exit the olm Cl RENAME The RENAME command serves multiple purposes renaming a volume and changing a drive name When renaming volumes if more than one slot is included in the rename command then VolumelD must end in enough digits to support the number of slots in the range No two volumes can be named the same within the library Renaming volumes is illegal if the library has a bar code reader Syntax RENAME LibraryID SLOT numberl1 number2 VolumeID RENAME LibraryID DriveName DriveLocation DriveHost LDev Examples This RENAME command would rename the tapes in slo
407. hostname idev where hostname is where BACKUP iX is being run and devis the tape drive This generated drive name must exactly match the drive name previously defined within OLM with the RENAME command An OLM Store on the library host system using TML The following command indicates that the user wants to use the cycle FULL and a library called mylib The volume is to be mounted on the library drive associated with LDEV 7 gt STORE FULL t OLM mylib AUTOREPLY 7 An OLM Store using a remote library and TML The following command performs a backup of the cycle PART using Idev 14 and the library mylib on library host pogo to move volumes gt STORE PART t OLM pogo mylib AUTOREPLY 14 Performing a Restore with OLM The following examples illustrate a few situations the user may encounter in using OLM with BACKUP HIX restores A Restore with a local library The following command restores files into SOURCE AP from a volume with the volid RND101 and volume set id myback in library mylib attached to the local host The volume is mounted on the library drive LDev 14 BACKUP iX User Manual 14 161 Chapter 14 ORBIT Library Manager OLM Operations Guide gt RESTORE t SOURCE AP OLM mylib AUTOREPLY 14 LABEL myback amp gt VOLID RND101 A Restore with TML issued from an OLM consumer system This RESTORE command with TML active directs that the latest
408. hysical transaction begins when the intrinsic is entered and ends when it completes No user code is executed during a physical transaction If a physical transaction were to fail it would result in a physical database inconsistency such as a broken chain or other internal IMAGE error For programs running in a job which generally do not require communication between the program and the user ZERODOWN cannot recognize a logical transaction and therefore works on a physical transaction basis A logical transaction on the other hand is defined by an application program and may consist of one or more physical transactions For example the DBPUT of an invoice header to a master dataset and of three line items to a detail dataset comprise four physical transactions but only one logical transaction A logical database inconsistency in this case would appear as a missing invoice header or one or more missing line items With BACKUP iX version 6 00 and newer the DBQUIESCE procedure for database quiescence is included for logical database integrity and improved Zero Downtime backup support for IMAGE transaction logging BACKUP iX User Manual 7 82 Chapter 7 Online and Zero Downtime Backup BACKUP iX Operations Guide Logical transactions via DBXBEGIN and DBXEND or DBBEGIN and DBEND BACKUP s Zero downtime backup functionality uses the DBQUIESCE procedure in addition to others to recognize logical transactions defined by DBBEGIN
409. ide the BackupOLMANSI MPE CI variable Error messages The following error messages may be returned when using the OLM option OLM requires that you specify the drive logical devices with the AUTOREPLY or SEQUENCE keywords OLM requires that you specify a LABEL and VOLID when not using TML Examples The following command performs a non TML two drive parallel backup on the OLM host system which has two drives connected directly to the library This syntax specifies a store fileset The OLM hostname parameter is not supplied since the host for the OLM provider is the machine used to run the backup gt STORE SYS t DRIVES 2 AUTOREPLY 14 15 OLM mylib amp gt LABEL myback VOLID RND101 RND102 With an OLM store the LABEL and VOLID options label the backup tapes yet do not create an ANSI label as they would in a non OLM store If the OLM ANSI parm is used an ANSI label can be created in an OLM store The NOANSI parameter for the OLM option is the default as in this example See Chapter 13 ORBiT Library Manager for more examples of performing backups to tape on a robotic tape library with the OLM option Notes e All volumes used in a BACKUP OLM operation must be located in the library at the start of the operation or imported into the library during the operation e The OLM keyword also affects the RESTORE LISTDIR DUMP READALL and VERIFY commands Option ON Performs a specified comma
410. if R had been specified Complete editing and execute command Restart editing Il Abort redo gt Appends a single character to the command line Example To change the SHOW format from LONG to SHORT gt STORE PUB SYS T SHOW LONG gt REDO gt STORE PUB SYS T SHOW LONG RSHORT gt STORE PUB SYS T SHOW SHORT RESTORE The RESTORE command is used to perform all restores from BACKUP store Syntax gt RESTORE tapefile filesetlist restoreoption diskfile filesetlist fileset res indirectfile filestorestore localexclude globalexclude fileset BACKUP iX User Manual 18 268 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide restoreoption ACCOUNT accountname AUTOREPLY ldev BACKUP backupspec ACCOUNT CREATE GROUP Bresel dA OWNER PATH CREATOR username accountname CWD pathname CYCLE cyclespec GEN ERATION value DBRESTORE DEFRAG DEV device DIRECTORY disabled DISKDIR dirfilename UN ATTENDED DRIVES numdrives SEQ UENCE ldev dirldev ENCRYPT encryptionmethod key keyfile1 keyfile2 GROUP groupname KEEP KEEPNEW KEEPOLD KEEPNONPVZ KEEPBAD LABEL volid VOLID volidlist LOCAL NEWDATE NOLABEL NOPATH OLDDATE OLM hostname libraryname
411. if it contains more than 5 errors BACKUP iX User Manual 18 263 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt READALL T MAXERRORS 5 Option MAXRETRIES Maximum number of retries allowed on any tape after which the tape is terminated prematurely and the READALL continues If not specified no limit is imposed on the number of errors that may occur on any tape Note The MAXRETRIES option is invalid for a disk READALL and is ignored if specified Syntax gt READALL MAXRETRIES numretries numretries Count of allowable retries on any tape specified as an integer value Example To terminate a tape if it has had more than 20 retries gt READALL T MAXRETRIES 20 Option OLM With the OLM option a user may specify the host name and the library name to verify the integrity of a backup to tape media located within a robotic tape library Only one library can be referenced at a time This option is available only with the OLM module installed and the OLM daemon job running on the library host machine The AUTOREPLY option must be used with the OLM option to coordinate the mounting of the media on the correct logical device Only one drive is allowed The LABEL and VOLID options are also required to identify each volume to the OLM database and to provide identifying internal labels for each volume At least one volume ID must be provided to perform the READALL command with OLM I
412. il explicitly set to another value The initial ORBiT defined default cycle attributes displayed by entering DEFAULT CYCLE with no parameters are Keep Retention Frequency Days ok Volumes req spare Size 1 30 7 1234567 1 1 The size classification parameter is assigned a blank value by default to allow any size media to be selected for any backup of this cycle Changing default cycle attribute settings To change existing defaults use the DEFAULT CYCLE command with the appropriate options For example to change the default for FREQUENCY to 1 and the default for VOLUMES to 3 required and 1 spare enter BACKUP iX User Manual 17 181 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt DEFAULT CYCLE FREOUENCY 1 VOLUMES 3 1 After any cycle default is changed all cycle default settings are displayed including the newly changed attributes as shown gt DEFAULT CYCLE FRE 1 VOL 3 1 Keep Retention Frequency Days ok Volumes req spare Size 1 30 1 1234567 3 1 Note Cycle attribute keywords may be abbreviated to 3 characters for both commands and cycle files Modifying and deleting a cycle To change cycle attribute settings in a cycle file open the cycle file with an editor modify the attribute settings listed there and save the file TML checks the cycle file s modification date and time each time the cycle is referenced and updates the information stored in the TML database if any chan
413. ile designator in this example T is any user assigned value up to 8 characters and beginning with a letter File density If storing to a dual density tape drive the density can also be specified on the file equation For example to store on an HP7980 tape drive using a density of 1600 bpi rather than the drive s default density of 6250 bpi BACKUP iX User Manual 6 67 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide FILE T DEV TAPE DEN 1600 Once the file equation has been set it is backreferenced on the STORE command by prefixing it with an asterisk gt STORE T Note No FILE parameters other than DEV and DEN may be specified on the file equation Designating Tape drives for backup with TML When using TML the backup device specification is used to determine which tape drive to store to and the type of backup media to select e g tapes or DATs as well For the greatest ease of operation and flexibility tape volumes in TML should have media attributes that match the backup device class TML then automatically selects corresponding media volumes for backup When this is the case the following typical file equation can be used FILE T DEV TAPE TML will interrogate the system device class table determine that TAPE is a valid device and select volumes that have TAPE media specified This is accomplished with a file equation like the following
414. ile information related to a generation for which no file information has been loaded an appropriate message will be issued For example this message would be displayed if SHOW CYCLE FILES was requested regarding a generation that had no file information loaded NOTE no file information exists for specified generation File information loading File information is loaded through a two stage process that includes both the creation and the loading of a file information log Either or both of these stages may be turned off to disable file information loading To defer file information loading the second stage file information log loading may be turned off then performed manually at a later time Creating the log file Whenever a cycle is stored a cycle generation is created and information about the files contained on that generation s tapes is saved in a separate file information log file Log files are named TMLC nnnx where nnn stands for the numerical day of the year and x represents the characters 0 9 or A Z with unique file names and are saved in the current group account Loading the log file The second stage is the loading of the file information log into the TMLDB database where it is then available for reporting Disabling file information log saving If the file register will not be used both the saving of log files and the automatic loading of file information may be disabled By doing so the disk space otherwise occu
415. ile users are accessing it DBCLOSE would normally reset this flag when closing the database If BACKUP did not reset this flag the first DBOPEN of the restored database would get an error saying the database has to be recovered Refer to the HP TurboIMAGE XL Database Management System Reference Manual for a detailed treatment of DBUTIL and the MUSTRECOVER option Non static files during an Online backup Because users have unrestricted access to files during an Online backup it is possible that new files will be created and existing files will be changed in some way or purged while the store is in progress For these reasons it is possible that files that did not qualify for store when the backup was invoked will qualify during the backup and that files will change during the backup in such a way that they no longer meet the criteria for inclusion in the store BACKUP iX User Manual 7 90 Chapter 7 Online and Zero Downtime Backup BACKUP iX Operations Guide BACKUP accommodates these dynamics by storing files that qualify during backup and by not storing files that become disqualified while the backup is running Files that disqualify after they have been written to the backup tape or disk are flagged in the store directory in such a way as to disallow them from being restored Files that qualify during a store are listed in the SHOW listing Files that disqualify during a store are listed in the Disqualified Files listing See Cha
416. iles not in its baseline store a restore from that delta store will not restore those files that were not included in the baseline fileset A restore from a delta store that contains files on volumesets that were not mounted when the baseline store was taken will not restore files that were not stored with the baseline A restore from a delta store that contains files on volumesets that were unmounted at any point during the Delta backup cycle will not restore files that were not stored with the baseline store A file whose security settings are modified using the MPE RELEASE SECURE or ALTSEC commands will not be stored by a DELTA store if no other file data or attributes have also been modified This is because these MPE commands do not update file label State Change timestamps and Delta store does not classify the file as being modified Miscellaneous Delta notes A baseline store must select at least one file The APPENDED option of STORE Appended backup functionality is ideal for use with Delta backups since the baseline store and multiple delta stores can be contained on the same tapeset File store bits will be set for the duration of a baseline store During delta store the file store bits will be set for all files including those that only have file attribute changes ACD etc Store bits will not be set if the ONLINE option is used in conjunction with BASELINE or DELTA BACKUP iX User Manual 8 99 Chapter 9
417. inated abnormally Note BACKUP sets the system JCW to a corresponding value when setting the STOREJCW where STOREJCW values of 1 6 are fatal and 7 8 are warnings The STOREJCW values used by BACKUP are the same as for MPE iX STORE BACKUP iX User Manual 22 392 Chapter 22 JCWs BACKUP iX Reference Guide STOREJCW and RESTOREJCW are also set by LISTDIR and READALL STOREJCWDISCRETE STOREJCWDISCRETE is an input JCW that governs whether or not the STOREJCW is set to the same value as the RESTOREJCW The JCW is set by SETVAR STOREJCWDISCRETE value Where value is specified as an integer 0 or 1 Values for the STOREJCWDISCRETE JCW are Value Meaning 0 STOREJCW and RESTOREJCW equivalent on RESTORE and READALL 1 STOREJCW not set by RESTORE or READALL TMLLANGID TMLLANGID is an input JCW which specifies the language to be used for the text on TML tape identification labels Refer to the Configuration section in Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian for more information BACKUP iX User Manual 22 393 Chapter 23 Files and File Designators BACKUP comes with several support files such as help and message catalogs Additionally BACKUP builds various external files while performing certain functions In this chapter The various files included with BACKUP with the exception of programs are documented For information on programs see Chapter 26 Programs comman
418. indication of the condition of the tape material being used If this number becomes high 10 or more for a 2400 tape reel with an average of 3 or 4 the tape volume should be discarded If the media being used is new and the number of retries is still excessive the tape drive may be out of adjustment During store If tape errors occur during the initial part of the store when the BACKUP tape label and the file directory are written to the tape BACKUP will rewind the tape and request another one After another tape volume is mounted the user is asked to REPLY at the system console The backup then continues normally Tape errors that occur in the data part of the tape after the file directory is written to the tape are handled by BACKUP as follows e First BACKUP will simply retry That is it will skip backward one datablock and rewrite the previous datablock If the error was not caused by a damaged tape but was caused for example by a transmission error this soft retry will probably be successful e Ifthe error persists BACKUP will mark the current tape volume as bad rewind it and request another volume The entire contents of the bad volume will be rewritten onto the next volume and the backup will continue In both cases messages describing the action taken are displayed on the system console During restore The integrity of the store directory is absolutely essential for properly restoring files For this
419. information e Connecting to the daemon e Loading and unloading tape volumes e Exporting tape volumes e Putting the tape library online or offline Other topics are discussed in the preceding section BACKUP iX User Manual 14 156 Chapter 14 ORBiT Library Manager OLM Operations Guide Deleting a library from OLM The DELETE command deletes an existing library from the library database so that olm is no longer configured to control it If a tape library is no longer to be used with the host system the DELETE command must be used to remove the library records from the OLM database The following example deletes an OLM library named ditchg associated with the host system opus olm gt DELETE LIBRARY opus dltchg Assigning a default OLM library The DEFAULT command may be entered to specify a default library Commands entered after that in the current run of the OLM Cl need not include the LIBRARY keyword the hostname and library name unless another library is to be used A default port drive and slot may also be specified with the DEFAULT command A default setting only lasts until you EXIT the Cl or until you change the default by specifying a different value in any command The effect of the first two commands in the example is to list slots 0 9 in the library opus dltchg That last two commands will move the volume in slot 1 in the library called LIB on the host call Gandalf to drive 0 olm gt DEFAULT
420. ing Options e If the CREATE option is specified to create nonexistent account s and or group s on restore the newly created account s and or group s will automatically be spanned e The VOLCLASS option may not be specified together with the DEV option e Ifthe DIRECTORY option is specified along with the VOLCLASS option the minimal accounting structure required for the files being restored is created If neither the VOL VOLCLASS or VOLSET option is not specified the full directory structures as contained in the backup are created BACKUP iX User Manual 18 303 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Option VOLID With the LABEL option VOLID specifies ANSI format tape labels and the volids for up to eight backup volumes unless used with the OLM option The VOLID option may only be used when it is combined with the LABEL option which specifies the volsetid optional expiration date and an optional comment In the event that the eight volid list becomes exhausted more volids will be requested from the console operator If used with OLM the ANSI NOANSI parms of the OLM option determine whether an ANSI label is created Syntax gt RESTORE VOLID volidlist volidlist Specifies a comma delimited list of up to 8 volume IDs to be used for the first 8 tapes in the target tapeset Each volid may be a maximum of 6 alphanumeric characters for each volid and is case sensitive Example To restore
421. ing regular expressions Neither the starting nor ending file need exist XDATE Imposes date restriction one of the following values ADATE Last access date and optionally time CDATE Creation date and optionally time DATE Last state change date and optionally time MDATE Last modification date and optionally time SDATE Last state change date and optionally time Parameters continued relop One of the following relational operators Equal to lt Less than gt Greater than BACKUP iX User Manual 18 310 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide lt Less than or equal to gt Greater than or equal to lt gt Not equal to datetimespec Date and optionally time in the following format datespec time datespec Date or days in one of the following formats Mmidallyylyy days Days relative to today time Time of day in the form hh mm using 24 hour time indirectfile Unnumbered disk file containing file selection specification for files to be stored May be prefixed by either or Unlike MPE IX STORE only filesetspecs may be specified in the indirect file other STORE options may not be included cyclename Name of a Tape Manager amp Librarian cycle storeoption One or more of the STORE command options documented with their parameters in detail in the pages that follow Examples To store all the files in the PROGRAMS group to the device class TAPE and generate a SHOW lis
422. ion Ldev is still being repaired from mirrored Ldev Ldev is now repaired from mirrored Ldev Ldev is now being repaired from mirrored Ldev Ldev is still a split backup volume Ldev is no longer a split backup volume Ldev is now a split backup volume Mirroring is still suspended on Ldev Mirroring is no longer suspended on Ldev Mirroring is now suspended on Ldev Ldev is still disabled Option ONVS Stores files located on particular volume sets If ONVS is not specified files from the system volume set and all mounted non system volume sets are stored Syntax BACKUP X User Manual 18 334 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt STORE ONVS volumesetname volumesetname Example To store the files located on the system volume set and on the nonsystem volumesets SET_A and SET_B gt STORE T ONVS MPEXL SYSTEM VOLUME SET SET A SET B Notes e The ONVS option may appear only once in the command options list To specify multiple volume sets delimit them with commas in a single ONVS specification This restriction may change with a future release e There may be no more that 20 volume set names in the list If more than 20 volume sets are specified the command is rejected e The wildcard can be used to reference all mounted volume sets e Ifa volume set is prefaced by a minus sign is assumed and that volume set is
423. ion Standard algorithm developed by the United States government ASCII A file type which includes ASCll format files BACKUP tape label Magnetic identification label written by BACKUP to each tape volume which contains the tape volid The BACKUP tape label is written as a user label to each tape on its first store Baseline store Delta baseline stores performed using the BASELINE option of STORE initiate a Delta backup cycle give the Delta backup cycle a unigue name create a standard backup of the entire contents of selected files and activate the Delta monitor process Baseline version The baseline version of a file is created when a complete file is included in a baseline store Additionally a file that appears in its entirety in a delta store because it was created after the baseline is also considered to be a baseline version of a file BACKUP iX User Manual 426 Glossary BACKUP iX BINARY A file type which includes Binary format files Byte A file type which includes Byte stream files Capabilities MPE defined attributes that are assigned to a user to determine the functions that may be performed Capabilities significant to BACKUP are SM System Manager OP System Supervisor AM Account Manager and ND Non shareable Device Compression The act of reducing the amount of data by compacting it while allowing subsequent decompression CSM The Compression Storage Management program CWD
424. ion criteria including use of the GENERATION option fails to find any qualifying files for example GEN 11 but only 10 generations exist the desired nonexistent file s will not be restored and no message will be issued Option GROUP Restores files from their source groups into the specified group Files originating from MPE iX groups are restored into the specified group in accounts with the source name If the specified group does not exist in the accounts being restored to files targeted to those groups are not restored The target group is substituted for each source group If files have no source group e g files in POSIX directories they are not restored Syntax gt RESTORE GROUP groupname groupname The group name of up to 8 characters Example To restore files into the ARCHIVE group of their respective source accounts BACKUP iX User Manual 18 286 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt RESTORE T GROUP ARCHIVE The GROUP option may be used in combination with the CREATE option to create the specified group if it does not exist as shown gt RESTORE T GROUP ARCHIVE CREATE GROUP Notes e To explicitly restore POSIX namespace files into a group use the CWD or LOCAL option e The CREATE option can be used to create nonexistent groups accounts users and or directories on restore e To restore both MPE and POSIX files to nonexistent
425. ion labels not printed External tape identification label formats Standard tape identification label formats are provided in multiple languages with corresponding date and time formats By default the NATIVE 3000 label is used Specifying the language of the label To set the label to a different language use the TMLLANGID JCW to specify the language using one of the following NLS Native Language Support language IDs Langids BACKUP iX User Manual 17 201 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide Language Date format Time fmt NATIVE 3000 mmldal yy AM PM AMERICAN ENGLISH mm dd yy AM PM CANADIAN FRENCH mm dd yy AM PM DUTCH dd mm yy 24 hour ENGLISH UK dd mm yy AM PM FRENCH dd mm yy 24 hour GERMAN dd mm yy 24 hour SPANISH dd mm yy 24 hour ND ONOPNAO For example to select the German language label enter SETJCW TMLLANGID 8 If TMLLANGID is not set or is set to an unrecognized value the default NATIVE 3000 label is utilized Default tape identification labels Default tape identification labels for each language are stored in the BCKUPMSG message catalog file The NATIVE 3000 label for example is stored in the following format Volid Seq Cycle 2d Density JCW Retries Errors Stored Expires Used TML replaces the s with the appropriate values when the label is printed The blank lines before and after the label 1000 1002
426. ions may be specified in the same restore command The specified commands are MPE commands performed with DO Examples To send the message to the console if an error is encountered gt RESTORE T ON ERROR DO TELLOP BACKUP error occurred To exit on error gt RESTORE T ON ERROR QUIT To stream the job CHECKRUN once the tape volume needs to be changed gt RESTORE T ON VOLUME DO STREAM CHECKRUN Option ONVS The ONVS option references a particular volume set from which the files were stored the original volume set This is useful for restoring files from one volume set to another or for recovering if a disk drive fails and all data on the volume set to which it belongs must be restored Syntax BACKUP iX User Manual 18 296 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt RESTORE ONVS volumesetname volumesetname volumesetname The name of the volume set for example MPEXL_SYSTEM_VOLUME_SET Example To restore only those files originally on volume set PRIVATE_VOL_D to the volume named VOL_C within the PRIVATE_VOL_A volume set gt RESTORE T ONVS PRIVATE VOL D VOLSET PRIVATE VOL A VOL VOL C Notes e The ONVS option may appear only once in the command options list To specify multiple volume sets delimit them with commas in a single ONVS specification e There may be no more that 20 volume set names in the list If more than 20 vo
427. irect filesets or TML cycle names If a Cl variable is defined with the same name as an indirect file BACKUP will select the indirect file for the substitution OPUS gt PUB listfile in FILENAME IN2 OPUS gt PUB backuppl BACKUP iX 6 78 c Copyright 1991 06 ORBiT SOFTWARE INC 150ct06 04 31pm BACKUP ixX 72 DAYS LEFT IN DEMO PERIOD Online module 72 DAYS LEFT IN DEMO PERIOD Delta module 72 DAYS LEFT IN DEMO PERIOD Wizard module IS NOT INSTALLED gt store IN2 bac2 Building intermediate scratch files NOTE Previously HPTIMEF would be dereferenced when the ON event occurred it will now be dereferenced when the STORE commend itself is executed To list the time of the event itself users should replace with Id Store t Online ON released DO Tellop Release occurred at HPTIMEF The following example will automatically perform a full backup on Saturday and a partial backup on all other days 2 29 Chapter 2 Program Operation BACKUP iX Operations Guide job backjob operator sys if hpday 7 then Saturday setvar storetype fullbackup else setvar storetype partbackup endif file tapedev dev tape run backuppl pub orbit storetype tapedev exit leoj Long commands BACKUP commands that cannot fit on a single line may be continued on additional lines by appending an ampersand amp to the end of each line for example gt S
428. is chapter explains how BACKUP handles error conditions and how to recover from them For preventative measures refer to Chapter 15 Ensuring reliable backups in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide in this manual In this chapter Find information on the following error handling topics e Completion JCWs e Tape errors and retries during store and restore e Restoring a file with an error e Disk I O errors e Tape drive errors e System aborts e Internal errors e TML tape identification labeling errors e Inconsistent TML generation e Restored TMLDB database e TML file register inconsistency e TMLDB database inconsistency The following JCWs are also discussed as the above topics are covered e The FILESNOTRESTORED FILESNOTSTORED FILESRESTORED FILESSTORED and STOREJCW JCWs Completion JCWs BACKUP sets several JCWs after a FULLBACKUP PARTBACKUP RESTORE and STORE which can be tested to determine the results of the backup STOREJCW Reports whether the store was successful or not if unsuccessful the reason is given RESTOREJCW Reports whether the restore was successful or not if unsuccessful the reason is given FILESSTORED Reports the number of files stored BACKUP iX User Manual 26 421 Chapter 26 Error handling BACKUP iX Reference Guide FILESNOTSTORED Reports the number of files that were selected but not stored FILESRESTORED Reports the number of files restored FILESNOTRESTORED Reports the number
429. is ignored when restoring from a disk backup Syntax gt RESTORE DISKDIR dirfilename UN ATTENDED dirfilename A store directory filename of up to 16 characters optionally qualified with group and account or partially or fully qualified Posix filename Note f dirfilename is not specified the directory is read from the file BACKUPDF ATTENDED An attended multi device restore with DISKDIR will direct the user where to mount only those volumes needed for the restore This is the default UNATTENDED An unattended multi device restore with DISKDIR will examine all drives for needed data once the directory work has been done Example To restore a file in attended mode using a store directory that was saved under its default filename BACKUPDF in the current group account BACKUP iX User Manual 18 282 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt RESTORE T SOMEFILE DISKDIR To restore all files in unattended mode using a stored directory saved under the filename PARTDIR in the current group account gt RESTORE T DISKDIR PARTDIR UNATTENDED Option DRIVES Allows multiple tape drives to be used in parallel for restore Tape drives must be of the same type e g tape or DDS but not mixed density configuration and device class Syntax gt RESTORE DRIVES numdrives numdrives The number of backup devices between 1 and 64 If the DRIVES op
430. is name must be resolvable through a DNS lookup and the OLM daemon must be running on the named host Libraryname The name given to the library Because multiple libraries can be on the same host a library name must be entered in this field Note that the library name is case sensitive ANSI This literal will indicate ANSI labels are to be used in the operation See also the BackupOLMANSI MPE CI variable NOANSI This literal will indicate ANSI labels are NOT to be used in the operation NOANSI is the default when the MPE CI variable BackupOLMANSI is not bound or is set to False See also the BackupOLMANSI MPE CI variable Example To make a copy of the following source tape volumes e volume ids ABC123 ABC234 e label SRC1 e contained in the drives 51 and 52 where the drives are part of the library named st4x30 which is connected to the system on which Backup is being run as the following target tape volumes e volume ids XYZ456 XYZ567 e label TGT1 e contained in the drives 53 and 54 where the drives are part of the library named st4x30 which is connected to the system on which Backup is being run gt COPY T1 OLM st4x30 Drives 2 Autoreply 51 52 LABEL SRC1 VOLID ABC123 ABC234 TO T2 OLM st4x30 Drives 2 Autoreply 53 54 LABEL TGT1 VOLID XYZ456 XYZ567 Notes e AUTOREPLY or SEQUENCE option has to be specified in order to identify the Idevs to be used The ldevs specified must be part of the library e f
431. is that PUB files are stored as well as all files in the ORBIT account In the next example the same indirect file IND2 is used to specify a local exclusion fileset gt STORE PUB TELESUP PUB SYS IND2 The line PUB contained within the indirect file is not interpreted as a global exclusion The fileset defined by AIND2 is evaluated and is applied as a local exclusion fileset to the fileset PUB SYS The contents of the indirect file IND2 have essentially been coerced into a local exclusion fileset Identifying errors within indirect files The contents of Indirect files are syntax checked using an optimized version of the normal BACKUP command syntax checker Any syntax errors will be clearly identified The error message identifies the actual line containing the error delimited by quotes the location of the error using a N character followed by the name of the indirect file and the line containing the error Deferred processing of indirect file global exclusion filesets The processing of global exclusion filesets specified with indirect files is deferred until after all other filesets in the indirect file have been processed This matches the way that global exclusion filesets specified at the BACKUP command prompt are also deferred until after all other filesets have been processed Optimizing processing of large indirect files BACKUP efficiently processes even very large indi
432. is used See Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands for details on the BASELINE and DELTA options of the Store and Restore commands BACKUP iX User Manual 8 94 Chapter 8 DELTA Backup Module BACKUP iX Operations Guide Delta monitor During a Delta backup cycle the Delta monitor tracks and saves only the changes to the files groups accounts and directories selected and backed up by the baseline store The Delta monitor becomes active when the baseline store is run and continues to be active between backups throughout the cycle The Delta backup monitor records file attribute changes BACKUP s secondary file scan is able to determine the file attributes at the completion of a backup as well as properly handle dynamic files that have been created purged renamed etc during a backup In the event of a system abort a baseline store must always be done in order to restart the Delta monitor following a reboot Delta store directory A Delta store directory is used by each Delta backup cycle to relate a baseline store with its delta stores and to ensure continuity between the baseline store and subsequent delta stores The Delta store directory is created automatically whenever a baseline store is performed It is given the same name as the deltacyclename and is built in the DELTA group of the account in which the BACKUPPL program resides by default the ORBIT account If the DELTA group does not already exist BACKUP iX creates it wit
433. ist it is assumed that this installation is for an existing Tape Manager amp Librarian and all information is preserved All existing CYCLE and DATA files are retained files on the installation tape that have the same names as existing files in the CYCLE and DATA groups are left in the PUB group Also for an existing installation the internal prior backup date is preserved for use by the PARTBACKUP command and the GETDATE option of the STORE commana The installation program looks for the prior backup date in the ORBIT account if not found it checks the IJG account an account into which BACKUP was formerly installed Depending on the version of the BACKUP iX package you are installing it may be necessary to convert the TML database or perform other functions If so these tasks are either performed automatically as part of installation or separate installation instructions are provided Step by step installation Follow these step by step instructions for installation of the BACKUP iX package with its Tape Manager amp Librarian module 1 Mount the BACKUP installation tape 2 Log on as MANAGER SYS into the PUB group HELLO MANAGER SYS PUB 3 Restore the installation program into PUB SYS FILE T DEV TAPE RESTORE T LOCAL SHOW 4 Put the tape drive back online and run the ORBINSTP program RUN ORBINSTP 5 The installation program will prompt for a selection of the i
434. ive For example when releasing a drive from STORE the following message is displayed on the console Store to ldev 14 completed drive released Note It may appear as though the drives are kept open until after the backup is completed Typically this is because the drive is idle but still opened by BACKUP as the store directory is being assembled Duplicating a backup from one device to another BACKUP s COPY command copies the contents of a store volumeset on one tape drive to tape volumes on another tape drive If the tape volume contains a BACKUP tape label it is not written to the copy For example to copy the backup from the DDS drive on ldev 14 to the DDS drive on ldev 15 FILE DDS1 DEV 14 FILE DDS2 DEV 15 RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt COPY DDS1 TO DDS2 BACKUP iX User Manual 13 149 Chapter 14 ORBiT Library Manager The ORBIT Library Manager OLM purchased separately provides the ORBiT Library Manager daemon OLMRPCD and Command line Interface OLM Cl and adds an OLM parameter to BACKUP iX commands enabling them to interact with tape volumes in tape libraries In this chapter Find detailed information about the ORBIT Library Manager including these topics e Overview e Basic OLM setup procedures e Using the OLM CI for remote library control e Using BACKUP iX commands with the OLM parameter e Exception handling e Limitations and restrictions Please refer to Chapter 18 B
435. ization files kept together 2 High optimization file blocks fragmented and spread throughout tapes For example to perform a full backup using high optimization gt STORE T OPTIMIZE 2 OPTIMIZE may be specified without a factor in which case factor 1 is used Increasing the number of store processes BACKUP uses multiple processes when performing a backup Increasing the number of processes used for store may improve performance on larger HPe3000 systems Increasing store processes The number of processes to be used for a backup can be specified as the number of processes per backup device By default four processes per backup device are used This value may be overridden using the BACKUPPROCESSES JCW which is set before invoking BACKUP For example doubling the default number of processes on a large HPe3000 could allow better throughput and would be specified by SETVAR BACKUPPROCESSES 8 Note Using multiple backup processes fragments data within the backup by interleaving data from various backup processes This fragmentation can lead to longer restore times when performing partial restores The more backup processes the greater the fragmentation on the backup media BACKUP iX User Manual 16 175 Chapter 16 Maximizing Performance BACKUP iX Operations Guide Increasing restore processes BACKUP uses multiple processes when performing a restore Increasing the number of processes use
436. k size Refer to Chapter 16 Maximizing performance in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide for a table of equivalent tape drive models Note Do not use the MAXBLOCK option when storing across a network or when performing a store which will be restored over a network Syntax Example BACKUP iX User Manual 18 326 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide To store to a 7980 tape drive at its maximum supported block size of 32 Kbytes rather than the default block size of 16 Kbytes gt STORE T MAXBLOCK Option MAXERRORS Maximum number of irrecoverable errors allowed on any tape or tapeset after which the operation is terminated prematurely If not specified no limit is imposed on the number of errors that may occur on any tape Note The MAXERRORS option is invalid and ignored for a disk backup Syntax gt STORE MAXERRORS numerrors numerrors Count of allowable errors on any tape specified as an integer value Example To terminate an operation if a tape contains more than 5 errors gt STORE T MAXERRORS 5 Option MAXRETRIES Maximum number of retries allowed on any tape after which the tape is terminated prematurely and the store continues If not specified no limit is imposed on the number of errors that may occur on any tape Note The MAXRETRIES option is invalid for a disk backup and is ignored if specified Syntax gt STORE MAXRETRIES numretries numretries Count
437. kkkkkkkkk oO oO oO program files IMAGE database files KSAM files VPLUS files SPOOL files ASCII files BINARY files Byte stream files Symbolic links Oo 0 0 Device links KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK RR RR R KOR RR RR RR MA Fe OF OONO OOQ OO ul oO O ON OOoOooOoo ie Be Pig Di Ee Pi ir niia N O OWOOOOO Verifying completeness of restored files Files verified as being completely restored gt E Refer to Chapter 24 Reports in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for an explanation of the reports generated by RESTORE BACKUP iX User Manual 11 133 Chapter 12 Labeled T apes Tapes may be either labeled or unlabeled In this context labeling does not mean physically affixing a label to the tape volume external label but rather the encoding of a label as data on the tape internal label In this chapter In the following topics find information on labeled tapes and how their use can result in more secure backups e MPE iX labeled versus BACKUP labeled tapes e Using BACKUP Proprietary labeled tapes e Using BACKUP s ANSI labeled tapes e Considerations for appended backup e Labeled tapes and the Tape Manager amp Librarian The following commands and options are discussed as the topics above are covered e The LABEL NOLABEL and VOLID options of the STORE and RESTORE commands and the VOLID option of the COP
438. kup If using incremental backups Monday s incremental backup contains all files modified on Monday Tuesday s incremental backup contains files modified on Tuesday etc This method minimizes the size of daily backups but can complicate and lengthen the restore process by requiring all backups to be restored A convenient method for performing incremental backups is to specify both the GETDATE and SETDATE options on the STORE command This combination of options retrieves the date of the last backup full or incremental to determine which files to store and then replaces the date with the current date at the end of the backup Incremental backup example The following entry example performs an incremental backup gt STORE T GETDATE SETDATE Optionally if a backup is to be performed every day 7 days per week a constant relative modification date of 1 can be specified for the DATE option instead Selective backup cycles In addition to full and partial backup cycles other types of backups may be required either on a regular periodic or one time basis Some examples of such special backup cycles are e Archiving storing and purging old files that are seldom used or no longer needed e Distributing certain files to other sites within a company e Mid day backups of a particularly critical database 4 42 Chapter 4 Backup Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide e Periodic storage of static files
439. kup encrypted using default settings gt RESTORE T ENCRYPT Notes e When restoring an encrypted backup with Restore Wizard the specified encryption key is applied to all backups BACKUP iX User Manual 18 284 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Option FIRST For a restore with Restore Wizard that qualifies multiple versions of the same file specifies that the earliest stored version or an offset thereto should be restored Syntax gt RESTORE FIRST o0ffset offset A numerical value maximum offset value is 5 used to specify the version of files relative to the earliest version of the files Omit the offset value to restore the earliest version Examples To restore the earliest version of each of the files in the LOG PUB SYS fileset on all backups gt RESTORE T LOG PUB SYS FIRST Notes If neither the FIRST or LAST option is specified LAST is used automatically Option GENERATION For a restore with Restore Wizard specifies the generation s to restore from It is generally used in combination with the CYCLE option to specify a specific generation of a particular cycle Syntax gt RESTORE GEN ERATION value value The generation s to restore from specified in one of the following formats e All generations omit the GENERATION parameter e Most recent generation specify O e Absolute generation number e g
440. kup specify the name of the disk backup fileset The fileset name may be qualified with group or group account as needed For example to restore from the disk backup fileset TEST gt RESTORE TEST Unspecified restore device To intentionally have the logon user name imposed while specifying RESTORE command options specify a semicolon as the restore device for example HELLO OPERATOR SYS FILE OPERATOR DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt RESTORE is the same as gt RESTORE OPERATOR SHOW Specifying store directory handling In order to perform a restore BACKUP first requires the store directory which is created by store and contains information about all the files stored The way that the store directory was handled on store will determine how it should be accessed for restore BACKUP iX User Manual 11 126 Chapter 11 Restoring Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide Store directory on disk If the DISKDIR option was specified on the STORE command the store directory is saved in a file on disk and can be used by restore To do so it is necessary to specify the DISKDIR option on the RESTORE command Also if the directory was not created under its default filename in the current group account it is also necessary to specify the name of the file that contains the store directory For example to restore a file using a store directory which
441. kup cannot be guaranteed It is therefore recommended that the NOLOCK option be used only in cases in which no users will be logged on during the backup thereby assuring no access to files The NOLOCK option is automatically used if the ONLINE or ZERODOWN option is specified Syntax BACKUP iX User Manual 18 328 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide NOLOCK Example To perform a faster system backup with no users accessing files gt STORE T NOLOCK Option OLM With the OLM option a user may specify the host name and the library name to perform backups to tape media located within a robotic tape library Only one library can be referenced at a time This option is available only with the OLM module installed and the OLM provider or daemon background job running on the library host machine Either the AUTOREPLY option or the SEQUENCE option with the DRIVES option must be used with the OLM option to coordinate the mounting of the media on the correct logical device Volumes will be mounted on drives in the order indicated by SEQUENCE or AUTOREPLY and in that order of precedence The LABEL and VOLID options are both required to identify each volume to the OLM database and to provide identifying internal labels for each volume unless TML is used If TML is involved the volume labels will be automatically determined and passed to OLM For OLM to handle reel changes at least one volid must be sup
442. kups in a Delta backup cycle and use the DELTA option of STORE A Delta store indicates the Delta backup cycle name to identify its associated baseline and only stores disk page changes to the files stored in the baseline or in the prior delta store Delta backup cycle A Delta backup cycle is invoked by the BASELINE option of the STORE command and includes all deltas associated with that cycle The term Delta backup cycle expresses the concept of the entire backup process using the BACKUP Delta module Both a baseline store and one or more delta stores are included in a Delta backup cycle Each time a baseline store is performed a new Delta backup cycle is begun Every baseline store must be followed by one or more delta stores to form a complete Delta backup cycle Delta cycle names A Delta cycle name is assigned with the baseline store either by default or as parameter of the BASELINE STORE option and identifies each Delta backup cycle The delta stores that follow the baseline stores must use the same Delta backup cycle names to be recognized as associated with their baselines Delta backup cycle names are reusable However the Delta directory will be overwritten when the name is reused Delta module The BACKUP Delta module purchased as a BACKUP add on provides the functionality to store entire files in an initial backup then store only the changes to those files in later backups within the same Delta backup cycle Delta
443. l validation is performed on restore files can be restored regardless of the contents of the tape label Because tape labels are not verified some security is sacrificed Problems such as allowing the wrong tape to be used for restore could occur However because tape labels are not verified the restore will be faster ANSI labeled tapes are always validated Verifying proprietary tape labels on restore The LABEL option of the RESTORE command compares the volsetid specified in the restore command against the BACKUP label and prevents files from being restored if the volsetids do not match If a tape with a wrong volsetid is mounted the tape is rejected and a tape with a matching volsetid is requested This request is repeated until either the correct tape is mounted or the user aborts the restore For example to restore from a tape with the volsetid 000123 while making sure that the correct tape is mounted gt RESTORE T LABEL 000123 Using the LABEL option can slow down restore since BACKUP must verify the tape label This is especially true when using tapes that were stored to using the DIRECTORY option since the portion of the tape containing the DIRECTORY file would otherwise have been skipped but now must be read and could take several minutes However using the LABEL option gives the security of knowing the correct volume set is being used for the operation Using BACKUP s ANSI labeled tapes BACKUP is able
444. le TMLCONF supplied by ORBiT The TMLCOMF file is located in the DATA group of the account in which BACKUP is installed The information in the configuration file is checked every time TML is invoked The TMLCOMF file contains the address of the TML database file and settings for the eight other TML global configuration parameters Note TML expects to find its configuration file in the DATA group of the account in which BACKUP is installed If the TMLCOMF file is located in a different group account the TMLCOMF file must be redirected before starting BACKUP by entering a fully qualified file equation for example FILE TMLCONF DATA ORBIT TMLCONF PUB SYS Default configuration parameters The ORBiT defined default configuration parameters for TML are BACKUP iX User Manual 17 210 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide TMLDB DATA ORBIT TMLCycles CYCLE ORBIT TMLAutoScratch YES TMLSaveLogs YES TMLAutoLoad YES TMLPrintLabels NO TMLRestore NO VOLUMELABEL BACKUP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Changing configuration parameters BACKUP initially sets default TML configuration parameters but they may be changed To modify or add TML configuration parameters use an editor to open the TMLCOMF file and modify the parameter settings listed there Note When modifying the TMLCOMF file YES and NO configuration values may be abbreviated as Y and N Displaying current configuration
445. le contains a definition of the backup fileset and settings for the six other cycle attributes The cycle file has the same name as the cycle and is stored in a designated group account by default CYCLE ORBIT The designated cycle group must contain only cycle files other types of files are not allowed in the cycle group Cycle attributes Each cycle is defined by attributes that describe the files selected for backup the number of backup generations to retain how long to retain each generation how often to perform the backup the specific days of the week on which to perform the backup the number of tapes to reserve for each backup and the size of tapes to use for backups These cycle attributes are listed by their identifying keywords and explained in detail below The cycle attribute keywords may be abbreviated to 3 characters when used with TML commands The DEFAULT CYCLE DELETE CYCLE and SHOW CYCLE commands are provided for changing or reporting cycle attribute values See chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands filesetlist Indicates the files to include in the backup as specified for BACKUP s STORE command KEEP The number of cycle generations to keep before a specific generation expires RETENTION The number of days that each cycle generation should be retained before expiring FREQUENCY The number of days to skip before performing a backup of this cycle again for example 4 means that the backup should be p
446. le equation BACKUP iX User Manual 6 74 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide RESET BPOUT Selection of tapes for backups BACKUP iX assists in the selection of tapes for use in backups through the optional creation of internal and external tape labels The LABEL option of the STORE command can be used to create an internal label and thereby set an expiration date for each tape volume Use of this option will assure that sufficient backups always exist to recover the system When an internally labeled tape is selected for a store BACKUP will require confirmation that the tape has not expired rather than overwriting needed data If using TML tape selection may be performed automatically TML determines the number of tapes required for the particular backup and selects the proper tapes Information about tape selection by TML is included in Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian in the section titled Storing with Tape Manager amp Librarian External tape identification labeling It is recommended that all tapes have a physical tape identification label attached which at minimum describes which backup the tape belongs to and its creation and expiration dates The external tape identification label should be updated after every store with the latest information With TML external tape identification labels may be printed either manually or automatically upon the completion of storing a cycle Refer to cha
447. le for the library A device file provides the connection between the library robotics Idev and OLMRPCD It functions much like an MPE file equation To create one first use SYSGEN to define devices within MPE then use the OLMDEV program to create the device file for the library In the example that follows assume that you are adding a tape library and want to put the robotics control on LDev 27 with the drives on LDev 28 and LDev 29 Logon as MANAGER SYS and enter SYSGEN At the SYSGEN prompt enter io sysgen gt io io gt ap 56 48 0 id pseudo io gt ad 27 id HPC1194F path 56 48 0 0 io gt ad 28 id DLT7000 path 56 48 1 0 io gt ad 29 id DLT7000 path 56 48 2 0 io gt hold io gt exit sysgen gt keep sysgen gt exit Reboot or use the DOIONOW command See the system manuals for your model Then run OLMDEV with two parameters the device file name to be created and the Idev number for the library s robotic controller The device file name must be of the format dev name and is case sensitive Assuming the library name is to be libchg enter the following to create the device file BACKUP iX User Manual 14 153 Chapter 14 ORBiT Library Manager OLM Operations Guide OLMDEV PUB ORBIT dev libchg 27 The ldev number used in the OLMDEV command must be the ldev associated with the library robotics not one of the library drives If you need to purge a device file use the purgelink command Lau
448. le in order to start recovery Refer to the HP TurboIMAGE XL Database Management System Reference Manual for more information about the DBRECOV program Note that files with DBQuiesce errors are stored and are restorable with the KeepBad option as of version 6 0 although integrity of those files cannot be guaranteed Files restored with KEEPBAD may be corrupted and should be checked thoroughly In summary the method used by ZDT ensures logical file integrity for accessors working at terminal sessions provided that their transactions do not span a terminal read or certain other idle conditions that are logically equivalent to a terminal read For programs that perform logical transactions that span terminal reads and for BACKUP iX User Manual 7 83 Chapter 7 Online and Zero Downtime Backup BACKUP iX Operations Guide batch jobs physical but not logical database integrity is guaranteed In no case will physical database integrity be compromised for Native Mode files by use of the ZERODOWN option Compatibility Mode files not supported with Zero downtime backup Due to operating system limitations the Zero downtime backup module supports only Native Mode files Compatibility Mode CM files including CIR circular RIO Relative 10 and CM KSAM data and key files files are not supported Any users with write access to Compatibility Mode files should exit these files at the synchronization point otherwise physical consistenc
449. le information logs since they exist only as long as the generation is active To disable automatic file information loading while still permitting manual loading at a later time the configuration option TMLAUTOLOAD must be turned off Refer to the section in this chapter titled Configuration for more information Updating the file register The file register requires updating when storing cycles and scratching cycle generations The file register may be updated in two ways loading and unloading File information is loaded when storing cycles as information about files stored to tape is added into the file register File information is unloaded when scratching generations as corresponding file information must be deleted from the file register File register loading may be invoked either automatically or manually when storing unloading is performed automatically when scratching Automatic loading File information is loaded automatically as needed at the end of a store when both the TMLSAVELOGS and TMLAUTOLOAD configuration options are enabled The following message is displayed when loading begins Loading file information for backup generation s File information loading continues at the rate of several thousand files per minute depending on system load and system model When loading has completed the following message is displayed file information loading complete Manual loading File information loading can be requ
450. le type designation gt STORE T SELECT TYPE lt gt IMAGE File types File type designators used with the SELECT TYPE option are IMAGE DB KSAM SPOOL PROG VPLUS ASCII BINARY BYTE SYMLINK DEVLINK and LARGE For details on File Types see the Glossary article For example to select all IMAGE databases and all KSAM files gt STORE T SELECT TYPE IMAGE OR TYPE KSAM The same facility can be used to exclude files of a given type For example to exclude all object programs from the backup BACKUP iX User Manual 6 61 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt STORE T SELECT TYPE lt gt PROG Selection by size Files can be selected by their size based on the number of records they contain eof using the SELECT SIZE option of the STORE command For example to store files in the TEST account that have more than 10 000 entries gt STORE T SELECT SIZE gt 10000 The relational operators lt gt lt gt and lt gt may be used when selecting files by size Selection by volumeset One or more volumesets may be specified using the ONVS option of BACKUP s STORE command to select files for store With volumeset as the file selection criteria a group of disk drives which comprise a volumeset may be stored separately and then restored from in the event that one should crash For ex
451. lected gt STORE T DIRECTORY SETDATE SHOW DBSTORE or gt STORE T DIRECTORY SETDATE SHOW DBSTORE PART Notes e The DBSTORE option will not function on databases that are open exclusively For any database that BACKUP is unable to access a message is displayed saying that the root file could not be updated and the store continues e The DBSTORE option overrides any other selection criteria e g DATE which may have deselected datasets BACKUP iX User Manual 18 318 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide e Jumbo and large datasets are automatically included when using DBSTORE Option DEFER Specifies size of internal filebuffer used in performing a deferred backup to tape The filebuffer is a temporary file that contains data to be written to tape All data is stored via the filebuffer and once a mounted tape is full waits in the filebuffer until another tape is mounted on the drive If storing to a slow tape drive specifying the FILEBUFF or DEFER option can improve performance for a non deferred backup by permitting additional parallel processing However for fast tape drives DEFER FILEBUFF may decrease performance due to increased CPU utilization The DEFER option added in version 6 50 is basically a synonym for FILEBUFF but has a default value of 1 Note The DEFER FILEBUFF option uses more disk space Syntax numsectors Number of sectors as an integer value up t
452. letion This JCW should therefore not be used without an understanding of the performance implications BACKUPIRNOCONFIRM BACKUPIRNOCONFIRM is an input JCW which can be used to disable the confirmation dialog displayed after files are selected to be restored using the Restore Wizard Disables the dialog that allows the user to choose listing or confirming the file selection for a restore using the Restore Wizard To disable the confirmation dialog set the JCW to 1 BACKUP iX User Manual 22 385 Chapter 22 JCWs BACKUP iX Reference Guide SETVAR BACKUPIRNOCONFIRM 1 BACKUPMAXERRORS BACKUPMAXERRORS is an output JCW that returns the total number of tape errors that occurred during store on the tape that had the most errors The JCW is displayed by SHOWJCW BACKUPMAXERRORS BACKUPMAXRETRIES BACKUPMAXRETRIES is an output JCW that returns the total number of retries that occurred during store on the tape that had the most retries The JCW is displayed by SHOWJCW BACKUPMAXRETRIES BACKUPNOSSM BACKUPNOSSM is an input JCW for the STORE and RESTORE command which must be set if using a backup device that is configured as an HP DDS drive but does not support Save Set Marks Save Set Marks SSMs are supported by all HP and compatible DDS drives and by some third party DDS and 8mm drives Failure to set the BACKUPSSM JCW for HP DDS configured backup devices that do not support SSMs can result in poor restore performance or ev
453. lue of 0 SIZE Identifies the size of the media used for stores of this cycle For example a cycle used for regular transfer of data to another site may require only a 600 tape reel which could be designated as SMALL while regular backups would be stored to LARGE 2400 reels Because TML can back up a cycle to a variety of media e g reel tapes and DATs an arbitrary size classification is used to describe media size rather than an absolute measurement like tape length in feet The size classification permits media of various lengths to be maintained and TML to select appropriate length media for storing the cycle For example a cycle that is alternately stored to a 1200 tape reel and a 600 cartridge tape could be configured with a size of MEDIUM and both types of media configured with the same size classification Size classification is specified as a freeform alphanumeric value of up to 8 characters with no embedded spaces Descriptive size classifications such as SMALL MEDIUM and LARGE should be used Assign the size classification parameter a blank value to allow any size media to be selected for any backup of this cycle Creating a cycle To create a new cycle use an editor to build a cycle file in the group account designed to contain cycle files By default the group account is CYCLE ORBIT but this may be overridden as a configuration option in the TMLCOMF file Please refer to the TML Confi
454. lume sets are specified the command is rejected This restriction may be changed in a future release e The wildcard can be used to reference all mounted volume sets e Ifa volume set is preceded by a minus sign is assumed and that volume set is excluded e SYS may be specified in place of MPEXL SYSTEM VOLUME SET e There is no restriction for using VOL VOLCLASS or VOLSET along with ONVS as ONVS is used to select files from the backup and the other options are used to specify the placement of the files being restored Option OWNER Changes files owner to a specified user If specifying the OWNER option the current user must have SM capability be the GID manager a user whose logon account matches the group ID GID of the file and who has AM capability or be the current owner Syntax gt RESTORE OWNER username accountnamel username The user and account name of up to 8 characters each Examples To change the owner of all restored files to MANAGER SYS gt RESTORE T PUB SYS OWNER MANAGER SYS The OWNER keyword may be used in combination with the CREATE option to create the specified user if it does not exist as shown BACKUP iX User Manual 18 297 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt RESTORE T OWNER MGR CREATE OWNER Option PREVIEW Displays tape volume s and disk space required for restore without restoring files and is intended
455. ly by store date and time For each occurrence of the file the modification date cycle and generation store date and time and volid of the tape on which the file is contained are displayed In the following example SHOW FILE is being used to display ALL versions of the file SALENDX DATA SALES By default all versions of the specified fileset are displayed so ALL could have been omitted from this command statement BACKUP iX User Manual 17 207 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt SHOW FILE SALENDX DATA SALES ALL Filename Group Account Stored Cycle Volid Last modified SALENDX DATA SALES 09 01 99 FULL 000127 09 01 99 17 08 09 07 99 FULL 000134 09 07 99 17 10 09 14 99 FULL 000142 09 14 99 09 21 99 FULL 000150 09 21 99 09 24 99 PART 000211 09 24 99 09 25 99 PART 000216 09 25 99 09 26 99 SALESDB 001011 09 26 99 09 26 99 PART 000206 09 26 99 09 27 99 SALESDB 001012 09 27 99 09 27 99 PART 000231 09 27 99 In this example 10 versions of the specified file have been found on all active backups with 4 copies on FULL backups 4 copies on PART backups and 2 copies on SALESDB backups Varying modification dates and times suggest that all versions of this file are different Latest copy of a fileset The latest or last file is considered to be the one which has the most recent modification date and time If multiple versions of the file with the same modification date an
456. mand has been used previously to set a default slot then the default slot s location will be where the volume gets moved to If a default slot has not been set then the first empty slot will be used BACKUP iX User Manual 20 368 Chapter 20 OLM Command Line Interface Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax IMPORT LibraryID SlotLocation PortID VolumeID Examples olm gt Import LIBRARY hacker dltchg PORT 0 Slot 5 This would import the volume in port 0 to slot 5 olm gt IMPORT LIBRARY hacker dltchg PORT 0 SLOT 5 tape0l The above would load the volume from port 0 to slot 5 in dltchg on hacker and assign a volid of tape01 This is legal only if there is no barcode reader olm olm gt Default Library Pogo Stick olm gt Import 000010 The above example would import volume 000010 to the first empty slot in the library Usually this would only happen if there was a volume with id 000010 in a port and there was a barcode reader on the library that could read the volume s id olm olm gt Default Library Pogo Stick Slot 1 olm gt Import 000010 Would import volume 000010 into slot 1 because slot 1 has been set as the default olm olm gt Default Library Pogo Stick Slot 1 olm gt Import 000010 Slot 3 Would import volume 000010 into slot 3 Since slot 3 was specified in the import command it overrides the default of slot 1 LIST The L
457. mands BACKUP iX User Manual 13 142 Chapter 13 Backup Devices BACKUP iX Operations Guide Automatic REPLY to console tape mount requests MPE iX permits tape drives to be configured as autoreply meaning that a REPLY command need not be issued for them because they will automatically REPLY to console tape mount requests The system configuration must be changed to designate a device as autoreply BACKUP on the other hand by use of the AUTOREPLY option is capable of automatically issuing a REPLY for tape drives that are not configured as autoreply Such a REPLY is effective only for a single BACKUP operation The AUTOREPLY option may be specified for BACKUP commands which read from or write to tape The AUTOREPLY option is especially useful when performing a deferred backup since the backup may be started when no operator is present to REPLY to the console request The AUTOREPLY option specifies the Idev number s for which the REPLY should be issued If reading from or writing to more than one backup device it is only necessary to specify the particular devices for which the REPLY should be issued All devices need not be specified since some devices may already be configured as autoreply or the operator may want to REPLY to them manually For example to store to Idev 7 8 and 9 and have BACKUP automatically REPLY to the console requests for each of these devices gt STORE T DRIVES 3 AUTOREPLY
458. may not Procedure for a network backup The following is the procedure for performing a network backup 1 Perform a disk backup as described above by entering a STORE at the prompt similar to the following example gt STORE BACK BACKUP SYS SHOW Use NSCOPY DSCOPY or a similar method to transfer the disk backup files to the other system using the utilitys FCODE option to specify the filecode of each disk backup file 993 for the directory 995 for other files For example DSCOPY BACK0000 BACKUP SYS SYS1 BACK0000 BACKUP SYS SYS2 FCODE 993 DSCOPY BACK0001 BACKUP SYS SYS1 BACK0001 BACKUP SYS SYS2 FCODE 995 Alternately use NS to perform a backup over a network by opening the other computer s tape drive through a file equation that specifies the nodename PRODUCTION CALIFORNIA USA for the nodename Idev 7 for the tape drive The command line entries look like this FILE PCUT DEV PRODUCTION CALIFORNIA USA 7 RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt STORE LOGS PROD PCUT SHOW Operational notes for a network backup When performing a network backup by opening the other computer s tape drive through a file equation the BACKUPPL program and BACKUPMC message catalog are not written to the beginning of the store volumeset 5 56 Chapter 5 Backup Methods BACKUP iX Operations Guide e Fast Search functionality is not available when restoring from backups performed over a network
459. mber of compressed datablocks on the first tape volume and the number of sectors and megabytes they occupy on all tapes compression percentage Amount of compression achieved required size of filebuffer Amount of disk space required for the filebuffer used when performing a deferred backup shown in sectors and megabytes total amount of disk space stored Amount of uncompressed disk space occupied by files that were stored shown in sectors and megabytes total number of tape errors Accumulated number of errors on all tapes total number of tape retries Accumulated number of retries on all tapes hours minutes seconds Duration of store in wall time from the beginning of the store until tn BACKUP s gt prompt is redisplayed Store Tape Status As each tape volume is completed for store a status report is displayed BACKUP iX User Manual 24 403 Chapter 24 Reports BACKUP iX Reference Guide kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Tape statistics for volume Volumeset Volume compression percentage Backup Name kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk total number of tape errors backup ldev number x total number of tape retries total number of data blocks HHHHHHH sectors Mbytes time beginning hh mm ss ending hh mm ss elapsed hh mm ss amount of disk space stored sectors
460. me MDATE Last modification date and optionally time SDATE Last state change date and optionally time relop One of the following relational operators Equal to lt Less than gt Greater than lt Less than or equal to gt Greater than or equal to lt gt Not equal to Parameters continued datetimespec Date and optionally time in the following format datespec time datespec Date or days in one of the following formats mm dd lyyJyy days Days relative to today time Time of day in the form hh mm using 24 hour time indirectfile Unnumbered disk file containing file selection specification for files to be restored May be prefixed by either or AM Unlike MPE iX RESTORE only filesetspecs may be specified in the indirect file other command options may not be included restoreoption One or more of the RESTORE command options documented with their parameters in detail in the pages that follow Examples To restore all the files that originated in the current group from device class DAT D which do not already exist on the system KEEP BACKUP iX User Manual 18 271 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide FILE D DEV DAT RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt RESTORE D KEEP SHOW To restore all files on the system with the exception of those files having a later modification date KEEPNEW than the files of the same name from a store to tape T
461. meters hostname The optional name of the host machine running the OLM provider is indicated This is optional if the command is performed on the OLM host Note that the hostname must be terminated with a colon This name must be resolvable through a DNS lookup and the OLM BACKUP iX User Manual 18 255 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide daemon must be running on the named host libraryname The name given to the library Because multiple libraries can be on the same host a library name must be entered in this field Note that the library name is case sensitive ANSI This literal will indicate ANSI labels are to be used in the operation See also the BackupOLMANSI MPE CI variable NOANSI This literal will indicate ANSI labels are NOT to be used in the operation NOANSI is the default when the MPE Cl variable BackupOLMANSI is not bound or is set to False See also the BackupOLMANSI MPE CI variable Examples To list the file directory contents of a backup to tape in the library named mylib attached to the OLM host system POGO gt LISTDIR t AUTOREPLY 14 OLM pogo mylib amp gt LABEL FULL VOLID 100002 See Chapter 13 ORBiT Library Manager in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide for more examples of performing restores from tape media located on a robotic tape library Error messages The following error messages may be returned when using the OLM option OLM requires that you specify
462. mm dd yy BEE XXXXXX XXXXXXKX XXXXXX files selected Restore List Confirm or Abort R L C A R List If the reply L is entered the selected files are listed with their attributes Options such as proceeding with the restore or verifying each file may then be indicated BACKUP iX User Manual 116 Chapter 10 Restore Methods BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt RESTORE T DATA AP CYCLE PART GEN 0 The following generations and tape volumes are required for this restore Cycle Gen Created Seq Volid Media Length Dir XXXXXXXX mm dd yy XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX HHH XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX H XXXXXXXX mm dd yy KXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX 3 files selected Restore List Verify or Abort R L C A L The Restore Wizard has selected the following files for restore Pathname Stored Cycle Gen Volid Last modified XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm XXXXXXXX XXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm XXXXXXXX XXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm XXXXXXXX XXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm 3 files selected Restore List Confirm or Abort R L C A R Confirm If the reply C for Confirm is entered each file is listed in succession and each file may be accepted or rejected for restore by specifying Y or N gt RESTORE T DATA AP CYCLE PART GEN 0 The following generations and tape volumes are required for this rest
463. mmand ese ees ee ee se eke ee 19 349 AES encryption see 4 47 18 284 18 323 AM capability 3 36 3 37 4 46 18 277 ANSI format labels configuring in TML rerien se ee ee ee 17 213 ANSI labeled tapes AUTOREPLY option ees ee se ees ee ge ee 13 145 LABEL OPHON ee ee ee ee ee Re ee 12 137 multiple backup devices 0 eee 13 145 SEQUENCE OPDHON esse ee ee ee ee se se se ee ee 13 145 SUPPO a ER EE iA ea aa ie 12 136 Appended backup BACKUP ODHON ees ee ee arenaen 18 316 procedure ss Se ge SG EE Ge ee ed ges 5 55 terminologVY us ie aes deci Ee EL BE KA As 5 54 Archival DaCkup ccccccceeeeeeeeeees 4 43 4 48 427 ASO RE RE ER ER RES ee ae 427 ASCII files Ee Ee Dae Ee eg eed od 6 61 11 123 selecting for restore ese 18 300 18 338 Autochangers ee ee ee ee ee 13 142 Autoreply devices 13 143 Backup devices SNULLE see Es Re ee Ee eb GE EE 6 69 plock SEEK EDE EE te eed 16 176 disk backup ee ES Ee eg de DE 6 69 fast 16 177 for TEME EE EE DE ell 6 68 releasing when finished ee ee ee 13 149 setting file equation 6 75 SPOCIYING si ER Ee ee ete 6 67 tADE EE EE Pe ee de Ek aan Ace 6 67 third Dartys see ie EE cee canis Re YE de EE Ee 13 141 unspecified ss Gi tee GE ESE aetna 6 69 using multiple eect ees 13 143 16 177 BACKUP tape label se ese ee ee ee AR Re Re ee ee 427 BACKUPBUFSIZE JOW sesse 16 177 22 384 BACKUP iX BACKUPDBQUIESCE JOW 22 385 BACKUPDF file
464. monitor During a Delta backup cycle the Delta monitor tracks and saves only the disk page changes to the files and accounting structure changes to the groups accounts and directories selected and backed up by the baseline store The Delta monitor becomes active when the baseline store is run and continues to be active between backups throughout the cycle BACKUP iX User Manual 428 Glossary BACKUP iX Delta store directory A delta store directory is maintained by each Delta backup cycle and is used by the Delta backup module for relating baseline stores and delta stores The Delta store directory and its functionality are not directly used or referenced by the operator Delta restore directory A Delta restore directory is used by the Delta backup module to facilitate restoring from a Delta backup cycle s baseline and delta stores The Delta restore directory and its functionality are not directly used or referenced by the operator DES encryption The Data Encryption Standard algorithm developed by the United States government DEVLINK A file type which includes device link files Differential backup A type of partial backup which includes only the changes to files that have been modified since a previous complete backup For example Wednesday s partial backup would include pages from within files that have been modified since the last previous complete backup The entire file is not necessarily backed up Disk backup
465. mple if two Delta backup cycles are active no more than three non Delta Online backups can be run concurrently Errors and exceptional conditions The following is a list of conditions that could occur in Delta backup operations that are known to cause problems and generate error messages The primary caution a delta store must never be more inclusive than its baseline store It is strongly recommended that the baseline and delta filesets of the same Delta backup cycle be identical BACKUP iX User Manual 8 98 Chapter 8 DELTA Backup Module BACKUP iX Operations Guide A delta store is attempted without a corresponding baseline store An error message is displayed and the process terminates This condition could be due to the misspelling of the Delta cycle name the fact that the baseline store never ran or that the Delta store directory has been purged A restore from a delta store is attempted without a previous restore from its related baseline store An error message is displayed and the process terminates A delta store is attempted following a system abort An error message is displayed and the store terminates A baseline store must be run first following a system abort A failed restore from a delta store following a successful restore from a baseline store will generate an error and leave the baseline data intact on disk If a delta store is more inclusive than its baseline store that is if a delta store includes f
466. mpletion of each restore reports both the number of files restored and the number of files not restored Reports of these values are available through two output JCWs that can be tested by entering SHOWJCW FILESRESTORED or by entering BACKUP iX User Manual 11 128 Chapter 11 Restoring Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide SHOWJCW FILESNOTRESTORED These JCWs and their output are FILESRESTORED Number of files successfully restored FILESNOTRESTORED Number of files not restored Note lf the value of either JCW FILESNOTRESTORED or FILESRESTORED exceeds 32767 an MPE iX Cl variable is set rather than the JCW These variables are named FILESNOTRESTORED or FILESRESTORED corresponding to the JCWs Note Additional output JCWs are available for testing other store results Refer to Chapter 22 JCWs in the BACKUP X Reference Guide for information Redirecting program output FILE BPOUT It is possible to redirect all BACKUP output to a disk file by setting a file equation that redefines the BPOUT formal designator The file equation must specify SHR and ACC APPEND For example BUILD LIST DEV DISC REC 128 V FILE BPOUT LIST SHR ACC APPEND BACKUP will check for attempts to redirect its output using an illegal file equation and if this is detected will display an appropriate error message When the BPOUT file equation has been defined the following messages will be displayed before r
467. n Excessive tape errors can result from an incorrect tape drive cable configuration in linking drives make sure to use a Chain configuration and not a star configuration Tape drives that are out of adjustment may also return excessive errors Tape errors may also result from using HP IB cables that are too long Powerfail BACKUP is usually able to recover successfully from a device powerfail although it is possible that one or more datablocks that were written before the powerfail occurred cannot be read Should this occur a message is displayed on the console and files that are affected are highlighted in the SHOW listing System aborts Any system abort involving BACKUP should be followed by a memory dump before restarting and ORBiT Technical Support should be contacted Internal errors Internal errors may be caused by hardware problems operating system problems interference with other system software and by programming errors In the event of an internal error call ORBiT Technical Support TML tape identification labeling errors If an error message is returned when requesting printing of tape identification labels no labels are printed Inconsistent TML generation Should TML not complete successfully during the creation of a generation it marks the generation as inconsistent An inconsistent generation can either be committed or scratched BACKUP iX User Manual 26 423 Chapter 26 Error handling BAC
468. n 22 389 BAGKUPTME rensie aceite beseer 22 389 BACKUPTMLRESTORE ese sees see 22 389 BACKUPVOLUMES ee ee sees se ee ee ee se see 22 389 FIEEBUEF 2 nee Ee Seen ds seg tna Reese 22 390 FILESNOTRESTORED ese ee ee ees se see 22 390 FILESNOTSTORED ee ees see aa 22 390 FILESRESTORED ore e ee ese ee ee es ee 22 390 FILESSTORED oe irasan See ER Re aE EARE 22 391 JOW system JOW 22 391 NBDISABLE aaia eeoa Bun aaea ee Reese 22 391 RESTOREJOW RE se E Ee ke 22 392 RESTOREPROCESSES 22 392 SIOREJGVV Ee ER Eer ae eet eens 22 393 STOREJCWDISCRETE ees se se esse 22 394 TMLLANGID ee ee ee ee ee RA ee 22 394 KEEP RE ee ea IE ee tee 432 KEEP option ignored in delta restore 8 97 KEEPBAD EE N Ee ee etic Gee ese 18 288 KEEPNEW ee sani ees ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 18 288 KEEPNEW installing from full and incremental backUDS ii se ee Re ee 9 108 KEEPNEW restoring files iese see esse ese ee 11 119 KEEPNEW installing from full and partial backups 9 108 KEEPNONPVZ ee ese ee ee ee ee i 18 289 KEEPOLD S EA EG Ne Ee ean 18 289 KEEPOLD restoring files 11 119 11 130 KSAM Ee ge oe dela ie eee ated eae 432 KSAM files ee ee ee Re ee ee 6 61 11 123 432 selecting for Store essees 18 309 KSAM64 files 000 0 2 ee ee ee ee ee Ee RA Ee ee ee ee 433 KSAMMXLfIleS iss SE EE RE wwe eines 432 LABEL CYCLE command 2 0 eeeees 19 355
469. n as OPERATOR SYS or MANAGER SYS HELLO MANAGER SYS 2 Issue a file equation for the tape drive FILE T DEV TAPE 3 Mount the first tape of the store volumeset and place it online Then restore BACKUPPL and BACKUPMC into PUB SYS using NM RESTORE RESTORE T LOCAL OLDDATE SHOW 4 Run the BACKUPPL program RUN BACKUPPL 5 Proceed to restore files If the DIRECTORY option was used on the store you can also specify it on restore to recover nonexistent users groups and accounts BACKUP iX User Manual 9 109 Chapter 9 Restore Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt RESTORE T SHOW DIRECTORY If the DIRECTORY option was not used on store specify the CREATE option to create nonexistent users groups and accounts gt RESTORE T SHOW CREATE When the restore is completed purge the BACKUPPL program and BACKUPMC message catalog from PUB SYS since they should have been successfully restored into PUB ORBIT BACKUP iX User Manual 9 110 Chapter 0 Restore Methods In this chapter Find information describing methods and instructions for restoring from various backups e Restoring from a tape backup e Restoring from a disk backup e Restoring from an online backup e Restoring from an appended backup e Restoring over a network e Restoring with the TML Restore Wizard Restoring from a tape backup Backups can
470. n be accomplished in a variety of ways including e Using incremental instead of partial backups e Performing separate infrequent backups of static files and excluding these files from regular backups BACKUP iX User Manual 16 173 Chapter 16 Maximizing Performance BACKUP iX Operations Guide e Keeping some files on disk in compressed format using a third party or other data compression program Using data compression By using compression when performing backups BACKUP is able to reduce the amount of data transferred to tape or disk and thereby speed up overall performance For backups to tape the amount of tape used is also reduced Data compression is performed using method 2 unless it is explicitly disabled and may be tuned using the COMPRESS option of the STORE command Setting data compression Data compression is accomplished in BACKUP using one of three methods selected by number Method Description 0 Disables data compression 1 A run length compression which typically yields 2 1 compression 50 reduction in data by replacing strings of any repetitive characters with an identifier that describes the character and number of occurrences 2 A run length compression which typically yields 2 5 1 compression using the same technique as the 2 1 algorithm but with a shorter code word Default if COMPRESS is either not specified or is specified with no parameter 3 A table driven algorithm which can yield 4 1 com
471. n continue with only read access allowed to files particularly for job streams which may read files and create reports Files may be backed up while open for read access Files which are open for writing are not stored and an error message is written to the store listing next to each file that is not stored By referencing the store listing and identifying the files which were not stored it is then possible to store just those files when exclusive access is available If this is a daily occurrence an indirect file containing the names of the files could be created and referenced and the backup split into two operations one to backup files open for read access and one to backup files open for write access If users require write access to files during a store BACKUP s online backup module may be used to perform system backup during normal read write access Exclusive access is required to all files that are restored since existing files must first be purged before the file can be restored from the backup 3 38 Chapter 4 Backup Strategies BACKUP contains extensive functionality for performing backups that meet a variety of requirements In this chapter Find information on these topics e Backup cycles e Archival backup e Symbolic links backup e IMAGE and ALLBASE database backup e FIFOs and streams e Spool file backup e Password protected and encrypted backup e INSTALLable backups e Backups restorable onto a
472. n the Online Status report Zero downtime backup A traditional Online backup requires that users release write access to their open files once all files have been written to the backup At that time a console message requesting synchronization is displayed Users must then close their open files for just a few minutes typically by exiting applications A Zero downtime ZDT backup however can be completed without requiring users to close files or exit applications yet ensures logical file integrity Using the ZERODOWN option of the STORE command all suspendable processes are automatically suspended when the synchronization point is reached Users are interrupted only briefly during synchronization and automatically released once synchronization is complete A ZDT backup will store Native Mode files that are open for write Ensuring data integrity during a ZDT backup In automatically suspending users the ZERODOWN option causes certain steps to be taken to ensure logical file integrity To understand how this is done and the ramifications some background information about data integrity specifically regarding physical and logical transactions is required The issue of file integrity will be illustrated for IMAGE databases although the same concepts may apply to other types of files Physical and logical transactions A physical transaction is defined by IMAGE and is generated by a call to an IMAGE intrinsic such as DBPUT The p
473. nally spawns another program a son process both must be suspendable in order for the user to be suspended If one or the other is not suspendable neither is suspended Zero downtime backup example BACKUP s Zero downtime backup is invoked when the ZERODOWN option of the STORE command is specified In a traditional Online backup the store operation will wait for operator reply and the operator may control when the reply is entered But with a Zero downtime backup the need for an operator to reply is eliminated To perform a Zero downtime backup for Native Mode files include the ZERODOWN option with the STORE command Other options may also be entered with ZERODOWN in the STORE command For example the following entry invokes a Zero downtime backup and includes the SHOW option to display a listing of all files stored and their attributes gt STORE T ZERODOWN SHOW Refer to Chapter 18 Backup iX Commands in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for more information on options of the STORE command ZDT backup console displays After a Zero downtime store command is entered BACKUP begins storing files starts its proprietary logging process and displays a series of messages on the console Once the synchronization point is reached BACKUP proceeds to suspend all sessions and jobs Suspending users for ZERODOWN zero downtime option Unable to suspend the following processes JOBNUM LD
474. nch background jobs On the OLM host system and on any system which hosts an OLM tape drive if different stream the JPORTMAP PUB ORBIT and JOLMRPCD PUB ORBIT jobs to support OLM The first is the RPC port mapper and the second is the OLM daemon or OLM provider Also stream JPORTMAP PUB ORBIT on any system on which you want to use the OLM CI or BACKUP iX with olm JPORTMAP does not need any customization In JOLMRPCD the OLM database will be created and accessed in the job s login group unless the environment variable OLM_DIR directs otherwise This variable indicates the base directory for OLM databases Changing or adding the OLM_DIR variable means that any existing OLM database must be moved to the new directory as well Stream the jobs and then you ll be ready to use OLM with the OLM Cl program Prepare OLM to support a tape library e Run the OLM Cl program e Add the library to OLM e Set the current default OLM host system for the library e Name the library tape drives e Import tape volumes e Enter volume IDs into OLM Optional e Add tape volumes to a TML cycle pool Optional An element is specified in OLM Cl commands by giving the type of element and the relative element number For example slot 0 drive 3 and port 1 Currently only arm 0 is used so the arm is never specified in OLM Cl commands In OLM terminology the combination of element type and number is called a library location All elements of a particular type are
475. nd STDLIST Mount each tape as it is called for by BACKUP making sure that it is write enabled e g for a reel to reel tape make sure that a write ring is attached Upon completion of the store label each tape with descriptive information If using TML and tape identification labels have been printed affix the labels to the tapes If using TML for complete security mount a reserved tape for the TMLDB database and perform a separate store of it gt STORE TMLDB DATA ORBIT T SHOW Replace the tapes on the tape rack Retrieve any BACKUP and TML reports that were printed for this backup such as the SHOW listing and perhaps a listing of the tape volumes used Check them for proper completion of the store and file them in a safe place Step by step disk backup guide The following is a step by step guide for performing a store to disk backup 1 Run BACKUP and issue a STORE command specifying the disk backup fileset and store fileset list in the command line RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt STORE SOURCE MFG POLD SOURCE SHOW DATES or referencing an indirect file gt STORE OLDFILES SOURCE POLD SOURCE SHOW DATES Alternately the FULLBACKUP or PARTBACKUP command may be used BACKUP iX User Manual 6 76 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt FULLBACKUP FULL SHOW 2 Specify any STORE options required e g SHOW PROGRESS AUTOREPLY
476. nd determines the number of processes used per tape drive for the store As an output JCW reports the number of processes used by BACKUP during a store Instructs BACKUP to automatically synchronize without requiring an operator REPLY when a process cannot be suspended Instructs BACKUP to put up a console REPLY request at the synchronization point Used with online ZERODOWN backups Returns total number of tape errors occurring during a store Returns the total number of tape retries that occurred during a store Returns the total number of tape volumes contained in the store volumeset at completion of a store dump or copy Returns the size of the disk filebuffer in Ksectors Returns the number of files selected for restore but due to error were not restored Set by restore this output JCW returns the number of files restored Returns the number of files selected but not stored due to error or to being open for write access BACKUP iX User Manual 22 382 Chapter 22 JCWs BACKUP iX Reference Guide FILESSTORED output Returns the number of files stored JCW system JCW output Set by BACKUP based on the final value of the STOREJCW NBDISABLE Input and As an input JCW governs whether NetBase is enabled or output disabled As an output JCW reports the state of NetBase as enabled or disabled RESTOREJCW output Reports the success or failure of a restore RESTOREPROCESSES Input and As an input JCW checks its value wh
477. nd rollforward recovery e First if the DBSTORE option was used on the store DBRECOV will abort because the time stamp in the root file set by the DBSTORE option does not match that in the transaction log file on the DBOPEN record e Second if this abort is overridden using DBRECOV s gt CONTROL NOSTAMPS entries in the database will likely be duplicated This is because some transactions in the log file will probably already exist in the database and therefore will be reapplied A possible method of recovery that would allow a Zero downtime backup of a database enabled for rollforward recovery would be to start a new log cycle once a week right after the full backup A rollforward recovery would require a restore of the database that was stored right before the log cycle was started The log file would then be processed against it Note This method of recovery could take more time than recovering from a daily backup and log file since potentially several days worth of transactions would have to be posted to the database MUSTRECOVER If the MUSTRECOVER option set via DBUTIL has been set IMAGE software will prevent database access following a database failure until the database has been recovered restored to a logically consistent state When BACKUP is used to restore recover a database an internal flag in the root file will be reset just as with a DBCLOSE BACKUP s ZDT backup emulates a DBCLOSE of the database wh
478. nd the expiration and scratch dates BACKUP iX User Manual 17 193 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide All pools may be displayed by specifying a cycle of To display tapes in the global pool specify a blank cycle SHOW POOL can also restrict output to information on tapes that are of a specified disposition using a disposition qualifier SHOW POOL disposition qualifiers A disposition qualifier may be specified with the SHOW POOL command to show information on tapes that are of a specified disposition All tapes in the pool are assigned one or more disposition qualifiers which determine how they are treated The possible SHOW POOL disposition qualifiers are ALL Tapes of all dispositions the default AVAILABLE Tapes that can receive a store new tapes or scratch tapes EXPIRED Tapes that have expired SCRATCHED Tapes that have been scratched PROTECTED Tapes that belong to an unscratched generation and will not be overwritten Note A tape can have more than one disposition for example a tape that has been scratched is SCRATCHED AVAILABLE and normally EXPIRED The ALL qualifier The ALL qualifier of SHOW POOL causes all tapes in the specified pool to be listed regardless of disposition The following command lists all tapes in the PART cycle pool By default all tapes are listed so the ALL qualifier could have been omitted gt SHOW POOL PART ALL Media Length Seq Volid Used Expire
479. nd when a particular event has occurred Multiple ON options may be specified in the same store command however only one ON FILE condition may be specified The specified commands are MPE commands performed with DO A special variation of the ON command is ON ERROR QUIT which must be specified exactly ON ERROR QUIT Syntax ON event DO mpecommand ON FILE filename groupname accountname DO mpecommand 7ON ERROR QUIT event One of the following conditions on which to DO a specific MPE command BACKUP iX User Manual 18 330 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide SUSPEND RELEASED SYNCPOINT SYNCWAIT DO mpecommand VOLUME ERROR FILE filename groupname accountname ERROR mpecommand Any MPE command filename A file name of up to 8 characters the file name may include wildcards in which case the condition is satisfied when the first qualifying file is stored groupname A group name of up to 8 characters which may include wildcards If not specified defaults to current group accountname An account name of up to 8 characters which may include wildcards If not specified defaults to current account ON ERROR QUIT A variation of the ON commands The store is terminated on any error Event summary RELEASE SUSPEND D This event is the point in time near the completion of a backup when all disk files are fully accessible having been released for users to resume
480. nditions e Miscellaneous Delta notes Overview The term Delta backup cycle will be used to express the concept of the entire backup process using the BACKUP Delta module Both a baseline store and one or more delta stores associated with the baseline are included in a Delta Backup cycle Each time a baseline store is performed a new Delta backup cycle is begun The baseline store is a standard backup that stores the entire contents of the selected files gives the Delta backup cycle a unique name and activates the Delta monitor process When a baseline store is complete the Delta monitor continues to record all activity related to files stored in the baseline store and will only record disk pages within files where a change has occurred The second or later backups in a Delta backup cycle up to the next baseline use the DELTA option and are called delta stores Delta stores are differential rather than incremental That is delta stores will only store changes to the files stored in their baseline or in prior associated delta stores Subsequent associated delta stores will continue to backup file changes in reference to the baseline store If only a few records were changed between the first and second or later backups in the cycle delta stores could be very small even though the files may be very large Every baseline store must be followed by one or more delta stores to form a complete Delta backup cycle The same cycle name must b
481. ndling tasks of LOADTAPE and EJECTDAT Syntax RUN LOADTAPE PUB ORBIT PARM ldev RUN LOADTAPE PUB ORBIT INFO Idev Where Idevis the Idev number of the specified backup device BACKUP iX User Manual 21 376 Chapter 21 Programs Command Files and Scripts BACKUP iX Reference Guide Example To place Idev 7 online RUN LOADTAPE PUB ORBIT PARM 7 RUN LOADTAPE PUB ORBIT INFO 7 Notes The user running LOADTAPE must have ND Non shareable Device capability ORBINSTP The ORBINSTP PUB SYS program installs or re installs BACKUP Refer to the nstallation procedures provided in the BACKUP iX Installation Guide for detailed information on ORBINSTP SETDATE The SETDATE program permits the prior backup date normally saved by the SETDATE option of the STORE command to be set to a desired date Syntax SETDATE Example Use SETDATE to set the last backup date to a specific date SETDATE PROGRAM TO DISPLAY SET ORBIT PRIOR BACKUP DATE Version 2 00 BACKUP iX currently set prior backup date amp time gt FRI JAN 7 2001 12 00 AM You may specify CD or CT for current date or time Enter prior backup date as mm dd cclyy hh mm PM gt At the SETDATE prompt type CD or CT to specify that you will enter just the date or time press lt enter gt and type in the specific date or time at the new prompt or type in the combined date and time in the format shown BACKUP iX
482. nds in the BACKUP X Reference Guide Basic OLM setup procedures Follow these steps and procedures to prepare BACKUP iX with OLM to provide library services e Install the OLM module e Create an OLM device file for the library e Launch background jobs e Prepare OLM for library support e Adda new library to OLM e Set the current default OLM host system for the library BACKUP iX User Manual 14 152 Chapter 14 ORBiT Library Manager OLM Operations Guide e Name the library tape drives e Import tapes into the library Optional e Enter volume IDs into OLM Optional e Add tape volumes to a TML cycle pool Optional Install the OLM module See the Installation Procedures section at the front of the BACKUP iX User Manual for installation details Restore the installation tape This will place the OLM module files into PUB ORBIT Specifically the following four files will be restored the RPC port mapper PORTMAP which facilitates communication between OLM components the OLMRPCD daemon which communicates SCSI commands directly to libraries LIBIFACE which provides middle management of communication between BACKUP iX OLMRPCD and the HP 3000 operator console LIBMC which is the message catalog for LIBIFACE the OLM Cl which allows direct user interaction with OLMRPCD OLMDEV which is used to create an OLM device file for the library VALIDATE which is the customer side of olm copy protection Create an OLM device fi
483. ne module or by using other options to automate the synchronization reply See more on Zero downtime backups below Also other options may be entered with ONLINE in the STORE command For example the following entry invokes a traditional Online backup and includes the SHOW option to display a listing of all files stored and their attributes gt STORE T ONLINE SHOW Refer to Chapter 18 Backup iX Commands in the BACKUP IX Reference Guide for more information on options of the STORE command Online backup console displays After an Online store command is entered BACKUP begins storing files starts its proprietary logging process and displays a series of messages on the console Starting ONLINE logging Once BACKUP has finished storing all the files it prepares the logging data and begins to store it to the backup Finished storing selected files preparing logging data Storing logging data During the storing of logging data a percentage completed counter is displayed at the same interval as store progress messages When most of the logging data has been stored BACKUP displays a message on STDLIST indicating that all files must be closed for synchronization and that the system console has a prompt for operator reply All data has been stored all files must be closed now Operator REPLY for synchronization outstanding on console BACKUP also displays a message on the system co
484. need to clarify how Include files are interpreted when they are themselves excluded For example If indirect file IND1 contains the line SYS PUB SYS the following command is self explanatory gt STORE IND1 However the following command requires some explanation gt STORE IND1 In this case the indirect file IND1 is expanded into the list of files that represent SYS PUB SYS and the resulting list of files is used to exclude files from the fileset The net result of this is that the fileset PUB SYS will be stored along with all other files groups and accounts outside of the SYS account As is common with any exclusion fileset the result of expanding an excluded indirect file cannot result in files being included that were not already included For example gt STORE ORBIT IND1 will result in just ORBIT being stored In the next example the indirect file IND2 contains the following lines ISYS PUB When used as a traditional include file BACKUP iX User Manual 6 65 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt STORE PUB IND2 Although the fileset PUB is interpreted as a global exclusion fileset a is assumed at the start of each line in an indirect file the scope of this exclusion fileset is reduced to that of files included by the indirect file The result of applying this rule
485. nformation regarding the following Tape Manager and Librarian topics e An overview of TML e Cycles e Generations e Tapes and Pools e Backup Schedule Management e Tape Identification Labels e File Register e Configuration An overview of TML BACKUP s Tape Manager amp Librarian TML also called the Wizard module is an optional add on module with features that automate many manual operations associated with backups restores and tape handling while eliminating all of the paperwork TML is a valuable resource in creating and maintaining a successful tape library assuring that tapes are organized and rotated properly that unreliable tapes are identified for discarding and that tapes are scratched in a timely manner Backup schedule planning tape selection internal and external tape identification labeling tape usage and reliability tracking and scratching of expired backup tapes may be performed with TML Additionally all backup statistics are catalogued by TML while online lookup and offline reporting are provided for all backup information including records of all files contained on all tapes A summary of benefits e Prevents overwriting active non expired tapes e Safeguards against restoring the wrong version of a file e Identifies tape requirements for each backup e Assures tape reliability e Satisfies auditing requirements e Eliminates all paperwork associated with a backup e Automates ID label printing
486. ng all or part of the directory They are mounted in turn to search for and read directory data until the entire directory has been retrieved If the Wizard TML module is installed volume s will be automatically determined and passed to OLM However if TML is not used then the LABEL and VOLID parameters are required BACKUP iX User Manual 14 160 Chapter 14 ORBIT Library Manager OLM Operations Guide When the OLM parameter is used the presence of the VOLID parameter in a command will NOT indicate ANSI labeled tapes by default If ANSI labels are desired use the OLM parameter s ANSI parameter as in the syntax below or refer to information on the BackupOLMANSI MPE CI variable Performing a Store with OLM A two drive parallel backup The following command performs a non TML two drive parallel backup on the library host system The OLM hostname parameter is not supplied since the library host is the same as the local host gt STORE SYS t DRIVES 2 AUTOREPLY 14 15 OLM mylib amp gt LABEL myback VOLID RND101 RND102 The LABEL and VOLID parameters are used to label the backup tapes In this example ANSI labels are not created as they would be in a non OLM store since NOANSI is the default The label information is contained in the BACKUP iX internal label If the OLM ANSI parm is used an ANSI label would be created in the above store In its requests to OLMRPCD BACKUP iX uses a drive name in the form
487. ng volumes are reguired for the backup of cycle FULL Volid Media Size Length Pool 001013 CTAPE LARGE 150FT 001014 CTAPE LARGE 150FT 001015 CTAPE LARGE 150FT 001016 CTAPE LARGE 150FT 001017 CTAPE LARGE 150FT 001018 CTAPE LARGE 150FT 001019 CTAPE LARGE 150FT 001020 CTAPE LARGE 150FT 001021 CTAPE LARGE 150FT 001022 CTAPE LARGE 150FT 001023 CTAPE LARGE 150FT 001024 CTAPE LARGE 150FT Printing reports Appending OFFLINE to the PREVIEW CYCLE command causes output to be printed offline as well as being displayed on STDLIST Output is sent to device class LP under the formal file designator TMLLIST Tape Identification Labels BACKUP s Tape Manager amp Librarian TML is capable of printing tape identification labels external labels for each tape which can be attached to each tape for identification purposes Tape labels may be printed when tapes are added into TML Updated labels may be printed automatically when each store is completed or on demand at any time In this section external and internal labels are contrasted information is provided about tape identification label specifications dedicating a printer device for labels external tape label formats automatic label printing and manual label printing using the LABEL CYCLE and LABEL TAPE commands and the TMLPRINTLABELS configuration option External vs internal labels Two distinct types of labels are used by TML external and internal The external label
488. ng which files were last modified and or backed up using the MDATE or BDATE options of the RESTORE command e Specifying the earliest or latest version of the qualifying file or a version in between using the FIRST or LAST options of the RESTORE command if multiple versions of a file qualify for restore Restore Wizard command options The RESTORE command has several command options used alone or in combination that facilitate restores with Restore Wizard CYCLE Restricts the restore to certain cycles or all cycles GENERATION Restricts the restore to certain generations of certain cycles or all cycles MDATE Restricts files to those that fall before on or after a specified date and or time of modification BDATE Restricts files to those that fall before on or after a specified date and or time of backup FIRST Selects the earliest version of a file if multiple versions qualify LAST Selects the latest version of a file if multiple versions qualify BACKUP iX User Manual 114 Chapter 10 Restore Methods BACKUP iX Operations Guide Refer to the RESTORE command in Chapter 18 BACKUP iX Commands in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for syntax and explanations Note TML s SHOW FILE command supports the same selection options as above Refer to the File register section in Chapter 17 Tape Librarian amp Manager in this manual for examples Command usage notes The following are usage notes for pertinent RESTORE
489. nged Upon changing the attributes of any tape the new attributes are displayed For example this command transfers 4 tapes into the pool of the FULL backup cycle BACKUP iX User Manual 17 191 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide gt CHANGE TAPE 160 163 CYCLE FULL Volid Media Length Cycle 000160 TAPE 2400FT FULL 000161 TAPE 2400FT FULL 000162 TAPE 2400FT FULL 000163 TAPE 2400FT FULL New tapes adding and labeling All tapes should be added into TML and labeled both internally and externally as soon as they are received This will allow TML to keep track of all available tapes and properly manage them Adding new tapes New tapes are added into TML by using the ADD TAPE command and specifying the volid s and attributes Volids may be specified either singly individually delimited by commas or as a range Volids must be unique if an attempt is made to add a tape with a volid that already exists in any tape pool the entire command is rejected Here are some examples of commands that add various kinds of tapes into TML This command adds ten 2400 tapes with volids 000200 through 000209 gt ADD TAPE 200 209 MEDIA TAPE LENGTH 2400FT SIZE LARGE This command adds two 90M DATs with volids D420 and D430 gt ADD TAPE D420 D430 MEDIA DDS LENGTH 90M SIZE MEDIUM This command adds a DDS tape with volid 000330 into the pool for the cycle SALESDB gt ADD TAPE 3
490. not recommended but for the smallest of backups You need to ensure that you have enough disk space for the copy because Backup can not predetermine the amount needed and will potentially consume all available disk space on the system Option VOLID VOLID specifies ANSI format tape labels for the source and or target tape volumes unless used with the OLM option It may only be used in combination with the LABEL option which specifies the volumeset identification Syntax with Input Source tape BACKUP iX User Manual 18 233 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide This option can specify upto eight volids for the source drive In the event that the eight volid list becomes exhausted BACKUP will prompt for additional volids gt COPY T1 VOLID volidlist TO Syntax with Output target tape This option can write upto eight volids for the target drive In the event that the eight volid list becomes exhausted BACKUP will prompt for additional volids gt COPY TO T2 VOLID volidlist volidlist Specifies a comma delimited list of up to 8 volume IDs to be used for the first 8 tapes in the target tapeset Each volid may be a maximum of 6 alphanumeric characters for each volid and is case sensitive Example To copy the volumeset named ACCT comprised of volids ACT123 and ACT124 to the volumes CYA123 and CYA124 The volumes ACT123 and ACT124 are in the drives 7
491. not restored To restore these files use the GROUP option with the ACCOUNT option The target account is substituted for each source account If files have no source account e g files in POSIX directories they are not restored unless additional options for restoring POSIX files and directories are used Syntax gt RESTORE ACC OUN T accountname accountname Account name of up to 8 characters Example To restore files into their respective groups in the TEST account gt RESTORE T ACCOUNT TEST The ACCOUNT option may be used in combination with the CREATE option to create the specified account if it does not exist as shown gt RESTORE T ACCOUNT TEST CREATE ACCT Notes e Use the CREATE option to create nonexistent users groups accounts and or directories on restore See page 319 in this chapter for details on the CREATE option of RESTORE e Use the CREATE PATH option to restore POSIX directories that are in the path of the source account BACKUP iX User Manual 18 274 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide e Use the CREATE PATH option with the GROUP and ACCOUNT options to restore both MPE and POSIX files to nonexistent accounts and groups and to directories below group level e The ACCOUNT option may be used in combination with the GROUP option but neither ACCOUNT nor GROUP can be specified with the LOCAL or CWD options in the same RESTORE command e U
492. not upshifted The key files used to contain the 128 192 or 256 bit keys To LISTDIR a backup encrypted using the DES algorithm with a key of SECRET gt LISTDIR T ENCRYPT 2 SECRET To LISTDIR a backup encrypted using the AES algorithm with key files of KEY1 and KEY2 gt LISTDIR T ENCRYPT 3 KEY1 KEY2 To LISTDIR a backup encrypted using the fast algorithm with a key of PROTECT gt LISTDIR T ENCRYPT 1 PROTECT Both the encryption method and the encryption key will default if not specified For example to LISTDIR a backup encrypted using the fast algorithm and a blank key gt LISTDIR T ENCRYPT Option LABEL Validates volsetid specified against volsetid in BACKUP tape label prevents LISTDIR if they do not match By default the BACKUP tape label is checked Syntax BACKUP iX User Manual 18 254 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt LISTDIR LABEL volsetid volsetid Specifies the user defined tape volumeset ID of the tape volume set has a maximum of 6 alphanumeric characters and is case sensitive Example To list the directory of a backup volumeset with the store directory on volume FULLO7 gt LISTDIR T LABEL FULLO7 Notes If used on ANSI labeled tapes the VOLID option must also be specified Option OLM With the OLM option a user may specify the host name and the library name to list the conten
493. ns prior to 6 50 of the STORE command for example gt STORE T DEFER 2000000 If desired use the DISKDEV option of the STORE command to specify a device class or Idev number other than the default on which the filebuffer should be built The default is to build the filebuffer on any system disk The default device class is DISC created with SYSGEN by the system manager For example to build the filebuffer on device class SYSDISC enter gt STORE T DEFER 2000000 DISKDEV SYSDISC To build the filebuffer on a nonsystem volume log on to a group account that resides on the desired nonsystem volume When performing a deferred backup it is often desirable to have a particular operation invoked once all files have been written to the filebuffer This can be specified with the ON RELEASED option of the STORE command For example to stream the job NIGHTJOB when all files have been stored into the filebuffer gt STORE T DEFER 2000000 ON RELEASED DO STREAM NIGHTJOB Mount the first tape volume s for the backup Once the first tape volume or volumes have been written BACKUP will release files and wait for the next tape volume s to be mounted When convenient mount additional tapes to complete the backup Operational notes for deferred backups If the deferred backup will be started with no operator present the tape drive s should either be configured as autoreply device s
494. nsole requesting the operator to indicate whether or not the backup can be finished All data has been stored all files must be closed now All files closed for synchronization Y N The operator should first have users exit their applications or take other appropriate action to release write access to files and then should REPLY Y to the console request as in this example REPLY pin Y If a REPLY of N is given the prompt continues to loop until a REPLY of Y is specified Once the operator has replied to the console indicating that all files have been closed BACKUP scans the system directory to identify files that have been created purged and renamed during the backup BACKUP iX User Manual 7 81 Chapter 7 Online and Zero Downtime Backup BACKUP iX Operations Guide Performing secondary file scan BACKUP then stores the remaining logging data and completes the backup During this time BACKUP requires that files to be stored not be opened for write access and displays a console message Storing final logging data After storing the remaining logging data BACKUP displays a message on both STDLIST and the console indicating that logging has completed and all files have been released for normal access Logging completed all files have been released At this point the backup is complete and the Online Status report is generated See Chapter 24 Reports for details o
495. nstallation dialog language the tape drive to use and passwords for the ORBIT account and the MGR ORBIT user Respond to these prompts as requested Installation proceeds automatically and displays a message upon completion of the installation program and its job streams The Tape Manager amp Librarian is set up to accommodate by default a mid sized HPe3000 site e 500 tapes e 30 000 files of which 5 are POSIX files with pathnames longer than 28 characters e If these values are insufficient they may be changed Refer to Chapter 25 Maintenance in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for a discussion 1 19 BACKUP iX Operations Guide BACKUP iX Operations Guide Introduction In this chapter BACKUP iX is introduced with the following topics e The need for backups e Overview e Summary of benefits e General features e Operational features e Reporting features The need for backups System backups mean regularly copying the information stored in the system to backup media For the vast majority of backups the data stored to tape is never restored it is simply overwritten with a new backup at a later time Backups generally exist as a measure of protection in case something goes wrong a catastrophic system crash or major failure a disaster in the computer room or a careless user purging or overwriting a particularly important file Backups are also used to archive data or as a convenient and inexpensive mechani
496. numbered sequentially starting at 0 For example the first drive is identified as drive 0 and the first slot as slot 0 See the reference section for more detail on the syntax and function of OLM Cl commands 1 Start the OLM CI by entering OLM at the colon prompt If you need to execute only one OLM command you can specify it in the MPE info string OLM 2 Use the ADD command to add a new library to OLM At the OLM prompt enter the ADD command with the LIBRARY keyword followed by the name of the host system followed by a colon the name you wish to give the library and the full path for the device file name created with the OLMDEV command The hostname identifies the system to which the library robotics is attached The hostname must be resolvable either in the etc hosts file or through a DNS lookup BACKUP iX User Manual 14 154 Chapter 14 ORBIT Library Manager OLM Operations Guide The following example causes olm to create the OLM databases needed to support a library named dltchg associated on host opus with the device file dev dltchg Note that the device file name is case sensitive olm gt ADD LIBRARY opus dltchg dev dltchg The hostname and colon are not necessary if the command is entered from that host system So the ADD command olm gt ADD LIBRARY dltchg dev dltchg would be equivalent to the previous command example if the command is entered on opus 3 Enter the LIST c
497. ny HPe3000 The following commands options and JCWs are discussed as the topics above are covered e The FULLBACKUP PARTBACKUP and STORE commands e The DATE DBSTORE DIRECTORY ENCRYPT GETDATE PURGE SELECT and SETDATE options of the STORE command Backup cycles The amount of data lost in the event of a major failure largely depends on how recently the last backup was performed It is therefore important that backups be performed regularly Backups are typically divided into cycles to make them manageable Since backing up the entire system could require several hours backing up every day would in most cases be excessive The goals in establishing backup cycles are to minimize the number of files that are backed up minimize the frequency of backups and limit the time required for system recovery in the event of a disaster The typical environment has only two backup types within a cycle full backup and partial backup Usually a full backup is performed once a week and a partial backup is performed each day to reflect all changes since the last full backup Some environments use a type of partial backup called an incremental backup which backs up only the files changed following the previous incremental backup rather than all of the files changed since the last full backup An incremental backup often needs to store fewer files than a full backup and is therefore faster but more time is usually required to recover the files modified
498. o 2097152 2 097 152 sectors or the value 1 If numsectors exceeds the amount of free disk space available on the system BACKUP creates the filebuffer of the maximum allowable size and displays a warning message To allocate the largest file buffer possible based on available system disk space specify numsectors of 1 DEFER has a default value of 1 Allocating the largest file buffer possible can potentially consume all free disk space on the system therefore it is not recommended unless the backup is small enough that the resulting file buffer will leave sufficient disk space for other processing Example This command performs a full deferred system backup using a filebuffer of 500 000 sectors gt STORE T DEFER 500000 DRIVES 2 Option DELTA With the Delta module installed the DELTA option of STORE is used to perform the second or later backups in a Delta backup cycle following the baseline store A delta store specifies the Delta cycle name to associate the delta store with its baseline store in the same Delta store cycle Delta stores will only backup changes to the files stored in the baseline or the prior delta store See details on the BASELINE option of STORE above in this chapter See Chapter 15 DELTA Backup Module in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide for more explanation of the Delta module Syntax BACKUP iX User Manual 18 319 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide DELTA deltacyclenam
499. ocally Excluded filesets A B C Globally Excluded filesets DEV PUB DEVBAK T Fileset exclusion in an indirect file When using fileset exclusion in an indirect file care must be taken BACKUP implicitly appends a comma to the end of each line in the file which causes each line to be treated as a global exclusion To declare a local exclusion in an indirect file specify the excluded fileset on the same line as the fileset from which it is being excluded as shown on line 3 in the first example below For example the indirect file SPECIAL PROD containing the lines CSL DATE lt 5 SYS LOG HHH SYS BACKUP iX User Manual 6 64 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide and then referenced on the STORE command as gt STORE SPECIAL PROD T is equivalent to the command gt STORE CSL DATE lt 5 SYS LOGH SYS T Note Only fileset specifications filesetspecs may be specified in the indirect file other command options may not be included If an indirect file contains any globally excluded filesets the scope of the globally excluded filesets is limited to files that are included within the indirect file This prevents indirect files from having unforeseen side effects Excluding indirect files As stated above Indirect files may contain Include Local Exclude and Global Exclude filesets But we
500. of TAPE or if storing to DDS TML will select volumes with a media of DDS If something other than device class is specified for media TML can be instructed to select volumes using a file equation when performing the store LENGTH This attribute used for display purposes only is a freeform 6 character tape length For tape reels and other media measured in length the number of feet meters should be specified For DDS and other media measured in time the number of minutes of storage time should be used Values with embedded spaces must be surrounded by single or double quotes SIZE The SIZE attribute is an 8 character freeform classifier with no embedded spaces and is used to group media of various lengths e g SMALL MEDIUM and LARGE It allows media of various lengths to be maintained and TML to select media of the appropriate length for storing the cycle For example a cycle used for regular transfer of data to another site may require only a 600 tape reel which could be designated as SMALL while regular backups would be stored to LARGE 2400 reels and archives would be stored to XLARGE 3600 reels BACKUP iX User Manual 17 190 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide The SIZE classifier is used instead of absolute measurement to allow proper media selection for cycles that may be stored to more than one type of media e g the same cycle ma
501. of files modified during the backup created Number of files created during the backup renamed Number of files renamed within the store filesetlist during the backup purged Number of files purged during the backup saved Number of temporary files saved and number of files renamed into the store filesetlist during the backup BACKUP iX User Manual 24 399 Chapter 24 Reports BACKUP iX Reference Guide Restore Status A status report is displayed at the completion of restore indicating various characteristics of the restore FILES RESTORED H FILES NOT RESTORED listed above total number of blocks H HH sectors megabyte s number of blocks on first tape sectors megabyte s total amount of disk space restored H HHHHH sectors megabyte s tape errors retries on restore tape errors retries on store H This restore took hours minutes seconds FILES RESTORED Number of files that were successfully restored FILES NOT RESTORED Number of files that could not be restored each of which is listed above the Restore Status report with an explanation data blocks Number of datablocks on all tapes and amount of data they represent in sectors and megabytes if compression was used for store amounts represent compressed data blocks on first tape Number of datablocks on the first tape volume and the number of sectors and megabytes they occupy on
502. of the following formats e All generations exclude the GENERATION parameter e Most recent generation specify O e Absolute generation number e g 33 BACKUP iX User Manual 19 361 Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide e Relative generation number e g 1 means the next to last generation 2 the previous generation etc BDATE Backup date and optionally time relop One of the following relational operators Equal to lt Less than gt Greater than lt Less than or equal to gt Greater than or equal to lt gt Not equal to backupdate Date of the backup in mm dd cclyy format backuptime Time of the backup in hh mm format MDATE Date and optionally the time the file was last modified modifydate Date of last file modification in mm dd cclyy format modifytime Time of last file modification in hh mm format Parameters continued FIRST Restore the first earliest version of the file if multiple versions qualify or a version relative to the first specified by n The maximum offset value is 5 LAST Restore the last latest version of the file if multiple versions qualify or a version relative to the last specified by a numerical offset value The maximum offset value is 5 ALL Default All occurrences of the specified fileset in all backups OFFLINE Print output on device class LP under formal file designator TMLLIST as well as STDLIST Exam
503. om a session STDLIST is the terminal and output is sent to the terminal screen If BACKUP is run in batch from a job stream STDLIST is the output spool file Store The act of copying data from the system onto a backup Store bits A bit on each file that is set when a file is being stored used to prevent file access during a backup Store directory A directory containing information about the files contained on a store volumeset which is required for any restore The store directory is written to tape with the backup and may optionally be retained in a file on disk SYMLINK A file type which includes symbolic link files Synchronization point A moment near the completion of an online backup in which the data stored on tape is logically equivalent to the data on the system SYSGEN An HP supplied program which creates a tape that may be used to INSTALL the system Tape identification labels Stick on labels which can be printed for labeling tapes Tapeset A group of related tapes usually from a single backup Temporary files Files that reside in the temporary domain as opposed to the permanent file domain and which are not stored by BACKUP BACKUP iX User Manual 434 Glossary BACKUP iX TurboIMAGE XL HP s proprietary network database management system in use on almost all HPe3000 computers running MPE iX A replacement version of TurboIMAGE on MPE V it is still generally referred to as IMAGE
504. om the TML PREVIEW or SHOW command BACKUP iX User Manual 23 394 Chapter 28 Files and File Designators BACKUP iX Reference Guide BACKUP files and file designator descriptions BACKUPDF The BACKUPDF file contains the store directory which is saved on disk if the DISKDIR option is specified on the STORE command The store directory file is built in the current group account under the name BACKUPDP or a specified name and assigned a filecode of 7652 BACKUPHC BACKUPHC PUB ORBIT is the BACKUP online help catalog This file is accessible through BACKUP s HELP command The help catalog is in MAKECAT HELP format If desired this file may be modified by the user and recompiled using MAKECAT PUB SYS HELP Refer to the relevant HP documentation for information about working with help catalogs BACKUPMC The BACKUPMC PUB ORBIT message catalog is used by TML for user messages and online help The catalog is in a proprietary format so user modifications are disallowed This file along with BACKUPHLP PUB ORBIT must be present for TML to function properly BCKUPHLP BCKUPHLP PUB ORBIT is used by TML for user messages and online help This file along with BACKUPMC PUB ORBIT must be present for TML to function properly The catalog is in MAKECAT HELP format If desired this file may be modified by the user and recompiled using MAKECAT PUB SYS HELP Refer to the relevant HP documentation for information about working with hel
505. ommand to display a listing of the library The LIBRARY keyword must be used followed by the hostname a colon and the libraryname olm gt LIST LIBRARY opus dltchg 4 Establish a name for each tape drive in the library to identify each drive with its host For example these two commands will identify drive 0 and drive 1 in the library named ditchg with Idev 17 and Idev 19 which are connect to the host RINGO olm gt RENAME LIBRARY opus dltchg DRIVE 0 RINGO 17 olm gt RENAME LIBRARY opus dltchg DRIVE 1 RINGO 19 The Idev number used by that system for the drive must come after the colon The host name in the last field is always required for this command Note that library drives must be named for BACKUP iX and its OLM parameter to identify and use tapes in the library In this BACKUP iX command executed on RINGO the AUTOREPLY parameter indicates the ldev number for a drive that has been named RINGO 17 using the RENAME command as shown above The SEQUENCE parameter also may be used to specify the Idev number in the BACKUP iX command if you want to reply manually to the MPE mount command or the device is configured for autoreply in MPE gt STORE T AUTOREPLY 17 LABEL 5 VOLID 5 OLM opus dltchg Using the RENAME command name each drive to be used by BACKUP iX with the format DriveHostName LDev 5 If tapes have not yet been imported into the library use the IMPORT command to import tapes throu
506. on ldev 7 and have BACKUP automatically REPLY to the console request gt READALL T AUTOREPLY 7 Option CYCLE Specifies the name and generation of the TML cycle upon which to perform the validation Syntax gt READALL CYCLE cyclename GEN gen cyclename ThaaaaaodfkaMMlcysikde gen The generation number within the cycle BACKUP iX User Manual 18 261 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Example To perform a READALL on Idev 7 for the last backup of cycle FULL gt READALL T CYCLE FULL GEN 0 To perform a READALL on ldev 51 in the OLM controlled library for the next to last backup of cycle FULL gt READALL T CYCLE FULL GEN 1 O0LM st4x30 AUTOREPLY 51 Option DRIVES Allows the parallel use of multiple backup devices for READALL The serial handling of multiple backup devices is not permitted with the READALL command Tape drives must be of the same type e g tape or DDS but not mixed and density and configured with the same device class Syntax gt READALL DRIVES numdrives numdrives The number of backup devices between 1 and 64 If the DRIVES option is not specified a default of 1 drive is used Examples To perform a parallel READALL to two backup devices gt READALL T DRIVES 2 To perform a parallel READALL to three backup devices gt READALL T DRIVES 3 Notes e If using
507. or gt 7 days 30 day 6 mos 1 year 2 year 09 01 99 7581 7088 4554 2780 727 09 07 99 7590 7102 4554 2780 727 09 14 99 7588 7108 4554 2780 727 09 21 99 7590 7110 4554 2780 727 Tapes used The TAPES mode of SHOW CYCLE shows the tapes that comprise the tape volumeset for each generation with one line per volume Each volume description includes the sequence number within the store volumeset volid type of media length density at which it was written number of times written to and number of tape retries and errors which occurred during that store Any zero value is displayed as rather than O to make non zero values easier to recognize Also the tape volume s that contain the store directory are flagged This example requests only the tapes for the last generation of each cycle gt SHOW CYCLE GEN 0 TAPES Created Seq Volid Length Den Used Retry Error Dir 09 21 99 1 000123 2400FT 6250 2 2 000124 2400FT 6250 3 000125 2400FT 6250 4 000126 2400FT 6250 5 000127 2400FT 6250 6 000128 2400FT 6250 7 000129 2400FT 6250 8 000130 2400FT 6250 1 000210 2400FT 6250 2 000203 2400FT 6250 3 000201 2400FT 6250 1 000905 600FT 1600 09 27 99 09 26 99 Files on tape The FILES mode of SHOW CYCLE lists all the files successfully stored in the backup The listing is similar to the SHOW listing output by the store except files are displayed in alphabetical order by account group and filename rather than
508. or jobs than is used for sessions Suspending batch jobs BACKUP attempts to break each active batch job by performing the equivalent of a BREAKJOB Suspending terminal sessions For a ZDT backup in a session BACKUP will try every two seconds for 60 seconds by default to suspend all terminal processes as they enter a terminal read or other recognized wait state All suspended processes stay suspended until all remaining processes can be suspended BACKUP iX User Manual 7 84 Chapter 7 Online and Zero Downtime Backup BACKUP iX Operations Guide The maximum timeout duration may be specified in seconds as a parameter of the ZERODOWN option For example to increase the timeout to two minutes specify a ZERODOWN value of 120 seconds gt STORE T ZERODOWN 120 When the timeout period lapses BACKUP will report remaining active jobs and sessions and prompt the operator to try again to suspend all unsuspendable jobs and sessions and proceed with synchronization or to abort the backup This cycle is repeated until either all processes are suspended or until the operator replies with a C Continue or A Abort Suspending process trees BACKUP recognizes process trees and will only suspend a process if all other dependent processes are suspendable So either the entire tree is suspended or no process in that tree is suspended For example if a user is running a program the father process which inter
509. or stores The SIZE classifier is used to group and maintain media of various lengths e g SMALL MEDIUM and LARGE and allows TML to select the media of the appropriate length for storing the cycle For example a cycle used for regular transfer of data to another site and requiring only a 600 tape reel could be designated as SMALL regular backups could be stored to LARGE 2400 reels while archives could be stored to XLARGE 3600 reels The SIZE classifier is used instead of absolute measurement to allow proper media selection for cycles that could be stored to more than one type of media and therefore could have inconsistent tape lengths e g the same cycle could be stored to either TAPE or DAT The SIZE parameter in the cycle file must match the size value when creating tapes ADD TAPES For example Cycle file SIZE large ADD TAPES SIZE large The SIZE parameter is not case sensitive classification A freeform alphanumeric value of up to 8 characters with no embedded spaces It is recommended that descriptive size classifications be used such as SMALL MEDIUM and LARGE If the size classification is to be ignored allowing media of any size to be selected for any backup of this cycle assign this parameter a blank value CYCLE Defines the tape volume s home pool pool Name of an existing cycle or blank for the global pool Example
510. ore Cycle Gen Created Seq Volid Media Length Dir XXXXXXXX mm dd yy XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX HHH XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX H XXXXXXXX mm dd yy XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX files selected Restore List Verify or Abort R L C A C Pathname Cycle Gen Volid Last modified Restore Restore XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX H HHH XXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm N Y Y Restore XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX H HHH XXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm N Y N Restore XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX H HHH XXXXXX mm dd yy hh mm N Y Y 2 files selected Restore List Confirm or Abort R L C A R Abort If the reply A is entered the restore is aborted and the BACKUP prompt appears BACKUP iX User Manual 117 Chapter 10 Restore Methods BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt RESTORE DATA AP CYCLE PART GEN 0 The following generations and tape volumes are required for this restore Cycle Gen Created Seq Volid Media Length Dir XXXXXXXX mm dd yy XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX HH XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXX mm dd yy BEE XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX 3 files selected Restore List Confirm or Abort R L C A A Restore operation aborted by user request gt Note The confirmation dialog can be disabled if desired by setting the BACKUPIRNOCONFIRM JCW to 1 Note The confirmation dialog is not invoked in batch therefore special care should be exercised when performing a restore with Re
511. ore directory to write to tape and whether they should be written to the last tape volume or a separate volume The default is to store two copies of the store directory at the end of the last tape The purpose of writing the store directory to a separate volume is to speed up restore since BACKUP would not have to read past the data on the tape to reach the directory DISKDIR The DISKDIR option when used with the STORE command specifies that the store directory file created during a store to tape should be kept on disk as well as tape A restore of such a backup will proceed more quickly since the store directory does not need to be read from tape Use of the DISKDIR option is especially appropriate when using high capacity tape media such as DLT or DDS The default store directory filename BACKUPDF is assigned if none is provided with DISKDIR BACKUP iX User Manual 6 70 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide If the store directory filename entry in the DISKDIR option is not qualified it is built in the current group account or CWD If qualified it is built in the group account or HFS directory specified The DISKDIR file is assigned a special filecode 7652 If a DISKDIR file of the same name already exists it is not automatically overwritten but the store is aborted and an error message is displayed Example of use of TAPEDIR and DISKDIR For example to write one copy of the store directory to a separate
512. ort in troubleshooting problems Stopping BACKUP The user normally exits BACKUP when the operation is completed but the operation may also be aborted before completion 2 26 Chapter 2 Program Operation BACKUP iX Operations Guide Exiting To exit BACKUP normally use the EXIT command gt EXIT Aborting BACKUP can be aborted at any time BACKUP termination can take several minutes once an abort is requested This is because substantial clean up processing may have to be performed e g unlocking store bits releasing system resources etc When aborting BACKUP one or more actions may be necessary to cause BACKUP to terminate Perform each step listed below to stop BACKUP from a session The steps used in aborting a batch job are presented following this section Only continue to the next step if the current step does not work Aborting BACKUP from Session mode If running BACKUP from a session 1 If BACKUP is waiting for a REPLY for the tape drive issue a REPLY of 0 REPLY 143 0 2 If BACKUP is not waiting for a REPLY hit the BREAK key and type the ABORT command ABORT 3 If BACKUP has requested that a tape volume be mounted mount the correct volume and check that the tape is online successfully mounted and available for use 4 At the system console issue the ABORTIO command specifying the ldev number of the tape drive being accessed ABORTIO 7
513. oth the absence of a volume with the old volid and two volumes with the new volid and can cause various problems and confusion later Therefore overriding BACKUP s request for overwriting tapes is strongly discouraged Backing up the TMLDB database All information about each backup is contained in the TMLDB database which is updated at the end of the backup after all tapes have been written since all information is not known until that time This of course means that the latest TML information is not included with the backup For this reason a separate backup of the TML database should be performed for complete security in the event of a problem Because only the latest copy of the TML database is needed a single tape can be reserved for this purpose and overwritten with each backup Note When performing an appended backup of the TMLDB database to a labeled tape specify the tape volume s volid Also we recommend that TMLDB be specified to be stored at the beginning of the backup so that it will be released early in case TML should need to reopen the database to allocate additional tapes Restoring with TML Restore Wizard With BACKUP s Restore Wizard a component of the Tape Manager amp Librarian module a restore may be performed without having identified either the backup in which a specified fileset exists or the tapes that are needed A RESTORE command specifying the desired files is simply issued The tapes con
514. ount the SLT tape Restart the system from the tape drive the secondary path specify interaction with IPL and then perform an INSTALL ISL INSTALL 2 Mount the first tape volume of the backup Log on as MANAGER SYS or OPERATOR SYS and restore the BACKUPPL program and its message catalog into PUB SYS HELLO MANAGER SYS FILE T DEV TAPE RESTORE T OLDDATE DIRECTORY 4 Run the BACKUPPL program to recover the volumeset directories and to restore the SYS account from tape RUN BACKUPPL gt RESTORE T SYS OLDDATE SHOW Note If doing a restore from a session as part of a system INSTALL do not use the SHOW option 5 Put the tape back online and restore the remaining files from tape gt RESTORE T SYS OLDDATE SHOW or use whatever RESTORE command options ARE required 6 At this point the operating system has been re INSTALLed and all of the files from the last full backup have been restored Any partial backups performed following the full backup must now be restored See below for the appropriate procedure for either partial or incremental backups BACKUP iX User Manual 9 107 Chapter 9 Restore Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide INSTALLing from full and partial backups To INSTALL the system from full and partial backups two approaches are possible The first is to restore the latest full backup followed by the most recent partial backup The oth
515. ount where they re located A lockword input as part of an MPE syntax fileset is used to fulfill any lockword prompts while the fileset is processed and in this case no interactive prompt will be issued In the event a lockword is requested by BACKUPPL terminal echo is turned off while the lockword is entered from the terminal Access control definitions ACDs Access Control Definition ACDs security provisions are optional for MPE iX files and will be preserved on store and restore ACDs are required for all POSIX files and directories and cannot be removed BACKUP automatically and unconditionally retains ACDs in the following case e Restoring an object directly below an MPE iX group whose group ID GID does not match the GID of its source account BACKUP iX automatically and unconditionally creates ACDs in the following cases 3 37 Chapter 3 Security and Access Requirements BACKUP iX Operations Guide e Restoring a file that does not have an ACD into the POSIX namespace e Creating a POSIX directory via CREATE PATH File access requirements Using standard backup methods files that are open for write access cannot be backed up but this restriction does not necessarily mean that users must stop what they are doing and log off the system in order to perform a backup Using standard backup methods files can be stored if they are open for read but not write access This means that in many cases valuable processing ca
516. ounted Refer to Chapter 22 JCWs in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for information Determining the filebuffer size In performing a deferred backup it is necessary to specify the size of the filebuffer in sectors using the DEFER option or the FILEBUFF option of the STORE command See step 1 of Procedure for deferred backup above The method presented here for determining the size of the filebuffer is to note the filebuffer size listed following a backup Perform a backup and note the Store Status report The easiest method for determining the required filebuffer size is to perform the desired backup non deferred then use the required size for filebuffer data listed in the Store Status report If desired the store can be done to NULL which performs the same operation as a regular store but suppresses the output data Once the filebuffer size has been determined for a standard backup it is generally applicable for future backups and can be tuned if necessary Allocating largest filebuffer possible To allocate the largest filebuffer possible based on available system disk space use DEFER with no parameter or specify a FILEBUFF value of 1 This causes the process to first build a small file then expand it as necessary up to 2 gigabytes if available Note Allocating the largest filebuffer possible can potentially consume all free disk space on the system therefore it is not recommended unless the backup is small enough tha
517. oup and maintain media of various lengths e g SMALL MEDIUM and LARGE and allows TML to select the media of the appropriate length for storing the cycle For example a cycle used for regular transfer of data to another site and requiring only a 600 tape reel could be designated as SMALL regular backups could be stored to LARGE 2400 reels while archives could be stored to XLARGE 3600 reels The SIZE classifier is used instead of absolute measurement to allow proper media selection for cycles that could be stored to more than one type of media and therefore could have inconsistent tape lengths e g the same cycle could be stored to either TAPE or DAT The SIZE parameter in the cycle file must match the size value when creating tapes ADD TAPES For example Cycle file SIZE large ADD TAPES SIZE large The SIZE parameter is not case sensitive classification A freeform alphanumeric value of up to 8 characters with no embedded spaces It is recommended that descriptive size classifications be used such as SMALL MEDIUM and LARGE If the size classification is to be ignored allowing media of any size to be selected for any backup of this cycle assign this parameter a blank value Example To set the default cycle attributes for new cycles such that each backup is retained for 4 weeks 30 days and two generations of any cycle backup are kep
518. p catalogs BCKUPMSG The BCKUPMSG PUB ORBIT message catalog contains TML tape identification label formats in various languages The catalog is in MAKECAT format so it is necessary to run MAKECAT if any modifications are made diskfile Disk backup files are created using any legal MPE or HFS syntax filename with a name specified by the user having a maximum of 16 characters with a 4 digit sequence number that is automatically appended by BACKUP The first character of the diskfile name must be alphabetic and may optionally be qualified with group and account The filename may also be specified using a file equation If lt diskfile gt is specified as Feq then Feq must be a file equation specifying a tape device BACKUP allows Feq syntax to be used with file equations that specify DEV DISC MPE filenames may be fully or partially qualified in any group or account where the user has write access HFS syntax filenames may be specified using absolute or relative HFS pathnames Two or more files are created depending on the characteristics of the files being stored and the system disk utilization The following disk backup files are always created diskfile0000 Contains volume label and directory diskfile0001 Contains stored data continuation files are numbered from 0002 upwards BACKUP iX User Manual 23 395 Chapter 28 Files and File Designators BACKUP iX Reference Guide Where diskfile is the specified 1 chara
519. pec References the desired appended backup in one of the following formats e A user assigned backupname by which the backup is referenced Up to 8 characters alphanumeric first character must be alpha e Anumber indicating the sequence of the desired backup within the backupset where 1 is the first backup in the backupset The sequence number does not reset on volume change e FIRST meaning the first backup in the backupset e LAST meaning the last backup in the backupset This is the default e Anumber preceded by a minus sign indicating a backup relative to the last backup May be used in combination with LAST e g LAST 1 e Anumber preceded by a plus sign indicating a backup relative to the first backup May be used in combination with FIRST e g FIRST 1 Examples To restore the AP database from the last backup on the backup volumeset gt RESTORE T APDB DATA AP BACKUP LAST To restore the TEST SOURCE group from the next to last backup on the backup volumeset gt RESTORE T TEST SOURCE BACKUP LAST 1 or gt RESTORE T TEST SOURCE BACKUP 1 To restore the TEST SOURCE group from the second backup on the backup volumeset gt RESTORE T TEST SOURCE BACKUP FIRST 1 or gt RESTORE T TEST SOURCE BACKUP 1 To restore some programs from the backup named PROGS BACKUP iX User Manual 18 276 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BAC
520. pecify O e Absolute generation number e g 33 e Relative generation number e g 1 means the next to last generation 2 the previous generation etc Example To print tape identification labels for the last PART backup gt LABEL CYCLE PART GEN 0 LABEL TAPE Prints tape identification labels for specified tapes Syntax gt LABEL TAPE volset Parameters volset The tape volumeset specified as e A specific volid e g 000100 or 100 e Arange of volids e g 100 199 disallowed for alphanumeric volids e Selected volids e g D100 D102 D200 e Any combination of the above e g 100 106 D100 Example To print a tape identification label for the tape with volid C127 BACKUP iX User Manual 19 356 Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt LABEL TAPE C127 PREVIEW CYCLE Displays the next scheduled backup date of all cycles or the next scheduled backup date and tapes required for a specified cycle Syntax gt PREVIEW CYCLE cyclespec MED IA mediatype OFFLINE Parameters cyclespec The name of a cycle or for all cycles If is specified TML loads file information for only those generations which require loading MEDIA Type of media Specify the backup device class for MEDIA the media type to cause TML to automatically select the media appropriate for that device when the backup is p
521. pied by log files may be saved With file information log saving disabled the file register cannot be updated To disable the saving of file information logs as well as the loading of file information the configuration option TMLSAVELOGS must be turned off Refer to the section in this chapter titled Configuration for more information Disabling or deferring file information loading If automatic file information loading is disabled while the ability to create and save the file information log continues the file information logs are saved but the contents of these logs are not loaded into the file register BACKUP iX User Manual 17 205 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide File information for any active cycle generation may be loaded at a later time perhaps later in the night after nightly batch processing or on the weekend In addition the choice of loading only file information pertaining to selected generations is provided Such explicit file information loading is done through the ADD FILE command specifying the cycle and generation for the file information that is to be loaded Regardless of whether the file information for a given log file has been loaded or not each log file remains on the system until its corresponding generation has been scratched Then the log file is automatically purged provided the logon user has read and write access to it This minimizes the amount of disk space required for fi
522. ple To display a listing of files to be restored that are in the third from the latest backup generation of the WEEKLY cycle enter gt SHOW FILE LAST 3 CYCLE WEEKLY To display a listing of files to be restored that are in the most recent generation of the DAILY cycle and were last modified after 6 00 PM on June 15 2001 enter gt SHOW FILE MDATE gt 06 15 2001 18 00 00 GENERATION 0 CYCLE DAILY SHOW POOL Shows tapes in pools and their disposition BACKUP iX User Manual 19 362 Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax 7 ALL AVA ILABLE gt SHOW POOL cyclespec EXP IRED OFFLINE SCR ATCHED PRO TECTED Parameters cyclespec The name of a cycle or to indicate the pools of all cycles and the global pool blank value POOL specifies global pool only ALL Default All tapes assigned to the pool regardless of disposition AVAILABLE Tapes that can be written to new or scratched EXPIRED Tapes that have expired expiration date lt today SCRATCHED Tapes that have been scratched scratched date lt today PROTECTED Tapes that belong to unscratched generations OFFLINE Print output on device class LP under formal file designator TMLLIST as well as STDLIST Example To display a listing of tapes that are available and may be overwritten gt SHOW POOL AVAILABLE To display all protected FULL backup tapes
523. plied If more than one volid is provided volumes will be taken for reel changes in the order listed with the VOLID option If the expected volume IDs are not found the user will be prompted for additional tapes or TML will be queried for them See Chapter 13 ORBIT Library Manager and Chapter 27 OLM Command Line Interface Commands for information on using the OLM Cl to label media for use in a tape library with BACKUP Syntax The syntax for the OLM option is as follows gt STORE OLM hostname libraryname ANSI NOANST Parameters hostname The optional name of the host machine running the OLM provider is indicated This is optional if the command is performed on the OLM host Note that the hostname must be terminated with a colon This name must be resolvable through a DNS lookup and the OLM daemon must be running on the named host libraryname The name given to the library Because multiple libraries can be on the same host a library name must be entered in this field Note that the library name is case sensitive ANSI This literal indicates that ANSI labels are to be used in the operation See also the BackupOLMANSI MPE CI variable NOANSI This literal indicates that ANSI labels are NOT to be used in the operation NOANSI is the default when the MPE Cl variable BackupOLMANSI is not bound or is set to False See also BACKUP iX User Manual 18 329 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Gu
524. pogo The operator on the local host will be prompted for the volume id to be used gt COPY S AUTOREPLY 14 to T AUTOREPLY 13 OLM pogo mylib label vs23 volid If the tape on Idev14 is also in the library named mylib attached to the host system named pogo The command would be gt COPY S AUTOREPLY 14 OLM pogo mylib label vs23 volid voll to T AUTOREPLY 13 OLM pogo mylib label vs24 volid vol2 Performing a Dump with OLM The OLM parameter of the DUMP command tells BACKUP iX to copy data from a disk backup file to a tape in a tape library BACKUP iX User Manual 14 162 Chapter 14 ORBIT Library Manager OLM Operations Guide This example copies data from the disk file DALY to a tape in Idev 13 in the library named mylib attached to the host system named pogo The operator on the local host will be prompted for the volume id to be used gt DUMP DALY T AUTOREPLY 13 OLM pogo mylib label vs23 volid Performing a Listdir with OLM The OLM parameter is not allowed with the DISKDIR parameter of LISTDIR since that makes no sense This example lists the directory of a backup from volume ABCOOO1 located in the mylib library which is on the host pogo gt LISTDIR T AUTOREPLY 13 OLM pogo mylib volid ABCO001 Performing a Readall with OLM This example verifies a backup on a volume 000010 in library mylib attached to the host system named pogo gt
525. pool using BACKUP iX with the TML ADD TAPE command If there is a bar code reader the names added to TML must match names of volumes in the library to be useful gt ADD TAPE 110 117 MEDIA DDS LENGTH 90M SIZE MEDIUM CYCLE FULL In this example eight DDS tapes are added to the TML cycle pool named FULL See the section titled Tapes and Pools in Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian for more information on this topic At this point you should be able to use the olm parameter with BACKUP iX commands More OLM CI Commands OLM Cl commands are provided for various library management tasks such as setting up a tape library for olm displaying library and volume information or moving tape volumes within the library or to and from the library One or more OLM CI commands may be entered after first running the OLM Cl program or one command may be specified in the info string OLM Cl commands may be entered in all caps or all lowercase but not mixed The only exception is that the device file name which is only used in the ADD command is case dependent Several library management tasks are described in this section to illustrate how to use the OLM Cl program See Chapter 20 OLM Command Line Interface commands in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for details on syntax The following topics are presented here e Deleting a library from OLM e Assigning a temporary default OLM host and library e Displaying library
526. pression or better by representing repetitive character strings with space efficient tokens Greater compression and CPU utilization results from using the higher numbered compression methods Overall performance is dependent upon the environment generally the match of the CPU speed to the backup device performance For example compression method 1 will always use less CPU than the other methods but it may result in a slower backup overall for slow backup devices This is because with a fast CPU the backup device would be the bottleneck and it would be best to transfer less data data that is more compressed to slower backup devices even if this means burdening the CPU e g by using compression method 3 to do so Experimentation may be needed to determine the best compression algorithm For example to perform a full system backup with method 3 the COMPRESS option may be used gt STORE T COMPRESS 3 If the COMPRESS option is specified without a method method 2 is performed If the COMPRESS option is not specified with the STORE command method 2 is performed by default Disabling data compression Data compression may be disabled by specifying a value of 0 for the COMPRESS option For example to back up the system with no compression gt STORE T COMPRESS 0 Note BACKUP uses a more efficient tape format than MPE iX STORE so disabling data compression may still yield a tape savings over MP
527. ps provide storage to a nonvolatile medium which can be taken offsite for protection from environmental mishaps Backups can be performed using a single backup device or up to 64 backup devices serially or in parallel Various types of backup devices are supported Refer to Chapter 13 Backup Devices in the BACKUP AX Operations Guide for information about backup devices and using multiple backup devices Disk backups Disk backups provide the ability to perform a system backup without the presence of an operator Backup to tape requires that an operator be present to change tape volumes BACKUP provides two types of disk backup deferred backup and disk backup Deferred backup is a backup to tape using disk for intermediate storage Data that does not fit on one or more mounted tape volumes is deferred stored temporarily on disk in an area called the filebuffer until additional tapes are mounted to complete the tape backup Upon completion of the tape backup the disk backup filebuffer is purged Disk backup is a backup to a set of permanent disk files A disk backup can be kept on disk permanently and files can be restored directly from it just as from a tape backup The contents of the disk backup can be dumped to tape at any time creating a copy of the disk backup that can then be used itself in a restore Deferred backups A deferred backup creates a temporary disk file called the filebuffer that acts as a buffer to the
528. pter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian in the BACKUP X Operations Guide for more information Step by step tape backup guide The following is a step by step guide for performing a tape backup 1 Seta file equation for the backup device FILE T DEV TAPE 2 If using the Tape Manager amp Librarian module and tape identification labels will be printed a Make sure that labels are loaded on the printer and that the printer is online b If using a language other than NATIVE 3000 American English set the TMLLANGID JCW to the appropriate langid FILE TMLLANGID 8 c Seta file equation for the appropriate printer FILE TMLABLP DEV 25 10 3 Run BACKUP and issue a STORE command specifying the store fileset list in the command line BACKUP iX User Manual 6 75 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt STORE T SHOW SETDATE or referencing an indirect or cycle file gt STORE FULL T SHOW FILES 30000 SETDATE Alternately the FULLBACKUP or PARTBACKUP command may be used gt FULLBACKUP T SHOW Specify any STORE options required e g SHOW PROGRESS AUTOREPLY etc See Chapter 18 BACKUP iX Commands for details on commonly used options for a tape backup Remove the required tape volumes from the tape rack If using TML the volids of the required tapes are displayed on the system console a
529. pter 24 Reports in the the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for more details on the SHOW listing Effect of changes to files Let s examine each of the changes that could occur to a file that would qualify or disqualify it from the store This will include files that have been modified created accessed renamed purged saved are open at the syncpoint or have file selection attributes change during the store Modified Only files that were actually modified during the store are flagged with an M in the SHOW listing regardless of whether the file was opened for write access or not Created Files created during an online backup are flagged with a C in the SHOW listing This is also true for files created before the backup that are selected for store based on creation date using the CDATE option of the STORE command Accessed If files are being selected for store based on last access date using the ADATE option of the STORE command files opened and accessed during the backup are stored Renamed Based on the filesetlist being stored files renamed during an online backup may either be renamed into or out of the store filesetlist or may still qualify for store if broad parameters are used as would be the case with a backup of Files that disqualify for store because they have been renamed out of the store filesetlist are listed in the Online Disqualified Files listing with the message RENAMED DURING STORE
530. ptional and can be specified in any combination However GEN takes precedence over BDATE and MDATE i e BDATE and MDATE are filters applied to the selected generations If GEN is not used all generations are selected and BDATE and MDATE apply to all generations e Toselect the earliest or latest version or a version in between from multiple versions of files qualifying for restore use the FIRST or LAST options LAST is automatically imposed if neither option is used e To search all backups all generations of all cycles use neither the CYCLE nor the GEN option e To search all generations of a particular cycle specify the cycle name with the CYCLE option and do not use the GEN option e To search the same generation of all cycles specify CYCLE and the absolute or relative generation number e g GEN 0 for the last generation of all cycles e To search multiple generations of different cycles specify multiple CYCLE GEN options pairs e f selection criteria fails to find any qualifying files for example LAST 3 when only two copies of the file exist the desired file s will not be restored since they do not exist and no message will be issued e If a nonexistent generation is specified it will be ignored and no error message will be issued Restore Wizard examples To restore the latest version of the files in SOURCE AP from all backups gt RESTORE T SOURCE AP LAST To restore the
531. r BDATE options of the RESTORE command e Specifying the earliest or latest version of the qualifying file or a version in between using the FIRST or LAST options of the RESTORE command if multiple versions of a file qualify for restore Restore Wizard command options The RESTORE command has several command options used alone or in combination that facilitate restores with Restore Wizard CYCLE Restricts the restore to certain cycles or all cycles GENERATION Restricts the restore to certain generations of certain cycles or all cycles BACKUP iX User Manual 17 216 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide MDATE Restricts files to those that fall before on or after a specified date and or time of modification BDATE Restricts files to those that fall before on or after a specified date and or time of backup FIRST Selects the earliest version of a file if multiple versions qualify LAST Selects the latest version of a file if multiple versions qualify Refer to the RESTORE command in Chapter 18 BACKUP iX Commands in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for syntax and explanations Note TML s SHOW FILE command supports the same selection options as above Refer to the File register section in Chapter 17 Tape Librarian amp Manager in this manual for examples Command usage notes The following are usage notes for pertinent RESTORE command options e CYCLE GEN BDATE and MDATE are all o
532. r each tape volume In performing a LISTDIR the tape volume with the directory should be mounted since it contains the most information For volume sets without appended stores BACKUP iX User Manual 15 171 Chapter 15 Ensuring reliable backups BACKUP iX Operations Guide this will normally be the last volume However LISTDIR can produce results with any tape volume of the backup volumeset mounted If the DISKDIR option was used on the STORE command to save the store directory in a disk file the store directory disk file may be accessed by LISTDIR This lists the contents of a store volumeset without requiring that any tapes be mounted and is much faster For example to instruct the printer to generate a hardcopy of a SHOW listing of a store volumeset in DATES and SECURITY format mount the last tape in the store volumeset and issue the following commands FILE T DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt LISTDIR T SHOW DATES SECURITY OFFLINE If the store directory resides on disk in the file PARTDIR the following command may be issued gt LISTDIR SHOW DATES SECURITY OFFLINE DISKDIR PARTDIR BACKUP iX User Manual 15 172 Chapter 16 Maximizing Performance Many factors can affect the performance of BACKUP including the characteristics of the data being stored the physical connection of the disk and backup devices loading of channels and VO traffic BACKUP has several controls that can be tun
533. r example gt FILE T DEV TAPE REDOing commands BACKUP s REDO and LISTREDO commands permit BACKUP commands to be re executed and optionally edited These commands operate in a similar way to equivalent MPE iX commands REDO presents the last command and LISTREDO lists the last few commands and provides a numerical identifier that can be used with the DO or REDO commands When the REDO command is issued with or without parameters the last BACKUP command is displayed with the cursor positioned in the first column of the next line If the command length exceeded 60 characters it is divided into 60 character segments To re execute the last BACKUP command type REDO and hit RETURN twice Editing commands with REDO To edit a recently executed BACKUP command type REDO and press RETURN for the last command or type REDO and the command number seen by previously entering LISTREDO and hit RETURN The previously entered command line is displayed with the cursor positioned on the next line below REDO STORE PUB SYS T SHOW LONG To append a single character to the end of the command line type the greater than character gt then the desired character and press RETURN To edit the command or command segment move the cursor using the space bar to the desired position under the first letter of the command segment to be changed Then use the following constructs to modify the command Command
534. r of issues affect multiple drive handling on restore in the following areas e Opening drives e Locating the store directory e Calling for and processing tapes e Handling wrong tapes Opening the drives and locating the store directory The order in which backup devices are opened and the method by which the store directory is located generally determine whether a restore will be done in attended or unattended mode With an attended restore the tape volume containing the store directory is mounted on a particular device the dirldev and BACKUP initially opens only that drive to read it Once the store directory has been processed BACKUP requests the tapes needed to complete the restore With an unattended restore initially one of the tapes from the store volumeset must be mounted on each of the drives including the tape on which the store directory resides and BACKUP then opens all of the drives and accesses all of the tapes for restore All mounted tapes must belong to the store volumeset being restored from otherwise the offending tapes will be rejected Multi drive restore with dirldev specified Attended Restore If an attended restore is to be performed mount the directory volume in one of the drives and specify its Idev in the dirldev parameter of the SEQUENCE option Restore then opens that drive reads the store directory and directs the operator to mount other volumes on the drives as needed and in the order specified
535. r vice versa Logical transactions generally do not span terminal reads or certain other wait states BACKUP therefore assumes that if a user is at a terminal read or is otherwise waiting on an external event then a logical transaction is not in progress With BACKUP iX version 6 00 and newer a Zero downtime backup can be done with no user downtime for databases enabled for roll forward recovery BACKUP utilizes an enhancement to the DBRECOV program in MPE iX 5 5 which allows a log cycle to span multiple backups with the ability to start recovery from any point in any log file in the log cycle Note however this feature cannot be used for databases that are opened exclusively When performing a Zero downtime backup continue to leave the current log cycle running rather than starting a new log cycle after performing a backup When a ZDT backup is performed against a logging enabled database certain information is written to the root files of all databases being backed up and to transaction log files In addition the database is quiesced at the synchronization point To recover a restored database it is only necessary to have the log file that was active at the time of the backup and all subsequent log files The name of the active log file is displayed upon completion of the backup and can also be determined using DBUTIL When DBRECOV is invoked it accesses the correct log file and positions to the correct location in that log fi
536. rces when storing and scratching This facility has been designed to minimize the resource requirements for both the STORE and SCRATCH processes However the use of the file register does require additional processing that consumes some system resources Disk space requirements for the file register are based on the number of files contained on all active backup generations Because typically all files on the system are contained on at least one active backup generation e g a full backup this figure is generally the same as the number of files on the system Time requirements when running a store process are based on the number of files being stored The time requirements for a SCRATCH operation are based on the number of files on the tapes being scratched and on the number of files in all active backups BACKUP iX User Manual 17 204 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide Result if file register not maintained Some sites may not want to expend the resources to have the file information reporting functionality that the file register affords therefore file register maintenance may be selectively deferred or disabled If the file register is disabled file information will not be loaded at store time and the Intelligent Restore feature of BACKUP will not work Further the following commands will not display file information e SHOW CYCLE FILES SHOW FILE e SHOW TAPE FILES If an attempt is made to report f
537. re individual volumesets from any backup including those that contain all volumesets Multiple backups may be appended to the same tapeset Backups may be performed over a network Full and partial backups are automated by internally saving the date and time of the full backup and using it for subsequent partial backups Permits a backup to be duplicated by copying between multiple backup devices Can automatically REPLY to backup devices that are not configured as autoreply Reporting features Frequent progress messages indicate percentage of backup and restore completion independently for each tape volume used in the backup Reports error and retry counts On store reports the number of files based on file type and last modification as well as the amount of disk space they consume Reports and sets JCWs for the number of files stored and not stored for accumulated errors and retries and for other backup attributes Displays a message indicating the specific reason that a file cannot be stored or restored Lists the contents of a store volumeset on demand Validates a store volumeset for reliability on demand Chapter 2 Program Operation BACKUP is installed in PUB ORBIT and is run as a command driven program on the HPe3000 In this chapter Find information on these topics e Running BACKUP from a session in batch mode and with TML e Session versus batch mode e Stopping BACKUP e Issuing commands
538. reason various options exist in BACKUP for protecting the store directory storing multiple copies on tape storing the directory or directories on a separate tape volume and saving the store directory in a disk file Files that could not be restored due to tape read errors are indicated accordingly in the SHOW listing Refer to Chapter 15 Ensuring reliable backups in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide for information about assuring backup integrity BACKUP iX User Manual 26 422 Chapter 26 Error handling BACKUP iX Reference Guide Restoring a file with an error If an error prevents a file from being restored and the file is to be restored no matter what it s condition the KEEPBAD option of the RESTORE command can be used to achieve this Note The KEEPBAD option should be used only in an emergency situation when no other backup copy of the file is available When using KEEPBAD the contents of the file may be corrupted and should be checked thoroughly Disk I O errors If BACKUP encounters a disk VO error on store the affected file is not stored and its filename is highlighted in the SHOW listing The backup continues storing other files following the disk I O error Tape drive errors Besides the errors that can occur from bad tapes or transmission errors errors can also occur on the backup device itself These errors fall into two categories configuration errors and power failure powerfail errors Configuratio
539. reated Nov 2 2006 04 25 38 on dev 18 NMSTORE of BACKUP iX program found at beginning of volumeset Found backup 1 named QA1 created Nov 2 2006 04 26 41 on dev 18 Using block size of 32760 bytes Selecting files for store 2 files 5024 sectors 1 23 megabyte s of disc space to store Optimizing selected file information for faster backup Storing selected files Store is 100 complete Finished storing selected files updating store directory Resetting store bits and compiling file statistics Writing store directory kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Tape statistics for volume 1 Volumeset Volume compression percentage 98 Backup 1 Name kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk total number of errors 0 backup ldev number 14 total number of retries 0 total number of blocks 8 1016 sectors 0 25 MBytes time beginning 13 17 21 ending 13 18 58 elapsed 00 01 37 amount of disk space stored 1728 sectors 0 42 megabyte s kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Tape statistics for volume 2 Volumeset Volume compression percentage 98 Backup 1 Name x kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk total number of errors 0 backup ldev number 15
540. rect files If you are interested in optimizing the use of indirect files BACKUP processes indirect files most efficiently if they contain a sorted list of files Tape Manager amp Librarian cycle file If using Tape Manager amp Librarian TML files to be stored are specified in the cycle file along with other cycle attributes e g retention period before expiration number of tape volumes to use etc The cycle file is contained in a configured group account by default CYCLE ORBIT and referenced on the STORE command prefixed by an exclamation point A TML cycle file is like an indirect file with the addition that the TML cycle parameters may be specified after the store filesets For example the cycle file for the cycle named SPECIAL could include the lines CSL DATE lt 5 SYS LOG H SYS KEEP 1 RETENTION 35 FREQUENCY 7 DAYS 1234567 VOLUMES 1 1 SIZE LARGE BACKUP iX User Manual 6 66 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide The cycle file is referenced on the STORE command as gt STORE SPECIAL T Notes BACKUP distinguishes between cycle files and indirect files by requiring that cycle files reside in a designated group account For a TML cycle file to be distinguished from a regular indirect file no other filesets may be specified in the same command Refer to the Cycles section of Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide
541. rectories if they do not exist as shown gt RESTORE T CWD ap bin CREATE PATH Option CYCLE See Chapter 17 Tape Manager and Librarian Option DATE See the page titled Options xDATE BDATE DATE MDATE and SDATE Option DBRESTORE Restores an entire database if the root file is specified Syntax gt RESTORE DBRESTORE Example To restore the entire GLDB database gt RESTORE T GLDB DATA GL DBRESTORE Notes e DBRESTORE will not attempt to restore a database if the root file is being accessed e The DBRESTORE KEEPNEW KEEPOLD and KEEP options may not be specified in the same RESTORE command e The DBRESTORE option cannot be used when performing a restore with Restore Wizard BACKUP iX User Manual 18 280 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Option DEFRAG Defragments files that are being restored thereby reducing the overall fragmentation of disk space on the system Additionally DEFRAG causes restored files to be built on fewer extent blocks than they would otherwise be built Syntax gt RESTORE DEFRAG Example To defragment the disk space occupied by the database GLDB17 when restoring the database gt RESTORE T GLDB17 DATA GL DEFRAG Option DELTA For a delta restore specifies that the delta store having the specified Delta cycle name be used with the associated baseline backup as the source of the
542. red to using TML Retry Number of tape retries that occurred on last store where indicates zero retries Error Number of tape errors that occurred on last store where indicates zero errors Dir A number in this field indicates that the volume contains all or part of one or more copies of the store directory Because the store directory ies may be contained on more than one volume multiple volumes within a generation may have this designator where the number indicates the sequence of the volumes containing the store directory ies TYPE option Displays information about the types of files stored on cycle generations Cycle Gen Created Files IMAGE KSAM VPLUS SPOOL PROG ASCII Binary XXXXXXXX mm dd yy H HHHH HHHHHH THHHHH HHH HHH HHH HHH HARARE Cycle Cycle name Gen Absolute number of generation within cycle Created Date generation of store was completed in mm dd yy date format Files Total number of files in backup IMAGE Number of files in backup that are TurboIMAGE XL root files or datasets KSAM Number of KSAM data and key files in backup VPLUS Number of VPLUS and VFAST form files in backup SPOOL Number of output spool files in backup PROG Number of object program files in backup ASCII Number of ASCII format files in backup BINARY Number of binary format files in backup SHOW FILE Displays information about files contained on active cycle generations Multiple copies of the same file are listed in order by mo
543. replacement characters one or more of the special characters described below and press RETURN gt STORE PUB SYS T SHOW LONG gt REDO STORE PUB SYS T SHOW LONG RSHORT Special REDO editing characters After editing the command one or more of the following special characters may be specified before hitting RETURN Completes editing and executes the command even if more command segments have not been displayed This is useful when necessary editing has been done and no further editing to any subsequent segments is required Restarts the editing function and returns to the first segment of the command while preserving modifications that were already made II Aborts the redo operation without executing the command gt Appends a single character to the command line Invoking dependent processing BACKUP is capable of dependent processing using the STORE command with specific options This involves performing an indicated action upon the occurrence of a pre defined event The following list matches STORE command options with corresponding occurrences recognized as events that will trigger other actions Events STORE options The storing of a specified file ON FILE The occurrence of an error ON ERROR Each tape volume change ON VOLUME The completion of the backup ON RELEASED The start of the waiting period for an operation with ON SYNCWAIT an explicitly delayed synchronization point
544. res file integrity and a complete and accurate backup 1 21 Chapter 1 Introduction BACKUP iX Operations Guide e An exclusive set of features called the Wizard module available with BACKUP s Tape Manager amp Librarian automates most of the manual operations associated with backup and adds additional intelligence and automation to backups and restores Summary of benefits In short BACKUP greatly reduces the time resources and inconvenience traditionally associated with backups e Permits reliable backups to be performed while users continue to work normally with unrestricted access to files during the backup e Reduces the overall time required for backups thereby increasing system availability e Shrinks tape requirements through data compression e Minimizes operations requirements through faster unattended and appended backup functionality e Eliminates the need to use DBSTORE for IMAGE databases e Provides a method for backing up the system volumeset directory and the directories of nonsystem volumesets eliminating the need to use STORE e Eliminates the need for separate backups to volumeset by providing greater flexibility in storing and restoring by volumeset e Simplifies the archiving storing and purging of seldom used or unused files e Facilitates automated consistent and documented backups e Makes possible the use of multiple backup devices for store and restore e Recovers data from bad t
545. rian TML Operations Guide YES gt TMLPRINTLABELS NO If not specified the default for the TMLPRINTLABELS parameter is NO TMLRESTORE The TMLRESTORE configuration option enables and disables the Restore Wizard YES gt TMLRESTORE NO If not specified the default for the TMLRESTORE parameter is NO Note The BACKUPTMLRESTORE JCW overrides the TMLRESTORE configuration option setting VOLUMELABEL The VOLUMELABEL configuration option specifies whether TML should use BACKUP proprietary or ANSI format tape volume labels BACKUP gt TMLVOLUMELABEL ANSI If not specified the default for the TMLSAVELOGS parameter is the BACKUP format Storing with Tape Manager amp Librarian This section provides information regarding storing Tape Manager amp Librarian cycles and how TML determines tape requirements selects tapes what to do in the event that the correct tape is not used and backing up the TMLDB database Pre selecting tapes TML expects that tapes will be pulled for use in advance immediately before performing a backup and selects and reserves the tapes when the backup is started TML displays the tape identifiers so that they may be pulled TML is also capable of pre determining what tapes are required without actually starting a backup through the PREVIEW command Tapes are not reserved by PREVIEW but are reserved by STORE so care must be taken when
546. ring using an autochanger either the tape volume containing the store directory must be loaded first in the stack or it must be accessed from disk using the DISKDIR option of the RESTORE command Once the store directory is located and processed each tape will be accessed in sequence and only the tapes that contain data to be restored will be read With the exception of the store directory volume if DISKDIR is not used tape volumes can be sequenced in any order for restore Tape libraries A tape library is a robotic device that typically contains several elements or components including one or more arms drives slots and zero or more ports These elements are for I O of data to be written to or read from a tape for movement of media between the library elements for storage of media in the library and for adding or removing library media from a port if available BACKUP with the OLM module notes the volume ID of tapes in the library whether library elements contain a tape volume their location within the library and the name by which OLM may direct them BACKUP tape handling commands with the OLM option can be performed on tape volumes located within a tape library without operator intervention Additionally the OLM Command Line Interpreter OLM Cl is provided in the OLM module for remote interaction with a tape library from the command line See Chapter 14 ORBiT Library Manager and Chapter 20 OLM Command Line Interpreter Com
547. rmation lists creation date last access date last modification date and last state change date SECURITY In addition to SHORT LONG or DIRECTORY information lists file owner and access matrix OFFLINE Lists SHOW output to both the screen and printer formal file designator OFFLINE If LISTDIR is run from a session and showformat is not specified SHORT format is imposed if run in batch showformat defaults to LONG All combinations of showformats are valid with the exceptions that LONG SHORT DIRECTORY and FILENAME are exclusive of each other and FILENAME must be used alone Example To send instructions to the printer to generate a hard copy listing of all the files in the backup with basic information about them enter RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt LISTDIR TEMP T SHOW OFFLINE Option VOLID Specifies ANSI format tape labels and volids for up to eight backup volumes The VOLID option may only be used in combination with the LABEL option which specifies the volsetid and optionally an expiration date and comment If the volid list is empty or becomes exhausted more volids will be requested on the console Syntax gt LISTDIR LABEL VOLID volidlist volidlist Specifies a comma delimited list of up to 8 volume IDs to be used for the first 8 tapes in the target tapeset Each volid may be a maximum of 6 alphanumeric characters for each volid BACKUP iX User Manual 18 257 Chapter 18
548. rs options and examples Example Direct access To access HELP directly view a specific topic and return to the BACKUP prompt enter HELP followed by the particular command name or other keyword For example to access examples of the RESTORE command gt HELP RESTORE EXAMPLES To access HELP directly and view all articles on a command including parameters options and examples as one continuous file enter HELP a space or a comma followed by the particular command name and ALL For example to view all HELP articles on the RESTORE command gt HELP RESTORE ALL The help article is displayed and concludes with Exi ti ng HELP returning to BACKUP BACKUP iX User Manual 18 248 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Interactive subsystem access To get help using interactive access to the HELP subsystem enter help at the help system prompt gt HELP The initial HELP menu is displayed Help is available on the following topics Changes Changes in this and recent BACKUP versions Commands STORE RESTORE and other BACKUP commands CVs User configurable CWs that influence BACKUP operation and information J CWs set by BACKUP Spool files Information on handling of NM spool files TML commands Tape Manager amp Librarian module commands TML reporting Tape Manager amp Librarian reporting capabilities KEYWORDS CHANGES COMMANDS CWS S
549. s When performing a restore with Restore Wizard that involves a single backup reporting is done in the same manner as in a conventional restore However if a restore of files with Restore Wizard that spans multiple backups is performed each backup s restore information is shown separately Operational notes for Restore Wizard When using Restore Wizard the following issues should be considered in planning backup strategy DBRESTORE option The DBRESTORE option may not be used when restoring using Restore Wizard Encrypted backups Backups may be encrypted to protect data on tapes from being read by unauthorized users If Restore Wizard is being used however only a single encrypt key is allowed The designated encrypt key will then be used for all backups Labels During restore Restore Wizard ignores any specified tape volume labels Instead the correct volids are retrieved from the TML database and used during restore to ensure that the correct tape volumes are used BACKUP iX User Manual 17 220 BACKUP iX Reference Guide BACKUP iX User Manual 17 221 Chapter 8 BACKUP Commands In this chapter BACKUP s standard commands STORE RESTORE etc are documented Please see Chapter 26 Tape Manager amp Librarian commands in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for a description of the TML Wizard module commands The BACKUP commands first are listed with a brief description then they with their command op
550. s e A specific Idev e g 14 e Arrange of ldevs e g 14 16 e Selected Idevs e g 14 17 BACKUP iX User Manual 18 232 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide e Any combination of the above e g 14 16 18 22 24 Example To copy from Idev 7 and 8 and have BACKUP open ldev 7 and then ldev 8 gt COPY T1 DRIVES 2 SEQUENCE 7 8 TO T2 Notes e DRIVES option is required when SEQUENCE specifies more than one drive e The SEQUENCE option may not be used with VOLID for ANSI labeled tapes options Option SINGLEDRIVE MULTIDRIVE Specifies that the copy is to be made using a single drive but staging the contents of the tape s to the disk MULTIDRIVE is the default operation and the MULTIDRIVE option is not required but is provided for consistency s sake Syntax with Output target tape gt COPY TO T2 SINGLEDRIVE Example To copy from Idev 7 to ldev 7 gt COPY T1 AUTOREPLY 7 TO t AUTOREPLY 7 SINGLEDRIVE To copy from Idev 7 to ldev 7 using OLM to handle the tape mounts gt COPY T1 AUTOREPLY 7 OLM st4x30 LABEL IN VOLID AHE471 TO amp t OLM st4x30 LABEL OUT VOLID AHE47 2 AUTOREPLY 7 SINGLEDRIVE Notes e A single drive copy will consume more disk space than the original backup consumed due to overhead such as the Backup directory and other overhead such as tape block headers A single drive copy is
551. s 16 characters except valid MPE iX group and account names is illegal If specified the invalid objects are reported in the SHOW listing MPE iX syntax selection of POSIX files On MPE iX 5 0 and beyond all internal file selection is done in POSIX format by default This requires the reinterpretation of MPE iX syntax in order to qualify POSIX files Leading is translated such that if it is the first component of an MPE namespace filename then the full name is converted to a POSIX name with current account and group filled in as necessary Therefore any fileset specification that includes an as the first component of the name implies a store of files in both the POSIX and MPE iX namespaces and will be reported as a POSIX namespace store The following conversions are automatically performed e are reinterpreted as meaning the entire system e is reinterpreted as meaning all files in the current directory and all directories beneath it e are reinterpreted as logonaccount meaning all the files in the logon account and all directories and groups beneath them e means the current directory Mixed filesets MPE namespace filesets may be specified in MPE iX or POSIX format and POSIX filesets may be specified in MPE namespace format where possible MPE format and POSIX format fileset specifications may be mixed in the same command Including multiple filesets
552. s Scratched Home pool TAPE 2400FT 000201 15 10 02 99 00 00 00 PART TAPE 2400FT 000202 12 09 28 99 00 00 00 PART TAPE 2400FT 000203 14 09 28 99 00 00 00 PART TAPE 2400FT 000204 10 01 99 00 00 00 PART TAPE 2400FT 000205 10 10 01 99 00 00 00 PART TAPE 2400FT 000206 10 10 01 99 00 00 00 PART TAPE 2400FT 000207 12 09 29 99 00 00 00 PART TAPE 2400FT 000208 12 09 29 99 00 00 00 PART TAPE 2400FT 000209 12 10 02 99 00 00 00 PART TAPE 2400FT 000210 13 09 30 99 00 00 00 PART TAPE 2400FT 000211 3 09 30 99 00 00 00 TAPE 2400FT 000212 3 10 02 99 00 00 00 TAPE 2400FT 000213 2 09 27 99 09 27 99 TAPE 2400FT 000214 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO NOU PWD PRPRPPR bBWNH OW Note in this example that tape volumes 000201 through 000210 have PART as their home pool meaning that they were explicitly assigned to that pool while the other tapes were borrowed from the global pool The AVAILABLE qualifier The AVAILABLE qualifier of SHOW POOL lists all tapes in the specified pool that are available for use by STORE namely new tapes that have never been used and tapes that have been scratched The following command lists all available tapes in all pools BACKUP iX User Manual 17 194 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian gt SHOW POOL AVAILABLE Media DDS TAPE TAPE TAPE TAPE TAPE TAPE TAPE TAPE SALESDB CTAPE The EXPIRED qualifier Length Seq 90M 1 2400FT 2 2400FT 3 2400FT 1 2400FT 2 2400FT 3 2400FT 1 2400FT 2 2400FT 3 150FT
553. s Voll Vol2 found in library RINGO DLTLIB Volume in RINGO DLTLIB port 0 Vol ID or A to abort will be displayed If the operator enters a volume ID BACKUP iX will attempt to move the volume from the port to the drive If the operator replies A BACKUP iX will abort the operation BACKUP iX User Manual 14 164 Chapter 14 ORBiT Library Manager OLM Operations Guide If the library does not have a mail port then BACKUP iX will abort with the message None of volume Voll Vol2 found in library RINGO DLTLIB An unneeded volume in the required drive If BACKUP iX needs to mount a particular volume in a particular drive but OLM indicates to Backup iX that a volume is already in that drive the messages Required LDev 14 is already loaded with volume Vol2 OK to use Ldev 14 for volume Voll Y N will be displayed on the console The latter message will remain recallable until satisfied or Backup iX is aborted To direct Backup iX to remove the volume that currently occupies the drive and load the needed volume into the drive the operator should reply Y At this point Backup iX will attempt to move the volume in the drive back to its previous location See below for exceptions associated with this operation If the drive cannot be made available for the Backup iX volume then the operator should reply N and BACKUP iX would abort the operation with LDev 14 not available Nee
554. s above are covered e The AUTOREPLY option of all commands that read from and write to tape e The OLM option of commands that read from and write to tape e The DRIVES and SEQUENCE options of the STORE and RESTORE commands e The COPY command Considerations for various backup device types For the most part BACKUP automatically adjusts itself based on the type of backup device to be used The backup device type is determined by BACKUP from the driver configuration for the specified Idev s Data compression Most backup devices such as DLT drives and most DDS drives offer hardware data compression For backup devices that support data compression and have this feature enabled consider disabling BACKUP s software data compression set COMPRESS 0 in the store command to reduce BACKUP s CPU usage Be aware that using software compression with such drives could actually result in data expansion However for high speed drives e g DLT using the BACKUP compression functionality could increase store performance by minimizing the amount of data sent through the SCSI port to the drive If you are unsure which approach is best you may want to run some performance tests ORBIT technical support is available to assist you and may have suggestions Software data compression is enabled by default and can be disabled by including COMPRESS 0 in the STORE command for example BACKUP iX User Manual 13 140 Chapter 13 Backup Devi
555. s detected in the volume set are reported to SYSLIST which is by default sent to STDLIST VERIFY utility The VERIFY utility is a stand alone program that has many of the features of the READALL VERIFY command in BACKUP For example to verify the backup tapes on ldevs 7 and 8 which are configured as device class TAPE and complain if any errors or more than one retry have occurred in the backup FILE T DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt VERIFY T AUTOREPLY 7 8 DRIVES 2 ERRORS 0 RETRIES 1 Use VERIFY s HELP command for more information about VERIFY and its command options and JCWs Comparison of READALL VERIFY command and the VERIFY utility These two facilities are quite similar but however have some key differences The READALL VERIFY command by default uses MPE IO routines that are below the file system It will use the file system if the JCW BACKUPFILESYS is set to 1 The VERIFY utility always uses the file system The READALL VERIFY command can read blocks much larger than 32760 bytes while the VERIFY utility will read blocks only up to that size The READALL VERIFY command will check that the data on the tape has been correctly compressed and encrypted if compression and or encryption features were used during the backup Determining backup contents using LISTDIR The LISTDIR command may be used to determine the contents of any tape or disk backup With LISTDIR a Tape Status report is also generated fo
556. s ese 18 326 restoring from esse ee ee ee ee eke Re ee 111 11 126 Step by step guide ee ee ee 6 76 step by step restore guide iese 11 131 Store directory ees ee ee ee AR ee ee 18 282 verifying integrity ees see ee ek ee ee ee 15 170 Disk device Changing on restore eessen 9 105 DISKETO S eniti niin De es eg 26 424 DLT backup device 13 142 22 387 430 DO comimand es EE EE Seeds ee Se pe Se 18 235 DUMP command ees sesse ee ee ee ee 5 53 18 236 APPEND options see ER eaten Ed ee ee Eed 18 237 AUTOREPLY option 18 238 BACKUP Optionen iia ee ee ee ee ee 18 238 CYCLE option ese ee ee ee ee ee 18 239 DRIVES Option ese se se eke ee ee ee ee ee 18 239 LABEL Option se Eg Me RR hates ii 18 240 MAXERRORS option ees ee ee ee ee 18 240 MAXRETRIES option esse see ees ee ee ee 18 241 NOLABEL OPDHON ee se ee ee ee ee ee ee 18 241 OEM Options EE Ee ee eN Ee EG eg Pb ed 18 242 PROGRESS option ees ee ee ee ee ee ee 18 243 SEQUENCE OPHON ee ee ee se Re ee eee 18 244 SHOW option ese ee ee ee ee ee Ee ee ee 18 244 MOLID ODHONE sir EG EE ee Eg ua 18 246 EJECTDAT command file sesse sees eee 21 375 BACKUP iX User Manual 437 Index Encrypted backup iese ees se se ee ee ee ee ee AA ee 4 46 Password protected ies se ee ee ee ee 4 47 restoring TOM ee ees ee ee ee Re ee ee ek ee 18 283 die Melle ER a ted cr eeentes 430 ENCRYPT OPHON ees ees ee e
557. s not specified the directory is read from the file BACKUPDF Example To list the directory of a tape backup using a store directory which was saved under the name MONDIR in the current group of the logon account enter gt LISTDIR T DISKDIR MONDIR Option ENCRYPT Specifies that store volumeset has been secured or encrypted the encryption method and key If ENCRYPT is not specified for an encrypted backup or if its attributes are specified incorrectly an error message is issued and files are not restored Note Encryption keys are case sensitive Note If this option is specified when restoring from a backup that was not encrypted an error is issued and the LISTDIR command is aborted Syntax BACKUP iX User Manual 18 253 gt LISTDIR Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide ENCRYPT encryptionmethod key keyfile1 keyfile2 1 Parameters encryptionmethod key keyfile1 keyfile2 Examples The encryption algorithm used for STORE specified as an integer value 0 to 2 as follows 0 No encryption keyword protection only 1 Fast proprietary algorithm the default 2 DES Data Encryption Standard algorithm 3 AES Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm The key used for encryption of up to 8 alphanumeric characters which can include special characters other than quotes and spaces The encryption key is case sensitive lower case characters are
558. s related options may be passed through BACKUP s INFO string RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT INFO BACKUP command Once the command is executed BACKUP automatically terminates Batch mode To run BACKUP in batch mode from a job stream create a standard batch job JOB FULLB OPERATOR SYS FILE T DEV TAPE IRUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT STORE T EXIT EOJ The BACKUP installation tape includes several job streams for performing backups that generally automate and secure the backup function ORBiT supplied job streams can be customized for use in any environment If modifying job streams it is recommended that the modified versions be placed in an account other than ORBIT to prevent them from being overwritten on an update or reinstallation of BACKUP 2 25 Chapter 2 Program Operation BACKUP iX Operations Guide Tape Manager amp Librarian When BACKUP is run TML if installed is automatically loaded The program TML PUB ORBIT also called the Wizard module is supplied to all customers with the installation demo But if this program is expired or not present in the BACKUPPL group the Tape Manager amp Librarian features will not be available If TML is active and is configured using TMLCONF to automatically scratch backup generations and their related tapes scratching is done as soon as BACKUP is invoked This frees up as many tapes as possible before any new backup is performed A messag
559. s that were used for the restore The JCW is displayed by SHOWJCW RESTOREPROCESSES RESTOREJCW RESTOREJCW is an output JCW which returns a value that indicates whether the restore was successful or not The JCW is displayed by SHOWJCW RESTOREJCW Note The RESTOREJCW is cumulative and if multiple events have occurred reflects the most severe error that may have occurred during the restore and is indicated by the highest JCW value For example if one or more files specified for store did not exist value 7 and one or more files could not be stored because they were open for write access value 8 the STOREJCW would be set to 8 if the program were then to terminate abnormally the STOREJCW would be set to 99 Values for RESTOREJCW are Value Meaning 0 No errors Syntax error in command Error while opening internal utility file s Error while opening indirect file Ph OO N gt Error while opening backup device file BACKUP iX User Manual 22 391 Chapter 22 JCWs BACKUP iX Reference Guide 5 Error in scanning files to be restored 6 Error occurred during execution 7 Either one or more files specified for restore does not exist or error in finding matching files 8 One or more files not restored because they were open for write access 99 Initial value when B is launched and indicates program terminated abnormally Notes BACKUP sets the system JCW to a
560. s up to and including 1020 The end of a label is determined by the end of consecutive message numbers Message numbers within each label must also be consecutive and the 6 lines that contain dynamic information must be kept together no blank lines in between in the order shown To alter horizontal spacing insert blank spaces at the beginning of each line following the message number To change the keyword descriptions simply change the wording as desired Fields can be removed from the right side of the label by deleting the keyword and its corresponding A line can be cleared by removing all text following the message number or similarly it can be changed to hard coded text by excluding all Ts on the line Previewing the tape identification label If experimenting with tape label formatting the TMLABPRT program may be run to preview results This program generates dummy values to produce a label representative of the tape identification label that will be printed by the LABEL command This preview label is displayed on the monitor screen before actually printing the label Refer to Chapter 21 Programs Command Files and Scripts in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for more information Automatic label printing Tape identification labels are printed automatically upon completion of store if the following two conditions are met 1 The TMLPRINTLABELS configuration option is enabled refer to the Configuration section in this
561. se either the CWD or LOCAL option to explicitly restore POSIX namespace files into an account Option AUTOREPLY Automatically REPLYs to console requests for the specified Idev s Syntax gt RESTORE AUTOREPLY ldevlist Idev Logical device number of tape drive ldevlist The logical device number s of the backup device s for which BACKUP should automatically reply specified in one of the following formats e A specific Idev e g 14 e Arange of ldevs e g 14 16 e Selected Idevs e g 14 17 e Any combination of the above e g 14 16 18 22 24 Examples To restore from Idev 7 and have BACKUP automatically REPLY to the console request gt RESTORE T AUTOREPLY 7 To restore from Idevs 7 8 and 9 with REPLYs for Idevs 7 and 8 done automatically gt RESTORE T DRIVES 3 AUTOREPLY 7 8 Notes e The AUTOREPLY option is invalid and ignored for a disk backup e Ifthe SEQUENCE option is not specified the AUTOREPLY option determines the order in which the backup devices are opened e The AUTOREPLY option may not be used with the VOLID for ANSI labeled tapes option Option BACKUP Specifies the particular backup in an appended backupset from which to restore BACKUP iX User Manual 18 275 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax gt RESTORE BACKUP backupspec backups
562. sends a move request to OLMRPCD which does the move and returns a status to BACKUP ix OLMRPCD also provides support for some tape drive peculiarities For example for some libraries an instruction must be sent to the drive to put the volume online after the library robot has moved a volume to the drive OLMRPCD provides this functionality The program that requests drive operations like this is OLMRPCD itself This means that if a library drive is not connected to the same host as the library robotics then OLMRPCD must be run on more than one host the host with the library robotics and the host with the drive A program called PORTMAP is responsible for routing the various olm commands and status returns across the network It must be run even if all this is happening on the same host In client server terminology the OLM Cl and BACKUP iX are clients and OLMRPCD is a server In provider consumer terminology the OLM Cl and BACKUP iX are consumers and OLMRPCD is a provider Library device configuration OLM supports complex library configurations For example a library with 3 drives can be configured as follows the Library Host HostA has the robotic control and one drive connected to it two other systems in the network HostB and HostC each have a single drive connected to them Library HostA Library Host Robotics Controller 4 gt SCSI Device I O In this configuraiton all commands for moving volumes and oth
563. ser Manual 16 176 Chapter 16 Maximizing Performance BACKUP iX Operations Guide Note The MAXBLOCK option should not be used if the anticipated restore is to be from a backup device that cannot support the maximum block size of the backup device to which the store was performed e g storing to a 7980 and restoring from a 7978A Likewise the MAXBLOCK option should not be specified for a disk backup if the intention is to dump to a backup device that cannot support the maximum block size Note The BACKUPBUFSIZE JCW can be used instead of MAXBLOCK and allows a specific block size to be explicitly set Refer to Chapter 22 JCWs in the BACKUP X Reference Guide for more information Using a filebuffer If storing to a slow backup device e g 7974 specifying the FILEBUFF option can improve performance for a non deferred backup by permitting additional parallel processing Refer to the discussions of deferred backups in Chapter 5 Backup Methods in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide in this manual for more information Not locking store bits A significant amount of the time during a backup is spent locking the store bits of all files being stored at the beginning of the backup to prevent them from being accessed and then unlocking the store bits at the end of the store to release them The locking and unlocking of store bits can be disabled by using the NOLOCK option of the STORE command Using NOLOCK reduces the overall backup d
564. sing fast backup devices iii ees ee ee ee ee AR ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 16 177 1 Tape Manager amp Librarian esse ee ee 17 178 this chapte oisinn ae ne ees 17 178 Anoverview of TML EE EE GE Re GER Ee Ee ee ee ee ee rise Ee gee 17 178 Bel EE EE OE EE E 17 179 GeMeratlOns AE ER ER RE N 17 184 Tapes and Pools isi Ee ER se AE Eg seed shades Ee ge eg Ne Ee ee GR Eg 17 189 Backup Schedule ManagemenNE iese ee ee Re ee ee AR ee ee 17 198 Tape Identification Labels se ee ER AA Ge Ee RR RA RR Re ee ee ee 17 200 Elle Registers EE GE Ge ER EE Ee Ge RE N ve Ge Ge Ee 17 204 GonfiguratieN ss sed len ie eet ad ke ti a gies ee 17 210 Storing with Tape Manager amp Librarian iese ek ee ee ee 17 213 Restoring with TML Restore Wizard ees ee ee ee ee ee ee 17 215 Reference Guide ss 1 8 BACKUP Commands ccececececeeeeeeeeeeeneeenees 18 222 In this Chapter N 18 222 Syntax conventiOnS eee iner AR AA Re AA ee ee ee ee ee ke ee ee ee 18 222 xi BACKUP iX User Manual BACKUP Command list ee ee ee ee ee ee AR ee e 18 222 GOPY SEE AE Ee EE SE EE EE ieee eee 18 223 DOSEER EE ea ees i are EE E 18 235 DUM Piss EE EE ER EE EE N 18 236 RARR EE EE AE T 18 246 EULLBAGKUP ES EE gee a dee ene ee see es 18 246 HELP iS achat tree Oe ee ee GER teen Eases Re 8 18 247 EISTDIR EE Re AE EE EEN SE DR Se ted ER tel tee eae ee 18 249 LISTIREDO REMME a lon ets Geared 18 258 PARTBAGKUP 4 st ed cate alae hen ee
565. sion or job logons during synchronization are not desirable BACKUP prevents new job and session logons by dropping the job and session limits to 0 0 immediately before the synchronization point and raising them to their prior level once all users are resumed Note No attempt is made to prevent HIPRI session or job logons BACKUP iX User Manual 7 88 Chapter 7 Online and Zero Downtime Backup BACKUP iX Operations Guide Excluded sessions Two jobs sessions are automatically and unconditionally excluded from a backup the logical system console and the session or job running BACKUP The console is excluded to allow the operator to reply to requests from BACKUP If the console is moved from its default ldev of 20 the session on the ldev to which it was moved will be excluded A warning message will be sent to that session notifying the user that the console has been reassigned In this case the session on ldev 20 would be suspended but CTRL A access at the system console would still be available The job or session running BACKUP is excluded to allow BACKUP to continue running to complete the backup Invoking dependent processing during an online backup Four methods are provided in BACKUP for recognizing the particular points at which an online backup Online or ZDT may be exited or interrupted Such an interruption could be for the automatic performance of an action or notification of an operator or user to
566. sm for distributing data and software to other systems and sites Archiving involves backing up data that is no longer needed for online access but which may someday be required For this purpose files are usually backed up to tape for long term storage and then purged Overview The BACKUP iX package is a high performance backup utility which replaces the MPE iX STORE and RESTORE commands and the DBSTORE program which are used in the performance of system backups BACKUP minimizes or eliminates the need for operator intervention in performing backups and reduces the amount of time and system resources required for backups It improves upon the MPE supplied utilities in several areas e By using special compression techniques BACKUP reduces the amount of time and storage media needed for backup Either a 2 1 2 5 1 or 4 1 compression algorithm may be used Tape savings can be up to 80 with time savings of 70 or more e Unattended backups may be performed using various methods compression to reduce media requirements deferred backup using disk for temporary storage of data that does not fit on tape disk backup with later dump to tape when convenient backup to multiple tape drives and multiple backups appended to a single tapeset e A unique Zero downtime online backup functionality permits users to access files normally for both read and write purposes while those files are being stored A special logging function ensu
567. specified For example to restore from a backup encrypted using the fast algorithm and a blank key BACKUP iX User Manual 9 108 Chapter 9 Restore Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide gt RESTORE T ENCRYPT Restoring onto any HPe3000 BACKUP can be used to restore files onto any HPe3000 system running the same operating system as the computer from which the files were stored i e MPE V or MPE ix This includes computers that are not licensed to use BACKUP BACKUP makes this possible by writing a copy of itself with its RESTORE function unrestricted onto the beginning of every store volumeset To restore files MPE iX RESTORE is used to restore the BACKUPPL program and message catalog from tape then BACKUP is run to restore the BACKUP format data files Performing a restore onto a system lacking BACKUP The following procedure shows how to restore files onto a system that is not running BACKUP as well as when recovering onto a licensed system on which BACKUP is not installed Before beginning the following are needed e The first tape in the backup which contains a copy of the BACKUPPL program and BACKUPMC the BACKUP message catalog in MPE iX STORE format e The tape of the backup volumeset which contains the store directory typically the last tape in the backup e Any additional tapes containing the files to restore Once these materials have been prepared follow these steps 1 Log o
568. split knowledge dual control key handling procedures These files can be stored in different places with differening access control lists applied to them to split the key knowledge between multiple users The contents of these two files must be 32 48 or 64 characters of hexadecimal 0123456789abcdef data as strings which represent 128 192 or 256 bit keys The keys in these two files are converted to their binary equivalents and then XORed one against the other to produce the final key that is then used for encryption and decryption Note The key must be remembered since it is required for decrypting the files when restoring If the key is not known for restore files cannot be restored and it is impossible for ORBIT or anyone else to determine the key Examples To encrypt the backup using the fast algorithm and a key of PROTECT BACKUP iX User Manual 18 323 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt STORE T ENCRYPT 1 PROTECT To encrypt the backup using the AES algorithm and a key files of KEY1 PUB ORBIT and KEY2 PUB SYS gt STORE T ENCRYPT 3 KEY1 PUB ORBIT KEY2 PUB SYS To encrypt the backup using the DES algorithm and a key of SECRET gt STORE T ENCRYPT 2 SECRET A default encryption method the fast algorithm and default encryption key eight spaces will be assigned by default if they are not specified To encrypt the backup using the fast algori
569. ssion percentage 95 required size of filebuffer 1651 sectors 0 40 megabyte s total amount of disk space stored 5024 sectors 1 23 megabyte s total number of tape errors 0 0 errors in store directory total number of tape retries 0 0 retries in store directory This store took 0 hours 3 minutes 0 seconds kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk of files size Ksectors Mb file type kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk oO oO oO program files IMAGE database files KSAM files VPLUS files SPOOL files ASCII files BINARY files s Byte stream files Symbolic links O OON OOOOO Oo O OON OOOOO ea aa AA AAA AA N O OOLWOOOOO Device links 02 02 423 not modified in past 7 days 23 not modified in past 30 days 02 23 not modified in past 6 months 5 02 1 23 not modified in past 1 year kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk CE FF OE E OE F E EE ea dad 2 2 2 2 RR RR RR RR RR Refer to Chapter 24 Reports in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for an explanation of the reports generated by STORE BACKUP iX User Manual 6 78 Chapter 7 Online and Zero Downtime Backup Unlike conventional backup utilities which require exclusive access to files during the entire store operation BACKUP through the fun
570. store Wizard in a batch job Reporting changes When performing a restore with Restore Wizard that involves a single backup reporting is done in the same manner as in a conventional restore However if a restore of files with Restore Wizard that spans multiple backups is performed each backup s restore information is shown separately Operational notes for Restore Wizard When using Restore Wizard the following issues should be considered in planning backup strategy DBRESTORE option The DBRESTORE option may not be used when restoring using Restore Wizard Encrypted backups Backups may be encrypted to protect data on tapes from being read by unauthorized users If Restore Wizard is being used however only a single encrypt key is allowed The designated encrypt key will then be used for all backups Labels During restore Restore Wizard ignores any specified tape volume labels Instead the correct volids are retrieved from the TML database and used during restore to ensure that the correct tape volumes are used BACKUP iX User Manual 118 Chapter Il Restoring Files BACKUP offers various techniques for selecting and specifying files for restore and several run time parameters that can be used to govern a restore In this chapter Find information on these topics e Identifying backups for a restore e Identifying tapes for a restore e Selecting files to restore e Specifying restore device s e Specifying store
571. store based on last label state change date and optionally time same as SDATE option The state change timestamp tracks when a file was last modified as well as when the file s label containing security and ownership info was last modified SELECT Selects files for store based on filecode type and or size SEQUENCE Specifies the order for opening multiple backup devices Must follow DRIVES option SETDATE Saves backup date and time for future use by GETDATE also may be used to force desired backup date SHOW Defines display format of information about files stored SYNCWAIT For an online backup delays synchronization indefinitely or until a specified time TAPEDIR Specifies if a tape backup s store directory should be written to a separate tape volume and the number of copies to write VOLID Specifies ANSI format tape labels and the volids for up to eight backup volumes ZERODOWN Performs a Zero downtime online backup of Native Mode files Option ADATE See the page titled Options xDATE ADATE CDATE DATE MDATE and SDATE Option APPEND Appends the backup to an existing backupset If APPEND is specified for the first backup to a tape volumeset the command is rejected To create a new appended backup volumeset thereby overwriting all backups on tape omit the APPEND option Note Use the BACKUP option on the first backup in an appended volumeset and with the APPEND option on the following appended backups The BACKU
572. storestore xDATE relop datetimespec filesetexcluded filestorestore localexclude globalexclude Filesets are defined the same as for MPE Traditional MPE ix files may be specified in file group account format where group and account default to current if not specified and may include the and wildcards in any position POSIX files are specified in directory basename format File ranges may be specified for both MPE and POSIX files using regular expressions Neither the starting nor ending file need exist Note Ranges cannot be specified with MPE syntax Note For fileset exclusion ranges cannot be specified for POSIX filesets BACKUP iX User Manual 18 270 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide filestorestore Filesets specified for inclusion in the store or restore filesetexcluded Filesets preceded by a minus sign are excluded and multiple exclusions may be specified for any fileset The minus sign must have a leading space if specified for exclusion of POSIX filesets localexclude Fileset preceded by a minus sign excluded from the fileset specified for inclusion globalexclude Fileset preceded by a comma and a minus sign excluded from all specified filesets XDATE Imposes date restriction one of the following values BDATE Backup date and optionally time only on Restore from tape with Restore Wizard DATE Last state change date and optionally ti
573. t Suite 600 Oakland CA 94618 U S A Feedback received from you is greatly valued and will be collected for use in future revisions of the manual We appreciate your contribution to the excellence of this product xvii Installation Guide BACKUP iX Operations Guide Installation Procedures BACKUP is shipped on a DDS cartridge or other requested media All BACKUP installations include the optional Tape Manager amp Librarian module either a demonstration copy if not purchased or a permanent copy if purchased Installing BACKUP The BACKUP iX package is installed into the ORBIT account through the installation program ORBINSTP PUB SYS which performs some installation tasks and then streams two jobs to complete the installation The ORBINSTP PUB SYS program e Creates the ORBIT account if it does not already exist e Creates the MGR ORBIT user as account manager if this has not already been done e Restores the files from the installation tape The jobs streamed by ORBINSTP include e Logging on as MGR ORBIT e Creating additional groups in the ORBIT account when those groups are not found there e Transferring files from PUB ORBIT the PUB group of the ORBIT account into other groups unless they already contain those files e Creating the TMLDB database from a supplied schema if it has not already been created e Setting up the BACKUPPL program e Setting a User Defined Command UDC to make using BACKUP easier To
574. t enter gt DEFAULT CYCLE RETENTION 30 KEEP 2 DEFAULT TAPE Displays current tape attributes and sets default attributes for new tapes Syntax MED IA mediatype gt DEFAULT TAPE LEN GTH measurement ses SIZ E classification CYCLE pool Parameters MEDIA Type of media Specify the backup device class for MEDIA the media type to cause TML to automatically select the media appropriate for that device when the backup is performed BACKUP iX User Manual 19 353 Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide For example if storing to device class TAPE TML will select volumes with a media of TAPE if storing to DAT TML will select media DAT etc Note To instruct TML to select volumes or media based on something other than device class use a file equation when performing the store mediatype User assigned media type alphanumeric string of up to 8 characters beginning with an alphabetic character and containing no embedded spaces LENGTH Freeform tape length used for display purposes only For media measured in length such as tape or cartridges specify the number of feet For DAT and other media measured in time indicate the number of minutes of storage time measurement Freeform alphanumeric string of up to 6 characters surrounded by single or double quotes if it contains embedded spaces SIZE Identifies the size of the media that should be selected f
575. t same as 1 e LAST meaning the last backup in the backupset This is the default e A number preceded by a minus sign indicating a backup relative to the last backup May be used in combination with LAST e g LAST 1 e A number preceded by a plus sign indicating a backup relative to the first backup BACKUP iX User Manual 18 226 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide May be used in combination with FIRST e g FIRST 1 Backupname An alphanumeric string of up to 8 characters first character must be alphabetic FIRST and LAST are reserved and cannot be used as a user defined backupname Note If the BACKUP option is not specified when copying an appended backup LAST is assumed Example To COPY bkup1 from the appended backup tape on drive 7 gt COPY T1 BACKUP BKUP1 AUTOREPLY 7 TO T2 To COPY the LAST backup from an appended backup tape on drive 7 as bkupcopy to the tape on drive 8 gt Copy T1 Autoreply 7 To T2 Autoreply 8 Backup BkupCopy The option BACKUP LAST is not required to be specified with the source tape in the COPY command shown above as this is the default action for an appended source tape Option CYCLE This option is available with the COPY command only with the Wizard TML module With Input source tape This option is used when the source tape is created using TML store It specifies the TML cycle
576. t above includes all files and internally generates the following BACKUP command gt STORE Full SETDATE DBSTORE SHOW AUTOREPLY 7 This command then automatically replies to the tape request and sends the SHOW listing to the console Note See coverage of the STORE command in this chapter for details on the STORE command options and their parameters HELP Provides help on BACKUP commands HELP is provided either by Direct access or by Interactive access using the help subsystem in BACKUP a hierarchy of menus and submenus In HELP one can find information on BACKUP Changes Commands JCWs Spool files TML commands and TML reporting Syntax Direct access To access a specific HELP article BACKUP iX User Manual 18 247 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide gt HELP helpentry ALL keyword Interactive subsystem access To access the interactive HELP subsystem from the BACKUP prompt simply enter help The HELP menu is then displayed see below gt HELP To exit the HELP subsystem gt E XIT Note Both BACKUPPL and the Help system use the same prompt gt Parameters helpentry A BACKUP command or any valid Help entry keyword A valid keyword for this command as shown in a KEYWORD list following a menu or submenu ALL Display all information available for this command including syntax paramete
577. t the resulting filebuffer will leave sufficient disk space for other processing To ensure that a specific amount of system disk space will be preserved while allocating a filebuffer specify a negative value as the parameter of the DEFER or FILEBUFF option in the STORE gt STORE T DEFER 4000 Disk backups A disk backup creates the equivalent of a tape backup in a set of permanent files on disk Restoring a file from a disk backup requires only a fraction of the time required for restoring from tape since disk can be scanned and positioned much faster than tape Disk backup is additionally useful for such common tasks as backing up program source files or data base files prior to updates or maintenance The backup files may permanently remain on disk perhaps on a special volume class within the system domain or on a nonsystem volume or can be dumped to tape at a convenient time using the DUMP command The store process for a disk backup is nearly identical to that for disk to tape The exceptions are that a user assigned four character file name is specified in place of the tape device and that a series of permanent files are created to contain the stored data Procedure for disk backups The following is the procedure for performing a disk backup 1 Perform a store specifying the name of the disk backup fileset 5 52 Chapter 5 Backup Methods BACKUP iX Operations Guide The name may be up to 4
578. t volume containing online log files and all such subsequent volumes will be required Note f the store volumeset consists of only one tape volume the tape drive must be put back online once the store directory has been read Replace the tapes on the tape rack 8 Retrieve any reports that were printed for this restore such as the SHOW listing Check them for proper completion of the restore and file them in a safe place Step by step disk backup restore guide The following is a step by step guide for performing a restore from a disk backup Run BACKUP and issue a RESTORE command specifying the disk backup fileset and the restore fileset list RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt RESTORE POLD SOURCE MFG SOURCE MFG KEEPNEW SHOW DATES or referencing an indirect file RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt RESTORE POLD SOURCE MFG OLDPROG SOURCE MFG KEEPNEW SHOW DATES 2 Specify any RESTORE options required e g SHOW OLDDATE KEEP KEEPNEW etc See Chapter 18 BACKUP iX Commands in the BACKUP iX Reference Guide for details on commonly used options for a restore from a disk backup 3 Retrieve any reports that were printed for this restore such as the SHOW listing Check them for proper completion of the restore and file them in a safe place BACKUP iX User Manual 11 131 Chapter 11 Restoring Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide Restore example The following listing illustrates a res
579. taining the desired version of the files are determined by BACKUP and TML working together then a console request is displayed as needed for the restore tapes This extremely powerful feature unique to BACKUP saves time and manual effort when restoring files and is especially useful for sites that have no operator Note The Restore Wizard requires the use of TML BACKUP s Tape Manager amp Librarian and is available only to owners and users of the TML module Restores with Restore Wizard can only be performed from backups created using TML Enabling Restore Wizard The Restore Wizard disabled by default can either be enabled via a configuration option or by setting a JCW When the BACKUPTMLRESTORE JCW is set to a value other than 0 Restore Wizard is enabled and the setting in the configuration file is overridden This feature makes it possible to enable Restore Wizard system wide but disable it for certain users or to disable it system wide but enable it for the system operator BACKUP iX User Manual 17 215 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide TMLRESTORE configuration option The TMLRESTORE configuration option in the TMLCOMF file describes whether Restore Wizard will be used or not YES TMLRESTORE NO If not specified the default for the TMLRESTORE parameter is NO Note The BACKUPTMLRESTORE JCW overrides this setting set to 1 to enable or 0 to disable the Restore Wizar
580. tc Example To scratch the fourth most recent generation of the PART backup cycle gt SCRATCH CYCLE PART GEN 4 SCRATCH FILE Unloads file information from the file register for specified generations while leaving the generation information intact Syntax gt SCRATCH FILE S cyclespec GEN ERATION value Parameters cyclespec The name of a cycle or for all cycles If is specified TML loads file information for only those generations which require loading GENERATION Absolute or relative generation number value Specified in one of the following formats e All generations exclude the GENERATION parameter e Most recent generation specify O e Absolute generation number e g 33 e Relative generation number e g 1 means the next to last generation 2 the previous generation etc BACKUP iX User Manual 19 358 Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Example To unload file information for the first generation of the ARCHIVE cycle gt SCRATCH FILES ARCHIVE GEN 1 SHOW CONFIG Displays information about TML configuration Syntax gt SHOW CONFIG OFFLINE Parameters OFFLINE Print output on device class LP under formal file designator TMLLIST as well as STDLIST Example To display the current TML configuration gt SHOW CONFIG SHOW CYCLE Displays cycle configuration and information about activ
581. te and time restrictions may be global applying to all files in the fileset list or local applying to a particular fileset Global date and time restrictions are specified using the ADATE DATE or SDATE MDATE or CDATE options of the STORE command For example to store all files on the system that were modified on or after December 20 1999 gt STORE T MDATE gt 12 20 99 To more specifically qualify entries that were modified at or after lunch time on the same date gt STORE T MDATE gt 12 20 99 12 00 Local date restrictions are specified by appending the date restriction to the corresponding fileset For example to store all files in the ACCT1 account which were accessed after July 31 1999 as well as all files in ACCT2 regardless of last access date enter the store using this expression gt STORE ACCT1 ADATE gt 07 31 99 ACCT2 T Selection by filecode or type Files can be selected by their filecode using the SELECT CODE construct of the STORE command or by file type using the SELECT TYPE construct of the STORE command File codes are assigned by the operating system or backuppl and may be viewed using the MPE ListFile utility File type descriptions are listed below and in the glossary For example to select all files with a filecode of 727 gt STORE T SELECT CODE 727 To select all files except IMAGE databases enter an expression using the IMAGE fi
582. tected and encrypted backup Backups may be password protected or encrypted to protect data on tapes from being read by unauthorized users Data encryption is especially appropriate for backups that are sent off site The ENCRYPT option of the STORE command may be used to specify that a backup be encrypted which of three encryption algorithms to use and what word or series of characters to make the encryption key 4 46 Chapter 4 Backup Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide The three algorithm choices include a fast proprietary algorithm the DES Data Encryption Standard algorithm and the AES Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm The AES and DES algorithms offers better protection and both conform to a standards but because they are considerably slower they are recommended only in cases in which they are specifically required The DES encryption key password consists of up to 8 alphanumeric or special characters The key is case sensitive and if a key has fewer than 8 characters is padded with space characters If no key is specified 8 space characters are used The AES encryption key is handled differently in that the key is not specified inline but is merged from two external files This allows for split knowledge dual control key handling procedures These files can be stored in different places with differening access control lists applied to them to split the key knowledge between multiple users The contents of thes
583. tected from write access when all activity logged during the store process is written to the backup When this is complete a message reports that the synchronization point has been reached With a traditional Online backup this condition must be determined by the operator and communicated to BACKUP Thus the traditional Online backup synchronization point is that moment when the operator replies to the syncpoint request and may be imposed at any time after the files have been stored Logging continues until synchronization is performed Following the syncpoint the remainder of the logging data is stored and the backup is completed At that time any files left open for write access are effectively not stored and are therefore reported as being excluded from the backup For a ZDT backup an operator reply is not needed Online backup operation During a traditional Online backup all changes to permanent files on the system are tracked by a proprietary logging process then stored to the backup tape or disk file after all selected files have been stored Since no log files are created to capture data that is being written to files very little disk space is required for Online backup to track changes to files and the use of system resources by the backup monitoring process is minimal Once all files have been stored a message notifies the operator and a REPLY request is displayed on the console At that time users must release
584. ter referenced BACKUP iX User Manual 18 224 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide CYCLE For a copy with the Wizard product specifies the cycle s into which to copy DRIVES Allows multiple backup devices to be used in parallel with the source tape LABEL Writes a tape label containing volid expiration date and comment to each tape volume OLM Permits copy to one or more tape volumes in a robotic tape library ON VOLUME Performs a Mpe iX command on target tape volume change DO command SEQUENCE Specifies the order in which multiple backup devices associated with the target tape are opened SINGLEDRIVE Indicates that the copy will use a single drive for the copy operation by staging the copy to disk PROGRESS Specifies the time interval at which the percentage completed progress messages need to be displayed Option AUTOREPLY Automatically REPLYs to console requests for specified Idev s Syntax with Input Source tape gt COPY T1 AUTOREPLY ldevlist TO Syntax with Output target tape gt COPY TO T2 AUTOREPLY ldevlist Idev Logical device number of tape drive Idevlist The logical device number s of the backup device s for which BACKUP should automatically reply specified in one of the following formats A specific Idev e g 14 A range of ldevs e g 14 16 Selected Idevs e g 14 17 Any combination of the above e g
585. ter the following at the command line gt STORE T DIRECTORY Note Itis recommended that the DIRECTORY option be imposed for all full backups to ensure recoverability using a current system configuration Warning The DIRECTORY option on a Restore command brings back all directory structures for the volumesets involved in the restore thereby replacing those structures on your system This can have unpleasant side effects such as replacing current passwords with old ones Backups restorable onto any HPe3000 Tapes written with BACKUP can be restored onto any HPe3000 system running the same operating system as the computer from which the files were stored i e MPE V or MPE ix This includes computers that do not have BACKUP installed This feature therefore guarantees recoverability even when the restore must be onto an unlicensed system such as a disaster recovery site BACKUP accomplishes this by always writing a copy of itself with an unprotected STORE command at the beginning of every tapeset in MPE iX STORE format Should the need arise BACKUP is Restored first and then run to restore the BACKUP format files from tape Warning BACKUP does not write itself onto backups that have been performed using ANSI labeled tapes 4 48 Chapter J Backup Methods Unlike conventional backup tools which can only perform backups directly to tape BACKUP can store to permanent files on disk or use disk for in
586. termediate storage when performing a deferred backup to tape Additionally special add on modules can extend functionality in several ways With the ONLINE module BACKUP can store files while open for read and write access while with the DELTA module BACKUP will store only changes within a file instead of entire files following a full backup The Wizard module TML is a valuable resource in creating and maintaining a successful tape library and with the OLM module BACKUP tape handling commands can interact with tape media located within a robotic tape library The selection of a backup method depends on the computer environment system resources uptime requirements and Data Processing staffing In this chapter Discussions and examples of various methods and procedures for performing backups are provided here with important operational notes Find information on these topics e Unattended backups e Tape backups versus disk backups e Deferred backups e Disk backups e Appended backups e Network backups e Online and Zero downtime ZDT backups e Delta backups The following commands options and JCWs are discussed as the topics above are covered e The DUMP and PURGE commands e The APPEND BACKUP DISKDEV FILEBUFF and DEFER options of the STORE command e The BACKUPFILEBUFFERTAPERI JCW Unattended backups An unattended backup is a backup that can be performed without an operator in attendance Several methods
587. tet eth tae ees eat ie 20 365 Syntax conventiOnS cece rA AR AA Re A ee ee ek ee ee ee 20 365 OLM Cl command lit ee ee AR ee Re ee RA ee ee ee ee ee 20 365 OLM Cl Parameter DefinitionS iese ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Re ee ee ee 20 366 DERE RE EE Aten 20 367 eel lae RR RE HEN 20 367 BAAR EE NE AE LE ONE EE 20 367 AE EE EE EE ER ON 20 368 DELETE 2E n EN Se Ee teas ee ee ee Eg Oe Ee De De eet cata gts 20 368 EXPORT te ss oe ee ee eo ge ene alii eee ee 20 368 IMPOR EK EO EE MR EE n 20 368 BEER EE AO TE EE EE EN N 20 369 LOAD SESSE RE RS EG DE GE DE ole 20 370 MOE EE EE EE NE EE 20 371 ell len RE ON EE 20 371 ONEINE RE EE en EE OR NE OE ON 20 371 ed ER EE N 20 372 RENAME as fed ee tired a ei 20 372 SET DRIVES is is ren ee ge n ee sd daca tated ela gs des 20 372 UNLOAD SERE Ge Ee ED GE deen ae De ee vee 20 373 UNLEOGK EE erat errs eee Ee DE EE EE 20 373 VALIDATE SEE ERG GE RE ot et oes ee 20 374 2 1 Programs Command Files and Scripts 21 375 Inthisichapter EE EE ERG a ea Re ee ER GE ee 21 375 Summary A E tes sek Ge ee A nega tk de ge ip gece pe nee 21 375 Programs Command Files and Scripts descriptions 21 375 2 2 Moe EA EE EE 22 381 Inthis chapter ese ie goes AE Be Roe oe ie gies 22 381 Input and output JOWS cece ee ee Re Ee GR AA Ge ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 22 381 Job Control Words summary esse ee se ee ee ee ee ee Re ee Ge Re ee ee 22 381 xiii Job Control Words descriptionS ie
588. than or equal to lt gt not equal to datetimespec Date and optionally time in the following format datespec time BACKUP iX User Manual 18 344 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide datespec Date or days in one of the following formats mmidallyylyy days Days relative to today time Time of day in the form hh mm using 24 hour time Example Use ADATE to store all files that start with the letter a are in the DATA group in the AP account and were last accessed on or after 10 00 AM 2 15 2003 gt STORE A DATA AP T ADATE gt 2 15 2003 10 00 Use CDATE to store all files in the DATA group and AP account that were created after 10 00 AM 2 15 2004 gt STORE DATA AP T CDATE 2 15 2004 10 00 Use MDATE to store the file APREG DATA AP if it was modified before 2 15 2004 STORE APREG DATA AP T MDATE lt 2 15 2004 Use DATE or SDATE to store all the files on the system having a label state change on or after 12 30 PM December 1 2001 gt STORE T SDATE 12 1 2001 12 30 Use DATE or SDATE to store all the files that had a label state change during the past five days STORE T SDATE gt 5 Use DATE or SDATE in a local date selection expression to store all files in the account ACA that had a label state change before December 1 2001 and all files in the ACB account gt STORE ACA SDATE lt 12 1 2001 ACB T Z O pd 77 e Ifthe GENERATI
589. that the key is not specified inline but is merged from two external files This allows for split knowledge dual control key handling procedures These files can be stored in different places with differening access control lists applied to them to split the key knowledge between multiple users The contents of these two files must be 32 48 or 64 characters of hexadecimal 0123456789abcdef data as strings which represent 128 192 or 256 bit keys The keys in these two files are converted to their binary equivalents and then XORed one against the other to produce the final key that is then used for encryption and decryption Note The key must be remembered since it is required for decrypting the files when restoring If the key is not known for restore files cannot be restored and it is impossible for ORBIT or anyone else to determine the key Example To decrypt and restore a backup which was encrypted using the proprietary algorithm and a key of PROTECT gt RESTORE T ENCRYPT 1 PROTECT To decrypt and restore a backup using the DES algorithm and a key of SECRET gt RESTORE T ENCRYPT 2 SECRET To decrypt and restore a backup using the AES algorithm and the key files of KEY1 PUB ORBIT and KEY2 PUB SYS gt RESTORE T ENCRYPT 3 KEY1 PUB ORBIT KEY2 PUB SYS Both the encryption method and key will default if not specified For example to restore from a bac
590. that the tape is unlabeled is displayed Storing with proprietary labeled tapes The LABEL option is used with BACKUP commands such as STORE that write to tape to create a tape label Values specified with the LABEL option are assigned to each tape in the store volumeset BACKUP tape labels can include up to three attributes Volsetid The ID of each tape volume up to a maximum of 6 characters in length Expiration date The date on which each tape expires if blank the tape is considered expired Comment Optional freeform alphanumeric string of up to 40 characters for user comments For example to write a label with volsetid ACCT an expiration date of 09 20 99 and a comment of ACCOUNTING TRANSACTION REGISTER to each tape volume in the backup gt STORE T LABEL ACCT 09 20 99 ACCOUNTING TRANSACTION REGISTER Storing to a proprietary labeled tape When a labeled tape is being written to the volsetid specified in the LABEL option must match the volsetid of the tape label or the tape This is verified by BACKUP and if the volsetids match the expiration date in the label is checked against the current date If either the specified volsetid does not match the volsetid on tape or the tape has not expired the problem is reported to the system console and a console request is issued asking if the tape can be overwritten A REPLY must then be entered to specify whether the tape should or should not be overwritten
591. the AP data base from the tape volumeset PART with the directory contained on the volume ACT 124 gt RESTORE T APDB DATA AP LABEL PART VOLID ACT124 Notes e The VOLID option cannot be used with the SEQUENCE option unless used with the OLM option To specify the drive opening sequence using ANSI labeled tapes list the volids in the desired order in the VOLID option e Ifthe VOLID option is used on ANSI labeled tapes the LABEL option must also be specified e The VOLID option for ANSI labeled tapes may not be used with the AUTOREPLY option unless used with the OLM option Option VOLSET Restores files to a specified volume set Syntax gt RESTORE VOLSET volumesetname volumesetname Specifies the name of the volume set Example BACKUP iX User Manual 18 304 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide To restore files to the volume set PRIVATE_VOL_A gt RESTORE T VOLSET PRIVATE VOL A Notes e If there is insufficient room in the specified volume set whatever files can be restored in the available space are restored and the files that cannot be restored are listed in the Files Not Restored report e Ifa file s group and account do not exist on the volume set specified with VOLSET the files are not restored and are listed in the Files Not Restored report Impact The VOLSET option can effect existing Options e If the CREATE option is specified to cre
592. the DRIVES option in combination with the AUTOREPLY option the DRIVES option must be specified before AUTOREPLY e The DRIVES option may not be specified in combination with the APPEND option otherwise the command is rejected e In earlier releases of BACKUP the DRIVES option was called TAPES BACKUP iX User Manual 18 262 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Option LABEL Validates the volsetid specified against the volsetid in the BACKUP tape label prevents READALL if they do not match By default the BACKUP tape label is not checked Syntax gt READALL LABEL volsetid volsetid Specifies the user defined tape volumeset ID of the tape volume set has a maximum of 6 alphanumeric characters and is case sensitive Example To ensure that the READALL tape has a volsetid of ARCHIVE gt READALL T LABEL ARCHIVE Notes If used on ANSI labeled tapes the VOLID option must also be specified Option MAXERRORS Maximum number of errors parity or transmission errors allowed on any tape or tapeset after which the operation is terminated prematurely If not specified no limit is imposed on the number of errors that may occur on any tape Note The MAXERRORS option is invalid and ignored for a disk READALL Syntax gt READALL MAXERRORS numerrors numerrors Count of allowable errors on any tape specified as an integer value Example To terminate a tape
593. the cause is presented the effects are described and suggestions are made for user action Baseline store must be restored first The traditional backup technique of restoring in reverse order from multiple backups last backup first while specifying the KEEP option cannot be used when restoring from baseline and delta stores Rather the baseline store which is always performed earlier than its related delta stores must be restored first The Delta monitor stops If a system abort occurs you must run a new baseline store to begin a new Delta backup cycle If the Delta monitor stops for any reason it cannot resume tracking from the point where it left off The user must start a new Delta backup cycle by performing a baseline store A delta store cannot be run without a corresponding baseline store A file cannot be restored from a delta store If the baseline version of a file has not been restored or has been purged after the baseline restore but prior to the delta restore the delta version of the file cannot be restored If this occurs an error message will indicate that the file cannot be restored The file will be listed in the Files Not Restored Report with the error message Baseline not restored A delta store may contain an entire file if the file was built after the baseline store ran In such a case a delta restore will restore the entire file However the baseline restore must still be done first BACKUP iX User M
594. the diskdir file or the disk backup fileset excluding 4 digit suffix maximum of 16 characters optionally qualified with group account or partially or fully qualified Posix filename Example To purge the disk backup fileset FULL gt PURGE FULL BACKUP SYS or gt PURGE SYS BACKUP FULL READALL Verifies the integrity of a tape or disk backup Any errors detected in the backup are reported to SYSLIST which is by default sent to STDLIST BACKUP iX User Manual 18 259 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Syntax gt READALL tapefile readalloption diskfile readalloption AUTOREPLY 1dev LABEL volid VOLID volidlist The following options are available with version 6 50 and newer k k CYCLE cyclename GEN gen DRIVES numdrives SEQ UENCE ldev dirldev ENCRYPT encryptionmethod key keyfile1 keyfile2 MAXERRORS numerrors MAXRETRIES numretries OLM hostname libraryname NO ANSI ON ERROR QUIT ERROR ON RETRY DO mpecommand VOLUME PROGRESS minutes Parameters tapefile Backreferences a file equation for the tape drive diskfile Name of disk backup fileset as a maximum of 16 characters first character must be alphabetic and optionally qualified with group and account The diskfile may be specified using any legal MPE or POSIX syntax filename or may backreferen
595. the drive was loaded from For tape drives the sixth column indicates what process id PIN for MPE and host has the drive locked If a drive is locked only the locking process may load or unload tapes it For tape drives the seventh column indicates whether an option to put a volume on line after the robot loads it has been set or not This is generally not needed and should only be used when advised by ORBIT technical support Loading and unloading tape volumes The LOAD command is used to move a tape volume in a library from a slot to a library drive and the UNLOAD command is used to move a tape volume in a library from a library drive to a slot LOAD This example LOAD command will cause the volume in slot 9 to be loaded into drive 1 olm gt LOAD LIBRARY pogo mylib SLOT 9 DRIVE 1 This example will move the volume 000012 to drive 3 regardless of what slot the volume is in olm gt Default library pogo mylib drive 3 olm gt LOAD 000012 UNLOAD This example UNLOAD command will cause the medium in drive 1 to be unloaded into slot 9 olm gt UNLOAD LIBRARY pogo mylib DRIVE 1 SLOT 9 If the SLOT parameter is not specified then OLM attempts to locate the prior slot from which the medium came and attempts to return it there If that is not possible the defaults if any are used Here is an example olm gt Default Library pogo mylib drive 1 olm gt Load Slot 9 olm gt UNLOAD
596. the user will be prompted for a volid See Chapter 13 ORBIT Library Manager in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide for information on using the OLM CI to label media for use in a tape library with BACKUP Syntax gt DUMP OLM hostname libraryname NO ANSI Parameters hostname The optional name of the host machine running the OLM provider is indicated This is optional if the command is performed on the OLM host Note that the hostname must terminated with a colon This name must be resolvable through a DNS lookup and the OLM daemon must be running on the named host libraryname The name given to the library Because multiple libraries can be on the same host a library name must be entered in this field Note that the library name is case sensitive ANSI This literal will indicate ANSI labels are to be used in the operation See also the BackupOLMANSI MPE CI variable BACKUP iX User Manual 18 242 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide NOANSI This literal will indicate ANSI labels are NOT to be used in the operation NOANSI is the default when the MPE Cl variable BackupOLMANSI is not bound or is set to False See also the BackupOLMANSI MPE Cl variable Error messages The following error messages may be returned when using the OLM option OLM requires that you specify the drive logical devices with the AUTOREPLY or SEQUENCE keywords OLM requires that you specify a LABEL and VOLI
597. these volume s are required for restore ABC123 ABC126 DirLDev specified If dirldev has been specified BACKUP then opens the maximum number of Idevs that would be needed for the restore starting with the earliest ones and releases the other drives It will retain the store directory volume on its Idev if it contains data to be restored BACKUP iX User Manual 13 147 Chapter 13 Backup Devices BACKUP iX Operations Guide For example if you specified DRIVES 5 SEQUENCE 14 18 14 but only four tape volumes were required for restore including the store directory volume mounted on Idev 14 BACKUP would open only Idevs 14 15 16 and 17 BACKUP prompts the user as follows to indicate the available ldevs that will be used for restore The following devices s will be used for restore 15 16 17 BACKUP closes the unnecessary drives and displays the following message 5 drives specified for restore only 4 needed ldev s 18 released DirLDev not specified If dirldev is not specified BACKUP will have already opened all drives to search for the store directory so will determine which mounted tapes are needed and begin to restore from those drives If tapes are mounted that are not needed for the restore yet additional tapes are required BACKUP will prompt for the user to mount the particular tapes that are needed If no more tapes are required the unneeded drives will be released Processing first tapes When BACKUP
598. thm and a blank key gt STORE T ENCRYPT To protect the backup using a key of SECURE gt STORE T ENCRYPT 0 SECURE Option FILEBUFF See the article titled Option DEFER Option GETDATE Facilitates partial and incremental backups by generating a DATE gt datetimespec option using the internally saved prior backup date and time which is set by either the SETDATE option of STORE or the FULLBACKUP command Note Specifying GETDATE in combination with the ADATE CDATE DATE MDATE or SDATE option is not allowed therefore whichever option is specified last will be ignored Syntax The GETDATE option can be used in two ways in the STORE command As a part of file selection specification If the DATE gt datetimespec has to be local to a specific fileset of the storeset use the syntax gt STORE fileset GETDATE As one of the store options If the DATE gt datetimespec has to be applied to all the files in the storeset use the syntax BACKUP iX User Manual 18 324 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide GETDATE Examples To perform a partial backup using the internally saved date and time of the prior backup which was performed on 12 10 2000 at 7 00 PM gt STORE T GETDATE This command internally generates the BACKUP command gt STORE T DATE gt 12 10 2000 19 00 To perform the above partial backup on the customer database
599. thoroughly The names of suspect files are displayed Syntax gt RESTORE KEEPBAD Example The KEEPBAD option is used to restore a file whether an error occurs or not For example this command restores the file TRANLOG from an online backup though it was open for write at the synchronization point gt RESTORE T TRANLOG KEEPBAD Option KEEPNEW The KEEPNEW restore option will restore the more recent version of a file If the date and time of one or more files being restored is older than or the same as that of the existing file s on disk the backup file is not restored the existing file is preserved Syntax gt RESTORE KEEPNEW Example To restore only files that have been changed more recently than their counterparts on disk gt RESTORE T KEEPNEW Notes e The KEEP KEEPNEW KEEPOLD and DBRESTORE options may not be specified in the same RESTORE command e The KEEPNEW and KEEPNONPVZ options may not be used together e fa file does not have a State Change date the modification date is used to determine which version of a file is newer BACKUP iX User Manual 18 288 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide Option KEEPOLD The KEEPOLD restore option will restore the less recent version of a file If the date and time of one or more files being restored is newer than or the same as that of the existing file s on disk the backup
600. those that do not change such as program files and packaged software files and exclusion of those files from regular backups e Using BACKUP s powerful file selection options files may be selected by wildcard exclusion creation date last access date last modification date and or file type e g IMAGE KSAM PROG VPLUS etc File type descriptions may be found in the glossary Selective backups require a strict procedure to make sure that changed files within that cycle are backed up In this example a static backup of all the object programs in PUB SYS and the SUPPORT account is performed gt STORE PUB SYS SUPPORT T SELECT TYPE PROG These files could then be excluded from regular backups resulting in fewer files being stored on a frequent basis Archival backup Archival backups are performed for the offline long term storage of seldom used or unused files It is recommended that unused files be purged from the system periodically to make space available for new files Before purging files however they should be stored to tape and retained in case they are needed at some later time Such a backup is referred to as an archival backup Archival backups are made easy by BACKUP s powerful selection options and the PURGE option of the STORE command The PURGE option causes files to be purged once they are successfully stored Archival backups are typically based on files last access dates
601. ting to STDLIST terminal in session mode device class LP in job mode FILE T DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt STORE PROGRAMS T SHOW The above command could alternately be issued in immediate mode with an INFO string FILE T DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT INFO STORE PROGRAMS T SHOW To store all the files on the system which were modified on or after January 1 2002 at 12 30 PM FILE T DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt STORE T DATE gt 01 01 02 12 30 To store all the files on the system which were modified since yesterday BACKUP iX User Manual 18 311 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide FILE T DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt STORE T DATE gt 1 To store all the files on the system except those in PUB SYS with the most detailed SHOW information The SHOW listing is sent to STDLIST terminal in session mode device class LP in batch mode RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt STORE PUB SYS SHOW LONG DATES SECURITY OFFLINE In the above example no disk or tapefile was specified so it defaulted to a tape file equal to the current user name To store all the files specified in the file FILELIST which specifies the file FILE1 in the current group account the files in PROD GL and all files in the SYS account except those in the groups PUB and UTIL EDITOR ADD 1 FILE1 PROD GL 2 SYS PUB SYS UTIL SYS
602. tion is not specified a default of 1 drive is used Example To restore in parallel from two backup devices gt RESTORE T DRIVES 2 Notes e If using the DRIVES option in combination with the AUTOREPLY or SEQUENCE option the DRIVES option must appear first in the command line Option ENCRYPT Specifies that the store volumeset has been encrypted using the proprietary AES or DES encryption algorithms and the key or key files If ENCRYPT is not specified for an encrypted backup or if its attributes are specified incorrectly the files will not be properly decrypted Note If this option is specified when restoring from a backup that was not encrypted it is ignored Syntax gt RESTORE ENCRYPT encryptionmethod key keyfile1 keyfile2 encryptionmethod Encryption algorithm specified as an integer value BACKUP iX User Manual 18 283 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide 0 no encryption password protection only 1 fast proprietary algorithm the default 2 DES Data Encryption Standard algorithm 3 AES Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm Key or keyfiles The key used for encryption of up to 8 alphanumeric characters which can include special characters except quotes and spaces The key is case sensitive keys less than eight characters are padded with blanks If no key is specified 8 blanks are used The AES encryption key is handled differently in
603. tion of the STORE command Determining required volumes When restoring files BACKUP displays a list of the tape volumes in the store volumeset that contains the specified fileset To display the required volumes without actually restoring any files use the PREVIEW option of the RESTORE command as shown FILE T DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt RESTORE T PUB GLFILES SHOW DISKDIR PARTMON PREVIEW Standard unlabeled BACKUP iX store volumeset created Dec 7 1999 17 36 50 Searching for store directory Retrieving and preparing store directory Building intermediate scratch files Selecting files to restore 23 files selected for restore store volumeset contains 1546 files NOTE this is a restore preview only no files will actually be restored Locating data blocks to restore The following volumes are required for restore 3 4 7 For unlabeled tapes the sequence numbers of the volumes within the store volumeset are displayed for labeled tapes the tape volids are displayed Also note that the DISKDIR option was used to access a store directory on disk If the store directory were not on disk its tape volume would need to be mounted Specifying files using restore command syntax Files can be selected for restore in a variety of ways The following methods may be used alone or in combination e Selection by volumeset e Selection by MPE iX and POSIX filesets and wildcards e Including multiple files
604. tions are presented individually in more detail A description syntax diagram parameter list and examples are provided for each command and option Syntax conventions BACKUP iX syntax as of release 6 78 is reflected KEYWORD Literal keywords Input User input May select one element Must select one element eter May repeat prior element s L May repeat prior element s use comma if parm is repeated 23 Must enter certain prior element s may enter others or All keywords and user input are required unless enclosed within bracket characters Bracket characters are not input as part of the command unless they are shown quoted BACKUP command list Copies a backup from one tape drive to another Re executes the last or a recent command Copies data from a disk backup fileset to a tape drive EXIT Exits the BACKUPPL program BACKUP iX User Manual 18 222 Chapter 18 BACKUP Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide PARTBACKUP Performs a partial system backup to tape or disk PURGE Purges a disk backup fileset or store directory file READALL Verifies the integrity of a tape or disk backup Re executes the last or a recent command with optional editing RESTORE Restores files from tape or disk that have been stored by BACKUP VERIFY Synonym for READALL STORE Stores files to tape or disk COPY Copies a backup from one tape drive to anoth
605. tn edie ete an 18 258 PURGE ich MR Ed nine el need 18 259 READAE EE eesti Ne eee soe te Sth SE Aces ets 18 259 side EE dean cece aca EE RE EE 18 267 RESTORE ME EE EE haat Shade N 18 268 STORE se foe ee ED Ee ee 18 308 1 9 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands 19 347 In this chapter ses ENE se eatin ee 19 347 ende ei ee ER EE N 19 347 TML Wizard Command list ee ee ee ee Re ee Ge Re ee RR ee ee ee 19 347 ADD FIL RE AE ORE OE NE 19 348 ADD TAPE 1 ee ese de Se EE Ee Se ene ER de SE LO 19 349 CHANGE TAPE eine tire ates etic aes tee tes eee a os ee 19 350 DEFAULT CYCLE aces ae aes Oe Gees 19 352 DEFAULT TAPE rtn Anita lie Anas auld Sate esse gee a 19 353 DELETE GYGLES sisess ste oe ees eg icc ake Reese ek see hia ee e be ee eek kg 19 354 DELETE TAPE Ms bies e a anne ad 19 355 LABEL CY GUE se Ee asie oe de see ee DERE ee ee Be be Ge Ee 19 355 LABEL TAPE se St Ee tts RS ee eee eN Eg Ee 19 356 PREVIEW CYCLE is on ere ed eie ke age ese a ee os 19 357 SGRATCH CYCLE Ge EE GP nade ee DE GR Ge ge ee Ad Ge Ee 19 357 SGRATGHEILES EE EE EG Re Seen ee De Ge ee ee ee ee oe aS 19 358 lede el ER N EE ERK OR we 19 359 SHOW GYGLE Se se ee e se Ve eg ge ee aea red 19 359 SHOW PILE GR ee eee eee 19 360 SHOW POOL de see oe dee ee gee nil eee 19 362 SHOWTAPE EE ee EG EE EA Re EE eke ee Ee RR Ge Gee ge veg 19 363 xii BACKUP iX User Manual 2 0 OLM Command Line Interface Commands 20 365 Inithis chapter EER EE EE ees ed
606. tore This backup was ZERODOWN e The ZERODOWN option may be used with BASELINE or DELTA When a baseline or delta store is entered with ZERODOWN an informational message identifies the store as a ZERODOWN DELTA store ora ZERODOWN BASELINE store and indicates the name of the Delta backup cycle e g DAILY This backup was ZERODOWN DELTA with name DAILY This backup was ZERODOWN BASELINE with name DAILY BACKUP iX User Manual 18 346 Chapter 197 ape Manager amp Librarian Commands In this chapter With the addition of the optional Tape Manager amp Librarian module to BACKUP several extended commands provide a greater variety of functionality for managing backups and tapes All TML commands are documented in alphabetical order For each command a description syntax diagram and parameter list is shown Syntax conventions BACKUP iX syntax as of release 6 78 is reflected KEYWORD Literal keywords Input User input May select one element Must select one element May repeat prior element s L May repeat prior element s use comma if parm is repeated Must enter certain prior element s may enter others or All keywords and user input are required unless enclosed within bracket characters Bracket characters are not input as part of the command unless they are shown quoted TML Wizard command list A
607. tore from multiple backup devices in parallel FILE T DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT BACKUP iX 6 78 c Copyright 1991 06 ORBiT SOFTWARE INC 260ct06 12 37pm Wizard module 3 48 c Copyright 1990 01 ORBiT SOFTWARE INC BACKUP 1iX 61 DAYS I IN DEMO PERIOD Online module 61 DAYS I IN DEMO PERIOD Delta module 5 61 DAYS I IN DEMO PERIOD Wizard module 1 IN DEMO PERIOD gt RESTORE T ACCOUNT ABSTESTB GROUP ACCT DRIVES 3 AUTOREPLY 14 15 18 amp gt SHOW FILENAME PROGRESS 1 Will perform parallel restore from ldev s 14 15 18 Mount tape volume containing store directory on any dev This unlabelled BACKUP iX volumeset was created Nov 2 2006 13 16 13 on NMSTORE of BACKUP iX program found at beginning of volumeset Found backup 1 unnamed created Nov 2 2006 13 17 21 on dev 14 This unlabelled BACKUP iX volumeset was created Nov 2 2006 13 16 13 on Found backup 1 unnamed created Nov 2 2006 13 17 48 on dev 15 This unlabelled BACKUP iX volumeset was created Nov 2 2006 13 16 13 on Found backup 1 unnamed created Nov 2 2006 13 18 14 on dev 18 Searching for the end of backupset on volume 3 on ldev 18 Searching for store directory for backup 1 on all devs Store directory located retrieving information Building intermediate scratch files Selecting files to restore 2 files selected for restore store volumeset contains 2 files Beginning restore of 5024 sectors of disk space Locating data blocks to restore Restoring
608. tored date and time Volid of volume stored to VPLUS files SHOW CYCLE TYPE SHOW CYCLE TYPE SHOW FILE SHOW CONFIG LISTF TMLC SHOW FILE SHOW CYCLE TYPE SHOW FILE SHOW CYCLE TYPE SHOW FILE SHOW FILE SHOW CYCLE TYPE BACKUP iX User Manual 24 405 Chapter 24 Reports File generation reports Attribute reported BACKUP iX Reference Guide Commands ASCII files stored Binary files stored Compression percentage Creation store date Creation store time Cycle name Density of volumes stored to Dynamic files online Error count on each volume Expiration date File loading information Filebuffer size required Files stored count Files stored filenames Files not modified for 7 days Files not modified for 30 days File generation reports continued Attribute reported SHOW CYCLE TYPE SHOW CYCLE TYPE SHOW CYCLE STATS LABEL CYCLE SHOW CYCLE all modes LABEL CYCLE SHOW CYCLE CREATION LABEL CYCLE LABEL CYCLE SHOW CYCLE TAPES SHOW CYCLE STATS LABEL CYCLE SHOW CYCLE TAPES LABEL CYCLE SHOW CYCLE CREATION SHOW CONFIG SHOW CYCLE STATS SHOW CYCLE STATS SHOW CYCLE TYPE SHOW CYCLE FILES SHOW CYCLE MODIFIED SHOW CYCLE MODIFIED Command Files not modified for 6 months Files not modified for 1 year Files not modified for 2 years Generation number IMAGE files stored KSAM files stored SHOW CYCLE MODIFIED SHOW CYCLE MODI
609. total number of retries 0 total number of blocks 4 508 sectors 0 12 MBytes time beginning 13 17 48 ending 13 18 58 elapsed 00 01 10 amount of disk space stored 1728 sectors 0 42 megabyte s KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK RR RR RR RR kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk BACKUP iX User Manual 6 77 Chapter 6 Storing Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide Tape statistics for volume 3 Volumeset Volume compression percentage 90 Backup 1 Name kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk total number of errors 0 backup ldev number 18 total number of retries 0 total number of blocks 9 1143 sectors 0 28 MBytes time beginning 13 18 14 ending 13 18 58 elapsed 00 00 44 amount of disk space stored 1568 sectors 0 38 megabyte s kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Label tape volume 3 as containing the store directory Store to ldev 14 completed drive released Store to ldev 15 completed drive released Store to ldev 18 completed drive released BACKUP iX version 6 78 list date 02Nov06 01 19pm store date 02Nov06 01 PATHNAME SST SECTORS CODE ABSTESTA FILES6 XL 4992 NMXL ABSTESTA FILES6 XXXX 32 781 LES STORED LES NOT STORED total number of blocks 13 1651 sectors 0 40 megabyte s compre
610. treams which provide certain functionality All such files except the installation programs are located in PUB ORBIT In this chapter Descriptions of all programs command files scripts and job streams what they do and how to operate them are included Summary list File types are described with the letters C and P C for command file and P for program EJECTDAT C Ejectsa DDS tape volume from a DDS drive replaced by TAPECTRL INITIAL P Initializes and validates the BACKUP program LOADTAPE P Places an available tape drive online ORBINSTP P Installs or re installs BACKUP SETDATE P Sets the prior backup date to a desired date SYNCUTIL P Detects when the synchronization point has been reached and REPLYs to the outstanding console request for synchronization TAPECTRL P Performs utility operations on DDS drives and other backup devices and is especially useful in unattended backup environments TMLABPRT P Previews TML tape identification labels VERIFY P Verifies a backup tape volume on multiple backup devices in parallel Programs Command Files and Scripts descriptions EJECTDAT The EJECTDAT command file can be executed to eject a DDS tape volume from a DDS drive It is useful for making sure that a DDS tape is not accidentally placed online and overwritten before it can be unloaded It is recommended that EJECTDAT be used in nightly backup job streams to protect the backup tape Note The TA
611. ts 3 through 5 to tape304 tape305 and tape306 olm gt RENAME LIBRARY hacker dltchg SLOT 3 5 tape304 To give a name to drive 3 in the library ditchg with the library attached to the host system hacker enter olm gt RENAME LIBRARY hacker dltchg DRIVE 3 pogo 23 SET DRIVE For some library drive configurations olm has to be configured to do particular operations after a load or unload There are two operations currently implemented put the volume online when the drive has not yet been opened in order to force MPE to do an AVR and force an eject after an unload operation to attempt to work around those drives that don t honor the rewind offline command These options should generally only be used when ORBIT technical support indicates it is necessary BACKUP iX User Manual 20 372 Chapter 20 OLM Command Line Interface Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide SET LibraryID DriveName DriveLocation operation Parameter operation The operations supported are ONLINE AFTER LOAD ONLINE NEVER EJECT AFTER UNLOAD and EJECT NEVER UNLOAD The UNLOAD command moves a volume from a drive into a slot If no SlotLocation is entered then the slot the volume was in prior to being loaded is used If olm cannot determine what slot that was then the first empty slot in the library is used Syntax UNLOAD LibraryID DriveID SlotLocation Examples olm gt UNLOAD LI
612. ts of the file directory of a tape backup located within a robotic tape library Only one library can be referenced at a time This option is available only with the OLM module installed and the OLM provider daemon background job running on the library host machine The LABEL and VOLID options are both required to identify each volume to the OLM database unless TML is used If TML is involved the volume labels will be automatically determined and passed to OLM A LISTDIR command must identify the directory volume by supplying at least one volume ID with the VOLID option for each drive in the library When a backup drive is indicated with the AUTOREPLY option each volume ID will be searched for the directory as if the operator were manually loading the volumes If the directory is not found in any of the listed volumes the operator will be prompted to import more volumes With TML the Restore Wizard will identify the directory volume load that volume on the first drive listed with AUTOREPLY and identify that drive as the directory ldev In searching for the directory volumes will be picked for a reel change from the volid list in the order listed with the VOLID option See Chapter 13 ORBIT Library Manager and Chapter 27 OLM Command Line Interface Commands for information on using the OLM Cl to label media for use in a tape library with BACKUP Syntax gt LISTDIR OLM hostname libraryname NO ANSI Para
613. type is a physical tape identification label which is optionally printed and affixed to each tape This TML labeling facility eliminates the need to use hand written labels for tape volume identification The internal label type used by TML is a BACKUP tape volume label containing the tape s volid written by BACKUP to the beginning of each volume TML references the internal tape label to verify that the correct volume has been mounted TML uses BACKUP tape labels which are different from MPE iX tape labels Refer to Chapter 12 Labeled Tapes in the BACKUP iX Operations Guide for more information about labeled tapes Note Although BACKUP tape labels support expiration dates TML does not make use of this facility This is because a user may scratch a tape that has not yet expired freeing it for reuse yet a store to this tape would fail because the tape had not yet expired Instead TML internally prevents protected tapes from being overwritten by rejecting unscratched tapes for store BACKUP iX User Manual 17 200 Chapter 17 Tape Manager amp Librarian TML Operations Guide External tape identification label specifications Tape identification labels are by default configured for printing on a removable adhesive label which can be replaced with every backup The default tape label specifications are e Avery 4052 removable tape labels which are 3 7 8 x 1 13 16 one across on continuous form stock e 10 characters per inch
614. uce various online and offline reports based on commands entered by the user In this chapter All reports produced by BACKUP and TML are listed with a description of each Documented BACKUP reports include e File Status e Online Status e Restore Status e Restore Tape Status e SHOW listing e Store Status e Store Tape Status Documented TML reporting includes e Summary of all TML reports organized by cycles files generations labels and tapes e All modes of TML s PREVIEW and SHOW commands File Status The File Status report displays summary information about the files stored including the number and disk space requirements of files by type and last modification date Files may fall into more than one category BACKUP iX User Manual 24 398 Chapter 24 Reports BACKUP iX Reference Guide kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk of files size Ksectors Mb file type kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk HERE RR HEHEHE HEHEHE program files HHEHHHHH HHHHHH HEHEHE IMAGE database files HHEHHH HH HEHEHE HEER KSAM files HEHEHEH HEER HHEHHE VPLUS files HHEHHH HH HEHEHE HHEHHH SPOOL files HHEHHH HH HHEHHH HEHEHE ASCII files HERE RR HHEHHH HEHEHE BINARY files HEHEHEHEH HHEHHH HHEHHE BYTE STREAM files HERE RR HHEHHE HHHHHE SYMBOLIC LINK files HHEHHH HH HHEHHH HEHEHE DEVICE LINK fil
615. uide disk11 131 RetentiOn iese se ee ee ER Ee RA ee ee ee ee ER ee ee 434 Scheduling bacKUDS iese esse ee ee ee ee ee 17 198 oetalCh is ESE EE E see cae eed 434 SCRATCH CYCLE command 17 185 19 357 SCRATCH FILE command esse ee esse sees 19 358 file register inconsistency eee 26 425 SCratehingss ss Ee es eiria 26 425 generations sees ese ee ee 17 184 17 212 AUTOMATIC si need ENS ea i 17 184 insufficient KEEP generations 17 185 manual see RE Ad wine 17 185 resource requirements se eke ee 17 204 unexpired ee ee ee ee ee nnn 17 185 updating file register ee ee ee ee ee 17 206 Security DrOVviSIONS ese ese ek ee ee See ACDs Selective backup ee Ee ee ee ee ee 4 43 SEQUENCE option of Restore DirLDeV a secede ck 18 242 18 294 SESSION ME EE eda aia Ee AE abled di 434 Session mode operation ese 2 26 18 311 SETDATE program s es 21 377 25 420 SHOW CONFIG commanid 19 359 24 412 FEDOriS SEER SE heat eee ee 24 412 SHOW CYCLE command sesse ee esse esse 19 359 CREATION mode ossai 17 186 24 413 EPOS e EE EN ae Ee Pe Ee Pe de Se 24 413 DIRECTORY mode se ese ee ee ee ee 24 413 EDORS RES ER A ee Ae 24 413 example ER ER OK ee aes 17 185 FILES MOJE rs EE ee ee eee 17 205 MODIFIED mode ees ee ee ee ee ee ee 24 414 PARMS mode ees ee ee se Re ee ee ee ee 17 183 BACKUP iX STATS mode sees ee see ee see 17 186 24
616. uired volumes It is the user s responsibility to account for SIZE when specifying volume requirements for each cycle How TML selects tapes TML selects tapes for store using the following rules 1 TML attempts to select the tapes from the pool of available tapes for the specified cycle In chronological order blank tapes are selected from the cycle pool first followed by tapes in the order scratched 2 If insufficient tapes are in the cycle s pool tapes are selected from the global tape pool Within the global pool blank tapes are selected first followed by tapes in order of scratching Tapes selected from the global pool are only borrowed they are returned to their home pool when they are scratched for reuse 3 If insufficient tapes are in both the cycle s pool and the global pool the store is not started The user must either a Add new volumes into TML into the current cycle s pool or the global pool b Transfer volumes from other cycles pools into the current cycle s pool or the global pool c Free up tapes by scratching one or more generations of the current cycle or of cycles that use tapes from the global pool d Change the cycle configuration to reduce the number of required and or spare volumes Result of tape shortage The calculated number of volumes are selected and displayed at the beginning of the backup If insufficient volumes exist at the time the store is started the store is not performed
617. uld already exist e Spool files will not be restored if the CREATE GROUP construct is specified as all output spool files must reside in the OUT group of the HPSPOOL account e If the CREATE OWNER construct is specified the user is created in his home account not the HPSPOOL account Created users are assigned ND Non shareable Device capability which is required by the spooler Defragmenting during restore BACKUP is able to perform disk defragmentation during restore whereby files are reallocated on restore into larger pieces and small chunks of disk space are recombined into larger pieces BACKUP iX User Manual 9 106 Chapter 9 Restore Strategies BACKUP iX Operations Guide Defragmentation works best when performing an INSTALL as more disk space is available to work with but defragmentation can benefit any restore To defragment files when restoring the APPROD account gt RESTORE T APPROD DEFRAG Performing a system INSTALL To perform a system INSTALL the following are required e Acurrent SLT System Load Tape e A backup stored with the DIRECTORY option e The latest full and partial backups We suggest that the restore be performed in a batch job if possible and that the included files for the SLT System Load Tape within SYSGEN be modified to include the EDITOR program on the SLT Use the following procedure to perform a system INSTALL that includes a restore from a session 1 M
618. uration but does not prevent files from being accessed during the store therefore the integrity of the backup cannot be guaranteed For example to perform a faster system backup by not locking store bits gt STORE T NOLOCK Note To avoid potential integrity problems the NOLOCK option should be used only when no users will be logged on during the backup thereby assuring no access to files Using multiple backup devices BACKUP is capable of splitting a backup between up to 64 backup devices of the same type by storing and restoring in parallel Refer to Chapter 13 Backup Devices in the BACKUP X Operations Guide in this manual for details With the availability of inexpensive backup devices like the DDS and 8mm drives it may be cost effective to purchase multiple backup devices for the purpose of permitting this type of backup Of course sites that already have multiple backup devices dedicated to multiple HPe3000 systems can pool the drives and alternate between systems Using fast backup devices All backup devices are not equal when it comes to speed Some are much faster than others The speed of a backup device is determined by various factors including the storage technology e g tape versus DDS the size of the on board cache and whether the drive has hardware data compression BACKUP iX User Manual 16 177 Chapter I7 T ape Manager amp Librarian In this chapter Find detailed i
619. ut JCW which allows you to display and count non archivable files in the FILES NOT STORED report By default these files are not displayed or counted SETJCW BACKUPCOUNTNONARCHIVE 1 or SETVAR BACKUPCOUNTNONARCHIVE TRUE BACKUPDBQUIESCE BACKUPDBQUIESCE is an input JCW which may be set to enable or disable DBQUIESCE calls This JCW should only be used when advised by ORBIT Technical Support SETVAR BACKUPDBQUIESCE value Where value is specified as an integer value either 0 1 or 2 0 Use DBQUIESCE and traditional ZDT code wait state This is the default case 1 Use only DBQUIESCE Do not use ZDT 2 Use only traditional ZDT method wait state Do not use DBQUIESCE This value may be useful when attempting to store databases that have been opened exclusively Note Use of DBQUIESCE does not work with exclusively opened databases BACKUP iX User Manual 22 384 Chapter 22 JCWs BACKUP iX Reference Guide BACKUPDISCDUMPFLIMIT BACKUPDISCDUMPELIMIT is an input JCW that restricts the file size of the disc to disc backup to a maximum value set in the JCW BACKUPDISCDUMPFLIMIT can now be increased beyond 32K but by keeping the file size to less than 2 GB would allow it to be FTP d SETVAR BACKUPDISCDUMPFLIMIT 1000 restricts the disc to disc backup to a 1000 records BACKUPEXPIRES BACKUPEXPIRES is an output JCW that displays the number of days left in the demo product SHOWJCW BACKUPEXPIRES The number of
620. vailable back up the current copies of the files on the system to a good tape or to disk restore the files from the bad tape onto the system store those files to a good tape and then restore the current copies Validating backups It is recommended that tapes be validated from time to time to identify errors which may exist and to ensure that all files on each tape can be read BACKUP implements a unique data identification scheme to ensure that all tape blocks are valid and to enable data to be restored from any portion of a tape even one that contains hard read or write errors This is done by writing a sequential identifier and various control information to each data block on the tape BACKUP iX User Manual 15 170 Chapter 15 Ensuring reliable backups BACKUP iX Operations Guide The integrity of these block headers the existence of all required data blocks and the consistency of the store directory can be verified using BACKUP iX s READALL command or the VERIFY utility that comes with BACKUP READALL VERIFY command READALL verifies tapes using one or more backup devices and can also verify a disk backup fileset VERIFY is a synonym for READALL For example to verify a volumeset using three tape drives FILE T DEV TAPE RUN BACKUPPL PUB ORBIT gt READALL T DRIVES 3 AUTOREPLY 14 15 16 To verify the integrity of the disk backup fileset TEST gt READALL TEST Statistics and any error
621. vailable in BACKUP for detecting and responding to tape errors and retries BACKUPTAPEERRORS Output JCW which returns the total number of tape errors that occurred on all tapes during store BACKUPTAPERETRIES Output JCW which returns the total number of tape retries that occurred on all tapes during store BACKUPMAXERRORS Output JCW that returns the total number of errors that occurred during store on the tape that had the most errors BACKUPMAXERRORSLDE V Output JCW that returns the Ldev number of the drive where the volume having the most errors was mounted READALL VERIFY only BACKUPMAXERRORSVOL Output JCW that returns the volume number of the volume having the most errors READALL VERIFY only BACKUP iX User Manual 15 169 Chapter 15 Ensuring reliable backups BACKUP iX Operations Guide BACKUPMAXRETRIES Output JCW that returns the total number of retries that occurred during store on the tape that had the most retries BACKUPMAXRETRIESLDE V Output JCW that returns the Ldev number of the drive where the volume having the most retries was mounted READALL VERIFY only BACKUPMAXRETRIESVOL Output JCW that returns the volume number of the volume having the most retries READALL VERIFY only MAXERRORS STORE command option which specifies the threshold maximum number of errors which if exceeded require that a tape should be terminated prematurely MAXRETRIES STORE command option which specifies the maximum number of retries at which a
622. ves are opened by volid not ldev For ANSI labeled tapes an attended restore may be indicated by specifying only the volid of the store directory volume BACKUP locates the specified tape volume on any drive opens it and thereafter automatically supplies the remaining volids of all tapes used in the restore Because the volid of the store directory volume has been specified the message will specifically ask for that tape Mount tape volume with volid ABC123 on any dev Searching for store directory for backup 1 An unattended restore may be indicated by mounting the tapes from the store volumeset on all drives to be used in the restore and specifying in the restore command the volids of all the mounted tapes Once the store directory volume is read BACKUP is able to determine the volids for the remaining tapes to be mounted Therefore only the volids for the first round of tapes need be specified However if volids are requested for tapes that are not needed an error in the processing does not result Note Both the LABEL and VOLID options must be specified when restoring from ANSI labeled tapes and the number of volume IDs specified cannot exceed the count indicated in the DRIVES option Calling for first tapes Once the store directory has been retrieved and processed BACKUP tells the user which tapes are required for restore The following volume s are required for restore ABC123 ABC126 For volumeset FULL
623. ward recovery Rollforward recovery recovers the database after a disk crash or other failure that damages the database Any missing transactions are physically applied by processing the log file against an older version of the database restored from a backup Use the RECOVER option of DBUTIL to enable the database Use the gt RECOVER command of DBRECOV to invoke Aollforward recovery BACKUP iX User Manual 7 89 Chapter 7 Online and Zero Downtime Backup BACKUP iX Operations Guide The transaction log file must match the database to which it will be applied For example the log file must begin with the first transaction applied after the database was stored because the entire contents of the log file are applied to the database on recovery Use the DBSTORE option of the BACKUP STORE command to set the dirty bit and the DBSTORE flag in the root file Start a new log cycle to match the log file with the version of the database stored e Use the ON SYNCPOINT option of the STORE command to disable logging at the synchronization point e Use the ON RELEASED option of the STORE command to start a new log cycle once the backup completes but before users access the database Note The process of starting a new log cycle requires that users exit the database so that the database can be closed If a new log cycle is not started and transaction logging remains enabled the following results could occur when performing a restore a
624. which may not be overwritten gt SHOW POOL FULL PROTECTED SHOW TAPE Displays information about tapes and their usage Syntax USA GE gt SHOW TAPE volset ERR ORS OFFLINE FIL ES Parameters volset The tape volumeset specified as e for all tape volumes BACKUP iX User Manual 19 363 Chapter 19 Tape Manager amp Librarian Commands BACKUP iX Reference Guide e Aspecific volid e g 000100 or 100 e Arange of volids e g 100 199 disallowed for alphanumeric volids e Selected volids e g D100 D102 D200 e Using embedded and wildcards e g D or D strings must be enclosed in quotes and ranges are disallowed e Any combination of the above e g 100 106 D100 E USAGE Default Information about the most recent use of each tape including tape attributes first use pool and expiration and scratch dates ERRORS The number of times each tape has been used as well as the number of errors and retries encountered on the last five stores to each tape FILES Information about files contained on tapes including store date and time cycle generation and modification date and time OFFLINE Print output on device class LP under formal file designator TMLLIST as well as STDLIST Example To print a report of all tapes and their usage to be posted on the tape rack gt SHOW TAPE OFFLINE B
625. with ON option 2 32 2 33 18 332 Volumeid sees EE ER adel ees Se Ee Pe gn oe Ee SU ia 436 VOLUMELABEL configuration option 17 213 Volumesetid iese ee ee ee eiai 436 Volumesets see ee ee Ee ee 6 62 11 121 436 VPEUSIGS ees eN ede ee 2s 6 61 11 123 selecting for restore 18 300 18 338 ER RE N 436 lee ER EE 436 Ges EE NE NE EA OE N 18 271 Wildcards for selecting files 11 121 17 207 18 270 18 310 19 361 do 11 121 11 121 11 121 17 207 18 270 18 310 19 361 11 121 18 270 18 310 19 361 Wildcards for selecting tape volumes 17 196 17 196 17 196 Wildcards for selecting tape volumesets 19 363 19 363 19 363 Wildcards to define filesets 6 59 6 59 J 6 59 6 59 BACKUP iX User Manual 445 Index BACKUP iX Zero downtime backKUD se ee ee ee ee ee 7 79 Zero downtime ee ee se ee ee 18 346 IMAGE transaction logging ee ee 7 89 unattended Zero downtime backup 7 88 BACKUP iX User Manual 446
626. xclusion in an indirect file specify the excluded fileset on the same line as the fileset from which it is being excluded Note Only filesetspecs may be specified in the indirect file other command options may not be included Specifying restore device s A restore may be performed from either tape or disk Disk backups may be restored from directly if DUMPed to tape files can be restored from tape just as if they had been stored directly to tape Restoring from tape If restoring from tape the drive is designated by backreferencing a file equation which defines the drives device class or Idev number For example to restore from device class DDS on ldev 14 the file equation can be either BACKUP iX User Manual 11 125 Chapter 11 Restoring Files BACKUP iX Operations Guide FILE D DEV DDS or FILE D DEV 14 The file designator in this example D is any user assigned value up to 8 characters and beginning with a letter If multiple backup devices are being used for restore they must all belong to the same device class and that device class must be referenced on the file equation Once the file equation has been set it is backreferenced on the RESTORE command by prefixing it with an asterisk gt RESTORE D Note No FILE parameters other than DEV and DEN may be specified on the file equation Restoring from a disk backup To restore from a disk bac
627. y ERR NO SUCH DRIVE e No such library ERR NO SUCH LIBRARY e No previous location e Incorrect volume mounted e No empty slot available Note that most parameters are keyworded e g the keyword drive must precede a drive identifier However volume id and device file are not This means that if you misspell a keyword e g driv it may get interpreted initially as a volume id for example The syntax error message that will be printed is most likely to say something like No such volume id than that the keyword is invalid Exception examples Needed volume not found in library by OLM If Backup iX needs a particular volume e g Vol1 but OLM determines the volume does not currently reside in the library and if the library has a mail port Volume Voll not found in library RINGO DLTLIB Volume Voll in RINGO DLTLIB port 0 Y N will be displayed If the operator replies Y then BACKUP iX will attempt to move the volume from the port to the drive via an empty slot If the operator replies N BACKUP iX will abort the operation If the library does not have a mail port then the Backup iX command will abort with the message Volume Voll not found in library RINGO DLTLIB None of needed volumes found in library by OLM When BACKUP iX needs any of a list of volumes e g Vol1 Vol2 but OLM determines that no volumes currently reside in the library if the library has a mail port None of volume
628. y REPLYs to console requests for specified Idev s Assigns a specified name to an appended backup by which it is later referenced Specify a cycle name for a baseline store Selects files for store based on creation date and optionally time Selects no compression low density medium density or high density compression Selects files for restore based on last label state change date and optionally time same as SDATE option The state change timestamp tracks when a file was last modified as well as when the file s label containing security and ownership info was last modified Equivalent to MPE iX s DBSTORE assures that all datasets are backed up if the root file is selected Specifies size of internal filebuffer used to perform a deferred backup to tape A synonym for FILEBUFF with a default setting of 1 Defragments the disk space occupied by files being restored over Specify a cycle name for a delta store Causes the system volumeset directory and all available nonsystem volumesets to be written to the beginning of the first tape Specifies disk device for the internal filebuffer which is used for a deferred backup or disk backup fileset Specifies for a tape backup that store directory should be kept on disk as well as tape Allows multiple backup devices to be used serially or in parallel for backup Selects proprietary AES or DES encryption algorithms and specifies the key or key files Options summary continu
629. y Use capacity of TAPELINK active generations 14 CONTROL M Global configuration Set to 1 values and flags TMLDB run time parameters 1 1 TAPELINK ee Links relates CYCLE to Use capacity of TAPE minus 20 TAPE The TMLDB database is tuned for optimum performance not only through its structure and dataset capacities but through two run time parameters AUTODEFER and BUFFSPECS These parameters are set automatically at installation but will be unset by rebuilding the database and may be unset by the use of certain database maintenance utilities AUTODEFER defers posting of certain writes for better performance while potentially sacrificing integrity in the event of a failure Because TML is able to recover from database failures AUTODEFER is enabled by default but may be disabled for extra security if desired The BUFFSPECS setting is configured to allocate the maximum number of buffers possible for any number of database accessors Because TMLDB is generally accessed by a single user at any time performance is optimized for a single user BACKUP iX User Manual 25 420 Chapter 26 Error Handling Various types of errors can occur when storing and restoring files Some are severe enough to cause the BACKUP program to abort while others prevent one or more files from being copied and generate an error message Errors are always possible due to system problems power failures inferior media and other conditions Th
630. y after restore cannot be guaranteed for these files It may be desirable to allow CM files that are unimportant or can be recreated should they be unrestorable to remain open at the synchronization point and proceed with synchronization This is assumed to be the default case Thus by default synchronization will proceed automatically without any operator intervention regardless of any open CM files However should you wish to notify users to exit open CM files the BACKUPSYNCYN JCW may be set before invoking BACKUP with SETJCW BACKUPSYNCYN 1 or SETVAR BACKUPSYNCYN 1 or SETVAR BACKUPSYNCYN TRUE BACKUP will then report when the sync point has been reached ask permission to proceed with the store and prompt the user for a reply to the console This provides an opportunity to delay user suspension until users have complied Identifying files open at the syncpoint Native Mode files that were open at the synchronization point will be designated with an O in the SHOW listing Files that were both open at the synchronization point and modified during the backup will also be flagged with an O rather than an M Zero downtime operation When the synchronization point is reached BACKUP attempts to suspend every process on the system They will remain suspended until synchronization is complete typically for about five minutes Suspension techniques A different suspension technique is used f
631. y be stored to TAPE and DDS and which have inconsistent tape lengths CYCLE This attribute defines the tape volume s home pool if blank the volume is added to the global pool Setting default tape attributes Default tape attribute values may be established for automatic assignment to each new tape as it is added For example if a site uses only DDS cassettes the default MEDIA attribute can be set to DDS and LENGTH to 90M These attributes will then be automatically assigned to each new volume added A default setting will remain from run to run until explicitly set to another value The correct defaults for the environment should be set before any volumes are added into TML ORBiT defined default tape attributes are Media Size Length Cycle TAPE LARGE 2400FT These defaults may be changed using the DEFAULT TAPE command For example to change the default MEDIA attribute to DDS and the default LENGTH to 90M gt DEFAULT TAPE MEDIA DDS LENGTH 90M When any tape default is changed the resulting current tape default settings are displayed as shown gt DEFAULT TAPE MED DDS LEN 90M Media Size Length Cycle DDS LARGE 90M Note Tape attribute keywords such as MEDIA or LENGTH may be abbreviated to 3 characters as shown above Modifying tape attributes Attributes of existing tapes may be changed using the CHANGE TAPE command Only attributes of unprotected tapes may be cha
632. y selected Image or AllBase rootfile is expanded into a complete list of dependent files If any of these files are missing or unavailable the entire database is excluded from the backup and an appropriate error message is displayed BACKUP iX also checks that dependent files have correct filecodes Orphan dependent file processing When the DBSTORE option is specified and a user attempts to store any database dependent file BACKUP iX checks that the associated database rootfile is also stored If it is not an appropriate error message is displayed and the dependent file is not stored Special handling for OMNIDEX index files Old style Omnidex index files are held in PRIV files whose names follow the sequence OA 0Z 1A 1Z 2A 2Z etc Their file codes are 411 Omnidex OA rootfile and 412 Omnidex index files BACKUP iX doesn t determine the exact list of Omnidex index files that should be present in a backup so all available files that match the wildcard pattern A Z are included in a backup then checked for the correct filecodes Files that match the Omnidex name pattern but lack the correct filecode are not automatically included Omnidex indexes are included even if the database rootfile is moved from inside an MPE Group to beneath a POSIX directory Special handling for Image databases located outside of MPE groups For databases located inside POSIX directories a simpler pattern matching metho
633. yte stream files iese ee ee ee AR ee 6 61 11 123 selecting for restore 18 300 18 338 Capabilities n EER eae teen Ee ee 3 37 d28 Security and access reduirements ee 3 38 CHANGE TAPE command 19 350 Commands Fee RE EE elane 2 30 Compression ee ee se se Ee 5 49 16 174 428 Conventions in this manual se ee ee XVi COPY command nasser i ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 18 223 AUTOREPLY option 18 225 BACKUP iX User Manual 436 Index BACKUP option aeaee anra se ee ee ee et 18 226 CY GLE OPON esse sees ee gees eek se ees ts 18 227 DRIVES ODUOM si siese cede es SE Ge Gee ARE 18 228 LABEL OPIO siese ese sere se ae gee ae 18 229 MULTIEDRIVE OPHON esse se sesse ee ee ee ees 18 233 OLM ODUOR is ies kes tes ge lead ees ee ee aiaa 18 230 ON VOLUME option esse ee ee se ee ee ee ee 18 231 PROGRESS option 18 234 SEQUENCE OpHON e ees ee ee ee ees se se ee ee 18 232 SINGLEDRIVE option ees se ese ee ee 18 233 VOLID option tine ee ee ee ee RA Ee Ee ee 18 233 ESME se dees ee N eat ee ee gee De see ss 428 LAAT D AN ER OE EE 428 CY Cl Cacti ER ER IE 428 attributes displaying eeraa Ee RA ee ee 17 183 ers oe N OE Ne 17 180 DAYS attribute sesse ee ee 17 180 17 198 default attributes displaying area oe ee rE RADER ER 17 182 filesetlist attribute se ee ee ee 17 180 FREQUENCY attribute 0 17 180 17 198 KEEP attribute iese sesse ee ee ee 17 180 17 184 Name AR RE EE EE EG E 17 179 r

BACKUP+/iX User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents